Home

HP LaserJet Enterprise M806 and Flow MFP M830

1.
2. lt GLa pHa s SL3302 ve DE Zei 4 gt L H I 1 l l l l l l l l l EFEERE l tafell 4 la A BAUR of 2 51 Sals 2 E 2 o 2 dolal EIE NES NMEEEEEBE ele Ig 85 eels BEBE am 1 t iH l L l CELT SERIE fal r ER D ets Fl LE mert l met E ME mac 3 SH Fi we E e Jt Sim TOPE 2 SES l
3. Figure 2 40 General circuit diagram product base 1 of 3 ircuit diagrams C SE vu sor ee Gas H g L Aiddng semog eyon moT NS Hae B esl zen vozat dE a md D ERE WOd 10sues 9423 SEI 53335 I l r s 5 l Ss DUSEL g e T l Aun diH l mE I h le t la la lah leleb l la ele ckpplkkk lelek lelelzlzl ke Ele lle lelle REERRRCCEPRERECEE NR BIE EERE PEPER EEE EER EEF E BEET di lol tele LLLLI rds IS ee HHHH l SSC e B EHI i RET Eri METERS EN Il vod 49110909 20 Ser L eee d E m lo le fe fe le fe la lg le L le le ls fe f ls le f f le fele lz f b ls ls e ale ERE dd ndis Bj ener IET b E i FT zm Bun E hami b Sen PE a pawanan HS SER ean H H 908W Wd 921 tere 6 9 Ki J L4 H S 9 ENWW sems A senva SE sl zs ser ps a vel
4. Figure 2 42 General circuit diagram product base 3 of 3 JE outer GY W ews Wod S B 7 mu Zeg Ze e le e F fx Joo jeuueog E Es she mesa a VOd JeAug xejdnq wr el soozr cz kel 20020 var Cen EF TERE EET Tare wun xeidng E T9 E ee d VOd IOH SEET E ANS 3 gen TE B CEH ve D ae oss BE E Ups ie Haler 12 B j z Jee d cis S e E s ence else ON H aj awe z YEE ve eee seer j wc t S Ei CG Ens al NEETETT a ETETETT E ZA bosesd 2 m ij SEI 393333 mesa JEJ zm A sec EEEREE 23113 GEN Con VOd Je dW H E SE B H s t E e a S l E E E p le le wo GEH 72 T enne EI E H xo E EREEBEERREEE Free H DEER Kg base EE Se oor T one DET a v TETT vod 1110 7u09 20 d keet KS ce Gy HOSCWLS T v S 9 Tools for troubleshooting 237 ENWW Figure 2 43 General circuit diagram high capacity input HCI feeder a g B
5. Table 2 18 Document feeder sensors Item number Component name Description 1 Sensor legal Detects whether there is a legal size original 2 Sensor portrait landscape Detects whether there is a portrait size or landscape size original 3 Sensor media width 4 Sensor stack height 208 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW Table 2 18 Document feeder sensors continued Item number Component name Description 5 Sensor paper presence Detects whether a document is present in the document feeder If paper is present in the document feeder when copies are made the product scans the document using the document feeder If no paper is present when copies are made the product scans the document using the scanner glass 6 Sensor ultrasonic Uses ultrasonic sound to detect a mutli page paper feed NOTE This sensor also functions as the pick success sensor 7 Sensor deskew Detects the top of the page as it approaches the back side scan module during e duplex copy jobs 8 Sensor prescan1 For an e duplex copy job HP EveryPage this sensor is used to activate the frontside s
6. a o E S s 1 gag ST E awe ER 2 EI pe wowsmusoos bed S S 88 z Deg 3 H D CH St J Ie Tl 3 n E ed zit xdg 33 og 5 2l e 2 s 28 I o d g 5 WAS Eja I ai 5 JH SEL EE E Hy O H L BAR Or L3 WAS EI 3E E r S 29 a UNSS EH ak 2 5 s 3 Hest Hl E a S8 AE S g S le bi SE N ry i I 2 S im J fle n Ws ger 2 j ue ER o NDS CE SCT S b DEE En GR 8E ao Se 3 IE 3 o H mes af fe i E EE j E gl me E N H 8 WW o i q 8 pri EDHE VW E E 9 ge g jb a d 2 E E a 8 E 5 F a lt j E 5 o S M 8 a 3 S I 28 ER moowas A ER E mootrals 28 ESSERE ES ORE 2 i mwas E mres seas G I SS usas O ER q veussus O mes e OG usas z zm E was v 3 LITER 9 mamas Zi l rz 5 see a asaras sumas S pa 7 LI 0 lssuzavais Gef moras EH pid UE EENS ph ees l N WAS T owas ial 14 8 l di sm r3 IT 3 emer CD JOKCISISSV ye JE n E TETRISISSY z ra EC EJE BAS 9 E IECH I Fe Seen L 5 n nerd Ale o el E I o E E AWO E D on Ie 8 E woo I E amp ow the z EX T aircon GIE an Hed m ss E
7. j HI H fs VC TE e SISSE one wiet H Kl qp onr Cl Am a Xe z mur j E zi Le E j m seo Onl r ee SS vzor ora pm aah oft ws r HHHHHH cur H j yun eideis seey appes dFH H iH 13311713213 one srE jE eem A EPERREEEPE a TER 2 de E BEEBE d d J mamm E E BERBER RB E sur gt E a E EBBER BEBRE VST i E SEKR E m asm E ELEBELET CATEL H ONOS oe SEIT yv T ES WOO MIN SON TOS a SW dWsOdH3dvd s zi EH WOO HINSOr 108 H K m F F i Aor Loze DEZ i WELDON TOS os zl FESO TIS kel 4 Sei s S SIS a7 o TEE EF mess Ed reuuvsorussvias j AY d Sz kel ws CT npo siwsosuaava os AU TW sur a S Kimamezgzezme eh Sid KASS E E VEINWSOCHSdVd Tos oU l H DEET ER iesse ei m nu ei GE ER m GNSS z 5 aF Eter zelt Sim OI a Fez m ces FI Terme m eee J PHa S X aw 2 ST MOSSIN ISNIN i RINT oe ALES we Pa A S m Seat z c d e LU lkaen ges VOd 1ejo3uo Jeuoyns eippes zi fy 3 Md SES 28 nar ssim fs m ees irs p j St Zen Fi E vod Ialono epes OL ER fs vee ts j S E urs m T Les 3 er E Za L sia mm es 8 CM was GE 8 re Seege 2 au F r va n E E 4 Ens Eds p am
8. Paper stopper A4 legal Bi Scu Jee pee C L le y AC A LBS A I Ca T js i ee I ILU C V E e Ee Paper stopper A3 legal e The paper stopper on the output bin is adjustable to recieve A4 short edge legal and A3 Ledger paper e An audible click sound can be heard when the paper stopper is pulled out and locked in position e A spring automatically retracts the paper stopper when the user pushes in to close it e A pair of guides function to neatly stack A4 long edge feed paper and then collapse when a longer sized paper is used 34 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Document feeder simplex selector e The simplex selector serves as a white or black background during the scanning process The black background is used when certain automatic cropping and edge detection modes are enabled on the device e Switching between white and black mode is caused by rotating the deskew motor in reverse which actuates a cam and lever that toggle the selector e The simple
9. Table 1 12 Document feeder sensors Item number Component name Description 1 Sensor legal Detects whether there is a legal size original 2 Sensor portrait landscape Detects whether there is a portrait size or landscape size original 3 Sensor media width Detects the media stack width one sheet or multiple sheets Used in combination with other sensors to determine media size and orientation 4 Sensor stack height Detects the media stack height one sheet or multiple sheets 5 Sensor paper presence Detects whether a document is present in the document feeder If paper is present in the document feeder when copies are made the product scans the document using the document feeder If no paper is present when copies are made the product scans the document using the scanner glass 28 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Table 1 12 Document feeder sensors continued Item number Component name Description 6 Sensor ultrasonic Uses ultrasonic sound to detect a mutli page paper feed NOTE This sensor also functions as the pick success sensor 7 Sensor deskew Detects the top of the page as it approaches the back side scan module during e duplex copy jobs 8 Sensor prescan1 Activates the frontside scan module this component is in the scanner base and the frontside background selector this component is in the document feede
10. 464 File System file operation failure To clear touch OK 464 File System file system is full To clear touch OK 464 File System is not initialized sss 464 File System is write protected sssssssssssss 464 Accept bad signature eene 464 ADF not detected TT 465 Bad duplexer connection ssssssssssssse 465 Bad optional tray connection sssenn 465 Calibration reset pending sss 465 einem ED 465 Canceling jobname sssssssssseeeee eene 466 Cartridge LOW ti es eroe eee aE E E Hed ieget ibd qd 466 Cartridge Memory Abnormal sees 466 Cartridge OUt aieia ea aese SEENEN dee 466 ENWW xvii xviii Checking engine nisso naina rnini p Y ER ER ERR 466 Checking paper path ssssssss HH 467 Chosen personality not available To continue touch OK 467 Clearing event log ies x fette eet ete duces S de 467 Clearing paper path ssssssssssssssssse tent 467 Close Front door e eee la HIE Medie cH a e REA 467 Glose Left door ib ertet be chs Madan 468 Close Lower Right door 468 Close stapler stacker multi bin mailbox door nnnnnnsnsnnnnnnnnneaeene 468 Close top COVER TE 469 Close Upper Right DOOF ss sssnnsenesrrsrrnnrrtnrrrtrtttrrrrnrtnntrnnnrnnnnnnn nnn 469 Gooling device x tee n e Re bo t
11. Booklet maker output bin The saddle stitcher flapper routes paper from the product to the booklet maker unit The booklet maker unit staples folds and then delivers the paper to the booklet maker unit output bin ENWW Booklet maker 119 Figure 1 90 Booklet maker unit paper path 120 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW HINTH euis eAup prouejos 19e1uo9 eje d pasy W10359Nf IeuBis xoojo soyow Burusnd ode euis xoojo 1030uJ Buipioj Jede Sa Bunoojjep seded z oN MOO IeUDIS OO 10 IDIOL d L1Sd14 leuis saup prouejos ejejd Bunoejjp jeded L ON N o c1Sd 4 leuis eAup prousjos A E GEUNN CL A euis eAup H J03ouu ejejd Duuonsod jedeg JeuBis eAup 10 0w Buipjoj aded JeuBis eAup Joo Buiusnd 1edeqd Saddle stitcher controller PCA 1 2 TISNITGS yeubis e up plousjos jeuBis eAup sojow yuewubIYy Jejut ejippes 1604 1u04J JeuBls eAup 10 0W 1849S euis AUP JO OW jeuBls eAup 10jouJ apiny jejut ejppes J Stacker controller JeuBbis eAup 10 0W pee4 Figure 1 91 Booklet maker motors Si a x o a i 2 o E o o o o E o 2 Ke o Ka Table 1 37 Booklet maker motors Saddle stitcher controller PCA Compone
12. a EE UND Els SS NEEETETT LLI CET ELIT EI z Ee sg A Li d SCHT ENTE Eh E riz Gaga E P Boe ED vOriSd 0viSd Toa SCHT Wie nian SU WIE ey bo HSeiSd ZSviSd E H rv Fc o ZOviSd vorisa WOd dm EXT SREL DEE Zeg SE See GE Und DARE Nod EH UNS Zen ENE Gro 1z ew EEEH H mnan HI 0 assa E Em es amp a suor SENET Ta set oer Nod mme oe Gu ES En VOd 1e ug oer roe opd Zo We dfo WOd 1ese Bh am
13. sssssssssssssssssssssseeneee nene nennen nnnm nnne 51 Tray 2 cassette media presence detection ssssesssssseeeee enne 52 Sensors for Jam E Le EE 53 HCI Paper Pati Em 57 FACT SIG Mal E 58 xxxi Figure 1 33 Figure 1 34 Figure 1 35 Figure 1 36 Figure 1 37 Figure 1 38 Figure 1 39 Figure 1 40 Figure 1 41 Figure 1 42 Figure 1 43 Figure 1 45 Figure 1 46 Figure 1 47 Figure 1 48 Figure 1 49 Figure 1 50 Figure 1 51 Figure 1 52 Figure 1 53 Figure 1 54 Figure 1 55 Figure 1 56 Figure 1 57 Figure 1 58 Figure 1 59 Figure 1 60 Figure 1 61 Figure 1 62 Figure 1 63 Figure 1 64 Figure 1 65 Figure 1 66 Figure 1 67 Figure 1 68 Figure 1 69 Figure 1 70 Figure 1 71 Figure 1 72 HCI electrical components ee 59 lale rore EE 61 HCI pickup and feed components AA 63 HCI lift up operation mechanism sssssssesssssssseeseeeeerenre nennen nennen rre tnnt nenne rennes 64 HCl jam sensor location niesieni anaia enn enne EE EE nennen nn en N nnns 66 otapler stacker paper path iH UR te ole lese aeo SEAN 68 Hole punch paper pathixs iiir ieu ee duceds 69 Stapler stacker controller signal flow diagram sseeennn n 71 Stapler stacker feed and delivery electrical components sssssssssssssssssees 74 Hole punch feed and delivery electrical components sssssssssssssssseeeeneeee 75 straight fe
14. Table 2 39 Booklet maker only covers Item Description Item Description 1 Upper top cover with extension 2 Saddle bin assembly 232 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Figure 2 38 Finishing accessories main assemblies Table 2 40 Finishing accessories main assemblies Item Description Item Description 1 Switchback assembly 3 Saddle feed assembly BM only 2 Puncher assembly SSHP only ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 233 hart Figure 2 39 General timing chart iming c General t uej ieNjep Joe ve uey puyeg uey Ja Aljap 1u014 ec uej ieAljop Ja L ue 49 0U0D uej Ajddns jewogd DL serq Jasn4 DL seq Jojeuruie aBseyo oneis serq 1oJsue DL seq Buidoje eq SL seq BuiBueuo Ajeulud PL Jojeou 1osn 4 EL 100w Jesn4 e Jojow wnq 4J0 OW paaj p sseg DL J0jouu paaj z ayjasseQ i il 40jouu dnysid ayasseg 4ojoui dnydid Jojoui JeuueoS jeu amp is O3GIA jeu amp is dOL Josuas Ajaaljap jesn4 Josuas dO puewwos JUL ALS HIST lNIMHd SANI AGLS LYM jeuBis NO JaMod 1oded YT uo sjurid aAnnoosuoo OML ENWW 234 Chapter2 Solve problems
15. sssssssssssssssssssseesere etenim netrn rtn nnne nnn taenn tnn sensn nnns 550 Use imanual print mod 6s TEEN 551 Solve image quality problems tarte nir teet irri ete una RR R ER ARR O RAN RA Side ER 553 Image defects table EE 553 Cleanithe product i2 edere eei bte Ld te didt ege a 558 Punta ceaningipage riti D taion 558 Check the scanner glass for dirt or smudges M30 558 Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder M830 560 Solve performance Droblems ssseesseoseeessnntttrntttrtttsttnsttesttesttt ttrt ttt tEn EEEE EEnnEnEn Raen naene erre Enn mennan 561 Solve connectivity problems ssssssssssssesesee eene nnne en nennen nennen aaaea niaaa aana 562 Solve USB connection problems snti eosina aee aa aeaaea a aa aaa aa eE 562 Solve wired network problems ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeececeenneaeecaeceeeeeeeeeseeeeesenseeesucsuaeeaeeees 562 Poor physical connection eene 562 The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product 562 The computer is unable to communicate with the product 563 The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network 563 New software programs might be causing compatibility problems 563 The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly 563 The product is disabled or other networ
16. 457 ENWW 99 00 08 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade 457 99 00 09 Upgrade canceled by user 457 99 00 10 Upgrade canceled by user 457 99 00 11 Upgrade canceled by user 458 99 00 12 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid 458 99 00 13 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid 458 99 00 14 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid 458 99 00 20 1i ise tec URL LL Ht een IR 458 SS qM 459 MISMA 460 99 02 09 EEN 460 99 09 60 Unsupported disk ssssssssssssseeeeee 460 99 09 61 Unsupported dek 460 99 09 62 Unknown disk sss 460 99 09 63 Incorrect ET 461 99 09 64 Disk malfunction ssssssH HH 461 99 09 65 Disk data error sssssssssssssssR RH 461 99 09 66 No disk installed sssssseeenenee 461 99 09 67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware 461 99 09 67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware 462 GE 462 Alpha Error Messages iiit ense rto CE cadi Det De eaten 462 binname full Remove all paper from bin sssss 462 Supply low OR Supplies low sss 462 Supply very low OR Supplies very low cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 463 Tray ESA lt le BETEN 463 File System device failure To clear touch OK
17. sNv4 ORES Lisa bes dd ETITI Ser Eug nd Hest VOd e eIpewweyu Dei z B E sin E n E 3 Ez saw SST ETE Sa DES Es EH ORNS TOW g DECH eu dess SITT mr SHd is EX ones ECO ELTLLTLE m KE I LEE GNSS CELE H ECHO SCH DES EKOS EG CAE ENNAN EEN TRAN N VENAIT Eimi TH D 7 iviSd pL Hs rw Eros E OLtiSd 60viSd Es Ers BE OI mei ei g E l 1 E o MME TH
18. r Addng 1ewogd wor mme eBejo uBiH imr Tools for troubleshooting 235 e P em Aiddns semog x i a oBejoA wo1 Py E Lr H ZC S Luss VOd 80S TO GH T e ven E ISAT SES CR EE Sell m z HME vvas t R oes Fel oie ih omes E wod feles Joen STET E FIAT fad aim eer Es 64 Gas a a T HERES ES 2 ores El lala d s me EIS ss by E dud TR i SLL ELI oe Es td HE Ka Der Srel mer EP remm Seed e0ssd n veer Eu sum Ex l TaN Ge TUN
19. 386 30 93 20 3062 i terre a aa A sen 386 30 03 22 EE 386 30 03 23 uicit etes qut tbe tid Ret uen ie utens 387 See Dee I M ML Ars MES RE 387 30 03 45 fecal HE Re Eee dd eire Te He de Eu Pe d Ce LEE edo dd 387 31 01 02 Jam in document feeder aesssseeeesrresceirnnnerrirressrnnnneneena 387 31 01 03 Document feeder pick error ssessssssssss 388 31 XX YZ Error Messages eene nnne nnns 389 31 03 30 nci Go es E EE LEG ence 389 3109 MID 390 31 03 82 xcu eal tide d Ede o ere ael ea cac Piece LED eda 390 31 08 1 25 sesto e iei eet isis rondes bic hanes 390 CEU ETE EE 390 31 08 A3 can iis tend iie aed e ere id dece End ene evi 391 ENWW SUVS ON E 391 EN A KEE 391 CINE r 392 EN Ek a 392 31 19 15 iata deii ec nia Res 393 32 08 XX Error Messages cient ice kontakt ek kane uen a ERR eL pude a eund dus 393 32 08 A1 32 08 A2 32 08 A3 n sehim aiai 393 32 1 C EEN 393 AD XXK YZ uewe EE 399 40 00 01 USB I O buffer overflow To continue touch OK 399 40 00 02 Embedded I O buffer overflow To continue touch OK 399 40 00 03 EIO X buffer overflow To continue touch OK 399 40 00 04 EIO X bad transmission To continue touch OK 399 40 00 05 Embedded I O bad transmission To continue touch AR en EE E AEEA EE 399 40 08 0X USB storage accessory removed ssssesssss 400 40 0X 05 USB storage accessory removed
20. Environmental product stewardship program 599 Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste Instead you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment For more information please contact your household waste disposal service or go to www hp com recycle Electronic hardware recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware For more information about recycling programs go to www hp com recycle Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH Regulation EC No 1907 2006 of the European Parliament and the Council A chemical information report for this product can be found at www hp com go reach Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS for supplies containing chemical substances for example toner can be obtained by accessing the HP Web site at www hp com go msds EPEAT Many HP products are designed to meet EPEAT EPEAT is a comprehensive environmental rating that helps identify greener electronics equipment For more information on EPEAT go to www epeat net For information on HP s EPEAT registered products go to www hp com hpinfo
21. ssssseeenn een 310 Troubleshooting menu sssseenm eem 322 Device Maintenance menu ssssssssseeeeeeeeeeenee emen nennen nnn 325 Backup Restore menu seeeeeneeenseensrrnsrrnsrrnsrtesrresrresrressresreeseeet 325 Calibration Cleaning menu M30 325 Calibration Cleaning menu MO 328 USB Firmware Upgrade menu sss 329 EIERE ER ee niit co Sh inen om t be ad ant ee 329 Interpret control panel messages and event log entries ssssesese 329 ENWW 10 XX YZ Error Messages reete neget tte eet een 329 10 00 00 e Label Memory Error ssssssssssssirsssesrrsserrrrssseerrressrernns 329 10 00 10 e Label Missing Memory Error scese 330 10 00 50 Cartridge seal roll up error sseeeees 330 10 23 50 Em 330 Uess deed gedet een tees bati a ete PLU Lees EL ieget 331 10 23 92 5 5 rau dieto oe dtl A devas gees Es 331 10 23 70 Printing Past Very Low eee 331 10 32 00 Unauthorized supply ssssssssssseeeeeee 331 10 XX 33 Used Supply In Use sssssssesee 332 10 XX 34 Used Supply In Use nsssnnsnnnnnennennnenessneseensresreeerrerrrenrnnne 332 10 XX 40 Genuine HP Supplies Installed 332 10 XX 41 Unsupported Supply in Use ssssssonsssnssonssenseenrrenrenrrennnene 332 10 XX 70 Printing past very low ssseeemmH 332 10 Y Y 15 Install supply 12 e ae
22. 363 13 B9 BZ niena aa a as aa aa 364 13 B9 2 a EUER E aaa add ated 365 E H RE 367 E EE 368 13 BA EE EE 368 13 BB EE TEE 369 13 DTAZ EE 369 13 D T DZ 1 ep REL dt a e HE a Rue navi La EO elias 370 13 DI EF testis aa aaa eaaa aea ainan 372 Seeerei Ee 372 E MEET 373 SISSE 373 E S EE 374 E ARTE 374 VS c npa X 375 TIENE En tito eter eelere ed dee iube 376 13 E6 AZ oca tete itd iin ki te Lee ta ed eee due EE o e uu S 377 xi ES RE 378 19 E6 BEF ziii ione tene en a tte deste 379 EN TEE 379 T9 EP EE init EE 380 30 XX YZ Error Messages eene nennen nnns 380 30 01 01 EE 380 30 01 00 3 3 5 Sto totins IU MESA MEI RE 380 30 01 08 2 iL RE Eae de dati oe vied Tu Poe a e LEER edo dd 381 30 01 10 event code Scanner ADF fan error ssss 381 30 01 14 5 ted E AE tee und CET E 381 30 01 15 WEE 382 30 01 18 nhe pi e pe isa E ttn 382 SU EE ee eege ee EE 382 30 01 23 Scanner calibration failure seeessssss 382 30 01 30 01 30 01 32 TT 383 3020 1930 d eene asse a 383 30 01 41 iiu e dtes es ote dae Ee ede ine de ete 383 30 01 42 usi ete ete E ueniet 383 3020 1749 ee De Merete etre rer seer ree EE 384 KREE 384 30 01 45 1i ub aient dta Eeer ice 384 BOLO TAG sacs so LUE 385 30 01 47 5 ius io E E RESET a Les ET A Dn eee oe dea AE Ee dede 385 ER N 385 BOO AO eer ee Ee 385 30 01 50 itu UT t RES e a Pel de ae Pine e tee 386 30 03 TA
23. eeeeeenese 151 Engirie dIagrnostics x etwa n pac Diva ioi putei nain rci iirata 156 Defeating interlocks ee ences enne trn nnn hers 156 Disable cartridge check 157 Engine test button gn e epe deberi dei inei 158 Paperpaltltest consta era e Idee ei dieere ones tet te ecd e te 158 Paper path Sensors test ho aite ede Pag ates Fe eerie deae 159 Manual sensor and tray bin manual sensor tests eesssusssss 160 Manual sensor fest 160 Tray bin manual sensor Test 161 Rn E ee EE 163 nne 163 Control panel tests ad e eae aie bera eda tec dad 163 Component test special mode test sssssssssss 164 Finishing accessory component test ssseeenee 166 Scanner tests AE 202 ee Tu 202 Diagralmis o e ePi A de Leda esie ifo ede eA ates ace 204 Block diagram edet et tede t Le dete d e ees 205 Location of connectors ccceccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecscaaaanaacaaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteess 215 DC controller PCA connectors sseen 215 viii ENWW High capacity input HCI feeder controller PCA connectors 217 Finishing accessories all controller PCA connectors 218 Plugijack locations CE 220 Locations of major Components nennen 222 Base product ES 222 High capacity input HCI feeder eee eeeeeeneteeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaas 227 Finishing accessories EE 231 General timing chart sssssssss
24. 20 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Laser scanner system ENWW The laser unit of the laser scanner system includes two laser diodes that enable scanning two lines simultaneously The laser scanner PCA turns on the laser diodes based on signals from the DC controller and the formatter systems The laser beams strike a six sided mirror that rotates at a constant speed The six sided mirror reflects the beams through a focusing lens to a reflective mirror and then to the photosensitive drum which also rotates at a constant speed This allows the beams to scan across the drum at a constant speed to form the latent image on the drum surface Figure 1 8 Laser scanner system pom uin uf uL ilis E eme e ee Ee DC controller Laser scanner A PCA Oylindrical lens Laser diodes Six sided mirror Scanner motor Z driver PCA Scanner motor Beam detect PCA Focusing lenses Beam detect mirror Reflective mirror Photosensitive drum Laser scanner system 21 Image formation system The image formation system consists of the toner cartridge the transfer charging roller and the fuser When the formatter sends a print command the image formation system completes the following process 1 The main motor rotates the photosensitive drum the primary charging roller the developing cylinder the transfer charging roller and the pressure roller 2 The primary c
25. M830 product only White Clean the glass Scratch down the page could mean the scanner glass needs to be cleaned 554 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 60 Image defects table continued Problem Horizontal lines appear on the page A horizontal white line displays on the page Cause Repetitive horizontal lines appear Solution Use the repetitive defects ruler to identify the dirty roller Clean the roller If the roller cannot be cleaned replace the fuser Horizontal scratches are present on the photosensitive drum Replace the toner cartridge Horizontal scratches are present on the fuser roller Repetitive horizontal white lines appear Horizontal scratches are present on the photosensitive drum Replace the fuser Use the repetitive defects ruler to identify the dirty roller Clean the roller If the roller cannot be cleaned replace the roller Replace the toner cartridge Dropouts appear The secondary transfer roller is deformed or has deteriorated Replace the secondary transfer roller The primary charging roller developing roller or photosensitive drum is deformed or has deteriorated The fuser roller is deformed or has deteriorated Replace the toner cartridge Replace the fuser The toner is not fully fused to the paper The high voltage power supply PCA is defective no transfer bias output The fuser roller or pressu
26. Table 2 25 High capacity input HCI feeder controller PCA connectors Co LJ J3015 J3014 J3018 J3016 L J3013 J3017 J3010 J3007 i i J3003 Item Description Item Description J3001 DC controller PCA J3010 Not used J3002 Not used J3011 Intermediate feed motor J3003 Right cassette lifter motor J3013 Left cassette lifter motor J3004 Right cassette pickup motor J3014 Left cassette pickup motor J3005 Right cassette lift up media surface sensor J3015 Left cassette lift up media surface sensor Right cassette pickup coordinate media surface Left cassette pickup coordinate media sensor surface sensor Right cassette media presence sensor Left cassette media presence sensor Right cassette media feed sensor Left cassette pickup solenoid Right cassette pickup solenoid J3006 Media feed sensor J3016 Left cassette media feed sensor Intermediate unit presence sensor Side feed guide open detection sensor Right door open detection switch J3007 Right cassette media size sensor J3017 Left cassette media size sensor Right cassette open detection sensor Left cassette open detection sensor J3008 Right cassette media level sensor J3019 Left cassette media level sensor ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 217 Finishing accessories all controller PCA connectors This is the main controller PCA for the finishing accessories e Stapler stacker SS e Stapler stacker with hole punch SSHP e
27. e Service mode functions e Solve fax problems e Product upgrades ENWW 127 Solve problems checklist If the product is not correctly functioning complete the steps in the order given in the following checklist If the product fails a checklist step follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions for that step If a checklist step resolves the problem skip the remaining checklist items 1 If the control panel is blank or black complete these steps a Check the power cable b Check that the power is turned on c Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the product power configuration See the label that is on the back of the product for voltage requirements If you are using a power strip and its voltage is not within specifications connect the product directly into the electrical outlet If it is already connected into the outlet try a different outlet 2 The control panel should indicate a Ready Paused or Sleep mode on status If an error message displays resolve the error e Use the Power on checks section in the product troubleshooting service manual to solve the problem 3 Check the cables a Check the power and network cable connections between the product and the computer or network port Make sure that the connections are secure b Make sure that the cables are not faulty by trying different cables if possible c Check the network connection 4 Make sure that the selected paper si
28. sssssssne enn 592 Table B 2 Product dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened ssssse 592 Table B 3 Physical specifications with toner cartridge sssenn een 592 Table B 4 Product dimensions with all doors trays and document feeder fully opened 592 Table B 5 Accessory specifications crt stg i vea dex YE deg Y Y BER E YR REA YR RR ARR RAD RR YR RM 593 Table B 6 Accessory dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened sssee 593 Table B 7 Operating environment specifications ssssssssssssssee eene 593 ENWW XXix XXX ENWW List of figures Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 Figure 1 12 Figure 1 13 Figure 1 14 Figure 1 15 Figure 1 16 Figure 1 17 Figure 1 18 Figure 1 19 Figure 1 20 Figure 1 21 Figure 1 22 Figure 1 23 Figure 1 24 Figure 1 25 Figure 1 26 Figure 1 27 Figure 1 28 Figure 1 29 Figure 1 30 Figure 1 31 Figure 1 32 ENWW Relationship between the main product systems sssssssssssssssssssessseeereee enne 2 Engine control System Em 7 DG controller block diagram 2r dek oEekedAd DEER S ANEA 8 Fuser control circuit 13 Fuser system block diagram aea rectae dE pr d a ea HE EE ade eve 14 Low vol
29. 65 Additional HCI pickup and feed functions ssssssssssseeeeeenernnes 65 HCI jam detection ssns ainsi n a a E NEEN a adden 66 Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch sssssssssssssee 68 Stapler stacker motors cccceececeeeeeeeeee a aaa aaae aaa aa aaae aaa aiit 72 Motor failure detection ssssssssssssssesseeeneneeemermernennnn nn 72 ENWW Feed and delivery operation ssssssssssseeeee eene nennen nnnm ener nnns 74 Switchback assembly emite ioi rt eoe tee apod dee ba a addet ea edd aa kei 77 StraighitiTeed ettet ret det usa xoc e ge dead 77 Switchback feed to the pass through assembly hole puncher assembly without hole punching operation sssssss 78 Switchback feed to the hole puncher assembly with hole PUNCHING operation ieri epe Ee er ER ren E 79 Hole puncher assembly 2 rrt rd e e Eran e PED e M Rc rd 81 Side registration operation ssssssee 82 Hole punching operation 2 hole 3 hole puncher assembly 83 Hole punching operation 2 hole 4 hole puncher assembly 85 Stapler stacker assembly sssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeen nennen 87 Swing height corittol EE 90 Process output bin paper stacking operation eeeceececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 91 Offset operation ssssssssssssssssesssse sensere e nnne EEEn nEn nnns 91 S
30. Printing stopped Description Time expired on the Print Stop test Recommended action Touch the OK button to continue Printing Supplies Status Page Description The product is printing the Supplies Status page Recommended action No action necessary 480 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Printing Usage Page Description The product is printing the Usage page Recommended action No action necessary Printing engine test Description The product is printing an engine test page Recommended action No action necessary Processing job from tray lt X gt Do not grab paper until job completes Description The product is actively processing a job from the designated tray Recommended action No action necessary Processing Description The product is currently processing a job but is not yet picking pages When paper motion begins this message is replaced by a message that indicates the tray the job is using Recommended action No action necessary Processing copy X of Y Description The product is currently processing or printing collated copies The message indicates that copy number X of total copies Y is currently being processed Recommended action No action necessary RAM disk device failure To clear touch OK ENWW Description The specified device failed Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error Tools for troubleshooting 4
31. a Check the ADF ground wire connection at the rear of the scanner b Ifthe ground wire is in contact with the CN10 connector test point of the SCB loosen the screw and move the wire away from the CN10 If the ground wire contacts the CN10 connector test point of the SCB the formatter will be damaged resulting in a persistent will not clear 31 01 03 document feeder pick error Ey NOTE The formatter will have to be replaced The grounding of the test point results in damage to a component on the formatter which results in a loss of 3 3v to the SCB 31 XX YZ Error Messages 31 03 30 ENWW Description The document feeder pick motor is not turning Recommended action 1 2 3 4 e Verify that the paper meets the product specifications Make sure that the input tray is not overloaded Check the event log for document feeder errors and then resolve any errors first Open and close the top cover to see if the pick motor turns without posting this error If the motor turns then the motor is good Verify that the motor cables are connected Reseat the document feeder to the SCB Replace the document feeder Tools for troubleshooting 389 31 03 31 Description The document feeder pick motor is not turning Recommended action 1 Verify that the paper meets the product specifications Make sure that the input tray is not overloaded Check the event log for document feeder errors and then resolve any erro
32. ccccccccccccecceceecececaeaeeeeeeesececeeeeeeeeeeceseeaeaeauaesuaaeasasssens 152 Heartbeat LED product operational eect teeta cece eeaecaeeaaaaaaaeaaeeaaeeaeeaeeeeeeees 155 Paper path sensors diagnostic tests c ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceecaaeaaecaeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneenieeaeeees 159 Manual sensor diagnostic tests 2 tee iine qi oce tee daadedecetiaancddenenabanebedesdautedsyabedecedt 161 Tray Din Manual Sensors niet nS aet itc btt iuto ema E erre cisci ares 162 Component test details ssssssssssssssssssssssssssseneereert nenne nennen nennen nennen nesteen senis 164 Motors and solenoids paper path ee caaesaaeeasassaeeaaeaeceeeeeeeees 205 Photo switches and sensors product base ssssssssee emm enne 207 Document feeder sensors eei deci de oe dee teet ie age o vaa naa vd dome ades 208 Jam serisors product base EE 210 High capacity input HCI feeder jam sensors seessssseem emn 211 High capacity input HCI feeder cross section sssssssseeeeemeeme 212 Stapler stacker SS and Stapler stacker with hole punch SSHP cross section 213 Booklet maker BM cross section eene nennen nennen ennemis 214 DC controller PCA connectors ssssssssssssseseseseeeeee ree enne enn nn nnne innen nnn erin en nnne 215 High capacity input HCI feeder controller PCA connectors ssse 217 Finishing accessories all co
33. ssssesssss 400 41 XX YZ Error Messages coe dete dete dieere P ege 400 AON dee a ieee tein o eeh Ee 400 AB KEE 401 41 03 FZ Unknown Misprint Error eeseesseeseeeeeses 402 41 03 YZ Unexpected size in envelope feeder To use another tray touch Options TA 402 41 03 YZ Unexpected size in tray X sss 403 41 04 00 Printer Error esessssssseeeene nn 404 41 05 YZ Unexpected type in tray lt X gt sss 404 41 XX YZ Error To continue touch OKT 405 42 XX YY Error Messages cei Spas DRE deele IHRER 406 42 XX YY Error Event Log message ssseeeeereeesserrrerrresssrreeees 406 44 XX XX Error Messages iter teet hr ed tete ed eeu c 406 44 01 XX Error Event log message MFP Only 406 44 03 XX Error Event log message MFP Only 406 44 10 XX Error Event log message MFP Only 406 44 34 XX Error Event log message MFP Only 407 44 92 XX Error Event log message MFP Only 407 AT XX XX Error Messages leet cette ecce Ae 407 AT OOD Wer 407 AT OVO med tette ve er D ee Wd HE 407 41 02 XO i ccena e opere a cod tod toos e eet ADU saa 408 el 408 AT OA XX tactic tem ett dede tee mx 408 ENWW xiii 41 05 00 apaa emet ee Eo teles Gir ritu fees 408 dE 409 47 WX YZ Printer Calibration Failed To continue touch OK 409 4
34. Close Front door Description The front door of the product is open ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 467 Recommended action 1 Close the door 2 Runthe switch test in the sensor monitor mode to make sure that the front door open detection Switch is functioning correctly If it is not replace the interlock switch assembly 3 Reconnect the connector J3 of the front door open detection switch and connector J302 on the DC controller PCA 4 Check the sensor flag on the front door open detection sensor If the flag is damaged replace the front door assembly Close Left door Description The left door of the product is open Recommended action 1 Close the door 2 Run the switch test in the sensor monitor mode to make sure that the left door open detection switch is functioning correctly If it is not replace the interlock switch assembly 3 Reconnect the connector J10 of the left door open detection switch and connector J302 on the DC controller PCA 4 Check the sensor flag on the left door open detection sensor If the flag is damaged replace the left door assembly Close Lower Right door Description The optional paper feeder right door is open Recommended action 1 Close the door 2 Runthe switch test in the sensor monitor mode to make sure that the right door open detection Switch is functioning correctly If it is not replace the right door open detection switch assembly 3 Reconnect the connector J
35. ENWW Main DC voltage Sub voltage Behavior 5V 5VA Supplied constantly 5VB Controlled by the formatter 5VC Supplied constantly Stopped during active off or inactive off 5VR Interrupted when the front door is open SW10 Interrupted when the left door is open SW10 3 3V 3 3VA Supplied constantly 3 3VB Supplied constantly Stopped during active off or inactive off 3 3VC Supplied constantly Stopped during active off or inactive off ENWW Engine control system 17 Over current over voltage protection The low voltage power supply LVPS has a protective circuit against over current and over voltage to prevent failures in the power supply circuit It automatically stops supplying the DC voltage whenever excessive current flows or voltage abnormally increases If the DC voltage is not being supplied from the LVPS the protective function might be running In this case turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable Do not turn the power switch on until the root cause is found The DC controller notifies the formatter of a LVPS failure when the protective function is activated In addition the LVPS has three fuses to protect against over current If over current flows into the AC line the fuse blows to stop AC power For safety the product interrupts 24V and 5V power when the interlock switch is turned off Accordingly the DC voltage to the following components is interrupted e Hi
36. PS3103 Tray 4 paper sensor Paper pickup assembly PS3102 Tray 4 paper surface Paper pickup assembly PS3303 Tray 4 paper size Paper pickup assembly PS3302 Tray 4 paper feed sensor SW3302 Tray 4 cassette operation SW3301 Lower right door 1 PS3306 Lower right door 2 Paper pickup assembly Switch cable Switch cable PS3301 HCI feed sensor Crossing paper feed assembly PS3308 Tray 5 paper sensor Paper pickup assembly PS3302 Tray 5 paper surface Paper pickup assembly PS3304 Tray 5 paper size Paper pickup assembly 162 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 14 Tray bin manual sensors continued Sensor or switch name Replacement part number Descriptions PS3305 Tray 5 feed sensor Paper pickup assembly SW3303 Tray 5 cassette operation PS1452 Output bin full Fuser drive assembly Print stop test Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image formation defects and jams within the engine During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the product paper path The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position The test can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60 000 ms If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job print time you can recover the product in one of two ways 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch th
37. Paper to pass through ass y or puncher ass y o Sai Paper from printer PS101 t EN EN GEN GN O Be Switch back counter roller Switch back roller Switch back feed hold position Switchback feed to the hole puncher assembly with hole punching operation The switchback feed to the hole puncher assembly function feeds the paper to the switchback paper path Then it feeds the switched paper to the hole puncher assembly The operational sequence of the switchback feed to the hole puncher assembly is as follows 1 The stacker controller receives the DELIVERY signal from the product 2 When the switchback inlet sensor detects the leading edge of paper the stacker controller drives the switchback motor ENWW Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 79 3 The paper is fed to the switchback paper path 4 When the trailing edge of paper reaches the switchback feed hold position after the switchback inlet sensor detects the trailing edge the stacker controller stops the switchback motor 5 The stacker controller reverses the switchback motor so that the paper is ejected from the switchback paper path 6 The paper is pressed against the registration roller and fed for a specified length after the switchback registration sensor detects the leading edge 7 The stacker controller drives the registration motor to correct the skew feed and feed the paper to the hole puncher assembl
38. This jam occurs when the media stays at the fuser output sensor PS502 for a designated amount of time after it has reached the fuser output sensor PS502 13 B9 A2 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Normal 13 B9 A3 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Light 1 or Light 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode 13 B9 A4 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 1 13 B9 A5 Tools for troubleshooting 363 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 2 13 B9 AB The fuser is printing in fuser mode Transparency 13 B9 AD The fuser is printing in fuser mode Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode Recommended action 1 2 3 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam If the issue persists remove the fuser and inspect the fuser sleeve pressure roller and delivery roller for blockage and or damage Replace the fuser as needed ACAUTION The fuser might be HOT 4 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 5 Test the Fuser Delivery sensor PS502 using the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify the sensor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the fuser 6 Touch Component Test 7 Runthe Fuser motor DCM drive test to verify that the Fuser Drive and Gears are functioning correctly If they are not r
39. Touchscreen black white or dim no image Figure 2 1 Touchscreen blank white or dim no image White display no image Dim display no image or image ls the Home button illuminated bright white a ls the product in bright Open the sunlight N diagnostic function If yes move the D product to a different location Touch the display or Home button to exit sleep mode Make sure that the product is plugged in and the power is turned on Does an image appear on the control panel Open the diagnostic function Perform the N backlight test Yy Turn the product power off Inspect and reseat the control panel cables Remove and reseat the formatter Make sure that the formatter LEDs function Does the display turn on Problem solved Is the backlight adjustable Are the formatter LEDs functioning Problem fixed Y Do not replace the control panel Turn the product power off Remove and reseat the formatter If the error persists troubleshoot the formatter Turn the product power off Remove and reseat the formatter Troubleshoot the formatter Do not replace the control panel Replace the control panel ENWW Troubleshooting process 145 Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond x TIP U
40. sssssssssseeee 240 General circuit diagram finishing accessories 3 of 241 General circuit diagram finishing accessories 4 Of 6 ssssssssssee 242 General circuit diagram finishing accessories 5 of 243 General circuit diagram finishing accessories 6 of 6 sssssssse 244 Print quality troubleshooting procedure page ssssen emen 245 Black print quality troubleshooting page nennen 246 Configuration page ostrea be Ei EU abe E Een p re HE e e pea bebe tbt 250 HP embedded Jetdirect page eet tiet Dani tee Ite a ERI HD ARE Tea RETURN EL eR Ride rREA 251 Certificate of Volatility 1 of 2 sss eren rennen emere nn i 605 Certificate of Volatility 2 0f 2 5 tete d e gedd ere 606 Gertificate of Volatility AT Ol 2 eiie tenenda ite ege ERI RR Ru oed Re ER 607 Certificate of Volatility 2 of 2 sss enne nnn nennen nennen nens 608 ENWW 1 Theory of operation e Basic operation e Formatter control system e Engine control system e Laser scanner system e l mage formation system e Scanning image capture system e Pickup feed and delivery system e 3 500 sheet high capacity input HCI feeder e Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch e Booklet maker ENWW Basic operation The product routes all high level processes through the formatter which stores font information processes the print image and commun
41. Ap LASERJET ENTERPRISE M806 LASERJET ENTERPRISE FLOW MFP M830 Troubleshooting Manual ol Ei M806dn M806x M830z r HP LaserJet Enterprise M806 and Flow MFP M830 Troubleshooting Manual Copyright and License 2013 Copyright Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and Services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein Part number CZ244 90967 Edition 1 11 2013 Conventions used in this guide En TIP Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts NOTE Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task ACAUTION Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product ZA WARNING Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury catastrophic loss of data or extensive damage to the product ENWW Conventions used in this guide ENWW Table of contents 3 MNEGEY ei n TEE 1 Basic operation me DELE 2 Sequence of ee TTT 3 Normal seque
42. DCM1 Fuser motor STM2003 Duplex feed motor DCM2 Drum motor STM2004 Duplex re pickup motor M2 Tray 3 feed motor STM2501 Tray 1 pickup motor M3 Tray 2 feed motor SL1 Face up solenoid M806 only STM1 Pickup motor SL2001 Duplex flapper solenoid STM2 Lift up motor SL2501 Tray 1 pickup solenoid STM3 Cassette pickup motor CL2501 Tray 1 feed clutch STM2002 Duplex switchback motor ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 205 Figure 2 14 Rollers product base LEI K Item Description Item Description 1 Face up delivery roller 13 MP tray feed roller Tray 1 2 Intermediate delivery roller 14 MP tray pickup roller Tray 1 3 Duplex inlet roller 15 MP tray separation roller Tray 1 4 Face down delivery roller 16 Cassette feed roller 5 Fuser delivery roller 17 Cassette separation roller 6 Fuser sleeve 18 Cassette pickup roller 7 Pressure roller 18 Transfer roller 8 Photosensitive drum 20 Duplex feed roller 9 Cartridge 21 Duplex registration roller 10 Registration roller 22 Tray 2 11 Laser scanner 23 Tray 1 12 Duplex re pickup roller 24 Duplex switch back roller 206 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW Figure 2 15 Switches and sensors product base PS1452 PS1411 PS1412 V VO PS1404 C PS2501 PS2502 V Q C Q NO O PS502 PS9 ps4 FS1 PS2002 D Q Q A d Nm oS A OR PS Y PS2004 PS2005 OO Ps1409 PS1402 Ps1410 V VO PS1401 PS140 ae P3 1406
43. Description If you are making two sided copies select a 2 sided format option Book style The back side of the original is printed right side up and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are bound along the left edge Flip style The back side of the original is printed upside down and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are to be bound along the top edge Book style original Flip style copy The back side of the original is printed right side up but the back side of the copy is printed upside down Use this option when the original is bound along the left edge but you want the copies to be bound along the top edge Flip style original Book style copy The back side of the original is printed upside down but the back side of the copy is printed right side up Use this option when the original is bound along the top edge but you want the copies to be bound along the left edge ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 267 Table 2 44 Copy Settings menu M830 only continued First level Collate Reduce Enlarge Second level Scaling Third level Values Collate on Sets in page order Collate off Pages grouped Auto 10096 7596 5096 12596 15096 20096 Range X Y 25 400 Description If you are making more than one copy select the Collate
44. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 221 Locations of major components Use the diagrams to locate components Base product Figure 2 27 M830 product integrated scanner assembly ISA E Table 2 29 M830 product integrated scanner assembly ISA Item Description Item Description 1 Scanner assembly 4 ADF output bin 2 Hardware Integration Pocket HIP cover 5 Control panel assembly 3 Automatic document feeder ADF 222 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Figure 2 28 Base product covers Table 2 30 Base product covers Item Description Item Description 1 Tray 1 multipurpose tray 6 Tray 2 2 Right door 7 Tray 3 3 Face up tray 8 Front door 4 Left door 9 Power switch 5 Power receptacle 10 Hardware Integration Pocket HIP cover M806 only NOTE This cover is on the ISA for the M830 product ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 223 Figure 2 29 Base product main assemblies 1 of 3 Table 2 31 Base product main assemblies 1 of 3 Item Description Item Description 1 Cartridge lifter assembly 6 Tray 3 automatic close assembly 2 Laser scanner assembly 7 Transfer feed assembly 3 Pickup assembly 8 Fuser 4 Drum drive assembly 9 Fuser drive assembly 5 Tray 2 automatic close assembly 224 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Figure 2 30 Base product main assemblies 2 of 3 Table 2 32 Base product main assemblies 2 of 3 Item Description Item Descripti
45. H1 H2 a 4 i Pressure roller FUSER TEMPERATURE signal FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal Troc oe Se circuit circuit Fuser heater control j Fuser heater safety Low voltage power supply 3 DC controller a a EE usd ee a C ew Table 1 6 Fuser components Abbreviation Component name Function H1 Fuser main heater Heats the center area of the fuser sleeve H2 Fuser sub heater Heats the edge of the fuser sleeve TH1 Main thermistor Detects the center temperature of the fuser heater contact type TH2 Small size thermistor Detects the temperature at one end of the fuser heater contact type TH3 Front thermistor Detects the temperature at one end of the fuser heater contact type TH4 Rear thermistor Detects the temperature at one end of the fuser heater contact type TP Thermoswitch Prevents an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser heater contact type Engine control system 13 Figure 1 5 Fuser system block diagram suet Low voltage ower suppl Zerocross POWST SURRY IZEROX circuit RIDO 4 9 99 jM REDI Relay control RL602 lt circuit RLD2 DC controller Fuser heater safety circuit Current detection circuit Le j FSRD1 i J FSR_CUR PW_TYP JP171 ES 100V Open 200V Close R FSRTH F FSRTH SS FSRTH M FSRTH Fuser sleeve ass y FSR
46. Print Cleaning Page Prints a page to clean the paper path The process takes up to 1 5 minutes 328 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW USB Firmware Upgrade menu To display At the product control panel select the Device Maintenance menu and then select the USB Firmware Upgrade menu Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port and follow the on screen instructions Service menu To display At the product control panel select the Device Maintenance menu and then select the Service menu The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access This menu is intended for use by authorized service personnel See the Service mode function section in the product troubleshooting manual Interpret control panel messages and event log entries The control panel messages and event code entries indicate the current product status or situations that might require action EY NOTE Event log errors do not appear on the control panel display Open the event log to view or print the event log errors A control panel message displays temporarily and might require that you acknowledge the message to resume printing or by touching the Stop button to cancel the job With certain messages the job might not finish printing or the print quality might be affected If the message is related to printing and the auto continue feature is on the product will attempt to resume printing after the message has
47. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error File System file system is full To clear touch OK Description A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system is full Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error File System is not initialized Description This file storage component must be initialized before use Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system File System is write protected Description The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error Accept bad signature Description The product is performing a remote firmware upgrade and the code signature is invalid Recommended action Download the correct firmware upgrade file for the product and then reinstall the upgrade See the product user guide for more information 464 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW ADF not detected Description The ADF was not detected when the product initialized Recommended action Make sure that the document feeder cables are connected and fully seated Bad duplexer connection Description This message indicates that the duplexer is not connected properly or has been pulled out and must be reinserted before printing can continue Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Reconnect the duplexer
48. Resend the print job If the error persists clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu 47 WX YZ Printer Calibration Failed To continue touch OK Description The device is unable to access or implement one of the image patterns files Y Calibration type Z Event 47 FC 20 event code Error Diffusion Image not found at system initialization 47 FC 21 event code Error Diffusion Store image failure 47 FC 22 event code Error Diffusion Image not found 47 FC 23 Error Diffusion Print engine execution failure 47 FC 30 0 event code Drum Speed Adjustment Image not found at system initialization 47 FC 31 event code Drum Speed Adjustment Store image failure 47 FC 32 event code Drum Speed Adjustment Image not found 47 FC 33 event code Drum Speed Adjustment Print engine execution failure 47 FC 40 event code Pulse Width Modulation Image not found at system initialization 47 FC 41 event code Pulse Width Modulation Store image failure 47 FC 42 event code Pulse Width Modulation Image not found 47 FC 43 event code Pulse Width Modulation Print engine execution failure Recommended action 1 2 Turn the product off and then on again If the error persists reload the firmware 48 XX YY Error Messages 48 XX YY Description A job framework internal error has occurred ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 409 Recommended action 1 No action should be necessary 2 I
49. See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct cartridge part number Advise the customer that HP recommends that they have replacement supplies available to install when the print quality is no longer acceptable 10 YY 15 Install supply Description The indicated supply has been removed or installed incorrectly 10 00 15 event code Black toner cartridge 10 23 15 event code Fuser kit Recommended action Replace or install the indicated supply See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct supply or kit part number 10 YY 35 Incompatible supply Description The indicated supply is not compatible with this product 10 00 35 event code Black toner cartridge 10 23 35 event code Fuser kit Recommended action The fuser might be hot Be careful when removing the fuser Install a supply that is designed for this product See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct supply part number 11 XX YZ Error Messages 11 00 01 or 11 00 02 Internal clock error ENWW Description This message indicates a problem with the formatter s real time clock The product real time clock has experienced an error 01 dead clock 02 dead real time clock Tools for troubleshooting 333 Recommended action 1 Whenever the product is turned off and then turned on again set the time and date on the control panel 2 Ifthe error persists you might need to replace the formatter 13 XX YZ
50. Tray lt X gt type size Description The media in the specified tray is detected as the specified size and type The custom switch was not changed Recommended action If the media is a custom size or type change the custom switch accordingly Tray lt X gt empty Type Size Description The specified tray is empty and the current job does not need this tray to print 488 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Tray X lifting Tray X open ENWW Recommended action Refill the tray at a convenient time X 1 Tray 1 X 2 Tray 2 X 3 Tray 3 X 4 Tray 4 X 5 Tray 5 This could be a false message If the tray is loaded without removing the shipping lock the product does not sense that the paper is loaded Remove the shipping lock and then load the tray Description The product is in the process of lifting paper in the indicated tray Recommended action No action necessary X 2 Tray 2 X 3 Tray 3 X 4 Tray 4 X 5 Tray 5 Description The specified tray is open or not closed completely Recommended action 1 2 X 2 Tray 2 X 3 Tray 3 X 4 Tray 4 X 5 Tray 5 Close the tray If this message displays after the lifter drive assembly was removed or replaced make sure that the connector of the assembly is connected correctly and fully seated If the error persists use the media size switches in the Tray Bin manual sensor test to test the switches If the switches do no
51. globalcitizenship environment pdf epeat printers pdf For more information To obtain information about these environmental topics e Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products e His commitment to the environment e Hie environmental management system e Hie end of life product return and recycling program e Material Safety Data Sheets Visit www hp com go environment 600 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Declaration of conformity M806 Manufacturer s Name Manufacturer s Address declares that the product Product Name Regulatory Model Product Options Toner Cartridges Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC 17050 1 and EN 17050 1 Hewlett Packard Company DoC BOISB 1305 01 rel 1 0 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA HP LaserJet Enterprise M806 HP LaserJet Enterprise M806dn HP LaserJet Enterprise M806x BOISB 1305 01 All CF325X conforms to the following Product Specifications SAFETY EMC RoHS Supplementary Information IEC 60950 1 2005 A1 2009 EN60950 1 2006 A11 2009 A1 2010 A12 2011 IEC 60825 1 2007 EN 60825 1 2007 Class 1 Laser LED Product IEC 62479 2010 EN 62479 2010 GB4943 1 2011 CISPR22 2008 EN55022 2010 Class A 9 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A1 2009 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 55024 1998 A1 A2 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Issue 4 GB9254 2008 GB17625 1 2003 EN 50581 2012
52. icto 597 HP LaserJet print Supplies eee ee tret e e rae HER aa RRRRRX ege 597 Return and recycling instructions eee 598 United States and Puerto Rico 598 Multiple returns more than one cartridge sss 598 Single returna 598 SMIPPING EE 598 INonsU in EE 599 a 599 Material reSthiClons RE S 599 Disposal of waste equipment by users sssssssssssssssseeeen nennen 600 Electronic hardware recycling sssssesseeeeene nenne nennen nennen 600 Chemical substants uge 600 Material Safety Data Sheet MED 600 EAD NEE 600 For more Us e EE 600 Declaration of conformity MOO 601 Declaration of conformity M20 603 Certificate of Volatility M80 cies eese nce oreet E tap di eee enn aD Eee RE rea nain reas 605 Certificate of Volatility M830 i ccce crei tee AAAA ee REM eaa elated ede 607 Safety statements 609 ELI UESIIDAETIBOCITNETO ELI OI DSL 609 Canada Industry Canada ICES 003 Compliance Statement A 609 VCCI statement Japan nenne e eene nnm ninh tenerse nennen ns 609 Power cord INStrUuCtONS e 609 Power cord statement Japan 609 EMC statement Chima diee i baec abet edu 610 EMC statement Korea iecit inea NEEN 610 EMI statement
53. 2 Open the following menus e Reports e Configuration Status Pages 3 Select the Current Settings Page option 4 Touch the Print button to print the report 138 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Troubleshooting process Determine the problem source When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation the product control panel alerts you to the situation This section contains a pre troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems e Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions The flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure check the following issues e Are supply items within their rated life e Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors Ey NOTE The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition Troubleshooting flowchart This flowchart highlights the general processes that you can follow to quickly isolate and solve product hardware problems Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step A yes answer to a question allows you to proceed to the next major step A no answer indicates that more testing is needed Go
54. 266 Display Settings menu 302 Fax Settings menu M830 only 284 General Settings menu 257 interpret messages and event log entries 329 Manage Supplies menu 304 Manage Trays menu 308 Network Settings menu 310 Print Options menu 300 Print Settings menu 297 Reports menu 255 Scan Digital Send Settings menu M830 only 273 Service menu 329 troubleshooting menu 322 troubleshooting tests 163 USB Firmware Upgrade menu 329 control panel diagnostic flowcharts 144 control panel menus 255 conventions document iii copy improve quality 558 counterfeit supplies 583 counts 564 copy scan 565 document feeder 565 document feeder duplex 565 document feeder simplex 565 flatbed cycle 565 page reset 564 refurbish cycle 564 send scan 565 current settings pages 138 customer support online 590 D date product first used 566 DC controller components 8 PCA connectors 215 DC controller PCA connectors 215 DC voltages 16 defeating interlocks 156 delivery system 39 demo page 151 diagnostics component 163 control panel 163 engine 156 LED 151 networks 316 diagrams block diagrams 205 disposal end of life 599 document conventions _ iii document feeder ADF sensors 28 paper feeding problems 549 document feeder M830 only operations 26 document feeder count document feeder pages 564 document feeder interval 564 document feeder rollers M830 cleaning 560 duplexer jams 511 E EIO interface 5 electrical specifications 593 el
55. 602 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Declaration of conformity M830 Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC 17050 1 and EN 17050 1 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company DoC BOISB 1305 00 rel 1 0 Manufacturer s Address 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that the product Product Name HP LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M830z Regulatory Model BOISB 1305 00 Including CZ994A Stapler Stacker CZ995A Stapler Stacker with 2 3 hole punch CZ996A Stapler Stacker with 2 4 hole punch CZ285A Booklet Maker Finisher BOISB 0703 00 Fax Module Product Options All Toner Cartridges CF325X conforms to the following Product Specifications SAFETY IEC 60950 1 2005 A1 2009 EN60950 1 2006 A11 2009 A1 2010 A12 2011 IEC 60825 1 2007 EN 60825 1 2007 Class 1 Laser LED Product IEC 62479 2010 EN 62479 2010 GB4943 1 2011 EMC CISPR22 2008 EN55022 2010 Class A EN 61000 3 2 2006 A1 2009 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 55024 2010 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Issue 4 GB9254 2008 GB17625 1 2003 TELECOM ES 203 021 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 68 RoHS EN 50581 2012 Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC EMC Directive 2004 108 EC the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC the RoHS Directive 2011 65 EU and carries the CE Marking C accordingly ENWW Declaration of conformity M830 603
56. Data stored on the toner cartridge eiiis r eenean esta cerne t ith e caa b Le ene ERE LR cid 584 End User License Agreemient eret rne EIN det en Ur Ove De Eo RED Ro e E RE Qe dvds 585 Sia 588 Customer self repair warranty service ssssssssssseseeeeeeen eene nennen nennen nnn 589 Customer SUpport 590 Appendix B Product TI EE 591 Physical specifiCatlOns 2 c rece recie ettet erra Eder ea esa dde ERN Ev eut uada caa uen c un 592 HP LaserJet Enterprise M Oge enne 592 HP LaserJet Enterprise Flow M830 ecceeccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeees 592 Finishing lee EE 593 Power consumption electrical specifications and acoustic emissions ssesssesssseserterrrnrrnn reee 593 Environmental specifications sssrinin ari aa E ar aT AERALA A EAE ERNES 593 ENWW xxiii Appendix C Regulatory information EEN 595 XXiv FCC feQulatioms E 596 Environmental product stewardship program cceceeseeeeeccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceacaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteee 597 Protecting the environment sssssssssssseeeeeneeeee ener eene nennen nnns 597 Ozone productioN eegene c 597 Power CODSUmlpllOn 5 ntt n earned Rex en EENS 597 gli 597
57. Description Image transformer internal error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Resend the print job 3 If the error persists clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 407 47 02 XX Description Job parser internal error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Resend the print job 3 Ifthe error persists clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu 47 03 XX Description Print job internal error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Resend the print job 3 Ifthe error persists clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu 47 04 XX Description Print spooler 9100 internal error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Resend the print job 3 Ifthe error persists clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu 47 05 00 Description Print spooler framework internal error Recommended action 1 2 408 Chapter 2 Turn the product off and then on again Resend the print job If the error persists clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu Solve problems ENWW 47 06 XX Description Print App internal error Recommended action 1 2 3 Turn the product off and then on again
58. From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e EventLog The event log displays on the screen To print it touch the Print button Print or view the event log from the Service menu i SS 20 Pe SS Ze From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button Open the Service menu On the sign in screen select the Service Access Code option from the drop down list Enter the following service access code for this product Specs Service Pin Open the Event Log menu The event log displays on the screen To print it touch the Print button Clear an event log T oS pm o S X Ze ENWW From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button Open the Service menu On the sign in screen select the Service Access Code option from the drop down list Enter the following service access code for this product Specs Service Pin Open the Event Log menu Select the Clear Event Log item and then touch the OK button Tools for troubleshooting 495 Clear jams E NOTE Some of the figures in this section show the M806 product however the procedures in this section apply to both the M806 and M830 products Auto navigation for clearing jams The auto navigation feature assists you in clearing jams by providing step by step instructions
59. High capacity input HCI feeder controller PCA connectors sssseeseeeesseeerrrssseeerrresssrrrrrssssrees 217 Finishing accessories all controller PCA connectors ssseem 218 Pugjack locations A LEE 220 Plug jack locations A EE 220 M830 product integrated scanner assembly SA 222 Base product ee ET 223 Base product main assemblies 1 of 31 224 Base product main assemblies 2 of 31 225 Base product main assemblies 3 of 31 226 High capacity input HCI feeder covers eene nennt 227 High capacity input HCI feeder main assemblies 1 Of 31 228 High capacity input HCI feeder main assemblies 2 of 31 229 High capacity input HCI feeder main assemblies 3 of 31 230 Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch covers nsnseessssssnsnrnnnnrninsensssnsnrnnnnnno 231 Booklet maker anly COVO I 232 Finishing accessories main assemblies ssssssssssseene eene eene 233 General timing chart ossi aian Hess ocn Heide Lee dude aei aa doen ane eee e a aeuo 234 General circuit diagram product base 1 of 3 235 General circuit diagram product base 2 of 3 ssssssssssssseeeeee eee 236 General circuit diagram product base 3 of 3 237 General circuit diagram high capacity input HCI feeder ssssse 238 General circuit diagram finishing accessories 1 of 6 sssssssssse 239 General circuit diagram finishing accessories 2 of 6
60. Output Bin M830 only Select from a list of the available trays All Bins Face Down Face Up Generates a test page for testing paper handling features You can define the path that is used for the test in order to test specific paper paths Test Duplex Path Off On ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 323 Table 2 54 Troubleshooting menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Number of Copies Range 1 500 Sets the default Default 1 number of copies for a copy job This default applies when the Copy or Quick Copy function is initiated from the product Home screen The factory default setting is 1 Manual Sensor Test Select from a list of available components Reset Sensors Test the product sensors and switches for correct operation Each sensor is displayed on the control panel screen along with its status Manually trip each sensor and watch for it to change on the screen Press the Stop button to abort the test Tray Bin Manual Sensor Test Component Test Select from a list of available components Reset Sensors Select from a list of available components Test the sensors in the trays and bins for correct operation Each sensor is displayed on the control panel screen along with its status Manually trip each sensor and watch for it to change on the Screen Press the Stop button to abort the test
61. Protocol Use for automatic configuration from a DHCPVv4 server If selected and a DHCP lease exists the DHCP Release menu and the DHCP Renew menu are available to set DHCP lease options Auto IP Use for automatic link local IPv4 addressing An address in the form 169 254 x x is assigned automatically If you set this option to the Manual setting use the Manual Settings menu to configure TCP IPv4 parameters Manual Settings IP Address NOTE This menu is available only if you select the Manual option under the Config Method menu Enter the address Available only if the Config Method option is set to the Manual option Configure parameters directly from the product control panel Subnet Mask Enter the address Default Gateway Enter the address ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 311 Table 2 53 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Default IP Values Auto IP Legacy Description Specify the IP address to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced TCP IP reconfiguration for example when manually configured to use BootP or DHCP NOTE This feature assigns a static IP address that might interfere with a managed network Auto IP A link local IP address 169 254 x x is set Legacy The address 192 0 0 192 is set consistent with older HP Jetdirec
62. Recommended action Clear the jam See the clear jams section in the service manual Supplies low Description Multiple supplies on the product have reached the user defined low threshold Recommended action Replace the supply when print quality is no longer acceptable Supply Memory Warning Description The product cannot read or write to the e label or the e label is missing Recommended action No action necessary The unit has corrupt data Description Data corruption has occurred in the firmware volume ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 487 e 98 00 01 Corrupt data in the firmware volume e 98 00 02 Corrupt data in the solutions volume e 98 00 03 Corrupt data in the configuration volume e 98 00 04 Corrupt data in the job data volume Recommended action For 98 00 01 98 00 02 and 98 00 03 perform the following steps 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Usethe Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu 3 Reload the firmware For 98 00 04 perform the following steps 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Run the file erase function Too many pages in job to staple Description The job contains more pages than can be stapled Recommended action Send the job to the stacker bin or make the job page count smaller Too many pages to make booklet Description The job contains more pages than can be assembled in the booklet bin Recommended action Send the job to the stacker bin or make the job page count smaller
63. TAWAN zc rer Ede Ree i Re EXER RR e M Ree ee M BR nea pen uA 610 Laser statement for Finland eene nennen nennen nnns 610 GS statement Germany 202 1 ei siete recepi odre dip gea EES EEEN NEN ANE NEEE REDE NA aeu Duca 612 Substances Table China ete tede E Ree cr Deere te as aita ce Era ede rena tds 612 SEPA Ecolabel User Information China 612 Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement Turkey sseeeesssss 613 ENWW Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement Ukraine seussss 613 Eurasian Conformity Belarus Kazakhstan Russia sseeenee 613 Additional statements for telecom fax products sse enne 614 EU Statement for Telecom Operation sssssssssssseeeeemeen 614 New Zealand Telecom Statements eene nene 614 Additional FCC statement for telecom products US 614 Telephone Consumer Protection Act US sesssssssssssssrrnnnnanrssennnaannnnsnnnennnnnnnnnnaaaannnennane 615 Industry Canada CS 03 requirements sssssssssssseeee nennen 615 Vietnam Telecom wired wireless marking for ICTQC Type approved products 616 Japan Telecom ET 616 ho rr mc 617 ENWW XXV xxvi ENWW List of tables Table 1 1 Sequence of operation product base sssssssssssseeeeee ene enne nennen enne 3 Table 1 2 Formatter har
64. Touch Component Test 7T Runthe intermediate feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the pickup drive assembly 8 Runthe intermediate feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the Merge Drive Assembly and or Merge Assembly 13 AA EE Description HCI Door Open Jam This jam occurs when the HCI right door SW3301 is opened during printing Recommended action 1 Close the Lower Right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 2 Openthe following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 3 Test SW3301 using the Manual Sensor Switch test to verify that the switch is functioning correctly 4 Ifthe error persists replace the Merge Assembly 13 AB EE Description HCI Door Open Jam ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 359 This jam occurs when the HCI inner flap door PS3306 is opened during printing Recommended action 1 Close the inner flap door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 2 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 3 Test PS3306 using the Manual Sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly 4 Ifthe error persists replace the left tray pickup assembly 13 B2 Az Description Media stay jam at registration sensor PS4 13 B2 A1 This jam occurs when the media is present longer than the expected medi
65. always print them or you can set up a schedule for each day of the week Schedule Add plus sign Print incoming faxes If you are using a fax printing schedule Touch this to setup Edit Store incoming use this menu to a fax printing faxes configure when to schedule if you Delete print faxes selected the Use Time Fax Printing Schedule option Event Days ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 293 Table 2 46 Fax Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Blocked Fax Fax Number to Numbers Block Description The blocked fax list can contain up to 30 numbers When the product receives a call from one of the blocked fax numbers it deletes the incoming fax It also logs the blocked fax in the activity log along with job accounting information Add blocked numbers Enter a fax number into the Fax Number to Block field and then touch the arrow button to add a new number to the blocked fax list To remove blocked numbers Select a number and touch the Delete button to delete it from the blocked fax list To clear all blocked numbers Touch the Delete All button to clear all of the numbers from the blocked fax list You can also use the Blocked Fax List report in the Information menu to view the list of the fax numbers that have been blocked on this product 294 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 46 Fax Settings menu M830 only continued Fi
66. and paper pushing motor clock sensor PI1 7 Make sure that the sensors are securely fastened to the chassis Check sensor P14 sensor PI15 and sensor PI1 for damage 8 Verify that connectors J6 J9 and J23 on the saddle stitcher controller PCA are fully seated and not damaged Check the wiring at the sensors 9 ONLY if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the saddle stitcher controller PCA 66 90 50 Description Booklet CPU sequence error Recommended action 1 Follow the instructions in the online help 2 Turn the product off and then on 3 Ifthe error persists see the output finishing device service manual for detailed instructions 69 11 YZ Description There is a duplexer error 452 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Ifthe error persists replace the duplexer 70 XX YY Error Messages 70 00 00 Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced a DC controller failure Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Ifthe error persists replace the DC controller 80 XX YY 82 XX YY Error Messages 80 0X YY Embedded Jetdirect Error ENWW Description An Embedded HP JetDirect print server critical error has occurred e 80 01 80 event log No heartbeat e 80 01 81 event log Reclaim timeout e 80 01 82 event log Invalid data length e 80 01 8B event log Invalid
67. black in the colors Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and darkest color on the page Background Cleanup Adjust the Background Cleanup setting if you are having trouble copying a faint image 290 Chapter 2 Solve problems Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image For example increasing the sharpness could make text appear crisper but decreasing it could make photographs appear smoother ENWW Table 2 46 Fax Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Automatic Tone The product automatically adjusts the Darkness Contrast and Background Cleanup settings to the most appropriate for the scanned document Default Select this to make the selected Image Adjustment setting the default value Optimize Text Manually adjust Optimize For Optimizes the output Picture for a particular type Text of content You can optimize the output Printed picture for text printed pictures or a Photograph mixture Manually adjust Use to manually optimize the setting for text or for pictures Text Use to optimize the text portion of the copy where text and or pictures are on the original Printed picture Use for line drawings and preprinted images such as magazine clippings or pages from books Photograph Best suited for ma
68. contacts for damage Replace any deformed or damaged parts ENWW Solve image quality problems 553 Table 2 60 Image defects table continued Problem Cause Solution White spots appear in the image The static charge eliminator is Clean the static eliminator dirty The secondary transfer roller Replace the secondary transfer is deformed or has roller assembly deteriorated Poor secondary transfer roller Clean the contact If the problem contact with the roller shaft remains after cleaning replace the secondary transfer roller assembly The back of the page is dirty The secondary transfer roller Replace the secondary transfer is dirty roller The fuser inlet guide or Clean the dirty parts If the dirt does separation guide is dirty not come off replace the guide The pressure roller is dirty Run the cleaning page several times If the issue persists replace the fuser Vertical streaks or bands appear on the page Scratches are present on the Replace the toner cartridge circumference of the developing cylinder or photosensitive drum Scratches are present onthe Replace the fuser circumference of the fuser roller Vertical white lines appear on A unknown substance has Remove any unknown substances the page adhered to the laser beam window Scratches are present on the Replace the toner cartridge circumference of the developing roller or photosensitive drum Wess dr
69. me SERETRISTETUTST S sui Lal zT 7 ze Ke TOTES TSW XSISWSSH 7 Stacker Controller PCA T q o a m o gt a x O by a DS z o OSS zess SUUS SL101 sc ET Virose s eT Te Ts Is Dr To To boli To Fs kk SEPETRTSTETRTSTSTE ER SR103 LA 2 sR102 LITE z zen EE z SRIO4 ELI z LI 3510 244 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Internal print quality test pages Print quality troubleshooting pages Use the print quality troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print quality problems Ey NOTE To get further assistance in print quality troubleshooting go to www hp com support IjM806 and or www hp com support ljflowMFPM830 and select PQ Troubleshooting Tools 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Print Quality Pages e Print PQ Troubleshooting Page 3 Touch the Print button The product prints a print quality troubleshooting procedure page and a black print quality troubleshooting page Follow the instructions on the print quality troubleshooting procedure page Figure 2 50 Print quality troubleshooting procedure page Print Quality Troubleshooting Procedure HP LaserJet M806 Page 1 1 Check the Control Panel 2 Troubleshoot Your Pr
70. paper feeder assembly which includes PI22 Only if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the saddle stitcher controller PCA If media is found in the finisher cover sensor PI22 the sensor is not detecting the media perform the following steps 1 Check the upper and lower guides and rollers in the paper path for damage 2 Make sure that the media diverter gate saddle stitch flapper is not blocking the paper path 3 Test solenoid SL5 inlet switch solenoid using the finisher component test from the control panel display SL5 should be opening and closing the media diverter gate saddle stitch flapper Description Booklet Initial Jam Jam in the front left door Occurs when paper is detected by one of the sensors on the paper sensor board P118 PI19 P120 vertical path paper sensor P117 booklet delivery sensor P111 paper positioning plate paper sensor PI8 or booklet making paper entry sensor PI22 when the machine is powered on Recommended action 1 2 Remove media from the booklet maker paper path Verify that the sensor flags are not damaged move freely and are correctly aligned with the sensor bodies Carefully clean each sensor body by gently blowing clean air across each sensor to remove dust and debris Tools for troubleshooting 345 4 Make sure that connectors J6 J9 J10 J13 and J21 are fully seated on the saddle stitcher controller PCA 5 Onl
71. perform the following steps e Check the sensor for obstructions e X Verify that the sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body e Make sure that the lower end of the flag is not damaged and is correctly positioned to activate the sensor Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the chassis Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris Verify that the wiring at the sensor is not damaged and that the intermediate connector J1007 and connector J3 on the stacker controller PCA are fully seated Replace the sensor if necessary Only if the error persists Replace the stacker controller PCA Tools for troubleshooting 335 13 60 FF Description Stacker Initial Jam Jam in the top left door left bins Finisher stay jam at either P1103 or PI104 when engine powered on When the engine is powered on the finisher s upper feed path entry sensor PI103 or the upper feed path exit sensor PI104 is activated suggesting that there is paper in the upper paper path of the finisher at sensors PI103 or PI104 Recommended action 1 Open the top door and remove any media in the paper path media detected at P1103 2 Raise the upper paper path exit delivery rollers and remove any media in the paper path media detected at P1104 3 Remove all paper found from the top left door area 4 Verify that the sensor flags are
72. select a 2 sided format option Book style The back side of the original is printed right side up and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are bound along the left edge Flip style The back side of the original is printed upside down and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are to be bound along the top edge Book style original Flip style copy The back side of the original is printed right side up but the back side of the copy is printed upside down Use this option when the original is bound along the left edge but you want the copies to be bound along the top edge Flip style original Book style copy The back side of the original is printed upside down but the back side of the copy is printed right side up Use this option when the original is bound along the top edge but you want the copies to be bound along the left edge Output Bin Optimize Text Picture Manually adjust Optimize For slider Automatic Standard Bin Correct Order Rear Bin Straightest Path Use this setting to optimize the output for a particular type of content 270 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 44 Copy Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Values Text Printed picture Photograph Description Manually adjust Use to manuall
73. 0614 13 0 RRNA EA EREZA A RC CE SJ T11363 2006 PED E HY BR EZRA F o X RAIA TEA ER BD EZ BE A S E E E EE LB SJ T11363 2006 WUE HY BR EZEK DEBS FT 2 RP EAT EL FF WK th ROHS LIE TE Ich FAIRS br VAR FP i ELTE Rd BERE BS RF SEPA Ecolabel User Information China hRS LET En FB P KA WEAF 63 0 dB A ZI 2388 8 UBER AI St Sr A I s DC e FR dn s KENT B CAAT mT NASH ISTA CORE XL P B SRI AI fH S DIRE SENSU AT SRA CIBTERBORAPUIAHO MORBO A SRM Ji RI ELS FA FBS ARD ARER 612 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement Turkey Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement Ukraine Eurasian Conformity Belarus Kazakhstan Russia ENWW T rkiye Cumhuriyeti EEE Yonetmeligine Uygundur O6nanHauHs BignoBigae BAMOraM TexHiuHoro perriaMeHTy LWO0 o6MexeHHsa BUKOPUCTAHHA DG He6eaneuHux PEYOBUH B erieKTDAHHOMy Ta eTIeKTDOHHOMYy o6nanHaHHi 3aTBep IpPKeHOro rI OCTaHOBOIO Ka6iHery MinicrpiB YkpaiHu Big 3 rpygHa 2008 Ne 1057 EAL NponzBogntenp Hewlett Packard Company 3000 Hanover Street Palo Alto California 94304 CLLIA HP Poccusa 3AO Xbionerr Tlakkapn A O 125171 Poccua r Mockaa Jlenuurpanckoe uiocce 16A crp 3 ren cpakc 7 495 797 35 00 7 495 287 89 05 HP Bbenapycb NOOO Xbronerr llakkapn ben 220030 benapycb r Munck yn VIHnrepHauoHanbHas 36 1 odbc 722 723 ten 375 17 392 28 18 cpakc 37
74. 1 Turn the product off and then on Make sure that there is no paper stuck in the jogger assembly Check connections J4 on the stacker controller PCA and intermediate connector J1032 Run the test on alignment motors If the error persists replace the required assembly o m amp o DN If the error persists replace the stacker controller PCA Description Stapler malfunction M105 Stapler mobility motor Recommended action Control panel diagnostics M105 Staple Motor Staple Shift Motor and PI110 Stapler Home Sensor Stapler Home Position Sensor 1 Test the upper stapler shift motor M105 by using the finisher component test from the control panel display e Ifthe stapler unit moves correctly proceed to the next step e Ifthe stapler unit does not move correctly or moves erratically perform the following steps a Check the flat flexible cable FFC for damage dents folds and or tears Replace the FFC if necessary b Check the FFC connectors and cable mounting areas c Ifthe error persists replace the stapler assembly 2 Testthe stapler shift home position sensor PI110 using the finisher component test from the product control panel e Ifthe sensor does not change state when the stapler unit is moved from the home position perform the following steps a Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the chassis b Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove
75. 18000 3 NFC Bandwidth 1Mhz Bandwidth WiFi 14Khz bandwidth 7Khz off center 13 56Mhz NFC Modulation DSSS OFDM modulation WiFi Effective Radiate Power ERP Power output max is 20dBm for WiFi Note Power out max for WiFi can be different in some regions and controlled by FW Power output is 23dBm into an 50 ohm transformer for NFC Note There will be some loss in the antenna and therefore this is not all radiated in to the air Specifications WiFi has 13 Channel support a spacing of 20MHz for B G amp N modes NFC is cable of reading writing via the following speeds 424 kbit s Manchester 1096 ASK Manchester 1096 ASK 212 kbit s Manchester 1096 ASK Manchester 10 ASK 106 kbit s Modified Miller 100 ASK Manchester 10 ASK Integrated module utilizes a USB 2 0 backplane interface Other Transmission Capabilities Does the device employ any other methods of non wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever e g anything other than standard hard wired TCP IP direct USB or parallel connections x Yes No If Yes please describe below Purpose Product contains an integrated WiFi NFC accessory module consisting of an HP Umber WiFi 802 11n and Near Filed Communication NFC radio The WiFi portion acts in Access Point mode ONLY and provides AP client connection capability NFC is used to pass NDEF tag data WiFi SSID WPA configuration data The latter is used to
76. 3 Ifthe error continues see the Output finishing device service manual for detailed instructions 66 90 10 Description Booklet Interlock Switch Error There are three switches in the Booklet Maker finisher SW1 the saddle guide switch also known as the inlet door switch SW3 the booklet ejection door switch and MS31 the front door switch The Stapler Stacker finisher only has one switch MS31 for the front door of the finisher All three switches detect if the associated door or guide plate is open or closed Each one of the switches also has a sensor SW1 PI9 SW3 PI3 and MS31 PI32 that acts as a backup and detects the same information as the switches The error occurs when all the doors and guides are closed and there is a mismatch in readings between the sensors and the switches For example the front door finisher door is closed PI32 senses the door is closed but MS31 senses the door is still open 444 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 66 90 29 ENWW Associated finisher door and guide switches and sensors are as follows e Saddle guide switch SW1 and saddle guide sensor PI9 e Booklet ejection door switch SW3 and booklet ejection door sensor PI3 e Front door switch MS31 and front door sensor PI32 Recommended action Control panel diagnostics PI32 front door 1 sensor PI3 booklet door 1 sensor also known as booklet delivery door sensor PI9 front door 2 sensor also known as the saddle guide door sensor or inlet doo
77. 3 Ifthe error persists replace the duplexer Bad optional tray connection Description The optional tray is not connected not connected correctly or a connection is not working correctly Recommended action 1 Turn the product off 2 Remove and then reinstall the optional tray 3 Reconnect the connectors for the tray 4 Turn the product on 5 If the error persists replace the connector for the tray Calibration reset pending Description A calibration reset occurs when all jobs are processed Recommended action To begin the reset sooner cancel all jobs by pressing the Stop button Canceling Description The product is canceling the current job ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 465 Recommended action No action necessary Canceling lt jobname gt Description The product is canceling the current job lt jobname gt Recommended action No action necessary Cartridge Low Description This message displays even though the toner cartridge is new Recommended action 1 Remove and then reinstall the toner cartridge 2 Make sure a genuine HP supply is used 3 Ifthe error persists replace the toner cartridge Cartridge Memory Abnormal Description This message displays even though the toner cartridge is new Recommended action 1 Remove and then reinstall the toner cartridge 2 Reconnect connector J305 on the DC controller PCA 3 Ifthe error persists replace the toner cartridge Cartridge Out De
78. 3 500 sheet high capacity input HCI 57 cassette media size detection and cassette presence detection 65 jam detection 66 motor control 61 motor failure 62 pickup feed operation 63 A accessories 218 253 3 500 sheet high capacity input feeder 57 booklet maker 111 hole punch 68 stapler stacker 68 acoustic specifications 593 ADF automatic document feeder sensors 28 anticounterfeit supplies 583 B basic product operation 2 batteries included 599 booklet maker 111 feed and delivery operation 119 jam detection 125 jams 538 motors 118 staple jams 544 C Calibrate Cleaning menu M806 control panel 328 cartridge design 24 memory 25 toner level detection 25 toner seal 25 cartridges non HP 582 recycling 597 warranty 581 cautions iii certificate of volatility M806 605 certificate of volatility M830 607 circuit diagrams general 235 clean the paper path cleaning page printing 248 cleaning paper path 558 product 558 rollers 560 scanner glass M830 558 cleaning page 326 328 clock 5 cold reset 566 component test special mode test 164 components DC controller 8 diagnostic tests 163 diagrams of 204 configuration page 151 configuration pages information 253 printing 249 connectivity LED 155 connectors DC controller PCA 215 control panel 6 163 Administration menu 255 Backup Restore menu 325 Calibrate Cleaning menu M806 328 Calibrate Cleaning menu M830 325 Copy Settings menu M830 only
79. 3A feed sensor PS1404 in the designated amount of time after the start of media pick up from Tray 3 This is a no pick jam from Tray 3 Recommended action 1 Open Tray 3 remove any jammed paper and then close the tray 2 Open and close the upper right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Make sure that the Tray 3 pickup feed and separation roller are installed correctly and show no damage or wear 4 Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers as needed 5 Check the connectors at the sensor feed motor and the DC controller PCA 6 Check connector J221 on the DC controller PCA and interconnect J21 7 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 8 Test PS1404 using the Tray Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensors are functioning correctly 9 Runthe Tray 3 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the pickup assembly 10 Ifthe error persists replace the paper pickup assembly Description Residual Media Jam in Tray 3 Tools for troubleshooting 351 This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Tray 3A feed sensor PS1404 or the Tray 3B feed sensor PS1403 at power on Recommended action 1 Open Tray 3 remove any jammed paper and then close the tray 2 Open and close the upper right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Make sure that the Tray 3 picku
80. 5 5 pe e ai ES R m e MS 8 NOWY aS 3 5 e Ue o zd ONS m i Aver 39 C Bes E 5 EN E as S 9 E z jg a el el ei INIS VIVANLA a 6 ve Se Green p OB RS E mum 2 228 mrt 4 E S 555 z We T Oo 258 z TSF 8 LAE sess 2 x r4 ROTOR ATT L5 el amp a J F Tun as VW Z m aia L gag SS S E 8 E g E S 5 ZG Qe E E g 2 5 d BERN m 8 a wis PY sk Ga ak E BNC VREWIEN 5 Det renaren P a umts dE I x wows TES o 3 a s GYE wap pi vans Pe E wes Ea A o EI 8 o 5 8 2 2 E g 8 8 5 a r 5 e gh Eu A Li E sd S m S Go H 8 g 5 Dlreemeeas H Be T s Ki NOWSWSMS g amp po A l 2 p g NSN PS z 8 sesta J A im aes zie reesen t 2 zd t west u S A Te i t eos Tt 5 Wess al I wer e see TES oA TUR O E JN 5 TE 5 WSONVHO E VSSWRO ia 2 ies al z ao I z zl g T T E amp gt H 4 Ge is ONS ov Ei st e Tareas Se d Cem Si j APP punti mde on Mel a 8 asomo FS 8 ROSAS B 5 ces ES 8 mes tl i we LES l E s x mmm z S E QNSS 8 MAS n DEn 5 h 2m mes 2m MAS Tver eiss H We J E we ius 240 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Figure 2 46 General circuit diagram finishing accessories 3 of 6
81. 800 340 2445 holds up to 31 kg 70 Ib of HP LaserJet toner cartridges 2 Use a single pre paid shipping label Single returns 1 Package the HP LaserJet toner cartridge in its original bag and box 2 Place the shipping label on the front of the box Shipping For US and Puerto Rico HP LaserJet toner cartridge recycling returns use the pre paid pre addressed shipping label contained in the box To use the UPS label give the package to the UPS driver during your next delivery or pick up or take it to an authorized UPS drop off center Requested UPS Ground pickup will be charged normal pick up rates For the location of your local UPS drop off center call 1 800 PICKUPS or visit www ups com If you are returning the package with the FedEx label give the package to either the U S Postal Service carrier or FedEx driver during your next pick up or delivery Requested FedEx Ground pickup will be charged normal pick up rates Or you can drop off your packaged toner cartridge s at any U S Post Office or any FedEx shipping center or store For the location of your nearest U S Post 598 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Office please call 1 800 ASK USPS or visit www usps com For the location of your nearest FedEx shipping center store please call 1 800 GOFEDEX or visit www fedex com For more information or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns visit www hp com recycle or call 1 800 340 2445 Informatio
82. A Wi P A Re te BAP Pt BU Sc Hf 1T HI Ser cf EMC statement Korea AB 211 0 JE eies Ag e 2e AnTAHSSS B 7 APS Y54771 ALU BOW SE ASAE OISS FASHA Hct 18 ag AMMA Assis AS SAC SUCH EMI statement Taiwan BAEK IVE AMINO Em ERER PEHE gt BYE ee CH AR TH gt OR GALERIE E BIER o Laser statement for Finland Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP LaserJet Enterprise 700 color MFP M775 laserkirjoitin on k ytt j n kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite Normaalissa k yt ss kirjoittimen suojakotelointi est lasers teen p syn laitteen ulkopuolelle Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on m ritetty standardin EN 60825 1 2007 mukaisesti VAROITUS Laitteen k ytt minen muulla kuin k ytt ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle VARNING Om apparaten anv nds p annat s tt n i bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstr lning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 HUOLTO HP LaserJet Enterprise 700 color MFP M775 kirjoittimen sis ll ei ole k ytt j n huollettavissa olevia kohteita Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkil T llaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota v riainekasetin vaihtamista paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita k ytt j n k sikirjassa lueteltuja k ytt j n teht v ksi tarkoitet
83. ATA Secure Erase Overwrites all data on the hard drive 4 Secure File Erase Erases files when jobs finish processing by overwriting them one or three times Type HDD Tape etc Solid State Drive Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory 8GB amp Yes L No Stores customer data OS applications Perform a Part Clean digitally signed firmware images persistent from the BIOS the M806dn bundle only data and temporary data used for processing memory and system functions Note SSD Used on Certificate of Volatility M806 605 Figure C 2 Certificate of Volatility 2 of 2 USB Does the item accept USB input and if so for what purpose i e Print Jobs device firmware updates scan upload X Yes Cl No If Yes please describe below Print jobs HP digitally signed firmware upgrades 3rd party application loading Restore encrypted backed up system settings USB ports can be disabled Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device X Yes J No If Yes please describe below Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive RF RFID Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics e g Cellular phone Bluetooth H Yes Cl No If Yes please describe below Purpose Product contains an integrated WiFi NFC accessory module consisting of an HP Umber WiFi 802 11n and Near File
84. Booklet maker BM saddle controller e GE RK ep VETAT T TT DUM Cm 5 esi A bes A x o Access the punch controller PCA A CAUTION ESD sensitive component For specific instructions about removing the following covers to access the saddle controller PCA see the product repair manual 1 Remove the following assemblies 168 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW e Bin cable cover e X Open closed stepped cover e Upper stepped cover e Lower stepped cover e Rear cover 2 Locate the following controller PCA switches and LEDs e SW602 callout 1 e SW603 callout 2 e LED601 and LED602 callout 3 e DIPSW callout 4 Ey NOTE The DIPSW has four electronic switches that can be set to either the ON or OFF position The DIPSW is marked ON to show the current switch position For normal operation of the finishing accessory all of the DIPSW switches must be in the OFF position Always return the DIPSW switches to the factory setting when you are finished testing an accessory Figure 2 12 Stapler stacker with hole punch SSHP punch controller PCA switches MO Y ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 169 Finishing accessory function tests Use the procedures in this section to diagnose problems with the stapler stacker SS stapler stacker with hole punch SSHP or booklet maker BM assemblies Pre alignment plate motor test Post alignment plate motor test Swing guide motor test Staple subassembly
85. CASSETTE OPEN DETECTION signal PS3101 Right cassette lift up media surface sensor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 2 signal PS3102 Right cassette pickup coordinate media surface HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK sensor SURFACE 1 signal PS3103 Right cassette media presence sensor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal PS3201 Left cassette lift up media surface sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 2 signal PS3202 Left cassette pickup coordinate media surface HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE sensor 1 signal PS3203 Left cassette media presence sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal PS3301 Media feed sensor HCI MEDIA FEED signal PS3302 Right cassette media feed sensor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA FEED signal PS3303 Right cassette media size sensor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA SIZE signal PS3304 Left cassette media size sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA SIZE signal PS3305 Left cassette media feed sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA FEED signal PS3306 Side feed guide open detection sensor HCI LONG EDGE FEED GUIDE OPEN DETECTION signal PS3308 Right cassette media level sensor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA LEVEL signal PS3309 Left cassette media level sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA LEVEL signal 60 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW HCI motor control The HCI has five motors in each cassette for paper feed and cassette lift up Figure 1 34 HCI motors PS3305 PS3307 V V v PS
86. Continue item and then touch the OK button Ey NOTE The product will initialize Table 2 1 Preboot menu options 1 of 6 Menu option First level Second level Third level Description Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Preboot menu and continues the normal boot process If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30 seconds the product returns to a normal boot the same as selecting Continue If the user navigates to another menu the timeout does not apply Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is required to open the Preboot menu ENWW Preboot menu options 131 Table 2 1 Preboot menu options 1 of 6 continued Menu option First level Second level Administrator Description This item navigates to the Administrator submenus If authentication is required and the user is not already signed in the Sign In prompt displays The user is required to sign in Download Network USB USB Thumbdrive This item initiates a preboot firmware download process A USB drive option will work on all FutureSmart products USB or Network connections are not currently supported Format Disk Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk partitions CAUTION Selecting the Format Disk item removes all data A delete confirmation prompt is not provided The system is not bootable after this action and a 99 09 67 error displays on th
87. Detects paper pushing plate J13 sensor leading edge position PI16 Stitcher unit IN sensor Detects stitcher unit storage J13 PI17 Vertical path paper sensor Detects paper in vertical path J10 PI18 No 1 paper sensor 1 Flapper Detects paper No 1 on paper J10 paper sensor sensor PCA PI19 No 2 paper sensor 2 Flapper Detects paper No 2 on paper J10 paper sensor sensor PCA PI20 No 3 paper sensor Detects paper No 3 on paper J10 sensor PCA PI21 Paper folding home position sensor Detects paper fold home position J18 PI22 Booklet making paper entry sensor Detects saddle inlet paper J21 Booklet maker delivery modes Table 1 40 Booklet maker delivery modes Feed Staple Saddle Punch Offset Supported function Straight No N A No Yes Straight No N A Yes No Straight Staple N A No No Straight Staple N A Yes No Straight Saddle N A N A No Switchback No N A No Yes Switchback No N A Yes Yes Switchback Staple N A No Yes Switchback Staple N A Yes No Switchback Saddle N A N A Yes 126 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW 2 Solve problems e Solve problems checklist e Menu map e Preboot menu options e Current settings pages e Troubleshooting process e Tools for troubleshooting e Clear jams e Paperfeeds incorrectly or becomes jammed e Use manual print modes e Solve image quality problems e Clean the product e Solve performance problems e Solve connectivity problems
88. Duplex paper path PS1452 of S1 QO PS502 PS9 tA PS2002 PS2 G i PS3 EA OKO M 2202 V NEMUS TRE pu LL PS1410 PS1409 PS1402 n PS1412 PS1411 PS1404 VY PS2501 PS2502 M TT O PS1401 PS1403 Table 1 17 Jam detection sensors Abbreviation Component name PS1 Right media width sensor PS2 Left media width sensor PS3 Center media width sensor PS4 TOP sensor PS8 Tray 2 feed sensor C PS9 Loop sensor PS502 Fuser delivery sensor PS1401 Tray 2 feed sensor B PS1402 Tray 2 feed sensor A PS1403 Tray 3 feed sensor B PS1404 Tray 3 feed sensor A PS1451 Face down tray delivery sensor M806 only Pickup feed and delivery system 53 Table 1 17 Jam detection sensors continued Abbreviation Component name PS1452 Face down tray media full sensor M806 only PS2002 Duplex switchback sensor PS2003 Duplex pre registration sensor PS2004 Duplex feed sensor PS2005 Duplex residual media sensor PS2502 Tray 1 feed sensor Table 1 18 Jams detected by the DC controller Jam Supported feature No pick jam 1 Yes No pick jam 2 Yes No pick jam 3 Yes No pick jam 4 No Pickup stay jam 1 Yes Pickup stay jam 2 No Pickup stay jam 3 No Pickup stay jam 4 No Fuser delivery delay jam 1 Yes Fuser delivery delay jam 2 No Fuser delivery delay jam 3 No Fuser delive
89. Error Messages 13 60 Az Description Stacker Entrance Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the top left door Finishers upper feed path entry sensor PI103 is remaining activated longer than expected suggesting that paper has jammed at the sensor The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms e 13 60 A1 e 13 60 42 e 13 60 43 Recommended action 1 Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be activating sensor PI33 2 Verify that the sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body 3 Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 4 Verify that the wiring at the sensor is not damaged and that the connector J708 on the stacker controller PCA is fully seated 13 60 Dz Description Stacker Entrance Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the top left door The engine signals the finisher that paper is about to enter the finisher from either the Switch Back assembly or the Hole Punch assembly if installed The finisher s upper feed path entry sensor PI103 which detects paper entering the finisher does not detect the paper within the expected time period triggering the error The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms e 13 60 D1 e 13 60 D2 e 13 60 D3 334 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW Recommended action 1 o a F Oo NM 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Print and analyze the
90. File Erase Erases files when jobs finish processing by overwriting them one or three times Type HDD Tape etc Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory O Yes L No Certificate of Volatility M830 607 Figure C 4 Certificate of Volatility 2 of 2 USB D Yes J No If Yes please describe below Does the item accept USB input and if so for what purpose i e Print Jobs device firmware updates scan upload settings USB ports can be disabled Print jobs HP digitally signed firmware upgrades 3rd party application loading Restore encrypted backed up system D Yes No If Yes please describe below Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive RF RFID Bluetooth J Yes No If Yes please describe below Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics e g Cellular phone wireless direct print for mobile devices Purpose Product contains an integrated WiFi NFC accessory module consisting of an HP Umber WiFi 802 11n and Near Filed Communication NFC radio The WiFi portion acts in Access Point mode ONLY and provides AP client connection capability NFC is used to pass NDEF tag data WiFi SSID WPA configuration data The latter is used to enable Frequency 2 4Ghz to 2 5Ghz ISM band WiFi 13 56mhz ISO IEC
91. Gi TE Fal PING24 at D ez Aiddnng Jamog e6e10 wo1 Figure 2 41 General circuit diagram product base 2 of 3 ENWW 236 Chapter 2 Solve problems
92. Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Execution Time H Values Range 1 24 hours Default 1 hour Description Specify the length of time in hours that an embedded test will be run If you select zero 0 the test runs indefinitely until an error occurs or the product is turned off Data gathered from the HTTP SNMP and Data Path tests is printed after the tests have completed Execute No Yes No Do not initiate the selected tests Yes Initiate the selected tests Ping Test Dest Type IPv4 IPv6 This test is used to check network communications This test sends link level packets to a remote network host then waits for an appropriate response To run a ping test set the following items Dest Type Specify whether the target product is an IPv4 or IPv6 node Dest IPv4 Range 0 255 Default 127 0 0 1 Enter the IPv4 address Dest IPv6 Select from a provided list Default 1 Enter the IPv6 address Packet Size Default 64 Specify the size of each packet in bytes to be sent to the remote host The minimum is 64 default and the maximum is 2048 318 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 53 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Timeout Default 001 Specify the length of time in seconds to wait for a re
93. Mbps full duplex operation 10T Auto 100TX Half 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100TX Full 100TX Auto Limits auto negotiation to a maximum link speed of 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps full duplex operation ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 321 Troubleshooting menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Troubleshooting menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 54 Troubleshooting menu First level Second level Third level Event Log M830 only Print Event Log M806 only Fourth level Values View Print View Event Log M830 only Paper Path Page View M830 only Print Description Use to print a list of the 1 000 most recent events in the Event Log For each event the printed log shows the error number page count error code and description or personality Use to print a list of the 1 000 most recent events in the Event Log For each event the printed log shows the error number page count error code and description or personality Shows how many pages were printed from each tray Fax Fax T 30 Trace Print T 30 Report M830 only When to Print Report Print Never automatically print Print after every fax Print only after fax send jobs Print after any fax error Print only after fax send
94. OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com 588 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Customer self repair warranty service HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair CSR parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement If during the diagnosis period HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement There are two categories of CSR parts 1 Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory If you request HP to replace these parts you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service 2 Parts for which customer
95. Paper path sensors test varies depending on which optional accessories are installed Table 2 12 Paper path sensors diagnostic tests Sensor name Sensor Switch Replacement part Descriptions Sensor test name number number Tray 5 feed sensor PS3305 Paper Path Test HCI feed sensor PS3301 Crossing paper feed Paper Path Test assembly Tray 4 feed sensor PS3302 Paper Path Test Tray 3 feed sensor PS1403 4 Paper Path Test Tray 2 feed sensor PS1401 2 Paper Path Test Tray 1 feed sensor PS2502 Paper Path Test TOP sensor PS4 Paper Path Test Paper Width Sensor 1 PS1 2 3 Paper Path Test Fuser loop 1 sensor PS9 Fuser drive assembly Paper Path Test Fuser output sensor PS502 Fuser assembly Paper Path Test Duplex switching PS2002 3 Paper Path Test sensor Duplex refeed sensor PS2004 5 Paper Path Test Output sensor PS1451 Paper Path Test ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 159 Table 2 12 Paper path sensors diagnostic tests continued Sensor name Sensor Switch Replacement part Descriptions Sensor test name number number Output bin full sensor PS1452 Paper Path Test PPCA sensor PS3307 Paper Path Test Manual sensor and tray bin manual sensor tests Use these diagnostic tests to manually test the product sensors and switches Manual sensor test The table in this section lists the sensors and switches available in the Manual Sensor Test Use the manual sensor test The Manual Sensor Test screen shows
96. This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two Conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems 2 Forregulatory purposes this product is assigned a Regulatory model number This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number s 3 The product meets the requirements of EN55022 amp CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures 4 Telecom approvals and standards appropriate for the target countries regions have been applied to this product in addition to those listed above 5 This product uses an analog fax accessory module which Regulatory Model number is BOISB 0703 00 as needed to meet technical regulatory requirements for the countries regions this product will be sold Boise Idaho USA February 2013 For Regulatory Topics only contact European Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH HQ TRE Herrenberger Strafe 140 D 71034 B blingen Germany www hp eu certificates USA Contact Product Regulation
97. Tray 1 pickup motor Fan FAN1 Power supply fan FAN2 Controller fan FAN3 Rear delivery fan M806 only FAN3B Rear delivery fan M830 only FAN4 Front delivery fan M806 only FAN4B Front delivery fan M830 only FAN5 Cartridge fan FAN6 Center delivery fan M806 only FAN7 Rear edge cooling fan FAN8 Front edge cooling fan FAN9 Condensation prevention fan FAN2001 Duplex fan Solenoid SL1 Face up solenoid M806 only SL2001 Duplex flapper solenoid SL2501 Tray 1 pickup solenoid Clutch CL2501 Tray 1 feed clutch Switch Swi Power switch Sw2 Tray 2 media length switch Sw3 Tray 2 media width switch SW4 Tray 3 media length switch SW5 Tray 3 media width switch SW6 Left door open detection switch SW7 Right door open detection switch SW8 Front door open detection switch Sw9 Output accessory detection switch M806 only Engine control system 9 Table 1 3 Electrical components continued Component type Abbreviation Component name SW9B Output accessory detection switch M830 only SW10 Interlock switch Test print switch Photointerrupter PS1 Right media width sensor PS2 Left media width sensor PS3 Center media width sensor PS4 TOP sensor PS5 Fuser shutter home position sensor PS8 Tray 2 feed sensor C PS9 Loop sensor PS502 Fuser delivery sensor PS503 Fuser depressurization sensor PS1401 Tray 2 feed sensor B PS1402 Tray 2 feed sensor A PS1403 Tray 3 feed sen
98. Use to exercise individual parts independently to isolate noise leaking or other issues To start the test select one of the components The test will run the number of times specified by the Repeat option You might be prompted to remove parts from the product during the test Press the Stop button to abort the test 324 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 54 Troubleshooting menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Print Stop Test Specify the length of time in milliseconds 0 60 000 Continuous Scan 2 sided M830 only Scanner Tests Sensors M830 only Retrieve Diagnostic Create device data Create files that Data file contain information about the product Create zipped debug that can help identify information file the cause of problems Include crash dump files Clean up debug information Send to E mail Export to USB Generate Debug Start Data Device Maintenance menu Backup Restore menu To display At the product control panel select the Device Maintenance menu and then select the Backup Restore menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 55 Backup Restore menu First level Second level Third level Values Description Backup Data Enable Scheduled Backup Time Enter a time Backups Days Between Backups Enter the number of days Backup Now Export Last Backup Re
99. Verifying Please Wait displays on the control panel The status bar will move for a moment and then lock up Typically if the user waits a few minutes the error will clear and the job will print In rare cases the message will lock up permanently and force the user to power cycle the product The event log might show the following errors as a result of power cycling the product during lockup e 48 05 05 e 98 03 11 Recommended action Review online support document c03249783 HP Color LaserJet CM4540MFP and LaserJet M4555MFP Series Printer Message Verifying Please Wait Locks Up Printer When Retrieving Print Job from Device Memory Waiting for Tray X to lift Description The specified tray is in the process of lifting paper to the top of the tray so it can feed correctly Recommended action No action necessary Windows Login Required to Use this Feature Description Windows login is required for the selected feature or job Recommended action Enter the necessary Windows login information Event log messages See the control panel message and event log entries section of the product reoubleshooting manual for eventl log entry descriptions and solutions 494 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Print or view an event log Ey NOTE The event log in using the Administration menu shows only a subset of events For a complete event log use the Service menu Print or view the event log from the Administration menu 1 3
100. ad te Bit ita tb let eb Aou ere 427 66 00 oy ee eebe cfe Em EN 428 66 12 40 Loa e ede a Ee aan ed see 428 Sm IM 429 SICH ER MEER 429 66 60 10 i eid iet Ie diese reine ae Pre fene Re ee e ei 430 06 002 TTT 430 00 6024 4 ctn ebe eege 431 66 60 28 si ai Aa ds d iade a el Sata nere ed Re S 431 66 60 31 5i tbt peste uiui die eer elad 431 E 433 TE 434 SR CET 435 E t arabi Mit ies iscritti ol 435 66 60 50 1o aud e RH URL Da LAU Ee EL AER 436 H NET 436 00 80 02 ed Ee Ee Ae Eege 436 66 80 03 dd oic UE eL aie eI EE Le RE ee 437 66 80 21 HEET 438 00 80 22 ee iD isst t eser due eas 438 66 80 23 x ad s itf el aeta sere EE 438 66 80 33 inae Cette Dt tia edi diei eter da 438 00 80 35 ios anon ee regele 438 EE 439 66 80 38 gien e Me pte E 440 00 80 46 525 sn a htetuo Stans eat heed ty Malina e ies eeu 440 66 80 51 RE 441 66 80 55 i iiia e dic bU eoa E EEA 441 SLM EE ee ee Ed 441 66 80 54 is id ect E edes e e irse ean re LL ed 442 66 80 Eege ett ecoute eebe tee 442 00 80 59 mnsa a s tees eebe 442 66 80 60 RELER eis de edid c ct le otc andre E eese dd ae 442 XV xvi RN WEE 442 GR 442 Spic 443 00 80 64 dide tassel tata thy cates setae eegen Ee 443 GE 443 66 80 70 nsi eb pte stis qt etat eti een ies 443 60 807 d Eo Dee c scene ree RE rde 443 GE 443 06 80 73 ci ob be dte en Eenheete eiat 444 GITE E LLL 444 GE 444 66 80 70 Luna pi oon a teli e tenet 444 60 90 10 e
101. alerts you that the maintnenace kit is very low but it continues printing ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 305 Table 2 50 Manage Supplies menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fuser Kit Low Threshold Settings Values 1 100 Default 10 Description Set the estimated percentage at which the product notifies you when the fuser is low Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue Continue Configure how the product responds when the fuser is reaching the end of its estimated life Stop The product stops until you replace the fuser Prompt to continue The product stops and prompts you to replace the fuser You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing Continue The product alerts you that the fuser is very low but it continues printing Store Usage Data On supplies Not on supplies The Store Usage Data menu provides a way to suppress the toner cartridges from storing most of the information gathered exclusively for the purpose of understanding the usage of the product Select the On supplies setting to store the data on the toner cartridge memory chip Select the Not on supplies setting to suppress the information from being stored on the memory chip 306 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 50 Manage Supplies menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Supply Messag
102. an HCI cassette lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter through the DC controller when the HCI cassette media stack surface 2 sensor does not detect the paper surface within a specified period from when the HCI cassette lifter motor starts rotating HCI cassette media size detection and cassette presence detection The HCI controller detects whether the paper loaded in the cassette is A4 R or Letter R size and notifies to the formatter through the DC controller The HCI controller also detects the presence of the cassette by monitoring the cassette open detection switch and notifies to the formatter through the DC controller These detections are not executed during active off condition Additional HCI pickup and feed functions ENWW Table 1 24 Additional HCI Pickup and feed functions Function Supported feature Right cassette lift up control Yes Left cassette lift up control Yes Right cassette presence detection Yes Left cassette presence detection Yes Right cassette media size detection Yes Left cassette media size detection Yes Right cassette media surface detection Yes Left cassette media surface detection Yes Right cassette media presence detection Yes Left cassette media presence detection Yes Right cassette media level detection Yes Left cassette media level detection Yes Right cassette multiple feed prevention mechanism Yes Left cassette multiple feed prevention mechanism Yes Automati
103. and is aligned correctly with the sensor body c If the error persists replace the stapler subassembly Eyf NOTE The stapler subassembly includes the stapler unit and base Description Stacker Staple Slide motor error Finisher upper stapler shift motor failure M105 This error occurs when the stapler does not leave the stapler shift home position sensor P1110 after the stapler shift motor M105 has driven for 5 seconds This error also occurs when the stapler fails to return to the stapler shift home position sensor P1110 after the stapler shift motor M105 has driven for 20 seconds Recommended action Control panel diagnostics M105 Staple Motor Staple Shift Motor and P1110 Stapler Home Sensor Stapler Home Position Sensor 1 Test the upper stapler shift motor M105 using the finisher component test from the product control panel e Ifthe stapler unit moves correctly proceed to the next step e Ifthe stapler unit does not move correctly or moves erratically perform the following steps 440 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 66 80 51 66 80 55 66 80 56 ENWW 2 Description b C Check the flat flexible cable FFC for damage dents folds and or tears Replace the FFC if necessary Check the FFC connectors and cable mounting areas If the error persists replace the stapler assembly Test the stapler shift home position sensor PI110 using the finisher component test from the product
104. as needed 13 B9 Cz Description Fuser Wrap Jam This jam occurs when the media disappears from the fuser output sensor PS502 before a designated amount of time after the media reached the fuser output sensor PS502 It is determined that the media is being wrapped around the fuser roller Z Fuser mode ENWW 13 B9 C1 event code Fuser wrap jam when Auto Sense Normal 13 B9 C2 event code Fuser wrap jam when Normal Tools for troubleshooting 365 e 13 B9 C3 event code Fuser wrap jam when Light 1 or Light 2 see event log secondary jam information for specific code e 13 B9 C4 event code Fuser wrap jam when Heavy 1 e 13 B9 C5 event code Fuser wrap jam when Heavy 2 e 13 B9 C6 event code Fuser wrap jam when Heavy media 3 e 13 B9 C7 event code Fuser wrap jam when Glossy media 1 e 13 B9 C8 event code Fuser wrap jam when Glossy media 2 e 13 B9 C9 event code Fuser wrap jam when Glossy media 3 e 13 B9 CB event code Fuser wrap jam when Transparency e 13 B9 CC event code Fuser wrap jam when Label e 13 B9 CD event code Fuser wrap jam when Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 see event log secondary jam information for specific code Recommended action 1 Open the left door 2 Remove the fuser and then remove any paper wrapped around the fuser roller ACAUTION The fuser might be HOT 3 Reinstall the fuser and then close the door 4 Print a cleaning page to make sure
105. attempt to clear the jam If media is stopped under the toner cartridge but has moved most of the way through registration try another toner cartridge If necessary replace the toner cartridge Make sure that the transfer roller is seated correctly and not worn or deformed Replace the roller if necessary Check the registration assembly for proper operation Replace the registration assembly as needed Open the following menus 362 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 B4 FF 13 B9 Az ENWW e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 7 Test the TOP sensor PS4 and width sensors PS1 PS2 PS3 using the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the registration sensor assembly Description Residual Media jam Loop sensor PS9 This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Loop sensor PS9 at power on Recommended action 1 Open the front door and clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Ifthe issue persists as another specific Paper Jam troubleshoot the specified Jam location 4 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 5 Test the Loop sensor PS9 using the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the assembly containing Loop Sensor PS9 Description Fuser delivery stay
106. bebo 469 Data received To print last page press ORT 469 Different paper sizes in job ssssssssA 470 EIO X diskinitializing iioi rine rite E 470 EIO X disk not functional sssssss 470 EIO X disk spinning up 470 Event lod is Emp ieren esp eter beads 470 Expected drive MISSING inn aA 471 External device initializing 471 Fax is disabled ignoring call 471 FIM Load Error Send full FIM on X pont 471 Flatbed cover open or Close Flatbed cover 471 Fuser Kit IOW 2 ot eet renes tentiae ea tie e A 472 Fuser Kit very low To continue touch ORT 472 Gateways failed EEN 472 Gateways OK nid p etate bb a become Ee tie Podio 472 Genuine HP cartridge installed sseeeeees 472 Genuine HP supply installed esses AT3 HP Secure hard drive disabled e eeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 473 Incompatible Supply ccccecccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeneeneeeas 473 Incompatible supplies cceeecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeneeneeees 473 iiir m NS 473 Install fuser unt 2 cece cee cece meei oa eaaa a ea aE E a 474 Install SUPPLY riii iat ie aeiae ioter aa a i 474 Internal disk device failure To clear touch OK ssuuss 474 Internal disk file operation failed sssssssssssssse 4
107. bin 1 shift motor M107 and stops the stacker operation when the output bin 1 switch MSW103 turns on Figure 1 74 Items detected by the area sensors Rack Output bin 1 paper sensor P1111 a ZZ Output bin 2 paper sensor PI112 Rack w Output bin 1 switch MSW103 M107 Output bin 1 shift area sensor PCA M108 79 bin 2 shift area sensor PCA Light shielding plate Ey NOTE P1111 is located on output bin 1 P1112 is located on output bin 2 ENWW Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 103 Figure 1 75 Output bin components Paper surface sensor P141 locate inside the accessory Paper surface sensor flag JS VS N Edge My Output bin 2 paper surface Output bin 1 sensor P148 Paper surface sensor flag Edge Output bin 2 Table 1 33 Output bin 1 shift area sensor PCA Detected items Area sensor 3 PS983 Area sensor 2 PS982 Area sensor 1 PS981 Output bin 1 upper limit On Off Off Stack count 650 sheet limit exceeded On On On Stack count 1 300 sheet limit exceeded Off On On Output bin 1 lower limit Off Off On Table 1 34 Output bin 2 shift area sensor PCA Detected items Area sensor 3 PS986 Area sensor 2 PS985 Area sensor 1 PS984 Output bin 2 upper limit On Off On Stack count 650 sheet limit exceeded On On On Stack count 1 300 sheet limit exceeded Of
108. can accommodate at one time The product temporarily saves all the scanned images After you have scanned all the pages for the job touch Finish to finish the job Cropping Options Do not crop Crop to content Use this menu item to automatically crop the scan for digital sending Use the Crop to content option to scan the smallest possible area that has detectable content Erase Edges Blank Page Suppression Use Inches Back side erase Front side erase Disabled Enabled Use this menu item to remove blemishes such as dark borders or staple marks by cleaning the specified edges of the scanned image In each of the text boxes enter the measurements in millimeters or inches for how much of the top edge bottom edge left edge and right edge to clean Use to prevent blank pages in the original document from being included in the output document 282 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 45 Scan Digital Send Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Digital Send Service Allow Usage of Enabled Configure how the Setup Digital Sending product interacts Software DSS Disabled with the HP Digital Server Sending Software DSS server HP DSS handles digital sending tasks such as faxing emailing and sending scanned documents to a network folder or USB storage device Use the Allow Usage of Digit
109. connector J223 on the DC controller PCA Solve problems ENWW 3 If the error persists replace the environment sensor assembly 4 Ifthe error persists replace the right door assembly 54 06 21 EVENT LOG ONLY Description Primary laser scanner beam detect abnormality Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Ifthe product has had parts removed or replaced check the connectors J209 and J234 on the DC controller PCA 3 Check the intermediate connection J23 4 Ifthe error persists replace the laser scanner assembly 5 If the error persists replace the upper cable guide assembly 55 XX YZ 56 XX YZ Error Messages 55 00 01 55 00 03 55 00 04 DC controller error Description DC controller PCA error occurred e 55 00 01 event code DC controller memory error e 55 00 03 event code DC controller no engine response e 55 00 04 event code DC controller communications timeout Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Ifthe error persists replace the DC controller PCA 55 01 06 55 02 06 DC controller error Description DC controller PCA error occurred The engine is not communicating with the formatter The communication link between the formatter and the DC controller was lost This can occur due to a timing error or intermittent connection loss between the formatter and the DC controller e 55 01 06 event code ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 417 NVRAM memory data er
110. continues until SW1 is pressed and released again a The punch motor initializes b The punch side registration motor initializes c The punch moves to the inside position d The punch operation begins e The punch moves to its initial position f The sequence starts again with step c e Second press of SW1 The aging sequence above stops Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW602 to continuously repeat the aging sequence steps a and b above 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW switches to the OFF setting o TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the punch is in the home front position before continuing 6 Ifthe aging sequence fails the test replace the defective assembly ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 199 Punch side registration test 1 Do one of the following e l fthis is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e l fyouare continuing from a previous punch controller PCA test go to step 2 2 On the punch controller PCA set DIPSW to the following settings e Switch 1 OFF e Switch 2 ON e Switch 3 and switch 4 OFF 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the punch controller PCA locate LED601 and LED602 and then observe the following e Ready state o LED601 off o LED602 flashing e Press SW603 to move the punch to
111. detection Yes Frequency detection circuit failure detection Yes Fuser depressurization mechanism failure detection Yes Fuser type discrepancy detection N A Fuser type identification detection No Fuser presence detection Yes Fuser life detection Yes Relay failure detection No Pressure roller cleaning Yes ENWW Engine control system 15 Low voltage power supply The low voltage power supply LVPS converts AC power into the DC voltage that the product components use The following figure shows the system block diagram of the low voltage power supply Figure 1 6 Low voltage power supply C2 AC input Low voltage power supply lV M Se d Sat l Fuse FU101 Rectifying circui Protection circuit 24V generation circuit 24VB Zerocross ZEROX circuit DC controller Power switch SWw1 Rectifying circuit generation circuit 5V generation circuit Protection circuit 24VA 24VA 1 Interlock switch RMT_PFC ED 3 3VA 5VA 1 3 3VC 1 WN L The product uses three DC voltages 24V 5V and 3 3V The voltages are subdivided as follows Main DC voltage Sub voltage 24V 24VA 24VB Behavior Supplied constantly Stopped during active off or inactive off Interrupted when the front door is open SW10 Interrupted when the left door is open SW10 16 Chapter 1 Theory of operation
112. door on the right side of the high capacity tray cabinet ENWW Clear jams 509 9 Remove any jammed paper 10 Close the jam access door on the right side of the high capacity tray cabinet NOTE If after clearing the jam the product control panel displays a message that there is no paper in the tray or the tray is over filled remove the tray and look behind it for any remaining paper 510 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the duplexer 1 Pull the release handle on the top of the finishing accessory and then slide the finisher away from the product until it stops 2 Open the left door 3 Lift the jam access cover on the duplexer ENWW Clear jams 511 4 Gently remove any jammed or damaged paper from this area by pulling it out of the product 5 Press down on the latch to release the duplexer 6 Pullthe duplexer straight out of the product until it stops 512 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 7 Lift the first jam access cover and then remove any jammed paper 8 Liftthe second jam access cover and then remove any jammed paper 9 Openthe front door ENWW Clear jams 513 10 Remove any jammed paper from the opening below the toner cartridge area 11 Close the front door 12 Slide the duplexer into the slot until it locks into place 514 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 Close the left door 14 Attach the finishing accessory ENWW Clear jams 5
113. dust band debris Tools for troubleshooting 437 66 80 21 66 80 22 66 80 23 66 80 33 66 80 35 c Make sure that connector J5 and J6 on the stacker controller PCA is fully seated and not damaged Check the wiring at the sensor d If the error persists replace the stapler assembly E NOTE The stapler assembly includes the stapler shift home position sensor P1110 stapler unit shift position plate assembly and the flat flexible cable FFC Description Lift up malfunction Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description Lift down malfunction Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description Lift sensor malfunction Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description Output roller malfunction Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description Self priming malfunction Recommended action Turn the product off and then on 438 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 66 80 36 Description Stapler Stacker motor error Finisher upper stapler motor failure M41 Error occurs either when the stapler does not leave stapler home position PI120 after staple motor M41 is driven for 0 4 seconds or when it does not return to stapler home position after the staple motor has detected a motor lock condition and the motor is driven backwards for 0 4 seconds attempting to reach home position Eyf NOTE PI120 and M41 are located
114. e 5 amp Its Sir re i p S 2 t D e B8 2 ge o ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 239 Figure 2 45 General circuit diagram finishing accessories 2 of 6 a l o m i igo o R 5 E A 18 El H S 8 E 8 ge 9 e 9 E E E E RC E a a P 2 2 5 5 5 GG S 2 s e P lt SER E EB S E 5 L a S 5 H H E TORR RA E 8 e emos i
115. e EIN E EDS ae T F F JAE e VOd 10sueg sedeq k ER ite ie un ote Ain e zer 9 S Ss CCA CEA CE 1 1 I 1 im 7 WOd 4e o3u02 1exoeis OL BER ERI ERE E T EPEE EPP PE ia ale or m geen Dk a FI 42 j a E aa TE j egen dB SG vii SCC Ge 3t aes pL HRHN S wee EET oer EEE ss jae 2 SIENOS BS Ee Sa E Hase md Teer Bud Wid ENWW 242 Chapter2 Solve problems D a Figure 2 48 General circuit diagram finishing accessories 5 of 6 JejoJjuo YOUN OL TEKTI iL 310ans raans Vv Vv TINI avosr HMvO8r vvogr VOd Jan uouiuio e ZN3S 39d3 71IVL QN9 S ONS NFHOd GXI HOd QXu Hod 1no Hod QN9 S d90 ASLSTW Gd334 DROE OFW G334 SCHO SO VW v W aa33 A ONS zer our ger VOd 1el o3uo2 Jexoels HMer ver Tools for troubleshooting 243 ENWW Figure 2 49 General circuit diagram finishing accessories 6 of 6 a o m M2 6 54321 H 5 zem N3S038 J21A NSSWVWE XEISTFIH mem Ga eem Kaz Ke 3 II Te ToT Te Te b bb me
116. e First press of SW1 The following aging sequence begins and continues until SW1 is pressed and released again a The paper folding motor rotates b The booklet feeder motor rotates c The jogger plate moves d The booklet alignment plate moves to the A3 P alignment position e The booklet alignment plate moves to the A4 P alignment position f The paper position plate moves to the LDR P staple position g The paper position plate moves to the LDR P folding position h The paper position plate moves to the LTR P staple position i The paper position plate moves to the LTR P folding position j The guide plate moves to the up position and then to the down position k The booklet feeder motor stops All of the saddle assembly solenoids activate and then deactivate e Second press of SW1 The aging sequence above stops E NOTE Press and hold down SW1 to continuously repeat and then stop the aging sequence above Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW switches to the OFF setting TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the aging sequence is stopped before continuing If the aging sequence fails the test replace the defective assembly Tools for troubleshooting 195 Saddle booklet alignment plate test 1 Do one of the following e l fthis is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all pap
117. e e e e e e i x M m M ia 74 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1 42 Hole punch feed and delivery electrical components Staple stacker with puncher ass y gt LED PCA Photosensor PCA SL101 SL103 Lm m m m 9 Table 1 29 Feed and delivery electrical components Abbreviation Component name M1 Switchback motor M2 Registration motor M41 Staple motor ENWW Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 75 Table 1 29 Feed and delivery electrical components continued Abbreviation Component name M63 Hole punch feed motor Stapler stacker with puncher assembly only M101 Inlet motor M102 Stack ejection motor M103 Front alignment plate motor M104 Rear alignment plate motor M105 Stapler mobility motor M107 Output bin 1 shift motor M108 Output bin 2 shift motor M109 Trailing edge assist motor M113 Saddle inlet motor SL101 Switchback inlet flapper solenoid Solenoids for the switchback assembly SL102 Switchback alienation solenoid Solenoids for the switchback assembly SL101 Inlet roller alienation solenoid Solenoids for the
118. e edat oe te dean eee ne 503 Clear jams in Tray 2 and Tray 3 506 Clear jams in Tray 4 and Tray D 507 Clear jams in the duplexer si cu iiem e E ete Er d de He dig te M deg 511 Clear jams in the left door fuser area sse eene 516 Clear jams in the output bin area M806 only sesssssssesssessssssrrrssssrrrsssrtrrrsssrrrnssserenrnsne 519 Clear jams in the stapler stacker accessory sssssse eee 521 Clear jams in the stapler stacker n 521 Glear conhnection jams iori a ioci ee Paste 522 Clear Staple IESELEN een e 523 Clear jams in the stapler stacker with hole punch accessory sssssssssssss 527 Clear top left door jams in the stapler stacker with hole punch accessory 527 Clear a connection jam in the stapler stacker with hole punch accessory 530 Clear Staple 1 Jarms EE 534 Clear jams in the booklet maker accessory ssssssss emen 538 Clear jams in the front left door of the booklet maker sseeeeeeeen 538 Cleaf connection JalriS TEE 541 Clear Staple 1 EE 542 Clear staple jams in the booklet maker sssssesseeeesseesrrrssseeerrrssssrrrrrrsssrrennns 544 ENWW xxi Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed sssssssssssssseeeeeeeenne nne 549 The product does not pick up paper 549 The product picks up multiple sheets of paper 549 The document feeder jams skews or picks up multiple sheets of paper M830 549 Prevent paper jams
119. ee E I ia 128 Menu map e 130 miizereemie nceeieipmee m Nees 131 G rrent settings PAGES RR 138 ENWW vii Troubleshooting PIOCESS iter ete e e Gurt tae RT Ee bet e BT ee Core eae 139 Determine the problem source nne nennen nennen nennen 139 Troubleshooting flowchart sssssssssseeen nene meer 139 Power subaylara onen tci a ite tiunt deser itte 140 Power On checks oiie etai a eaaa nent et aaar snis 140 Power on troubleshooting overview ssee 140 Control panel checks rtt ruin ei nade ted eerie Hg ERR A DE ERR CERRAR Ren 141 Control panel diagnostic flowcharts sss 144 Touchscreen black white or dim no image 145 Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond cene LO e added edet ll adhd De ae Ease dde 146 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone ueessesssss 147 No control panel sound 148 Home button is unresponsive sssssse 149 Hardware integration pocket HIP is not functioning control panel furictional cei reissett ea a a tahun Geena 150 Scanning SUBSYSTEM RE 150 Tools for troubleshootlng EEN 151 Individual component diagnostics sssseseeeeee emnes 151 LED diagnoses rtt ox e Eb e ee Rep ote eee Do eA Te ades 151 Understand lights on the formatter
120. error To continue turn off then on ENWW Description The fuser has experienced an error W fuser error code X fuser mode Y previous printer sleep state and Z next printer sleep state Fuser modes and sleep states are listed after all 50 WX YZ troubleshooting The specific issues are 50 1 Low fuser temperature 50 2 Fuser warm up service 50 3 High fuser temperature 50 4 Drive circuit fault 50 6 Open fuser circuit heating element failure 50 7 Depressurizing mechanism malfunction 50 8 Low fuser temperature 2 50 9 High fuser temperature 2 50 A Low fuser temperature 3 50 B High fuser temperature 3 Recommended action 1 2 6 50 1 Turn the product off and then on If the error returns turn the product off and ensure the printer is directly plugged into a wall outlet remove any surge protector or UPS If the error persists try a different wall outlet if possible one that is preferably on a dedicated or different circuit Make sure that the correct fuser model is installed in the product and that it meets the appropriate voltage requirements Make sure the fuser is seated properly If the error persists continue troubleshooting based on the individual error listed below Low fuser temperature failure Tools for troubleshooting 411 1 Remove and reinstall the fuser Make sure that it is seated correctly 2 Make sure that there is no residual paper in the fuser 3 Check
121. error occurred No video sync 4 Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again Resend the print job Swap out or reseat the toner cartridge to test it Check the toner cartridge before replacing any other parts HP original connectors etc Reseat the connections to the laser scanner and the DC controller If the error persists replace the laser scanner Replace the upper cable guide assembly o 4 em RF WO H Replace the DC controller 41 05 YZ Unexpected type in tray X Description The product detected a different paper type than expected Tray X is loaded with a media type transparencies envelopes etc that is different than what they tray is configured to use Y Type Z Tray e Y 0 expected type Unknown e Y 1 expected type Normal media e Y 3 expected type LBP OHT e Y 6 expected type Non assured OHT e Y expected type Heavy media e Y 8 expected type Light media e Y 9 expected type Rough media e Y C expected type Heavy media 3 e Y D expected type Heavy media 2 e Z 1 detected type Normal media e Z 3 detected type LBP OHT e Z 6 detected type Non assured OHT e Z 7 detected type Heavy media e Z 8 detected type Light media 404 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW e Z 9 detected type Rough media e Z B detected type Heavy glossy media glossy media 2 e Z C detected type Heavy media 3x e Z D detected type Heavy media 2 Recommended action 1 Load
122. event log looking for related jams occurring either in the Switch Back assembly or the Hole Punch assembly These errors might be the result of media failing to reach the output device in the correct amount of time Troubleshoot all Printer Engine Jams first Make sure that media is in good condition and not wrinkled or damaged Make sure that the correct paper size in the trays is selected according the paper size being fed Check the finisher entry point guides for damage Verify where the leading edge of the media is when the Jam occurs has media made it through Switch Back registration Test M2 registration motor Verify that the finisher rollers are turning before the media leaves the Printer If the rollers are not turning test motor M110 and M101 by using the finisher component test from the control activate during the test check the connectors for motor M110 Saddle inlet Motor M101 inlet motor Make sure that connector J17 is fully seated on the stacker controller PCA If the error persists replace motor M110 or M101 or the corresponding assembly Replace the stacker controller PCA If media is found in the finisher but has not reached sensor P1103 perform the following steps e Check the upper and lower guides and rollers in the paper path for damage e X Make sure that the media diverter gate is not blocking the paper path If media is found in the finisher covering sensor P1103 the sensor is not detecting the media
123. first and second paper exits the first delivery roller the stack delivery roller and return roller deliver the first and second sheet to the processing output bin Figure 1 53 Paper path 4 of 5 Stack ejection roller J 1st delivery roller 5 The first and second paper delivered to the processing output bin are aligned and then delivered to the output bin Figure 1 54 Paper path 5 of 5 Stack ejection roller Stack trailing edge assist guide Swing height control The swing height control maintains the swing assembly at the appropriate position to reduce scratches on the image caused by rubbing the stacked paper on the processing tray with the delivered paper Operational sequence of the swing height control is as follows 90 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW 1 The printed paper is fed to the processing tray 2 The paper is stacked on the processing tray and the swing height sensor flag turns off the swing height sensor 3 The stacker controller drives the swing motor to move up the swing assembly until the swing height sensor is turned on Figure 1 55 Stapler stacker assembly Swing ass y Swing height sensor flag Processing tray Paper is stacked on the processing tray and swing The swing motor drives and mo
124. in the tray matches the specified setting for the tray Unsupported drive installed To continue touch OK Description A non supported hard drive has been installed The drive is unusable by this product 490 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1 Turn the product off 2 Remove the hard drive 3 Turn the product on Unsupported supply in use OR Unsupported supply installed To continue touch OK Description A non supported supply has been installed or the toner cartridge is for a different product Recommended action Install the correct supplies for this product See the parts chapter in the service manual for supply part numbers Unsupported tray configuration Description The product has too many optional trays installed Recommended action Turn the product off remove the unsupported trays and then turn the product on Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory Description A non supported USB accessory has been connected Recommended action Turn the product off remove the USB accessory and then turn the product on Upgrade Error Description There was a SCB upgrade error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Resend the upgrade 3 Ifthe error persists replace the SCB Upper left bin full Description The booklet bin is full ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 491 Recommended action Remove media from the bin to continue USB accessory not functi
125. increase or decrease the number of minutes 258 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 43 General Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Print Quality Image Registration Adjust Tray X Print Test Page Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and from left to right You can also align the image on the front with the image printed on the back Use the Adjust Tray X menu to adjust the registration settings for each tray Before adjusting these values print a registration test page It provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions so you can determine which adjustments are necessary You can adjust values for X1 Shift X2 Shift Y1 Shift and Y2 Shift Use the Print Test Page option to print a page to test the image registration It provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions so you can determine which adjustments are necessary ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 259 Table 2 43 General Settings menu continued First level Second level Adjust Paper Types Third level Fourth level X1 Shift Y1 Shift X2 Shift Y2 Shift Select from a list of Print Mode paper types that the product supports The available options are the same for each paper type Values 5 00 mm to 5 00 mm Select from a list of print modes Description The direction that is perpendicular to the
126. is ejected to the processing output bin and the stack processed in the processing output bin is ejected to the output bin Simultaneous stack ejection is described below for two A4 copies between stacks when the equipment is set to sort 88 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW 1 When the first paper reaches the switchback point it is sent to the buffer unit and the buffer guide holds the trailing edge of the paper Figure 1 50 Paper path 1 of 5 Buffer roller Buffer guide Inlet roller 2 When the first sheet arrives at the buffer the second sheet is sent from the product Figure 1 51 Paper path 2 of 5 Buffer roller Inlet roller 3 The first delivery roller descends and works with the stack delivery roller to deliver the first and second sheet to the processing output bin At the same time the return roller and stack trailing edge assist send the stack in the processing output bin to the output bin Figure 1 52 Paper path 3 of 5 Stack ejection roller Buffer roller 1st delivery roller Buffer guide Inlet roller Switch back point trailing edge Return roller assist guide ENWW Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 89 When the stack in the processing output bin is sent to the delivery output bin and the trailing edge of the
127. it is damaged replace the fuser connector assembly or fuser 4 Ifthe issue persists replace the low voltage power supply 5 Perform a component test on the fuser motor Does the motor rotate e l fno replace the fuser e If yes check the cable guide assembly for damage Replace the cable guide assembly low voltage power supply and then the DC controller if necessary 50 4 Drive circuit fault 1 Check the product power source Make sure that the power source meets product requirements 412 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW Ey NOTE If the power source does not meet the power frequency requirements of 43 to 67Hz the fuser temperature control does not work correctly and causes this error 2 If possible connect the product to an outlet where another product is functioning to verify the power connection 3 Check and reconnect the connectors J206 and J219 on the DC controller PCA 4 Ifthe error persists replace the cable guide assembly LVPS and then the DC controller if necessary 50 6 Open fuser circuit heating element failure 1 Remove and reinstall the fuser Make sure that it is seated correctly 2 Check the connector J514 between the fuser and the printer If it is damaged replace the fuser connector assembly or fuser 3 Ifthe product has been serviced previously check the connectors J219 and J206 on the DC controller PCA and the connectors J90 and J91 on the power line between the low vol
128. jam occurs when residual media is detected at the HCI exit sensor PS3301 at power on Recommended action 1 2 Clear the jam in the indicated area Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam Make sure that the Tray 4 and Tray 5 pickup feed and separation rollers are installed correctly and show no damage or wear Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers as needed Check the connectors at the sensor feed motor and the HCI controller PCA 356 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 A8 D2 ENWW 6 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 7 Runa Paper Path Test from both Tray 4 and Tray 5 to validate the issue 8 Test PS3301 using the Tray Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensors are functioning correctly 9 Touch Component Test 10 Run the Tray 4 and Tray 5 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the pickup drive assembly 11 Run the intermediate feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the Merge Drive Assembly and or Merge Assembly Description Jam in Upper Right Door This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 2C feed sensor PS8 in the designated amount of time after the Tray 2B feed sensor PS1401 sensed the leading edge of the paper when printing from Tray 2 Recommended action 1 Clearthe jam in the i
129. laser products manufactured since August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States The device is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation A WARNING Using controls making adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation Canada Industry Canada ICES 003 Compliance Statement CAN ICES 3 A NMB 3 A VCCI statement Japan COREL DIAZMARRNRECT oe SES Pali CHAT SC EENS CECR cO SI I4 RH IGE CECR EREN CEMHVET VCCI A Power cord instructions Make sure your power source is adequate for the product voltage rating The voltage rating is on the product label The product uses either 100 127 Vac or 220 240 Vac and 50 60 Hz Connect the power cord between the product and a grounded AC outlet A CAUTION To prevent damage to the product use only the power cord that is provided with the product Power cord statement Japan SITT Aint BIRI FEAIELY FSU HR EE kd gl ESO ENEE ECHT ENWW Safety statements 609 EMC statement China WAAR in FEWER WA Pd n REACT FER
130. maximum storage time limit for stored Quick Copy and Proof and Hold jobs If a stored job is not printed during this period it is deleted Configure global settings for jobs that are stored in the product memory The Quick Copy Job Storage Limit feature specifies the number of Quick Copy and Proof and Hold jobs that can be stored on the product The maximum allowed value is 100 Default Folder Name Type the name for the stored jobs folder that is accessible to all users Enable Retrieve from USB 264 Chapter 2 Solve problems Enabled Disabled Enables the product to open a file from a USB drive ENWW Table 2 43 General Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Hold Off Print Job Enabled Enable this feature if you want to prevent Disabled print jobs from starting while a user is initiating a copy job from the control panel Held print jobs start printing after the copy job is finished provided that no other copy job is in the print queue Restore Factory Address Book M830 Use to restore all Settings only product settings to their factory defaults Copy M830 only Digital Send M830 only E mail M830 only Fax M830 only General M830 only Print M830 only Security M830 only Cancel M806 Reset M806 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 265 Copy Settings menu M830 only To display At the product c
131. move to align each sheet of paper when it enters the processing tray This error occurs when the aligning plate either does not leave or when it does not return to the aligning plate front home position sensor Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Make sure that there is no paper stuck in the jogger assembly 3 Check connections J4 on the stacker controller PCA and intermediate connector J1032 to the motor M103 4 Runthe test on alignment motors 5 If the error persists replace the required assembly 6 Ifthe error persists replace the stacker controller PCA Description Stacker Align Motor Error Rear M104 In order to neatly align the paper stack for either stapling or offsetting to take place the front and rear aligning plats move to align each sheet of paper when it enters the processing tray This error occurs when the aligning plate either does not leave or when it does not return to the aligning plate front home position sensor Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Make sure that there is no paper stuck in the jogger assembly 3 Check connections J4 on the stacker controller PCA and intermediate connector J1032 to the motor M104 4 Run the test on alignment motors 5 If the error persists replace the required assembly 6 Ifthe error persists replace the stacker controller PCA Description BIN1 Tray Motor Error Safety switch on Finisher error 1st tr
132. necessary 99 02 09 Description Firmware upgrade cancelled by user Recommended action No action necessary 99 09 60 Unsupported disk Description This is a Preboot menu error The hard disk currently installed is not recognized or supported by the product Recommended action Install the correct hard disk for this product 99 09 61 Unsupported disk Description This is a Preboot menu error The installed disk is installed in a product configured for an encrypted hard disk Recommended action Access the Preboot menu and then select Lock Disk to lock the disk 99 09 62 Unknown disk Description This error indicates that there is an encryption mismatch between the HDD and the formatter This typically happens because an HDD was swapped into a device from another device Recommended action Install a new disk or use the Preboot menu unlock the disk If a disk is to be reused in a different product execute the Clean Disk procedure from the Preboot and then reload the firmware and lock the disk 460 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 99 09 63 Incorrect disk Description This error indicates that the expected encrypted HDD is not present This is expected behavior when installing a new HDD in a device where the previous HDD was encrypted Recommended action Follow the procedure to load firmware on a new hard disk and then lock the disk to this product 99 09 64 Disk malfunction Description A fatal hard disk failure h
133. nette ttem ent 333 10 YY 35 Incompatible supply ssssssssessseesee 333 11 XX YZ Error Messages sssssssseseeeenen mme nennen nnne nens 333 11 00 01 or 11 00 02 Internal clock error ssssssss 333 1920CYZ eg e E 334 KEE 334 ERR 334 19 00 ET 336 n sv E H 336 ke RTE 337 ER 338 13 67 rA ER 338 19 67 EE 339 e vA EE 340 lis etnies lise ee aide eines i eed aac eae 340 KEE 341 19 069 Zu acted ee rom teda tomba p ule Jew tell Prudent 342 KREE 342 EXP C 343 e CIE 343 13 90 Dz didnt en at e eoe e dede cee 344 TIAE ra ear E EE E E E 345 19 94 TEE 346 13 94 DZ n eie lena I EI er We TAS 346 KE EM 347 VSO TE S iiiter instr agitant abad nina inertia t Ee rues 347 KT x SA 348 ENWW ENWW 13 99 D 37 0 ente ct en de 348 TS ALD iae dee c de Het li de Eee e Ran Cade 348 TSIAT FE TEE 349 IN ADEL 349 T9 AZIEER niuis aad eet iret et pedet as 350 USE ODER 351 SAG E 351 13 A4 D4 ii iene lien Pei steel iei e HIE dae eval sa a laa 352 VS AA dp 353 SADIPS 353 13 AS RR italic dete iinet nid 354 AS RE 355 IS Eelere 356 13 ATEEE EE 356 E RK 357 ISAS DI EE 358 13 A8 D4 or 13 A8 D4 richie aa ai aiie 358 SH dz 359 IS EE 359 E AZ irte en ge EHE ERE Ua ce Ede ede Le e da 360 H RE 361 E dei ics tees uita cette telis estatus 362 E CT ET 363 13 BJ AZ i M
134. not damaged move freely and are correctly aligned with the sensor body and properly mounted Also check wiring and connectors for damage or loose connections 5 Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 6 Verify that the sensor connectors J2 and J3 are fully seated on the stacker controller PCA Replace sensor PI103 and PI104 7 Only if the error persists replace the stacker controller PCA 13 64 Az Description Stacker Delivery Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the top left door left bins Finisher s upper paper path exit sensor P1104 remains activated longer than expected suggesting that paper has jammed at the sensor The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms e 13 64 A1 e 13 64 42 e 13 64 43 Control panel diagnostics M101 entrance motor SL102 buffer roller solenoid and SL103 output roller solenoid P1104 is located on the front frame of the finisher above the main stapler unit 336 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 64 Dz ENWW Recommended action 1 Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be activating sensor P1104 2 Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 3 Verify that the sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body 4 Lift swing guide assembly at the paper exit area to output bins and inspec
135. not initialized To clear touch ORT 486 Rotating Motor oreari ontani sedie ee eet eode ea dee S ane dti t 486 Size mismatch in Tray X anea a these 486 Sleep mode on sssssssssssssssesseee eene eerte 486 Staple Cartridge 2 and 3 very low warning 486 Staple Cartridge X low warning seeeeeeees 487 Staple Cartridge low 2 teo detentus 487 Stapler Stacker staple jam ssssssssssse 487 SUP PES OW 487 Supply Memory Warning seem 487 The unit has corrupt data 487 Too many pages in job to staple se 488 Too many pages to make booklet nsisssssseriresseeerrrserrrrsssrrenres 488 Tray X type size sessseeeeeeeese 488 Tray X empty Type Size eesseeseseseseesseessssss 488 Tray SX gt MING histo tet eie tU qae ettet bud 489 Tray EE 489 Tray SX ONSE emm 490 Type mismatch Tray lt X gt sonci i E i 490 Unsupported drive installed To continue touch OK 490 Unsupported supply in use OR Unsupported supply installed To continue touch ORT 491 Unsupported tray configuration see 491 Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory 491 Upgrade ENO notior ro ect t iniit 491 Upper left bin full sssssssseeemr 491 USB accessory not functional
136. occurs when the aligning plate home position sensor PI5 does not turn on when the aligning plate motor M5 has driven for 500 pulses This error also occurs when the aligning plate home position sensor PI5 does not turn off when the aligning plate motor M5 has driven for 50 pulses Recommended action Observe the alignment plates during a Booklet Maker stacking operation Tools for troubleshooting 449 If the alignment plates move during the operation perform the following steps 1 2 Check sensor PI5 for damage Make sure that the sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the plate Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensors to remove dust and debris If the alignment plates or the alignment plates drive gear has been removed or replaced make sure that the plates are correctly aligned with each other on the drive gear If the alignment plates do not move during the operation perform the following steps 1 Remove motor M5 and check the gears between the motor and alignment plates for damage Replace components as necessary 2 Make sure that connector J7 on the saddle stitcher controller PCA is fully seated and not damaged 3 Check the wiring at the M5 motor 4 Ifthe error persists replace the alignment motor M5 5 Ifthe alignment plates or the alignment plates drive gear has
137. on Sets in page order option to assemble the pages in the correct order in each set of copies Select the Collate off Pages grouped option to group the same pages together For example if you are making five copies of an original document that has two pages all five first pages would be grouped together and all five second pages would be grouped together Use to scale the size of the document up or down Select one of the predefined percentages or select the Scaling field and type a percentage between 25 and 400 The Auto option automatically scales the image to fit the paper size in the tray NOTE To reduce the image select a scaling percentage that is less than 100 To enlarge the image select a scaling percentage that is greater than 100 Paper Selection Auto Include Margins Manually feed Automatic Tray 1 Type Size Tray X Type Size The product reduces the image slightly to fit the entire scanned image within the printable area on the page For the best color and image quality select the appropriate paper type from the control panel menu or from the print driver 268 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 44 Copy Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Values Description Image Adjustment Darkness Select a value using the Use to improve the slide bar or touch overall quality of the Automatic copy Adjust the Darkness
138. or 98 01 00 Corrupt data in firmware volume Description Data corrupt has occurred in the firmware volume Recommended action 1 2 3 Turn the product off and then on Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu Reload the firmware 98 00 02 Corrupt data in the solutions volume Description Data corrupt has occurred in the solutions volume 454 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Usethe Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu 3 Reload the firmware 98 00 03 Corrupt data in the configuration volume Description Data corrupt has occurred in the configuration volume Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Download the firmware again and then attempt the upgrade again 3 Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu 4 Reload the firmware 98 00 04 Corrupt data in the job data volume Description Data corrupt has occurred in the job data volume Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Rerun the file erase function 99 XX YY Error Messages 99 00 01 Upgrade not performed file is corrupt Description A remote firmware upgrade RFU was not performed This is a CRC error in the firmware image bad image Recommended action Download the RFU file and then attempt the upgrade again 99 00 02 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive ENWW Description A remote firmware upgrade RFU was not
139. paper loaded in the Tray 2 cassette by using the Tray 2 cassette media end switch and Tray 2 cassette media width switch The DC controller also detects the presence of the cassette by using the Tray 2 cassette media end Switch The DC controller notifies the formatter if the Tray 2 cassette is absent Table 1 16 Stapler stacker delivery modes Paper size Cassette media width switch Cassette media end switch Top switch Center switch Bottom switch Top switch Center switch Bottom switch A4 On On On See footnote Off Off Letter On On Off Off Off B5 On Off Off Off Off Executive Off Off Off Off Off A5 R Off On On Off Off B5 R Off Off On Off Off Letter R On Off On Off Off A4 R On Off On Off On A3 On On On On On 11X17 On On Off On On B4 On Off Off On On Legal On Off On On On 1 The top Tray 2 cassette media end switch detects the presence of the Tray 2 cassette It turns off when the Tray 2 cassette is present and turns on when the Tray 2 cassette is absent ENWW Pickup feed and delivery system 49 Tray 2 cassette lift up operation The cassette lift up operation keeps the paper stack surface at the correct pickup position if either of the following conditions occur e Product power is turned on e Tray2 cassette is installed The following list describes the sequence of the Tray 2 cassette lift up operation a The Tray 2 cassette lifter motor rotates to move the lifter ra
140. prevent interference between paper and the paper folding rollers when paper is output The guide plate moves down before paper is folded to expose the paper folding rollers ENWW Booklet maker 117 e Theinlet has three paper sensors PI18 PI19 PI20 that are each suited to specific paper sizes e The paper positioning plate has a paper positioning plate paper sensor P18 Booklet maker motors Figure 1 88 Booklet maker motors Table 1 36 Booklet maker motors Abbreviation Component name Saddle stitcher controller PCA M1 Feed motor J5 M2 Paper folding motor J23 M3 Guide motor J12 M4 Paper positioning plate motor J7 M5 Alignment motor J7 M6 Stitcher motor rear J8 M7 Stitcher motor front J8 M8 Paper pushing plate motor J23 M9 Saddle inlet motor 118 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Booklet maker paper feed and delivery The stacker unit stacks paper delivered from the product offsets stack jobs or staples and delivers paper to the outputs according to commands from the product The booklet maker unit carries aligns and stitches paper delivered from the product and then feeds the resulting stack After these operations the booklet maker unit folds the stacks of paper and delivers them to the booklet maker unit output bin Figure 1 89 Feed drive for the booklet maker Output bin 1 Output bin 2
141. product power off and then return all of the DIPSW4 switches to the OFF setting E TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the bin has stopped moving before continuing 7 Ifthe stack lower output bin fails the test replace the lower stack output bin 184 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Saddle entrance motor or punch feed roller motor test E NOTE The name of this motor depends on the type of finishing accessory being tested For the stapler stacker with hole punch SSHP this is the punch feed roller motor For the booklet maker BM this is the saddle entrance motor 1 Doone ofthe following e _ If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e lfyouare continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe main controller PCA set DIPSW4 to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 and switch 3 OFF e Switch 4 ON e Switch 5 OFF e Switch 6 ON e Switch 7 and switch 8 OFF 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following e First press of SW3 The saddle entrance motor or punch feed roller motor rotates listen for the motor to rotate e Second press of SW3 The saddle entrance motor or punch feed roller motor stops Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to ca
142. registration motor 7 Verify that the finisher rollers are turning before the media leaves the Printer 344 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 92 FF ENWW e fthe rollers are not turning test motor M110 by using the finisher component test from the control activate during the test check the connectors for motor M110 Saddle inlet Motor Make sure that connector J17 is fully seated on the stacker controller PCA If the error persists replace motor M9 or the saddle paper feeder assembly for the type finisher you are working on Only if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the stacker controller PCA If media is found in the finisher but has not reached sensor PI22 perform the following steps 1 2 Check the sensor for obstructions Verify that the sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body Make sure that the lower end of the flag is not damaged and is correctly positioned to activate the sensor Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the chassis Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris Verify that the wiring at the sensor is not damaged and that the intermediate connectors between the sensor and connector J21 on the saddle stitcher controller PCA are fully seated Replace the sensor if necessary If PI22 is determined to be the failure point replace the saddle
143. replaced check the connector J221 on the DC controller PCA and interconnect J21 4 Ifthe error persists replace the lifter drive assembly Tray 2 60 00 03 Tray 3 lifting error Description Lifter driver assembly Tray 3 failure A tray lift motor error has occurred ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 423 Recommended action 1 Onthe product control panel open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 2 Usethe Tray Bin manual sensor test to make sure that the Tray 3 paper PS1411 and PS1412 surface sensors are functioning correctly 3 If this part has been removed or replaced check the connector J221 on the DC controller PCA and interconnect J21 4 Ifthe error persists replace the lifter drive assembly Tray 3 60 00 04 Tray 4 lifting error Description Lifter driver assembly Tray 4 failure A tray lift motor error has occurred Recommended action 1 On the product control panel open the following menus e Administration e X Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 2 Use the Tray Bin manual sensor test to make sure that the Tray 4 paper PS3101 and PS3103 surface sensors are functioning correctly 3 If this part has been removed or replaced check the connector J3005 on the HCI controller PCA J906 4 Ifthe error persists replace the lifter drive assembly Tray 4 60 00 05 Tray 5 lifting error Description Lifter driver assembly Tray 5 failure A tray lift motor error ha
144. return some of the paper to the tray Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper Adjust the guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications The document feeder jams skews or picks up multiple sheets of paper M830 ENWW The original might have something on it such as staples or self adhesive notes that must be removed Check that all rollers are in place and that the roller access cover inside the document feeder is closed Make sure that the top document feeder cover is closed Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed 549 The pages might not be placed correctly Straighten the pages and adjust the paper guides to center the stack The paper guides must be touching the sides of the paper stack to work correctly Make sure that the paper stack is straight and the guides are against the paper stack The document feeder input tray or output bin might contain more than the maximum number of pages Make sure the paper stack fits below the guides in the input tray and remove pages from the output bin Verify that there are no pieces of paper staples paper clips or other debris in the paper path Clean the document feeder rollers and the separation pad Use compressed air or a clean lint free cloth moistened with warm water If misfeeds still occur replace the rollers From the Home screen on the product
145. ruler in the image Clean the indicated roller If the contaminant does not come off replace appropriate roller or assembly The secondary transfer roller Replace the secondary transfer is deformed or has roller assembly deteriorated An unknown substance has Replace the toner cartridge adhered to the primary charging roller or photosensitive drum ENWW Solve image quality problems 557 Clean the product Over time particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the product This can cause print quality problems during printing Cleaning the product eliminates or reduces these problems Clean the paper path and print cartridge areas every time that you change the toner cartridge or whenever print quality problems occur As much as possible keep the product free from dust and debris To clean the product exterior use a soft water moistened cloth Print a cleaning page Print a cleaning page to remove dust and excess toner from the fuser if you are having any of the following problems e Specks of toner are on the printed pages e Toner is smearing on the printed pages e Repeated marks occur on the printed pages Use the following procedure to print a cleaning page 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button 2 Open the following menus e Calibration Cleaning e Cleaning Page 3 Touch the Print button to print the page 4 The cleaning
146. run the component tests Some tests might require that the ITB and toner cartridges be removed The control panel display prompts you to remove some or all cartridges during certain tests 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Component Test 3 Select the component test options for the test you want to run Table 2 15 Component test details Component test Item tested Replacement part number Comments Drum Motor DCM2 RM1 9784 000CN Activates the specified motor at a specific speed for 10 seconds Drum drive assembly Fuser Motor DCM1 RM1 9788 000CN Remove the toner cartridge to perform this test Fuser drive assembly Activates the specified motor at a specific speed for 10 seconds Tray 1 feed motor M3 DC motor assembly Activates the specified motor at a specific speed for 10 seconds Tray 3 and tray 2 pick DC motor assemblies Activates the specified motor at a specific motor speed for 10 seconds Tray 2 feed motor M2 DC motor assembly Activates the specified motor at a specific speed for 10 seconds Tray 3 feed motor M3 DC motor assembly Activates the specified motor at a specific speed for 10 seconds Tray 2 intermediate feed motor DC motor assembly Activates the specified motor at a specific speed for 10 seconds 164 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW
147. sse 492 USB hubs are not fully supported Some operations may not work properly tetris tee iat Quee ete tle a al 492 ENWW USB is write protected To clear touch ORT 492 USB needs too much power nnn 492 USB needs too much power Remove USB and Then Turn Off Iano EE 492 USB not initialized essssssen eee 493 USB storage accessory removed Clearing any associated data 493 USB storage device failure To clear touch OK 493 USB storage file operation failed To clear touch OK 493 USB storage file system is full To clear touch OK 493 Used supply installed To continue touch OK OR Used supply in use Description 0 r eee e cece cece aea a aa PE aeaa a E aaa 494 Verifying Please Wait cene ah aaa 494 Waiting for Tray X font 494 Windows Login Required to Use this Feature anieeecceeeeeeeeeeee 494 Event log messages EE 494 Print or view an event log sssssssssseeene N iE nnns 495 l t evento ote EE Up e tea Eugen 495 GT E E 496 Auto navigation for clearing jams sssssssssseee nennen nennen 496 Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams sssssssssssseeseetrrtrrtrrrnnsseererrrtrnnn rnn ne n 496 Clear jams inthe front dOOF osi eem ENEE ENNER NENNEN NENNEN d 497 Clear jaris InCLray T 2 5 ettet iet Dite d se cime 500 Clear jams inthe rightsdOor nec nee ee e
148. the guide plate The guide plate is positioned in front of the folding rollers as the paper stack is being stapled allowing the bottom edge of the paper to smoothly pass by the folding rollers When the stacked paper is lowered to the folding position the guide motor M3 lowers the guide plate out of the way to allow the paper stack to be pushed into the folding rollers This error occurs when the guide home position sensor P113 does not turn on when the guide motor M3 has driven for 700 pulses This error also occurs when the guide home position sensor PI13 does not turn off when the guide motor M3 has driven for 50 pulses Recommended action Control panel diagnostics M3 guide motor 1 Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the plate Check the wiring at the sensor Check sensor P113 for damage m dm o N Check the guide gears and gear tracks on the front and rear frame for damage Replace components as necessary 6 If the error persists replace the guide motor M3 and the guide home position sensor P113 together Description Booklet Align Motor Error The alignment motor M5 located in the booklet making area of the finisher drives the two alignment plates that adjust the side edges of the stacked paper so that the sheets of paper in the stack is perfectly aligned with one another This error
149. the Tray 2C feed sensor PS8 sensed the leading edge when printing from Tray 5 e 13 B2 DD This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Registration sensor PS4 in the designated amount of time after leaving the Duplex Wait Point when duplexing ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 361 Recommended action 1 Open the front and right doors and clear the jam in the indicated area Inspect the paper path and make sure that no paper is blocking the paper path 2 Check the registration assembly for proper orientation Replace the registration assembly as needed 3 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 4 Test the TOP sensor PS4 using the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the registration sensor assembly 5 Touch Component Test 6 Runthe Tray 2 intermediate feed motor M3 drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the pickup assembly 7 Ifthe error only occurs when duplexing check the duplexer for blockage or damage and replace as needed 13 B2 FF Description Residual Media Jam in Registration Area This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Registration sensor PS4 or any of the three width sensors PS1 PS2 PS3 at power on Recommended action 1 2 Open the front door and clear the jam in the indicated area Close the door to allow the product to
150. the finisher is latched and locked to the engine by tightening the thumbscrew inside the front door 3 Ensure that the grounding frame assembly the bar with the wheel located between the engine and the finisher is in the down position with the wheel touching the floor 66 80 01 Description Y align malfunction In order to neatly align the paper stack for either stapling or offsetting to take place the front and rear aligning plates move to align each sheet when it enters the processing tray The error occurs when the aligning plate either does not leave or when it does not return to the aligning plate front home position sensor Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on Make sure that there is no paper stuck in the jogger assembly Check connections J4 on the stacker controller PCA and intermediate connector J1032 2 3 4 Runthe test on alignment motors 5 If the error persists replace the required assembly 6 If the error persists replace the stacker controller PCA 66 80 02 Description Jogger malfunction 436 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 66 80 03 ENWW In order to neatly align the paper stack for either stapling or offsetting to take place the front and rear aligning plates move to align each sheet when it enters the processing tray The error occurs when the aligning plate either does not leave or when it does not return to the aligning plate front home position sensor Recommended action
151. the tray with the size and type of paper indicated or use another tray if available 2 If this message displays and the tray is loaded with the correct paper type check the print driver settings to make sure they match the tray type settings 3 Check all application and product settings to make sure that the Type setting is correct 41 XX YZ Error To continue touch OK Description This section covers all other errors of the form 41 XX YZ not covered in the previous sections A product error has occurred XX error type Y fuser mode Z input tray e XX 02 Beam detect misprint e XX 709 Sub thermistor abnormally high e XX 18 Scan line inclination adjustment e XX 20 Image drum HV e Y 2 Normal typed not AutoSense e Y 3 Light media 1 2 3 typed or AutoSense e Y 4 Heavy media 1 typed or AutoSense e Z 0 Envelope feeder e Z 1Tray1 e Z 2Tray2 e Z 3Tray 3 e Z ATray4 e Z 5Tray5 e Z 67Tray6 e D Duplexer ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 405 Recommended action 1 To clear the message touch the OK button 2 Ifthe message displays again turn the product off and then on again 3 Ifthe error persists replace the DC Controller PCA 42 XX YY Error Messages 42 XX YY Error Event Log message Description Internal system failure Recommended action 1 Turn the product off then on and then retry 2 Ifthe error persists clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot me
152. to the OFF setting x TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the trailing assist assembly is in the home position before continuing 6 Ifthe trailing assist motor fails the test replace the defective assembly ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 179 Stacker solenoid test 1 Do one of the following If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed If you are continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 On the main controller PCA set DIPSW4 to the following settings Switch 1 ON Switch 2 through switch 4 OFF Switch 5 and switch 6 ON Switch 7 and switch 8 OFF 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following First press of SW3 The entrance roller alienation solenoid activates for 500ms milliseconds and then deactivates listen for the solenoid to activate and then deactivate Second press of SW3 The buffer roller alienation solenoid activates for 500ms and then deactivates listen for the solenoid to activate and then deactivate Third press of SW3 The primary output roller alienation solenoid activates for 500ms and then deactivates listen for the solenoid to activate and then deactivate Fourth press of SW3 The buffer trailing edge solenoid activates f
153. to the appropriate section in this chapter and follow the instructions there After completing the instructions go to the next major step in this troubleshooting flowchart Table 2 7 Troubleshooting flowchart 1 Power on 2 Control panel Is the product on and does a readable message display Follow the power on troubleshooting checks See Power subsystem on page 140 Yes 4 No After the control panel display is functional see step 2 Does the message Ready display on the control panel After the errors have been corrected go to step 3 messages Yes 4 No 3 Open the Troubleshooting menu and print an If the event log does not print check for error messages event log to see the history of errors with this Event log product If paper jams inside the product see the jams section of the product service manual Does the event log print If error messages display on the control panel when you try to Yes 4 No print an event log see the control panel message section of the service manual After successfully printing and evaluating the event log see step 4 ENWW Troubleshooting process 139 Table 2 7 Troubleshooting flowchart continued 4 Open the Reports menu and print the If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration configuration pages to verify that all the page remove the accessory and reinstall it Information pages accessories ar
154. to this product The secure disk already locked to this product will remain accessible to this product Use this function to have more than one encrypted disk accessible by the product when using them interchangeably The data stored on the secure disk locked to this product always remains accessible to this product Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure disk in an unlocked mode for a single service event The secure disk that is already locked to this product will remain accessible to this product and uses the old disk s encryption password with the new disk The secure disk that is already locked to this product remains accessible to this product Clear Disk Pwd Retain Password Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the non secure disk and clear the password associated with the yet to be installed secure disk CAUTION Data on the missing secure disk will be permanently inaccessible Select the Retain Password item to use the non secure disk for this session only and then search for the missing secure disk in future sessions Boot Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required This might take a long time NOTE The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled The ATA secure erase command is a one pass overwrite which erases the entire disk including firmware The disk remains an en
155. trt ene REX RERBA ERO RR RR REDE RR REPE ERE eee eet 108 Stapler stacker assembly Sensors nennen erre nennen nnns 109 Booklet maker paper path 2 tee t t IERENS 111 Booklet maker signal ne EE 113 Paper delivery for booklet maker nennen nnne nennen 114 Tenue EE 114 Suke ang Ne SCE oan 115 Position the Stack EE 116 Fold and deliver the Te EE 117 Booklet maker motors A 118 Feed drive for the booklet maker eere eene nennen nennen 119 Booklet maker unit paper path 120 Booklet maker e e EE 121 Booklet maker Sensors niii niri onere inan dec ina e ua EE TR ERR ARE dees eR PAS A ASA ER Grade 122 Booklet maker switches and microswitches nn 124 Detecting jams in the booklet maker unt 125 Touchscreen blank white or dim no image sseeeeneeeneeenenenn 145 Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond sssssssss 146 Touchscreen has an unresponsive ZONE eene renes 147 No control panel Sound TE 148 Hohe button IS UNFESPONSIVE E 149 Hardware integration pocket HIP is not functioning control panel functional 150 Defeating interlocks 1 of 2 1 iie ni eite Eed eve pa d Leere EENS 156 Defeating interlocks 2 0f 2 1 2 c nec bread e nna epa cou ee o daas e br aacra ad 157 Engine tes e in en c 158 Finishing controller PCA switches ce eceeeeeee scene ee eee tenet eet ikinin eene emen 167 Booklet maker BM saddle
156. using the Preboot menu 568 1 o Sr e xe Turn the product on The HP logo displays on the product control panel When an underscore displays below the HP logo touch the logo to open the Preboot menu Use the down arrow yw button to highlight Administrator and then touch the OK button Use the down arrow yw button to highlight Startup Options item and then touch the OK button Use the down arrow yw button to highlight the Cold Reset item and then touch the OK button Touch the Home Er button to highlight Continue and then touch the OK button ByNOTE The product will initialize 00000000000 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Format Disk and Partial Clean functions Active and repository firmware locations The firmware bundle consists of multiple parts The main components are the Windows CE Operating System and the product peripheral firmware files There are two locations partitions on the hard drive where the firmware components are stored e The Active where the Operating System and firmware currently are executing e The Repository the recovery location If the Active location is damaged or a Partial Clean was performed the product automatically copies over the OS and firmware files from the Repository location and the product recovers If both the Active and Repository locations are damaged or a Format Disk was performed then both locations are gone and the error message 99 09 67 displays on the control panel
157. way the paper passes through the product is referred to as X This is also known as the scan direction X1 is the scan direction for a single sided page or for the second side of a two sided page X2 is the scan direction for the first side of a two sided page The direction that the paper feeds through the product is referred to as Y Y1 is the feed direction for a single sided page or for the second side of a two sided page Y2 is the feed direction for the first side of a two sided page Changing the Print Mode setting is usually the first thing to try to resolve print quality problems Problems can include toner not sticking well to the page a faint image of the page repeated on the same or following page incorrect gloss level etc Resistance Mode Normal Up Down Use this setting to correct print quality problems in low humidity environments and highly resistive paper Use the Up option to solve print quality problems that are related to poor toner transfer Use the Down option in the event that small pin hole defects occur 260 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 43 General Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Humidity Mode Normal M830 only Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Line Detail Normal M830 only Alternate 1 Off Separation Mode Normal Use the Alternate setting when you are M806 on
158. zZ z 210 Saddle stitcher controller PCA 2 2 Table 1 38 Booklet maker sensors Abbreviation Component name Description Saddle stitcher controller PCA PI1 Paper pushing plate motor clock Detects paper pushing plate motor J3 sensor clock PI3 Booklet delivery door sensor Detects eject cover open J3 122 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Table 1 38 Booklet maker sensors continued Abbreviation Component name Description Saddle stitcher controller PCA Pl4 Paper folding motor clock sensor Detects paper folding motor clock J3 PI5 Alignment plate home position Detects alignment plate home J3 sensor position PI6 Output bin sensor Detects paper on output bin J6 PI7 Paper positioning plate home Detects paper positioning plate J6 position sensor home position PI8 Paper positioning plate paper Detects paper on paper positioning J6 sensor plate PI9 Saddle guide assembly Inlet door Detects inlet cover open J9 PI11 Saddle guide door Inlet cover Detects paper ejection J9 PI12 Crescent roller phase sensor Detects crescent roller phase J9 PI13 Guide home position sensor Detects guide home position J9 PI14 Paper pushing plate home position Detects paper pushing plate home J9 sensor position PI15 Paper pushing plate top position Detects paper pushing plate J13 sensor leading edge position PI16 Stitcher unit IN sensor Detects stitcher unit storage J13 PI17 Vertical path
159. 0 degrees clockwise 4 The hole punch home position sensor turns on and the inside 2 holes punching operation is completed 5 The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the punch shaft 270 degrees clockwise Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 85 6 The outside 2 holes punching is operated 7 The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the punch shaft 360 degrees clockwise 8 The hole punch home position sensor turns on and the outside 2 holes punching operation is completed Figure 1 47 Operation of 4 hole punching Operation of 4 hole punchin gt Punch motor clock sensor Encoder e e Sensor flag ta C _ SD Punch home position sensor shaft y Off centering cam nage Sm Off centering cam ___ for outside 2 hole H s Punch n Paper for inside 2 hole D i i Punch shaft stops Punch shaft turns 360 degrees cw Outside punching operation is completed 86 Chapter 1 Theory of operation Punch shaft turns 90 degrees cw Home position for inside 2 hole Operates inside 2 hole punching Punch chip Punch shaft turns 270 degrees cw Operates outside 2 hole punching Punch shaft turns 180 degrees cw Inside punching operation is completed ENWW Stapler stacker assembly There are two paper paths to ou
160. 0 03 45 Description The calibration stitching label shifted or there are bad sensors in the scan module Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Upgrade the firmware 3 Replace the scanner Description The SCB cannot communicate with the flatbed scanner motor Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again As the product turns on verify that the scan head moves 2 Verify that the drive belt is in the correct position 3 Check for a red LED illuminated on the scanner motor 4 Check the cable connection to the SCB 5 Replace the scanner Description Scanner control board SCB firmware assertion failure SCB firmware assert controls the scan head motor Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Upgrade the firmware 3 Replace the SCB 4 Replace the scanner assembly 31 01 02 Jam in document feeder ENWW Description Jam in document feeder occurs when a page is picked but gets jammed somewhere inside the document feeder Recommended action 1 Check the ADF float to verify it is properly positioned Figure 4 Tools for troubleshooting 387 a Push on the float If properly installed it should spring back If it does not verify the latch at the top is snapped into position b Check the location of the small Mylar tabs If the tabs are blocking the paper path push gently on the tab to place it in the proper position behind th
161. 101 to the Reverse Driver PCA connector for damage 8 Onlyifthe error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the Reverse Driver PCA 13 68 Az Description Switchback Registration Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the stapler stacker connection Switchback Registration sensor SR102 remains activated longer than expected suggesting that paper has jammed at the sensor The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms e 13 68 A1 e 13 68 42 e 13 68 43 Recommended action 1 Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be activating sensor SR102 2 Verify that the finisher is securely fastened to the engine and make sure that the finisher and Printer are correctly aligned 3 Check the finisher entry point guides for damage 4 Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 5 Verify that the sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body 6 Run a diagnostic through the engine control panel and turn on M2 Registration motor to observe gear rotations on the upper left rear frame of the finisher 7 Check wiring from sensor SR102 to the Reverse Driver PCA connector for damage 8 Replace the Reverse assembly 13 68 Dz Description Switchback Registration Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the stapler stacker connection Media did not reach SR102 switch back registration sensor after p
162. 15 Clear jams in the left door fuser area WARNING The fuser can be hot while the product is in use 1 Liftthe release handle on the top of the finishing accessory and then slide the finisher away from the product until it stops 2 Open the left door of the product 3 Push down to release the latch on the duplexer 516 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 4 Pull the duplexer straight out of the product until it stops 5 Open the jam access cover WARNING The fuser can be hot while the product is in use 6 Gently remove the jammed paper ENWW Clear jams 517 7 Slide the duplexer into the slot until it locks into place 8 Close the left door 9 Attach the finisher 518 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the output bin area M806 only 1 Ifa finishing accessory is not attached to the product and paper is visible from the output bin grasp the leading edge and remove it 2 Ifa finishing accessory is attached to the product lift the handle to open the top cover of the finishing accessory 3 Remove jammed paper from the inside of the finishing accessory ENWW Clear jams 519 4 Close the top cover of the finishing accessory 5 Lift the jam access cover for the output slot If you can see any jammed paper gently pull it out 520 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the stapler stacker accessory e Clear jams in the staple
163. 15 does not turn off when the paper pushing plate motor M8 has been driven for 80 ms Also occurs when the number of pulses detected by the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor PI14 or PI15 is less than expected standard value ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 451 Recommended action 1 Open the front finishing door and activate the front door switch MSW31 and front door sensor PI32 so that the finisher will operate with the front door open 2 Turn the engine and finisher power off to clear the error and then turn the power on WARNING Operating the finisher with the front door open exposes moving parts that can cause serious injury Be very careful operating the finisher with the front door open 3 Use the control panel menus to begin a booklet making operation Observe the paper pushing plate motor M8 located in the lower right front corner of the finisher associated gears and the paper pushing plate for proper motion Ey NOTE The motor mount assembly includes the paper pushing plate motor M8 4 If motor M8 does rotate but the paper pushing plate does not move or moves erratically check the drive gears and paper pushing plate for wear or damage Replace components as necessary 5 If motor M8 does rotate and the paper pushing plate moves properly the plate movement sensors might have failed 6 Inspect the paper pushing plate home position sensor PI14 pushing plate leading edge position sensor P115
164. 2 3 4 5 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam Reseat the connections to the DC controller Make sure that the delivery flags move smoothly Open the following menus 378 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 6 Test the face down bin full sensor PS1452 using the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify the sensor is functioning correctly 7 Touch Component Test 8 Inspect the Left Door Diverter Assembly Test the Diverter solenoids SL1 and SL2001 to verify that the diverter is functioning correctly 9 Manually toggle the white activation rod in the diverter Replace the diverter if necessary 10 If necessary replace the delivery assembly 13 E6 FF Description Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the face down output sensor PS1451 at power on This jam code will only be in the event log if it is a residual jam at power on Recommended action 1 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Make sure that the delivery flags move smoothly 4 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 5 Test the face down output sensor PS1451 using the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify the sensor is functioning correctly 6 Ifthe iss
165. 2 of the right door open detection switch and connector J209 on the DC controller PCA 4 Check the sensor flag on the right door open detection sensor If the flag is damaged replace the right door assembly Close stapler stacker multi bin mailbox door Description This message displays even though the stapler stacker multi bin mailbox door is closed 468 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1 Reconnect the connector J465 on the stapler stacker controller PCA 2 Check the stapler stacker door sensor flag If the flag is damaged replace the sensor flag Close top cover Description This message displays even though the top cover is closed Recommended action 1 Use the cartridge door top cover switch SW101 test in the manual sensor test to make sure that the switch is functioning correctly if the switch fails the test replace the switch 2 Reconnect the connector J78 on the DC controller PCA 3 Ifthe error persists replace the cartridge door top cover switch SW101 Close Upper Right Door Description The upper right door is open or the message displays even though the upper right door is closed Recommended action 1 Close the door 2 Runthe switch test in the sensor monitor mode to make sure that the right door open detection switch is functioning correctly If it is not replace the interlock switch assembly 3 Reconnect the connector J2 of the right door open detection switch and
166. 2 hole 3 hole puncher assembly punches 2 holes or 3 holes in the trailing edge of the paper Five off centering cams are on the punch shaft two off centering cams with punches for 2 hole punching and three off centering cams with punches for 3 hole punching The sensor flag is also on the hole punch shaft The hole punch home position sensor detects the home position of hole punch shaft The hole punch home position for 3 hole punching is shifted 180 degrees from the hole punch home position for 2 hole punching When the hole punch shaft is at the home position the hole punch home position sensor is turned on The hole punch motor clock sensor ENWW Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 83 counts the clock pulse of the hole punch motor by the encoder on the shaft so that the hole punch controller stops the hole punch motor at its home position Accordingly the hole punch shaft stops at the home position for either 2 hole punching or 3 hole punching Hole punching is accomplished by turning the hole punch shaft 180 degrees from its home position The hole punch chips are collected into the hole punch chip box The hole punch chip box full sensor detects if the box is filled with hole punch chips The operational sequence of the hole punching operation for 2 hole punching in 2 sheets of paper is as follows 1 The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the hole punch shaft 180 degrees clockwise 2 The hole punc
167. 3301 V Sw3301 Ps3300 9 V PS3201 PS3302 V V PS3202 E B E PS3309 PS3308 a V V SW3303 PS3304 SW3302 PS3303 V V Table 1 22 HCI motors Abbreviation Component name Components driven M3301 HCI right cassette pickup motor Pickup roller separation roller and feed roller for the HCI right cassette M3302 HCI right cassette lifter motor Lifter for the HCI right cassette M3303 HCI left cassette lifter motor Lifter for the HCI left cassette M3304 HCI left cassette pickup motor Pickup roller separation roller and feed roller for the HCI left cassette M3305 HCI intermediate feed motor Intermediate feed roller ENWW 3 500 sheet high capacity input HCI feeder 61 HCI motor failure detection The HCI controller determines the following motor failures Table 1 23 HCI motor failures Failure detection function Supported feature Right cassette pickup motor failure detection No Right cassette lifter motor failure detection Yes Left cassette lifter motor failure detection Yes Left cassette pickup motor failure detection No The formatter is notified is a jam is caused when the cassette pickup motors fail 62 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW HCI pickup and feed operation ENWW The 3 500 sheet paper deck picks up one sheet of paper in the paper deck cassette and feeds it to the product The 3 500 sheet paper deck has two cassettes and each of
168. 5 17 392 28 21 HP KasaxcraH TOO Xbronerr llakkapn Kin 050040 Kas3axcraH r Anwar bocraHnbikckAl pa on yn Tumups3esa 28B 1 Tax ren cpakc 7 727 355 35 50 7 727 355 35 51 Ougnipyuii Hewlett Packard Company 3000 Hanover Street Palo Alto KanucbopHua 94304 AKLU HP KasakcraH KUC Xbionett Nakkapa K 050040 Ka3akcraH AnMarbi K BOCTAHAbIK ayfaHbl Tumupa3es ici 28B Ten cpakc 7 727 355 35 50 7 727 355 35 51 Safety statements 613 Additional statements for telecom fax products EU Statement for Telecom Operation This product is intended to be connected to the analog Public Switched Telecommunication Networks PSTN of European Economic Area EEA countries regions It meets requirements of EU R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Annex II and carries appropriate CE conformity marking For more details see Declaration of Conformity issued by the manufacturer in another section of this manual However due to differences between individual national PSTNs the product may not guarantee unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point Network compatibility depends on the correct setting being selected by the customer in preparation of its connection to the PSTN Please follow the instructions provided in the user manual If you experience network compatibility issues please contact your equipment supplier or Hewlett Packard help desk in the country region of opera
169. 5 Table 1 20 HCI electrical components eee eeeeeeeeceeeaeaeeaecaeeceeeeeeeeee nennen nnne nannan nsns nnns nnns 58 Table 1 21 HCl electrical components isorine aaa aaa aa aaa a A 59 Table 1 22 HClmotors 61 Table 1 23 FIGl motor fallules uius corruit Seegen 4 sacatedddeacceated ed Hen a Rene Ya Pee EE EE eue DRE RE AEA 62 Table 1 24 Additional HCI Pickup and feed functions ssssssssssssssssesseneennen eee 65 Table 1 25 Stapler stacker delivery modes 2 c ccccceeeeeccceceneseneeeeeeeesseeeeneeesdeceeeneeesteneneceeesseneedesenseeeeesenenseeees 69 Table 1 26 Stapler stacker with hole punch delivery modes AA 70 Table 1 27 Stapler stacker motors misip onenian naina ana aa aaa aaa a aaa a aa aAa aae aaa AA aAA 72 Table 1 28 Stapler stacker failure detection 2 0 0 0 cccccccccccccseaeseeeeseeseeceeseeeeeeeceeeeeesesesseessessseseaeeeeseseseseeeees 73 Table 1 29 Feed and delivery electrical components ssssssssssssssseeeenee ener 75 Table 1 30 Motors for the stack job offset sssssssssssssessseseeeeenee nennen nnne rennen nennen 93 Table 1 31 Sensors used in Stapling sse eee rnnnen nennen nennen nnns 95 Table 4 32 Motors used in stapling EE 96 ENWW xxvii Table 1 33 Table 1 34 Table 1 35 Table 1 36 Table 1 37 Table 1 38 Table 1 39 Table 1 40 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 5 Table 2 6 Table 2 7 Table 2 8 Table 2 9 Table 2 10 Tab
170. 6 in sec Listen for the motor to increase rotation speed e Fourth press of SW3 The switchback motor rotates in the reverse direction at a slow rate 118 mm sec 4 65 in sec Listen for the motor to slowly rotate e Fifth press of SW3 The switchback motor rotates in the reverse direction at a medium rate 500 mm sec 19 69 in sec Listen for the motor to increase rotation speed e Sixth press of SW3 The switchback motor rotates in the reverse direction at a fast rate 700 mm sec 27 56 in sec Listen for the motor to increase rotation speed e Seventh press of SW3 The switchback motor stops E NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to repeatedly cause the switchback motor to rotate in the feed direction at a slow to fast rate reverse direction and rotate from a slow to fast rate and then stop 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSWA switches to the OFF setting o TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the switchback motor is stopped before continuing 6 Ifthe motor fails the test replace the motor ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 187 Registration motor test 1 Do one of the following e _ If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e l fyouare continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 On t
171. 74 Internal disk file system is full ss 475 Internal disk is write protected sssssssssssssesssee 475 Internal disk not found 475 Internal disk not function 475 ENWW ENWW Internal disk not initialized eseeseessesssssssssssssseseseee Internal disk spinning up sse Jam in document feeder nnnennesnennernseeesreesteettttrnnn rnn nnnnnnnn nnen Job not stapled due to mixed sizes 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Load Tray X Type Size To use another tray press OK Loading program XX Lower left booklet bin ul Manually feed output stack Then touch OK to print second side Manually feed Type Size To use another tray press OK Moving solenoid iiit cti x tan Pete pte a e ptite Moving Solenoid and motor ssssseeeeeeseseseeerrrrssssrirrrrnsssstenerrnrnsssnt NOOB tO Cane TETTE Non HP Supply Installed 0 cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeecenenaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeees Output Bin Full irae te etaed sea e dee E dne tds Output Device detached AA Paulette G ss ege Performing Paper Path Test Please Wall i aree beet t beta x E Reed VIE eege Printing Configuration sseeeem Printing Event Log ssssseeeene eene Printing File DIFeCtOLy i niic iiiter ien tgeer kr thee he inb tes Priming FONTES s n a Printing Fuser Test Page Printing le ME E Printing Menu Map
172. 8 XX YY Error Messages deett tein ENNER iesnic NEEN 409 489 Y Y i5 uiia elei na conie arta 409 49 XX Y Y Error MESSAGES ET 410 49 XX YY Error To continue turn off then on ssssssssssssssseessesssesssee 410 50 WX YZ Error Messages nennen nnn 411 50 WX YZ Fuser error To continue turn off then on 411 51 XX YZ 52 XX YZ Error Messages ssssesseesseesseertrnrrrrrrrrrrnnnrnnnnnnsnnneeene 415 51 00 10 Beam detect error ssssssssnssnsseesrtrrrtrrrrnnennsrnsserrerrrte ne 415 51 00 19 51 00 20 Laser Scanner Error Laser malfunction 416 52 00 00 52 00 20 Scanner Startup Rotation error 416 54 XX YZ Error Messages d cedi Leere tee dene Ee oa tee eddie o 416 54 00 03 EVENT LOG ONLY 416 54 06 21 EVENT LOG ONLY 417 55 XX YZ 56 XX YZ Error Messages 417 55 00 01 55 00 03 55 00 04 DC controller error 417 55 01 06 55 02 06 DC controller error essesssssse 417 56 00 Y Y Errors iiid ieee eR Ue eed 418 STAAN LENO Messages iet ab be dti eet nue bale ee Hide ds 418 57 00 01 Error To continue turn off then on cccceeeeeeeeeeees 418 57 00 02 Error To continue turn off then on cceeceeeeeeeeeeees 418 57 00 03 Error To continue turn off then on cccceeeeeeeeeeees 419 57 00 03 Error To continue turn off then on ccceceeeeeeeeeeees 419 57 00 04 Err
173. 81 RAM disk file operation failed To clear touch OK Description A PJL command was received that attempted to perform an invalid operation such as downloading a file to a nonexistent directory Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error RAM disk file system is full To clear touch OK Description The hard disk is full Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error RAM disk is write protected To clear touch OK Description The RAM device is write protected and no new files can be written to it Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error RAM disk not initialized Description The file system on the RAM disk must be initialized before it can be used Recommended action Initialize the file system on the RAM disk Ready Description The product is online and ready for data No status or product attendance messages are pending at the display Recommended action No action necessary Ready IP Address Description The product is online and ready for data No status or product attendance messages are pending at the display The product IP address displays 482 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action No action necessary Receiving Upgrade Description The product is receiving a firmware upgrade Recommended action Do not turn the product off until it reaches the Ready state Reinsert duplexer Description The product is not detecting the du
174. 91 on the power line between the low voltage power supply assembly and the fuser 6 Ifthe issue persists replace the fuser 7 If the issue persists replace the low voltage power supply assembly 50 9 High fuser temperature 2 1 Remove and reinstall the fuser Make sure that it is seated correctly 2 Check the paper type setting in the product control panel menus and in the print driver Make sure that the settings match and are correct for the type of media being used 3 Check the connector J514 between the fuser and the printer If it is damaged replace the fuser connector assembly or fuser 4 Ifthe issue persists replace the fuser 5 Ifthe issue persists replace the low voltage power supply assembly 50 A Low fuser temperature 3 1 Remove and reinstall the fuser Make sure that it is seated correctly 2 Make sure that there is no residual paper in the fuser 3 Check the product power source Make sure that the power source meets product requirements Make sure that the product is the only device using the circuit 4 Check the connector J514 between the fuser and the printer If it is damaged replace the fuser connector assembly or fuser 5 Ifthe issue persists replace the fuser 50 1B High fuser temperature 3 1 Remove and reinstall the fuser Make sure that it is seated correctly 2 Check the paper type setting in the product control panel menus and in the print driver Make sure that the settings ma
175. Administration Menu Map option 4 Touch the Print button to print the report 130 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Preboot menu options If an error occurs while the product is initializing an error message displays on the control panel display The user can open the Preboot menus The error menu item will not be seen if an error did not occur A CAUTION The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk The operating system firmware files and third party files among other files will be completely lost HP does not recommend this action Open the Preboot menu 1 Turn the product on 2 The HP logo displays on the product control panel When a 1 8 with an underscore displays below the HP logo touch the logo to open the Preboot menu 3 Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Preboot menu 4 Touch the OK button to select a menu item Cold reset using the Preboot menu 1 Turn the product on 2 The HP logo displays on the product control panel When a 1 8 with an underscore displays below the HP logo touch the logo to open the Preboot menu 3 Use the down arrow v button to highlight the Administrator item and then touch the OK button 4 Use the down arrow v button to highlight the Startup Options item and then touch the OK button 5 Use the down arrow e button to highlight the Cold Reset item and then touch the OK button 6 Touch the Home fer button to highlight the
176. Booklet maker BM Figure 2 24 Finishing accessories all controller PCA connectors Co Ld E p J3015 J3014 J3018 J3013 J3011 J3007 J3006 J3005 J3004 J3008 J3003 a ee ES qr Table 2 26 Finishing accessories all controller PCA connectors Item Description Item Description J1 Buffer trailing edge retainer solenoid J15 Saddle controller Output bin 1 delivery roller alienation solenoid Buffer roller alienation solenoid Inlet roller alienation solenoid J2 Swing guide home position sensor J16 Common media feed PCA Paper path sensor Front door open close detection sensor Swing height sensor J3 Gear change motor J17 Inlet motor Gear change home position sensor Top door open close detection sensor Inlet sensor 218 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 26 Finishing accessories all controller PCA connectors continued Item Description Item Description J4 Trailing edge assist motor J18 Output bin 2 media surface sensor 2 Rear alignment plate motor Front alignment plate motor Trailing edge assist home position sensor Rear alignment plate home position sensor Front alignment plate home position sensor Tray paper sensor J5J5 Stapler PCA 1 J19 Stack ejection motor J6 Output bin 2 media surface sensor 1 J20 Staple safety switch Output bin 1 media surface sensor Swing guide open detection switch Shutter home position sensor Stapler shift home position sensor Shutter open close clutch J7 Outp
177. Description The indicated supply is not compatible with this product e 10 00 35 event code Black toner cartridge e 10 23 35 event code Fuser kit Recommended action Replace the supply with one that is designed for this product Incompatible supplies Description Toner cartridges or other supply items are installed that were not designed for this product The product cannot print with these supplies installed Event codes are supply specific Recommended action Touch the OK button to identify the incompatible supplies Replace the supplies with those that are designed for this product Initializing Description The product is starting ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 473 Recommended action No action necessary Install fuser unit Description The fuser has been removed or installed incorrectly Recommended action A WARNING The fuser can be hot while the product is in use Turn the product off and then wait for the fuser to cool before handling it 1 Remove the output bin or stapler stacker 2 Remove the fuser 3 Reinstall the fuser Install supply Description A supply item is either not installed or installed incorrectly e 10 00 15 event code Black toner cartridge Recommended action Install the supply item or make sure that the installed supply item is fully seated Internal disk device failure To clear touch OK Description 82 0X YY event code The internal disk failed Recommend
178. Diagnostic formatter failed Off TIP The connectivity LED is off if the power cable is disconnected the product power switch is in the off position or the product is in Sleep Mode e Firmware or system freeze o Check control panel for an error message o Control panel failure NOTE This condition is not usually caused by a formatter failure Turn the power off and then on again If the error persists perform a firmware upgrade Connectivity LED The connectivity LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly While the product is initializing after you turn it on the LED blinks rapidly and then turns off When the product has finished the initialization sequence the connectivity LED pulses on and off HP Jetdirect LEDs ENWW The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs The yellow LED indicates network activity and the green LED indicates the link status A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic If the green LED is off a link has failed For link failures check all the network cable connections In addition you can try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control panel menus 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus Tools for troubleshooting 155 e Network Settings e Embedded Jetdirect Menu e Link Speed 3 Select the appropriate link speed an
179. EXISTS Pressure roller FSREXISTS2 ae a A IERI DNE JUN 14 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Fuser heater protection The fuser protective function detects an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser unit and interrupts power supply to the fuser heater The following four protective components prevent an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser heater DC controller The DC controller monitors the detected temperature of the thermistor The DC controller deactivates the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal and releases the relays RL602 RL603 to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an excessive temperature Fuser heater safety circuit The fuser heater safety circuit monitors the detected temperature of the thermistor The fuser heater safety circuit releases the relays RL602 RL603 to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an excessive temperature Thermoswitch The contact to the thermoswitch breaks to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when the temperature of the fuser heater is abnormally high Current detection circuit The DC controller detects the current value of the CURRENT DETECTION signal and deactivates the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when the current is higher than a specified value Table 1 7 Fuser control functions Function Supported feature Fuser temperature control Yes Fuser failure
180. HW checks on board Green solid Red solid DRAM e Power on self check failure Boot process halted Replace the formatter Control panel Green solid Yellow fast flash connection initializes NOTE Control panel communication successful If an error occurs a message should appear on the control panel display e Formatter to control panel connection failed o Boot process continues Check the cables between the formatter and control panel for damage Make sure that the cables are fully seated Preboot menu available including diagnostics Accessing disk for firmware image Firmware boot Product operational Green solid Green solid NOTE If applicable disk error messages appear on the control panel display Green solid NOTE If applicable error messages appear on the control panel display Green heartbeat blink NOTE If applicable error messages appear on the control panel display Red solid e Diagnostic failure Follow diagnostic instructions Turn the power off and then on again to restart the initialization process Yellow fast flash e Control panel not connected Yellow fast flash e Control panel not connected Yellow fast flash e Control panel not connected 49 XX YY error or initialization freezes Not applicable LED off NOTE An error message for example 49 XX Y Y might appear on the control panel display Eventually a formatter connection missing
181. ID If you replace the formatter the date is lost Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date that the product was first used The date format is YYDDD Use the following formula to calculate the dates 1 2 To calculate YY subtract 1990 from the calendar year For instance if the product was first used in 2002 calculate YY as follows 2002 1990 12 YY 12 Subtract 1 from 10 October is the tenth month of the year 10 1 9 e Multiply 9 by 30 9 x 30 270 or add 17 to 270 270 17 287 Thus DDD 287 Convert the service ID to an actual date You can use the product Service ID number to determine whether the product is still under warranty Use the following formula to convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows L 2 3 Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the product was installed Divide DDD by 30 If there is a remainder add 1 to the result This is the month The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date Using the Service ID 12287 as an example the date conversion is as follows 1 2 3 4 12 1990 2002 so the year is 2002 287 divided by 30 9 with a remainder of 17 Because there is a remainder add 1 to 9 to get 10 which represents October The remainder in step 2 is 17 so that is the date The complete date is 17 October 2002 Ey NOTE A six day grace period is built into the date system Product cold reset Cold reset
182. If media is stopped under the toner cartridge but has moved most of the way through registration try another toner cartridge If necessary replace the toner cartridge 6 Openthe following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 7 Test the TOP sensor PS4 using the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the registration sensor assembly 13 B2 Dz Description Media delay jam at registration sensor PS4 e 13B2D1 This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Registration sensor PS4 in the designated amount of time after the Tray 1 feed sensor PS2502 sensed the leading edge when printing from Tray 1 e 13 B2 D2 This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Registration sensor PS4 in the designated amount of time after the Tray 2C feed sensor PS8 sensed the leading edge when printing from Tray 2 e 13 B2 D3 This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Registration sensor PS4 in the designated amount of time after the Tray 2C feed sensor PS8 sensed the leading edge when printing from Tray 3 e 13 B2 D4 This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Registration sensor PS4 in the designated amount of time after the Tray 2C feed sensor PS8 sensed the leading edge when printing from Tray 4 e 13 B2 D5 This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Registration sensor PS4 in the designated amount of time after
183. JR C Punch home position sensor Off centering cam S Aj Photosensor PCA LED PCA Sts Side registration home position sensor bP ja Side registration motor 5 LEZ PF A unch feed motor 3 hole punch Punch chip box full sensor PCA Punch feed roller Punch chip box 2 hole 4 hole puncher assembly 4 hole punch Photosensor PCA LED PCA 2 hole punch ENWW Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 81 Side registration operation The side registration operation detects the trailing edge of paper by the side registration sensor and trailing edge sensor and moves the hole punch slide assembly to the proper punching position according to the paper size The side registration sensor and the trailing edge sensor consist of 5 sets of sensors on the paper path of the hole puncher assembly inlet The photo sensors are located on the upper side and the LEDs are located on the lower side so that the paper passes through between them The operational sequence of the side registration operation is as follows 1 When the trailing edge sensor detects the leading edge of paper the hole punch controller drives the side registration motor so that the hole punch slide assembly moves toward the front side of the staple stacker from its home position Punch slide ass y Trailing edge sensor LED5 PTR5 Paper feed direction 2 The side registration sensor detects the side edge of pap
184. OU ENWW HP s Premium Protection Warranty LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement 581 HP policy on non HP supplies Hewlett Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non HP toner cartridges either new or remanufactured NOTE For HP printer products the use of a non HP toner cartridge or a refilled toner cartridge does not affect either the warranty to the customer or any HP support contract with the customer However if product failure or damage is attributable to the use of a non HP toner cartridge or refilled toner cartridge HP will charge its standard time and materials charges to service the product for the particular failure or damage 582 Appendix A Service and support ENWW HP anticounterfeit Web site Go to www hp com go anticounterfeit when you install an HP toner cartridge and the control panel message indicates the cartridge is non HP HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem Your toner cartridge might not be a genuine HP toner cartridge if you notice the following e The supplies status page indicates that a non HP supply is installed e You are experiencing a high number of problems with the cartridge e The cartridge does not look like it usually does for example the packaging differs from HP packaging ENWW HP anticounterfeit Web site 583 Data stored on the toner cartridge The HP toner cartridges used with this product contain a memor
185. Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests Touch Component Test Inspect the Left Door Diverter Assembly Test the Diverter solenoids SL2001 to verify that the diverter is functioning correctly If it is not replace the assembly Manually toggle the white activation rod in the diverter Verify where the media stops on error e X Diverter assembly e Input of duplexer If media is stopped inside the diverter and the leading edge has not exited the diverter assembly replace the diverter assembly If media is stopped entering the duplexer with part of the page still present in the diverter but the leading edge in the duplexer replace the duplexer Tools for troubleshooting 371 13 D1 FF Description Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the duplex switchback sensor PS2002 or the duplex pre registration sensor PS2003 at power on Recommended action 1 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Replace the duplexer 13 D2 Az Description Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when the media stays at the duplex delivery sensor PS2004 for a designated amount of time after it has reached the duplex delivery sensor PS2004 e 13 D2 A2 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Normal e 13 D2 A3 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Light 1 or Light 2 see the event log second
186. Open the following menus e Administration e X Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 5 Test the Fuser Delivery sensor PS502 using the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify the sensor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the fuser 6 Runthe Fuser motor DCM drive test to verify that the Fuser Drive and Gears are functioning correctly If they are not replace the Fuser Drive Assembly 13 BA EE Description This jam occurs when the engine front door SW8 is opened during printing 368 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 BB EE 13 D1 Az ENWW Recommended action 1 Close the front door 2 Check the projection tabs of the front door that engage the door sensor SW8 If damaged replace the appropriate part 3 Use the Manual sensor test to activate the door switch Replace the switch if it is not functioning correctly 4 Check connector J302 on the DC controller PCA and connector J3 on SW8 Description This jam occurs when the engine right door SW7 is opened during printing Recommended action 1 Close the right door 2 Check the projection tabs of the right door that engage the door sensor SW7 If damaged replace the appropriate part 3 Use the Manual sensor test to activate the door switch Replace the switch if it is not functioning correctly 4 Check connector J302 on the DC controller PCA and connector J3 on SW7 Description Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when the media stays at the duple
187. PSW to the following settings e Switch 1 OFF e Switch 2 through switch 4 ON e Switch 5 through switch 8 not used 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the saddle controller PCA press and release SW1 and then observe the following e First press of SW1 The jogger plate moves to the push position listen for the motor to rotate e Second press of SW1 The jogger plate moves to the home position listen for the motor to rotate Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW1 to cause the plate to move from position to position 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW switches to the OFF setting o TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the motor is stopped before continuing 6 Ifthe motor fails the test replace the defective assembly 194 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Saddle booklet aging test 1 5 6 ENWW Do one of the following e _ If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e lfyouare continuing from a previous saddle controller PCA test go to step 2 On the saddle controller PCA set DIPSW to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 through switch 4 OFF e Switch 5 through switch 8 not used Turn the product power on On the saddle controller PCA press and release SW1 and then observe the following
188. PU drives a motor a solenoid and a clutch according to commands from the DC controller Figure 1 25 Tray 1 operations Tray 1 85 Tray 1 paper path sensor PS2502 Tray 1 ey pickup motor pickup tray driver Tray 1 SL2501 pickup solenoid c20 1C2501 2 CL2501 iid cid PCA r Tray 1 power supply The power supply provides 24 volts DC to the motor the solenoid and the clutch and 3 3 volts DC for the IC and the sensors 44 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Tray 1 sequence of operation If no paper is detected by the paper path sensor the Tray 1 pickup roller is returned to its initial position whenever any of the following occurs e The dooris closed e The product returns from sleep mode e Tray 1 is installed Tray 1 picks up paper according to the following sequence 1 Receives a pickup command 2 Turns on the pickup solenoid SL2501 to places the pickup roller in contact with the paper surface 3 Turns on the feed clutch CL2501 to rotate the pickup roller and the feed roller to pick up the paper 4 Feeds the paper to the between page adjustment position turns off CL2501 and feeds paper into the paper path 5 Receives a feed stop command stops the motor and returns to a standby state Tray 1 pickup and feed The pickup roller moves up and down to feed paper into the paper path This happens when the pickup solenoid moves the stopper away from the pickup
189. Packard Company HP that governs your use of the software product Software This EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP or its suppliers for the Software including a license agreement in online documentation The term Software may include i associated media ii a user guide and other printed materials and iii online or electronic documentation collectively User Documentation RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA BY INSTALLING COPYING DOWNLOADING OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS EULA IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THIS EULA DO NOT INSTALL DOWNLOAD OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE IF YOU PURCHASED THE SOFTWARE BUT DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA PLEASE RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN FOURTEEN DAYS FOR A REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE IF THE SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON OR MADE AVAILABLE WITH ANOTHER HP PRODUCT YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT 1 THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE The Software may include in addition to HP proprietary software HP Software software under licenses from third parties Third Party Software and Third Party License Any Third Party Software is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the corresponding Third Party License Generally the Third Party License is in a file such as license txt or a readme file You should con
190. Product contains an integrated WiFi NFC accessory module consisting of an HP Umber WiFi 802 11n and Near Filed Communication NFC radio The WiFi portion acts in Access Point mode ONLY and provides AP client connection capability NFC is used to pass NDEF tag data WiFi SSID WPA configuration data The latter is used to enable wireless direct print for mobile devices Frequency 2 4Ghz to 2 5Ghz ISM band WiFi 13 56mhz Bandwidth 1Mhz Bandwidth WiFi ISO IEC 18000 3 NFC 14Khz bandwidth 7Khz off center 13 56Mhz NFC Modulation DSSS OFDM modulation WiFi Effective Radiate Power ERP Power output max 20dBm WiFi Power output is 23dBm into an 50 ohm transformer NFC which translates to a lower Note Power out max for WiFi can be different in some regions and controlled by FW Specifications WiFi has 13 Channel support a spacing of 20MHz for B G amp N modes NFC is cable of reading writing via the following speeds 424 kbit s Manchester 1096 ASK Manchester 1096 ASK 212 kbit s Manchester 1096 ASK Manchester 1096 ASK 106 kbit s Modified Miller 10096 ASK Manchester 1096 ASK Integrated module utilizes a USB 2 0 backplane interface Other Capabilities Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data whatsoever L Yes DX No If Yes please describe below Purpose Specifications Author Information Name Title Email B
191. RA PS1413 V PS1407 PS1408 CN Css Table 2 17 Photo switches and sensors product base Item Description Item Description Sw2 Tray 2 media length switch PS1406 Tray 2 media level sensor 2 SW3 Tray 2 media width switch PS1407 Tray 3 media level sensor 1 Sw4 Tray 3 media length switch PS1408 Tray 3 media level sensor 2 SW5 Tray 3 media width switch PS1409 Tray 2 media surface sensor PS1 Right media width sensor PS1410 Tray 2 media presence sensor PS2 Left media width sensor PS1411 Tray 3 media surface sensor PS3 Center media width sensor PS1412 Tray 3 media presence sensor PS4 TOP top of page sensor PS1413 Cassette pickup roller home position sensor PS8 Tray 2 feed sensor C PS1451 Face down tray delivery sensor M806 only PS9 Loop sensor PS1452 Face down tray media full sensor M806 only PS502 Fuser delivery sensor PS2002 Duplex switch back sensor PS1401 Tray 2 feed sensor B PS2003 Duplex pre registration sensor PS1402 Tray 2 feed sensor A PS2004 Duplex feed sensor PS1403 Tray3 feed sensor B PS2005 Duplex residual media sensor Tools for troubleshooting 207 Table 2 17 Photo switches and sensors product base continued Item Description Item Description PS1404 Tray 3 feed sensor A PS2501 Tray 1 media presence sensor PS1405 PS1405 Tray 2 media level sensor 1 PS2502 Tray 1 feed sensor Figure 2 16 Document feeder sensors M830 only
192. Recommended action Resend the RFU 99 00 10 Upgrade canceled by user ENWW Description A remote firmware upgrade RFU was not performed The RFU was canceled by the user when reading the header number and size Recommended action Resend the RFU Tools for troubleshooting 457 99 00 11 Upgrade canceled by user Description A remote firmware upgrade RFU was not performed The RFU was canceled by the user when reading the rest of the header Recommended action Resend the RFU 99 00 12 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade RFU was not performed The header number is 1 but the header size does not match version 1 size Recommended action Download the RFU file again Make sure that you download the file for the correct product model and then resend the RFU 99 00 13 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade RFU was not performed The header number is 2 but the header size does not match version 2 size Recommended action Download the RFU file again Make sure that you download the file for the correct product model and then resend the RFU 99 00 14 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade RFU was not performed The file is invalid Recommended action Download the RFU file again Make sure that you download the file for the correct product model and then resend the RFU 99 00 2X Desc
193. Replace the diverter if necessary 10 Ifthe issue persists replace the delivery unit 13 E1 FF Description Residual Jam Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the face down bin full sensor PS1452 at power on Recommended action 1 2 3 4 5 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam Reseat the connections to the DC controller Make sure that the delivery flags move smoothly Open the following menus 376 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 E6 Az ENWW e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 6 Test the face down bin full sensor PS1452 using the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify the sensor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the delivery sensor assembly 7 Ifthe issue persists replace the delivery unit Description Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when the media stays at the face down output sensor PS1451 for a designated amount of time after it has reached the face down output sensor PS1451 e 13 E6 A2 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Normal e 13 E6 A3 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Light 1 or Light 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode e 13 EG A4 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 1 e 13 E6 A5 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 2 e 13 EG AB The fuser is printing in fuser mode Transpa
194. Scanner Error Laser malfunction Description A printer laser scanner error occurred Recommended action 1 3 4 5 6 Reconnect the connector J1 on the laser driver PCA and connector J209 on the DC controller PCA Reconnect the connector J151 on the laser scanner assembly and connector J234 on the DC controller PCA Reconnect the intermediate connector J23 of the laser scanner If the error persists replace the laser scanner If the error persists replace the upper cable guide assembly If the error persists replace the DC controller 52 00 00 52 00 20 Scanner Startup Rotation error Description A printer laser scanner startup 52 00 00 or rotation 52 00 20 error occurred Recommended action 1 4 Reconnect the connector J151 on the laser scanner assembly and connector J234 on the DC controller PCA Reconnect the intermediate connector J23 of the laser scanner Run the scanner motor drive test in the actuator drive mode to verify that the scanner motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the laser scanner assembly If the error persists replace the DC controller 54 XX YZ Error Messages 54 00 03 EVENT LOG ONLY Description Environmental sensor abnormality warning Recommended action 1 2 416 Chapter 2 Turn the product off and then on If the environment sensor has been removed or replaced check the connector from tray 1 to the environment sensor and the
195. TIAL PURPOSE Some states or other jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you 9 U S GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS Software was developed entirely at private expense All Software is commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations Accordingly pursuant to US FAR 48 CFR 12 212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227 7202 use duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U S Government or a U S Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this End User License Agreement except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory federal laws 10 COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS You will comply with all laws rules and regulations i applicable to the export or import of the Software or ii restricting the Use of the Software including any restrictions on nuclear chemical or biological weapons proliferation 11 RESERVATION OF RIGHTS HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA 2009 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P 586 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Rev 04 09 ENWW End User License Agreement 587 OpenSSL This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED
196. Table 2 15 Component test details continued Component test Item tested Replacement part number Comments Tray 3 intermediate DC motor assembly Activates the specified motor at a specific feed motor speed for 10 seconds Tray 5 and tray 4 DC motor assembly Activates the specified motor at a specific intermediate feed speed for 10 seconds motor Tray 4 feed motor DC motor assembly Activates the specified motor at a specific speed for 10 seconds Tray 5 feed motor DC motor assembly Activates the specified motor at a specific speed for 10 seconds Switchback motor STM2002 DC motor assembly Activates the specified motor at a specific speed for 10 seconds Duplex Feed Motor STM2003 Activates the specified motor at a specific speed for 10 seconds Duplex Refeed Motor STM2004 Activates the specified solenoid for 10 seconds Duplex side registration STM2001 Activates the specified solenoid for 10 motor seconds Fuse shutter motor M1 DC motor assembly Activates the specified solenoid for 10 seconds Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid SL2501 Activates the specified solenoid for 10 seconds Tray 1 feed clutch CL2501 Activates the specified clutch for 10 seconds Tray 4 Pickup Solenoid Activates the specified solenoid for 10 seconds Tray 5 Pickup Solenoid Activates the specified solenoid for 10 seconds Switchback Flapper Activates the specified solenoid for 10 Solenoid seconds Laser Scanner Motor M4 DC moto
197. Table 2 36 High capacity input HCI feeder main assemblies 2 of 3 Item Description Item Description 1 Left tray pickup assembly 3 Merge assembly 2 Right tray pickup assembly ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 229 Figure 2 35 High capacity input HCI feeder main assemblies 3 of 3 T 9 Table 2 37 High capacity input HCI feeder main assemblies 3 of 3 Item Description 1 HCI controller PCA 230 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Finishing accessories SP NOTE Unless otherwise noted the covers doors and output bins are common to all of the finishing accessories Figure 2 36 Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch covers N A Table 2 38 Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch covers Item Description Item Description 1 Open closed stepped cover 10 Rear cover 2 Upper stepped cover 11 Bin cable cover 3 Lower stepped cover 12 Pre reverse cover 4 Upper top cover 13 Front foot cover 5 Punch cover 14 Front cover door NOTE Stapler stacker with hole punch only 6 Upper reverse cover 15 Height wall assembly 7 Rear reverse cover 16 Lower bin assembly 8 Right cover 17 Upper bin assembly 9 Rear foot cover 18 Stack wall upper assembly and upper wall guide ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 231 Figure 2 37 Booklet maker only covers
198. Table 2 43 General Settings menu continued First level Jam Recovery Second level Third level Fourth level Values Auto Off On Description This product provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages Select one of the following options Auto The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available This is the default setting Off The product does not attempt to reprint jammed pages Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages performance is optimal NOTE When using this option if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on both sides some pages can be lost On The product always reprints jammed pages Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed This might cause overall performance to suffer Auto Recovery ENWW Enabled Disabled The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available This is the default setting Tools for troubleshooting 263 Table 2 43 General Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Manage Stored Sort Stored Jobs By Jobs Quick Copy Job Held Timeout Quick Copy Job Storage Limit Values Job Name Date Off 1 Hour 4 Hours 1 Day 1 Week 1 100 Default 32 Description This option allows you list the jobs either Alphabetically or Chronologically Sets a
199. The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004 108 EC the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC the RoHS Directive 2011 65 EC and carries the CE Marking C accordingly This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two Conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems 2 Forregulatory purposes this product is assigned a Regulatory model number This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number s 3 The product meets the requirements of EN55022 amp CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures ENWW Boise Idaho USA October 2013 Declaration of conformity M806 601 For Regulatory Topics only contact European Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH HQ TRE Herrenberger StraRe 140 71034 B blingen Germany www hp eu certificates USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Mail Stop 160 Boise Idaho 83714 0021
200. Values Description Proxy Server Select from a Specifies the proxy provided list server to be used by embedded applications in the product A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access It caches Web pages and provides a degree of Internet security for those clients To specify a proxy Server enter its IPv4 address or fully qualified domain name The name can be up to 255 octets For some networks you might need to contact your Internet Service Provider ISP for the proxy server address Proxy Port Default 00080 Enter the port number used by the proxy server for client support The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network and can be a value from 0 to 65535 Idle Timeout Default 0270 The time period in seconds after which an idle TCP print data connection is closed default is 270 seconds 0 disables the timeout 314 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 53 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Security Second level Secure Web IPSEC 802 1X Third level Fourth level Values HTTPS Required HTTPS Optional Keep Disable Reset Keep Description For configuration management specify whether the HP Embedded Web Server will accept communications using HTTPS Secure HTTP only or both HTTP and HTTPS HTTPS Required For secure encrypted communications only HTTPS access is ac
201. WA E Seege es BI i DESS qgsamisssv T e D TNESVEEVABLMOT ES ENA S a Bn man HH LCE Els 1 IESSE TIE S ras arroore E aus E Eco T wer DES 17173 HE oN Hed AE t ECTS E E Ss E oul Hea elt THOS E AIS Zieser m vl on Hed An ees I DE 88 Fe id 88 a Gi 55 amy ER Ee 3 UC Em B2 E I E snum 5 e ESSE IE H MECH mow eS l so 2 Hle 5 o n E LS A Fi HLE H 5 I i 8 H ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 241 Figure 2 47 General circuit diagram finishing accessories 4 of 6 yun eideys uo ejppes viar year ns Har me An 3s J
202. Y 2 Normal typed not from Auto Sense e Y 3 Light media 1 2 or 3 mode e Y 4 Heavy media 1 e Y 5 Heavy media 2 e Y 6 Heavy media 3 e Y T Glossy media 1 e Y 8 Glossy media 2 e Y 9 Glossy media 3 e Y A Glossy film e Y B OHT e Y C Label 400 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW e Y D Envelope 1 2 or 3 mode e Y E Rough e Y F Other mode e Z 0 From unknown tray e Z 1 From Tray 1 e Z 2 From Tray2 e Z 3 From Tray 3 e 2Z 4 From Tray 4 e Z 5 From Tray 5 e Z 6 From Tray 6 e Z f From Tray 7 e Z 8 From Tray 8 e Z 9 From Tray 9 e Z D From duplex Recommended action 1 To continue printing press v Turn the product off and then on again Resend the print job Replace or reseat the toner cartridge to test Check the toner cartridge before replacing any other parts HP original connectors etc Reseat the connections to the laser scanner and the DC controller If the error persists replace the laser scanner Replace the upper cable guide assembly Oo o N OP aA PR O NM Replace the DC controller 41 02 00 Description A beam detected misprint error Recommended action 1 Toclear the error message touch OK 2 Ifthe error persists turn the product off and then on again 3 Resend the print job ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 401 4 5 Reseat the connections to the laser scanner and the DC controller Replace the laser scanner 41 03 FZ Unknown Misprint Error Description T
203. a deskew function is perform by buckling the paper to accumulate a paper buffer The leading edge of the paper lines up parallel with the deskew drive rollers in preparation to be driven into the remaining paper path of the document feeder 32 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Document feeder paper pick and separation Figure 1 16 Separation angled ramp separation roller and separation pad Item number Description 1 Angled ramp 2 Separation roller 3 Separation pad e Thetop sheet of paper is picked by the pick roller e The angled ramp callout 1 profile functions as a barrier to prevent the remaining lower sheets from being picked with the top sheet e f more than one sheet of paper is being picked the separation roller callout 2 and separation pad callout 3 stop the lower sheet of paper which allows only the single top sheet to be pulled into the document feeder e The ultrasonic sensor located behind the separator pad ensures that the document feeder stops if more than one page is picked HP Every page technology e The separation roller and separation pad are customer replaceable and have an expected life of 100 000 pages ENWW Scanning image capture system 33 Document feeder paper stopper amp fins Figure 1 17 Paper stopper Ji n p 77 Lee E UT
204. a length plus 50mm or more is detected at the Registration sensor PS4 when printing from the Tray 1 13 B2 A2 This jam occurs when the media is present longer than the expected media length plus 50mm or more is detected at the Registration sensor PS4 when printing from the Tray 2 13 B2 A3 This jam occurs when the media is present longer than the expected media length plus 50mm or more is detected at the Registration sensor PS4 when printing from the Tray 3 13 B2 A4 This jam occurs when the media is present longer than the expected media length plus 50mm or more is detected at the Registration sensor PS4 when printing from the Tray 4 13 B2 A5 This jam occurs when the media is present longer than the expected media length plus 50mm or more is detected at the Registration sensor PS4 when printing from the Tray 5 13 B2 AD This jam occurs when the media is present longer than the expected media length plus 50mm or more is detected at the Registration sensor PS4 when printing from the Duplexer Recommended action 1 2 Open the front door and clear the jam in the indicated area Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 360 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 3 Make sure that the transfer roller is seated correctly and not worn or deformed Replace the roller if necessary 4 Check the registration assembly for proper operation Replace the registration assembly as needed 5
205. aaaeaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteee 25 Scanning image capture system sssssssssssesessee eene nennen en nnne nennen nennen nnns 26 lena c 26 Document feeder system sssssssssssssssseeeeeeeee enne nnne en nnne nennen nnn en nnns 27 Document feeder sensors nennen eene 28 Document feeder simplex operation ssssssssssssseeeeeree 29 Document feeder duplex operation ssssssssssseeeeeeeee 30 Document feeder paper control and deskew ssssssssssssssssss 32 ENWW Document feeder paper pick and separation sseeeeeessssseeeeeeee 33 Document feeder paper stopper amp fins eeeessssssssssssssssssss 34 Document feeder simplex selector sssssssssssssese eee 35 Document feeder white backing esssseeene nn 35 Document feeder duplex selector ssssssssssssssseseeee 36 Document feeder hinge att eee Hee ge bot ee engen 37 Pickup feed and delivery system c ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeee cea ceeaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeedeegsaeeaeaaaeseceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 39 Photo sensors and switches eee eeeee eee ee eee eee eaaaaaaeaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteseeeees 40 Motors Een ee EEN 42 Pickup and feed systelm xu cuiii cr cde tun i x e ea Ple Ie titt 43 Media size detection cc ccccccee cece ee eeeeeeceeceeeeeaeceaeceeeeeeeeee
206. ack ejection lower roller clutch CL102 is disengaged The output bin paper sensor P108 detects the processing output bin paper sensor P108 When the paper is delivered to the processing output bin the swing motor M106 starts and raises the swing guide When the swing guide home position sensor P1105 detects the rising of the swing guide the swing guide motor stops and holds the swing guide at the raised position After the processing output bin paper sensor detects the paper the aligning motor M103 M 104 starts and aligns the paper Figure 1 67 Staple paper path Stack ejection roller Swing guide 1st delivery roller fo Le E o Processing tray Stapler When the last sheet is aligned the stacker controller PCA moves the aligning plate to the alignment position with the aligning motor M103 M104 the paper is held by the aligning plate Then the stacker controller PCA staples at the specified staple position After stapling the stacker controller PCA starts the swing motor M106 and lowers the swing guide Then the stack is ejected by the stack delivery roller return roller and stack trailing edge assist guide Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 97 Figure 1 68 Shift process for the staple unit Stack ejection roller Swing guide Stack trailing edge assist guide Sta
207. ad for printing on both sides When this option is selected the product speed slows to the speed required for printing on both sides Duplex Blank Pages Auto Control how the product handles two sided jobs duplexing Two options are available Yes Auto Enables Smart Duplexing which instructs the product not to process blank pages Yes Disables Smart Duplexing and forces the duplexer to flip the sheet of paper even if itis printed on only one side This might be preferable for certain jobs that use paper types such as letterhead or prepunched paper Override A4 Letter Yes Prints on letter size paper when an A4 job is sent but no A4 size paper is loaded in the No product or to print on A4 paper when a letter size job is sent but no letter size paper is loaded This option will also override A3 with ledger size paper and ledger with A3 size paper ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 309 Network Settings menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Network Settings menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 52 Network Settings menu First level Values Description UO Timeout Range 5 300 sec Use to set the I O timeout period in seconds I O timeout refers to the elapsed Default 15 time before a print job fails If the stream of data that the product receives for a print job gets interrupted this setting indica
208. age drops significantly while in Ready or Sleep mode which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product Hewlett Packard printing and imaging equipment marked with the ENERGY STAR logo is qualified to the U S Environmental Protection Agency s ENERGY STAR specifications for imaging equipment The following mark will appear on ENERGY STAR qualified imaging products ENERGY STAR Additional ENERGY STAR qualified imaging product model information is listed at www hp com go energystar Paper use This product s manual automatic duplex feature two sided printing and N up printing multiple pages printed on one page capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product s life HP LaserJet print supplies It s easy to return and recycle your HP LaserJet toner cartridges after use free of charge with HP Planet Partners Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 597 HP LaserJet toner cartridge and supplies package You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return multiple cartridges together rather than separately HP is committed to providing inventive high quality products a
209. age power supply DC controller High voltage power supply Fusing bias Fuser q F user sleeve Pressure roller circuit Primary charging bias circuit Developing bias EUMD Cartridge To primary charging roller circuit To developing roller Pre transfer guide Static charge eliminator bias circuit Transfer bias Static charge eliminator Transfer roller circuit MNT Table 1 9 High voltage power supply circuits Bias generation circuit Purpose Primary charging bias Applies bias to the primary charging roller to spread a uniform negative charge to the photosensitive drum Developing bias Controls the amount of toner transferred to latent images on the photosensitive drum Pre transfer upper guide bias Prevents toner from adhering to the pre transfer upper guide Transfer bias Applies specific bias levels to the transfer charging roller at specific times e Cleaning bias Cleans the transfer charging roller by moving toner to the photosensitive drum e Between page bias Prevents residual toner from adhering to the transfer charging roller between pages of a print job e Print bias Transfers toner to paper from the photosensitive drum Separation static charge eliminating bias Discharges paper at delivery Toner level detection Monitors toner level via two antennae inside the toner cartridge
210. al Sending Software DSS Server option to configure the product to use HP DSS Allow Transfer to Enabled Use the Allow New Digital Sending Transfer to New Software DSS Disabled Digital Sending Server Software DSS Server option to specify whether DSS management of a product is transferable to a different DSS ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 283 Fax Settings menu M830 only To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Fax Settings menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 46 Fax Settings menu M830 only First level Second level Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Third level Fax Setup Wizard Fax Dialing Settings Fourth level Fax Dial Volume Values Description Configure settings for sending faxes from the product Use the Fax Setup Wizard feature to set up options for faxing NOTE To set up LAN fax or Internet fax use the HP Embedded Web Server To open the HP Embedded Web Server type the product network address into a Web browser To configure the fax features select the Fax tab Off These settings control how the fax Low modem dials the f outgoing fax number High when faxes are sent Dialing Mode Tone Pulse Redial Interval 1 5 Minutes Default 5 minutes Fax Send Speed Fast Medium Slow Dialing Prefix Detect Dial Tone Redial on Error Ran
211. ance kit 110V 220V includes the fuser pickup and feed rollers and secondary transfer roller estimated life 200 000 pages o 110V C2H67A o 220V C2H57A e ADF roller maintenance kit estimated life 100 000 pages o C1P70A 7 Verify that you have installed the print driver for this product Check the program to make sure that you are using the print driver for this product The print driver is on the CD that came with the product or can be downloaded from this Web site www hp com go ljM806 software and www hp com go ljflowMFPMS830 software 8 Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past If this solution works the problem is with the program If this solution does not work the document does not print complete these steps a Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed b If you connected the product to the network connect the product directly to a computer with a USB cable Redirect the product to the correct port or reinstall the software selecting the new connection type that you are using ENWW Solve problems checklist 129 Menu map You can print a report of the complete Administration menu so you can more easily navigate to the individual settings you need 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Reports e Configuration Status Pages 3 Select the
212. and supports color graphics and embedded fonts NOTE OCR file types are not supported on this product unless attached to DSS ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 275 Table 2 45 Scan Digital Send Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Optimize Text Picture Values Manually adjust Text Printed picture Photograph Description Use to optimize the output for a particular type of content You can optimize the output for text printed pictures or a mixture Manually adjust Use to manually optimize the setting for text or for pictures Text Use to optimize the text portion of the copy when text and or pictures are on the original Printed picture Use for line drawings and preprinted images such as magazine clippings or pages from books Photograph Best suited for making copies of printed pictures 276 Chapter2 Solve problems Output Quality High large file Medium Low small file Use to select the quality for the output Higher quality images require a larger file size than lower quality images Larger files take more time to send and some recipients might have trouble receiving larger files ENWW Table 2 45 Scan Digital Send Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Original Sides Fourth level Values 1 sided 2 sided Description Use to describe the layo
213. and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the Reverse Driver PCA 13 67 Dz Description Switchback Entrance Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the stapler stacker connection The engine signals the finisher that paper is about to enter the finisher Switchback assembly from the Printer The Switchback inlet Sensor SR101 which detects paper entering the finisher does not detect the paper within the expected time period triggering the error The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms 338 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 67 FF ENWW 13 67 D1 13 67 D2 13 67 D3 Recommended action 1 Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be activating sensor SR101 2 Print and analyze the event log looking for Printer or MFP related jams occurring either in the fuser or in the duplexer These errors might be the result of media failing to reach the output device in the correct amount of time Troubleshoot all Printer Engine Jams first 3 Make sure that media is in good condition and not wrinkled or damaged 4 Make sure that the correct paper size in the trays is selected according the paper size being fed 5 Verify that the finisher is securely fastened to the engine 6 Make sure that the finisher and Printer are correctly aligned 7 Adjust the finisher castors to obtain a uniform gap between the finisher and the engine 8 With the engine to finisher gap correct make sure that the finisher pap
214. and the deskew p nch rollers The paper is driven a preset distance past this point to create a buckle of paper allowing for skew correction The deskew motor rotates to drive the deskew drive roller which pulls the paper toward the prescan drive roller The pick motor stops turning and allows both the pick roller and the separator rollerto free spin while paper is being pulled in by the deskew drive roller The feed motor rotates to drive the paper into the prescan7 sensor The firmware registers the paper leading edge position as the prescan sensor is triggered The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the paper leading edge a calibrated distance from prescan7 sensorto the simplex scan area The simplex scanner begins capturing scan data The feed motor continues to drive the paper until the prescan2 sensor is triggered by the paper leading edge The firmware registers the paper leading edge position as the prescan2 sensoris triggered The feed motor continues to drive the paper leading edge through the calibrated distance from prescan2 sensor to the duplex scan area The duplex scanner begins capturing scan data If the u trasonic sensor detects the trailing edge of the page and the paper presence sensoris still activated more than one page was loaded and the next page is fed once the firmware has the memory available to store the scan data This is repeated for all pages that are loaded in the document feeder The prescan7 senso
215. anual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly 9 Ifthe error persists replace the paper pickup assembly 13 A2 FF Description Residual Media Jam in Tray 2 This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Tray 2A feed sensor PS1402 the Tray 2B feed sensor PS1401 or the Tray 2C path feed sensor PS8 at power on Recommended action 1 2 e no R Open Tray 2 remove any jammed paper and then close the tray Open and close the upper right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam Make sure that the Tray 2 pickup feed and separation roller are installed correctly and show no damage or wear Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers as needed Check the connectors at the sensor feed motor and the DC controller PCA Check connector J221 on the DC controller PCA and interconnect J21 Open the following menus 350 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 A3 D3 13 A3 FF ENWW e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 8 Test PS1402 PS1401 and PS8 using the Tray Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensors are functioning correctly 9 Runthe Tray 2 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly listen for the motor to activate If it is not replace the pickup assembly 10 Ifthe error persists replace the paper pickup assembly Description Jam In Tray 3 This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray
216. appeared for 10 seconds without acknowledgement For some messages restarting the product might fix the problem If a critical error persists the product might require service Ey NOTE Some of the messages in the following sections only appear in the event log xX TIP Some control panel messages and event log entries refer to a specific product sensor or switch in the recommended action to solve the problem See the diagrams in the clear jams section of the product troubleshooting manual for sensor and switch locations 10 XX YZ Error Messages 10 00 00 e Label Memory Error ENWW Description The product is unable to read the cartridge data This message indicates that the product cannot read or write to the e label of the toner cartridge This error can cause the supplies status feature to be disabled Recommended action 1 Open the front door lower the green handle and then remove the toner cartridge 2 Check the cartridge e label If it is damaged replace the cartridge Tools for troubleshooting 329 5 6 Reinsert the cartridge push the release button and then rotate the green handle to the locked position Close the front door If the message displays again turn the product off then on If the error persists replace the toner cartridge 10 00 10 e Label Missing Memory Error Description The product is unable to detect the e label This message indicates that the product has determined
217. are fully seated and not damaged Check the wiring at the sensor 8 Ifthe error persist replace sensor P1115 Tools for troubleshooting 433 9 Ifthe error persist replace the output bin 2 assembly B NOTE The output bin 2 assembly includes the output bin 2 shift motor M108 output bin 2 area sensors and the output bin 2 Area Sensor PCA 10 If output bin 2 does not move during the test perform the following steps 11 Check the output bin tracks for damage 12 Replace the output bin 2 assembly Ey NOTE The output bin 2 assembly includes the output bin 2 shift motor M108 output bin 2 area sensors and the output bin 2 Area Sensor PCA 13 ONLYI if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the stacker controller PCA 66 60 33 Description Stacker roller Lift Motor Error Finisher error liftlower motor M107 or M108 This error occurs when the output bin 1or 2 does not activate the Trays home position sensor when the output bin shift motor M107 is driven E NOTE Output bin home position is detected using the top sheet of paper on the bin when paper is present and the edge of the bin itself when there is no paper on the bin Recommended action 1 Manually release the failing output bin and position it at the midpoint of its travel area 2 Onthe product control panel open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Component Test 3 Tes
218. ared At least one of the following sensors detects media after a jam was cleared the jammed media was delivered the product is turned on and the fuser is at target temperature o Registration paper sensor PS2 Fuser delivery sensor PS501 Fuser jam sensor PS502 Tray 2 feed sensor B PS1401 Tray 3 feed sensor B PS1403 Face down bin delivery sensor PS1451 56 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW 3 500 sheet high capacity input HCI feeder The 3 500 sheet paper deck is optionally installed at the bottom of the product The 3 500 sheet paper deck picks up one sheet of paper and feeds it to the product The following figure shows the installation and the paper path Figure 1 31 HCI paper path e Intermediate feed roller Cassette feed roller UR D e 3 500 sheet paper deck Cassette separation roller Cassette pickup roller Left cassette Right cassette The HCI controller controls the operational sequence of the 3 500 sheet paper deck ENWW 3 500 sheet high capacity input HCI feeder 57 Table 1 20 HCI electrical components DC controller HCI controller 3 500 sheet paper deck Motor Solenoid Photointerruptor Switch Compo
219. arrow buttons to adjust the backlight level E Checks the ambient light sensor Ambient light sensor Use this item to test the ambient light sensor functionality 1 Touch the icon 2 Shine a flashlight at the control panel to the left of and down about 25 4 mm 1 in from the Home Er button 3 The numbers displayed below the icon test should be any value other than zero Tests the Home fa button Use this item to test the Home i button LED and switch functionality 1 Touch the icon 2 Press the Home Er button on the right side of the control panel The LED icon on the control panel display illuminates if the Home fa button test button LED and switch are correctly functioning ENWW Troubleshooting process 143 Control panel diagnostic flowcharts XX TIP Tilt the control panel forward On the back side of the control panel remove the round black rubber cover near the center of the control panel and then press the button inside the hole to access the diagnostic mode D Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems e Touchscreen is blank white or dim no image e Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond e Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone e Nocontrol panel sound e X Home button is unresponsive e Hardware integration pocket HIP is not functioning control panel functional 144 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW
220. ary jam information digits for specific mode e 13 D2 A4 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 1 e 13 D2 A5 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 2 e 13 D2 AB The fuser is printing in fuser mode Transparency e 13 D2 AD The fuser is printing in fuser mode Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode Recommended action 1 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Remove and inspect the duplexer unit Clear and clean the duplexer as needed 4 If the issue persists replace the duplexer 372 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 D2 Dz 13 D2 FF ENWW Description Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when the media does not reach the duplex delivery sensor PS2004 in a designated amount of time after the duplex pre registration sensor PS2003 sensed the leading edge 13 D2 D2 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Normal 13 D2 D3 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Light 1 or Light 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode 13 D2 D4 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 1 13 D2 D5 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 2 13 D2 DB The fuser is printing in fuser mode Transparency 13 D2 DD The fuser is printing in fuser mode Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode Recommende
221. as occurred Recommended action Replace the hard disk 99 09 65 Disk data error Description Disk data corruption has occurred Recommended action Use the Clean Disk procedure from the Preboot menu and then resend the RFU 99 09 66 No disk installed Description A disk drive is not installed in the product Recommended action 1 Install a compatible hard disk drive 2 Ifa compatible hard disk is installed reseat the hard disk to make sure that it is connected correctly 3 Ifthe error persists replace the hard disk drive 99 09 67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware ENWW Description This is an error indicating that there is no firmware installed on the disk This is usually the result of installing a new disk or performing a Clean Disk operation from the Preboot menu Recommended action 1 Press any button to continue to the main Preboot menu 2 Press the Help button to see the help text for the error Tools for troubleshooting 461 3 Select the Administration menu B NOTE If there is a password assigned to the Administrator a prompt to enter the product displays Enter the password to proceed 4 Select the Download item and then download the latest firmware The user can now download a new firmware bundle to the product 99 09 67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware Description This is an error indicating that there is no firmware installed on the disk This is usually the r
222. assing SR101 Switch Back inlet Sensor within the expected time period triggering the error The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms 340 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 69 Az ENWW e 13 68 D1 e 13 68 D2 e 13 68 D3 Recommended action 1 Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be activating sensor SR102 2 Verify that the finisher is securely fastened to the engine Make sure that the finisher and Printer are correctly aligned 3 Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 4 Verify that the sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body 5 Run a diagnostic through the engine control panel and turn on M2 Registration motor to Observe gear rotations on the upper left rear frame of the finisher 6 Test SL101 Switch Back inlet flapper solenoid using the control panel diagnostics 7 Check wiring from sensor SR102 to the Reverse Driver PCA connector for damage 8 Replace the Reverse assembly Description Switchback Lower Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the stapler stacker connection Switchback path sensor SR103 remains activated longer than expected suggesting that paper has jammed at the sensor The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms e 13 69 A1 e 13 69 42 e 13 69 43 Recommended action 1 Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be a
223. ation copyright notice or proprietary restriction from the Software 6 LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the HP Software except and only to the extent that the right to do so is allowed under applicable law 7 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information you provide in relation to i your Use of the Software or the HP Product or ii the provision of support services related to the Software or the HP Product All such information will be subject to HP s privacy policy HP will not use such information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to enhance your Use or provide support services 8 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Notwithstanding any damages that you might incur the entire liability of HP and its suppliers under this EULA and your exclusive remedy under this EULA will be limited to the greater of the amount actually paid by you for the Product or U S 5 00 TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS LOST DATA BUSINESS INTERRUPTION PERSONAL INJURY OR LOSS OF PRIVACY RELATED IN ANY WAY TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF HP OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSEN
224. ay lift lower motor M107 Tools for troubleshooting 431 This error occurs when the output bin 1 does not active the home position sensor P1116 when the output bin 1 shift motor M107 is drive for 20 seconds Ey NOTE M107 moves both output bin 1 and the upper output bin that is attached to output bin 1 on the Stapler Stacker finisher but only output bin 1 on the Booklet Maker finisher It also occurs when output bin 1 does not move when output bin 1 shift motor M107 is driven for 4 seconds It also occurs when output bin 1 switch MSW103 is activated while output bin 1 is operating Ey NOTE Output bin 1 home position is detected using the top sheet of paper on the bin when paper is present and the edge of the bin itself when there is no paper on the bin Recommended action 1 Manually release output bin 1 and then position it at the midpoint of its travel area 2 Onthe product control panel open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Component Test 3 Test the output bin 1 shift motor M107 using the finisher component test 4 If output bin 1 moves during the test continue with these steps 5 Ifthe paper surface sensor flag was recently removed or replaced make sure that it is installed correctly Ey NOTE The four tabs under the clips must be inserted into the slots behind the roller shaft of the lower stack ejection roller 6 Make sure that the paper surface sens
225. been removed or replaced make sure that the plates are correctly aligned with each other on the drive gear 66 90 45 Description Booklet Push Motor Error This error occurs when the paper pushing plate home position sensor P114 does not turn on when the paper pushing plate motor M8 has driven for 0 3 seconds This error can also occur under one of the these conditions When the paper pushing plate home position sensor PI14 does not turn off when the paper pushing plate motor M8 has driven for 80 ms When the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor P115 does not turn off when the paper pushing plate motor M8 has driven for 80 ms When the number of pulses detected by the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor P11 is less than the expected standard value When the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor P115 does not turn on when the paper pushing plate motor M8 has driven for 0 3 seconds 450 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1 Open the front finishing door and then activate the front door switch MSW31 and front door sensor P132 so that the finisher will operate with the front door open 2 Turn the engine and finisher power off to clear the error and then turn the power on WARNING Operating the finisher with the front door open exposes moving parts that can cause serious injury Be very careful operating the finisher with the front door open 3 Observe the paper push
226. bleshoot third party devices with the device manufacturer Scanning subsystem Calibrate the scanner Use this procedure to properly position the copied image on the page xo TIP This adjustment might be required after the scanner or document feeder is replaced 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button 2 Touch the Calibration Cleaning button 3 Touch the Calibrate Scanner button and then follow the instructions provided on the screen 150 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Tools for troubleshooting The section describes the tools that can help you solve problems with your product HP recommends that you provide enough space around the product to ensure that there is sufficient space to open doors and covers provide proper ventilation and for service personell to remove covers and internal assemblies Table 2 9 Product environment spacing Item Recommended spacing From the left side or right side of the 430 mm 17 in to 760 mm 30 in product input accessory or finishing accessory to an obstruction From the front side of the product input 610 mm 24 in to 1010 mm 40 in accessory or finishing accessory to an obstruction From the back side of the product input 460 mm 18 in to 760 mm 30 in accessory or finishing accessory to an obstruction Individual component diagnostics LED diagnostics LED engine and i
227. bleshooting 419 3 4 If no noise is heard make sure that the connectors J1455 and J1451 on the intermediate PCA and connector J205 on the DC controller board are connected correctly and undamaged If the error persists replace the face down delivery assembly 57 00 04 Error To continue turn off then on Description Front delivery fan FM 4B malfunction M830 only Recommended action 1 2 3 4 Turn the product off and then on Listen for fan noise at the left side upper front of the product If no noise is heard make sure that the connectors J1455B and J1451B on the intermediate PCA relay connector J1451 and connector J205 on the DC controller board are connected correctly and undamaged If the error persists replace the delivery fan assembly 57 00 05 Error To continue turn off then on Description Cartridge fan FM 5 malfunction Recommended action 1 2 3 4 Turn the product off and then on Listen for fan noise at the right side upper back of the product just above Tray 1 If no noise is heard make sure that the connector J225 on the DC controller PCA is connected correctly and undamaged If the error persists replace the cartridge fan assembly FM5 57 00 06 Error To continue turn off then on Description Center delivery fan FM 6 M806 only Recommended action 1 2 420 Chapter 2 Turn the product off and then on Listen for fan noise at the left
228. bleshooting 445 the rotary drive cam Like SW5 the stitch motor M6 is also part of the overall stitch stapler unit and replacement requires the replacement of the saddle stapler assembly This error occurs when the rear booklet maker stapler stitching home position sensor SW5 does not turn on when the stitch motor rear M6 has driven forward for 0 5 seconds This error also occurs when the rear booklet maker stapler stitching home position sensor SW5 does not turn off when the stitch motor rear M6 has driven forward for 0 5 seconds Recommended action 1 Check the rear stitch stapler for jammed staples 2 Clear jammed staples and then check the staple unit for damage Retest the stapler e fthe error continues check the following items a Make sure that HP approved staples are used b Replace the staple cartridge with one containing HP approved staples c If the error continues replace the saddle stapler assembly e Ifthe error persists but no damage is found proceed to the next step 3 Make sure that connector J8 on the saddle stitcher controller PCA is fully seated and not damaged 4 Check the wiring at the rear saddle stitch stapler and the saddle stapler assembly for damage and correct seating 5 Check the connector that the saddle stitch stapler assembly engages inside the finisher for damage and foreign material as well as for correct seating with the saddle stitch stapler assembly 6 Ifthe error persis
229. c delivery Yes 3 500 sheet high capacity input HCI feeder 65 HCI jam detection The 3 500 sheet high capacity input HCI feeder uses the following sensors to detect the presence of the paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed e Media feed sensor PS3301 e Right cassette media feed sensor PS3302 e Leftcassette media feed sensor PS3305 Figure 1 37 HCl jam sensor location WV PS3305 PS3301 VJ Qs di Kien Qo 1308 Jam Causes and conditions HCI no pick jam 1 e Fromright cassette The right cassette media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the right cassette pickup solenoid is turned on e Fromleft cassette The left cassette media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the left cassette pickup solenoid is turned on HCI no pick jam 3 e Fromright cassette The media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the right cassette media feed sensor detects the leading edge e From left cassette The media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the left cassette media feed sensor det
230. cam allowing the cam to rotate After completing one rotation the cam contacts the stopper again holding it in place to bring the pickup roller back to its initial position Tray 1 prevents feeding of multiple sheets using a torque limited separation roller The separation roller rotates in the opposite direction of the feed roller The torque limiter allows the separation roller to be turned backward as the top sheet feeds into the system but it returns additional sheets to the tray Tray 1 jam detection Tray 1 multi purpose tray includes a paper path sensor PS2502 that detects the leading edge of the paper as it is transported into the paper path If the paper path sensor fails to detect the paper within a specified time after the pickup solenoid is turned on the CPU stops the operation and notifies the DC controller of a jam The CPU in Tray 1 can detect the following jams Table 1 15 Tray 1 jam detection Jam type Description Pickup retry jam The paper path sensor fails to detect the leading edge of the paper 1 second after turning on the pickup solenoid The CPU stops the motor once and then restarts it Then it turns on the pickup solenoid 0 7 seconds later Pickup delay jam The paper path sensor PS2502 fails to detect the leading edge of paper within 3 seconds of turning on the pickup solenoid The CPU stops the operation and sends an error message to the DC controller Residual jam The paper path sensor detects paper
231. can module this component is in the scanner base and the frontside background selector this component is in the document feeder if needed 9 Sensor prescan2 For an e duplex copy job this sensor is used to activate the backside scan module and the backside background selector if needed these components are in the document feeder Tools for troubleshooting 209 Figure 2 17 Jam sensors product base PS1451 Simplex paper path veer Duplex paper path PS1452 PS2501 PS2502 O ZEE Si i PS9 V PS2002 PS2 i 2 PS3 P Lob 8 1 PS8 ele EE CV Ps2003 ZE NPS2004 O A PS2005 5 PS1401 PS1410 PS1409 PS1402 PS1403 PS1412 PS1411 PS1404 Z sees S Table 2 19 Jam sensors product base Item Description Item Description PS1 Right media width sensor PS1403 Cassette 2 feed sensor B PS2 Left media width sensor PS1404 Cassette 2 feed sensor A PS3 Center media width sensor PS1451 Face down tray delivery sensor M806 only PS4 TOP top of page sensor PS1452 Face down tray media full sensor M806 only PS8 Cassette 1 feed sensor C PS2002 Duplex switch back sensor PS9 Loop sensor PS2003 Duplex pre registration sensor PS502 Fuser delivery sensor PS2004 Duplex feed sensor PS1401 Cassette 1 feed sensor B PS2005 Duplex residual media sensor PS1402 Cassette 1 feed sensor A PS2502 Tray 1 feed sensor 210 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Figu
232. caused by hardware failures it is more common for 49 errors to be caused by printing a specific document or performing some task on the product 49 errors most often occur when a product is asked to perform an action that the product firmware is not capable of and might not have been designed to comply with such as e Printing files with unsupported programming commands e A unique combination of user environment and user interactions with the product e Interfacing with a third party solution that was not designed to work with the product e Specific timing network traffic or concurrent processing of jobs Each of these interactions could cause the product firmware to initiate an action that the product cannot accomplish In situations like this the product might present the error if it has no other option When these errors occur the only way to recover is to turn the product s power off and back on E NOTE LaserJet formatter PCAs are rarely the root cause of 49 service errors Please do not replace the formatter or flash unless troubleshooting has identified the formatter as the root cause 410 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW If the error persists continue troubleshooting with the flowcharts for either Intermittent or Persistent 49 error troubleshooting whichever is appropriate in document c03122817 HP LaserJet FutureSmart Devices 49 Error Troubleshooting Persistent and Intermittent 50 WX YZ Error Messages 50 WX YZ Fuser
233. cedure in this section to enable and configure the automatic cleaning function To enable the auto cleaning function 1 3 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button Open the following menus e Calibration Cleaning e Auto Cleaning Select the Enable item and then touch the Save button To configure the auto cleaning function 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button Open the following menus e Calibration Cleaning Open one the following menus e Cleaning Interval Default setting 1000 pages e Auto Cleaning Size Default setting Letter After selection an option item touch the Save button 248 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Print configuration page Depending on the model up to three pages print when you print a configuration page In addition to the main configuration page the HP embedded Jetdirect configuration pages print Configuration page Use the configuration page to view current product settings to help troubleshoot product problems or to verify installation of optional accessories such as memory DIMMs paper trays and product languages 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Reports e Configuration Status Pages ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 249 3 Touch Configuration Pag
234. cepted The print server will appear as a secure site Specify the IPSec status on the print server Keep IPSec status remains the same as currently configured Disable IPSec operation on the print server is disabled Specify whether the 802 1X settings on the print server are reset to the factory defaults Reset The 802 1X settings are reset to the factory defaults Keep The current 802 1X settings are maintained Reset Security Yes Specify whether the current security settings on the print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults Yes Security settings are reset to factory defaults No The current security settings are maintained ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 315 Table 2 53 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Diagnostics Embedded Tests LAN HW Test Yes Provides tests to help diagnose No network hardware or TCP IP network connection problems Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault is internal or external to the product Use an embedded test to check hardware and communication paths on the print server After you select and enable a test and set the execution time you must select the Execute option to initiate the test Depending on the execution time a selected test runs continuously until either the product is turned off or an error occurs and a diagnostic page i
235. cessory Generate Random Data Generate DTMF Tone Burst Select a value from the list Select a value from the list Generate DTMF Continuous Tone Select a value from the list Generate Pulse Burst Select a value from the list Generate Tone Dial Number Enter dial number Generate Pulse Dial Number Enter dial number 566 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Product Restore factory set defaults 4 First level Second level Value Description Generate Single Modem Tone Range 1100 2100 Hz Default 2100 Hz Line Measurements Fax Transmit Signal Loss Test Support Continuous Scan 2 sided NOTE M830 product only Save to Disk Continuous Copy 2 sided Save to Disk Raw Scan 2 sided NOTE M830 product only Mechanical Calibration Continuous Print from USB Automatic Calibrations Disabled Enabled Runtime Configuration MercStine Standard StandardEIC Workflow WorkflowEIC Reconfigure resets e General Settings Open the following menus e Restore Factory Settings Touch the Reset button to complete the process From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button A verification message advises that completing the reset function might result in loss of data EY NOTE The product restarts automatically after the reset operation completes ENWW Service mode functions 567 Restore the service ID Restore the service
236. ch accessory connection 530 right door 503 stapler stacker 521 522 541 Tray 1 500 Tray 2 and Tray 3 506 Tray 4and Tray5 507 paper movement operation 39 paper path stop movement for testing 163 paper pickup problems solving 549 paper path test sensors 159 password Service menu PIN 564 photo sensors 40 physical specifications 592 pickup feed and delivery system 39 plug jack locations 220 power consumption 593 power subsystem 140 power supply troubleshooting 140 preboot menu options 131 print quality built in troubleshooting pages 245 manual print modes 551 test pages 245 troubleshooting 553 PRINT state 3 Print Test Page 259 printing modes manual 551 stop for testing 163 problem solving event log messages 494 networks 316 Process Cleaning Page 326 product cold reset 568 product resets 567 R RAM random access memory product 5 toner cartridge 25 random access memory RAM product 5 toner cartridge 25 read only memory ROM 5 recycling 597 electronic hardware 600 HP printing supplies returns and environmental program 598 restore factory settings 567 restore the service ID 568 right door jams 503 ROM read only memory 5 S safety statements 609 610 scanner operations 26 tests M830 202 scanner glass cleaning 558 scanner settings 565 seal toner cartridge 25 security settings information 251 sensors diagnostic tests 159 tests manual 160 tests manual tray bin 161 sensors and swi
237. cher controller PCA are fully seated and not damaged 3 Replace the saddle stitcher controller PCA 4 Ifthe error persists replace the stacker controller PCA Description Punch Unit Failure The specific message varies depending on the cause but the solution for each message is the same e 66 40 40 Punch NVRAM error e 66 40 46 Punch Slide motor error e 66 40 50 Punch unit CPU sequence error Punch unit micro controller unable to start punch unit e 66 40 83 Punch motor failure Recommended action 1 Follow the instructions in the online help 2 Turn the product off and then on 3 If the error persists see the output finishing device service manual for detailed instructions Description Folding Unit Failure An error has occurred in the folding unit Tools for troubleshooting 429 Recommended action 1 Follow the instructions in the online help 2 Turn the product off and then on 3 Ifthe error persists see the output finishing device service manual for detailed instructions 66 60 16 Description Stacker Gear Change Motor Error The speed change motor M110 and sensor PI117 are associated with this error Finisher error speed change motor M110 The speed change motor M110 and sensor PI117 are associated with this error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and turn it on 2 Ifthe error continues Verify J3 on Stacker controller PCA is seated properly 3 Replace Speed Change Motor M110 or correspondi
238. ck roller M2 Registration motor Registration roller M61 Punch motor staple stacker with hole punch only Hole punch assembly M62 Side registration motor staple stacker with hole punch Hole punch feed roller only M63 Punch feed motor staple stacker with hole punch only Hole punch slide assembly Motor failure detection The stapler stacker controller does not detect motor failures in the switchback motor M1 or registration motor M2 The stapler stacker with hole punch controller detects motor failures for the following motors e Hole punch motor M61 e Side registration motor M62 72 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW The stapler stacker with hole punch controller does not detect motor failures for the punch feed motor M63 The stacker controller determines a motor failure and notifies the formatter of failure status when it encounters the following condition Table 1 28 Stapler stacker failure detection Failure detection function Supported feature Switchback motor failure detection No Registration motor failure detection No Hole punch motor failure detection stapler stacker with hole Yes punch only Hole punch feed motor failure detection stapler stacker with No hole punch only Side registration motor failure detection stapler stacker with Yes hole punch only Hole punch motor failure e The hole punch home position sensor does not detect the home position within a specified
239. ck toward the Tray 2 cassette mediastack surface sensor b Asthe lifter rack moves the lifter moves up c The Tray 2 cassette lifter motor stops when the Tray 2 cassette media stack surface sensor detects the lifter rack 50 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW The DC controller determines a Tray 2 cassette lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter if the Tray 2 cassette media stack surface sensor does not detect the lifter rack within a specified period after the Tray 2 cassette lifter motor starts rotating Figure 1 28 Tray 2 cassette lift up operation PS4 Cassette media stack surface sensor Cassette x Lifter drive ass y Lifting plate Lifter rack we Cassette lifter motor DC controller a Sieg See ee rt De ee e i ed ENWW Pickup feed and delivery system 51 Tray media presence detection The Tray 2 cassette media out sensor detects the presence of paper in the Tray 2 cassette The DC controller notifies the formatter when the Tray 2 cassette media out sensor detects the media is absent Figure 1 29 Tray 2 cassette media presence detection PS1 Cassette media width sensor Cassette media end switch 52 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Jam detection ENWW The product uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed Figure 1 30 Sensors for jam detection PS1451 Simplex paper path
240. cker and stapler stacker with hole punch 69 e Staple e Hole punch e Offset These delivery modes are independent of each other and can be used in any combination Table 1 26 Stapler stacker with hole punch delivery modes Feed Staple Punch Offset Supported feature Straight No No No Yes Straight No No Yes No Straight Yes No No No Straight Yes No Yes No Straight No Yes No No Straight No Yes Yes No Straight Yes Yes No No Straight Yes Yes Yes No Switchback No No No Yes Switchback No No Yes Yes Switchback Yes No No Yes Switchback Yes No Yes No Switchback No Yes No Yes Switchback No Yes Yes Yes Switchback Yes Yes No Yes Switchback Yes Yes Yes No 70 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1 40 Stapler stacker controller signal flow diagram o tatg Staple stacker ass y Connector PCA Motor Solenoid Formatter e ALL 5 Clutch 1 DC controller d Stacker controller Le Switch IO Bag Photointerrupter a Ke ee Low voltage Sensor power supply een Puncher ass y SSHP only Motor Switch Punch controller Photointerrupter K Sensor Component type Abbreviation Component name Motor M1 Switchback motor M2 Registration motor M61 Hole punch motor staple stacker with hole punch only M62 Side registration motor staple stacker with hole punch only M63 Hole punch feed motor s
241. code The backup operation completed successfully informational 32 1C 41 event code The backup operation encountered an error informational 32 10 42 event code The backup operation completed but with a warning message informational 394 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW 32 1C 43 event code A component in the backup file is not supported by the current version of firmware and will not be restored informational 32 1C 44 event code A component in the backup file is not transferable to another product and will not be restored informational 32 1C 45 event code Some data was not included in the backup file informational 32 1C 46 event code An expected component could not be found and was thus not backed up Because components should be known on backups this code is a warning informational 32 1C 47 event code Some data was not restored from the backup file informational 32 1C 48 event code The backup job ticket was submitted using an invalid network path 32 1C 49 event code The backup job ticket was submitted with a bad encryption 32 1C 4A event code An error occurred when creating the temporary directories used to store the backup files in transition to and from the compressed ZIP file 32 1C 56 event code Reset aborted Backup restore in progress informational 32 1C 57 event code Reset aborted informational 32 1C 58 event code Unknown reset error informat
242. conds for packet transmission and response Ping In Progress Yes No Shows whether a ping test is in progress Yes Indicates a test in progress No Indicates that a test completed or was not run Refresh Yes When viewing the ping test results this item upgrades the ping test data with current results Select the Yes option to upgrade the data or the No option to maintain the existing data However a refresh automatically occurs when the menu times out or you manually return to the main menu 320 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 53 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Link Speed Auto 10T Half Description The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network The available settings depend on the product and installed print server Select one of the following link configuration settings CAUTION If you change the link setting network communications with the print server and network product might be lost The print server uses auto negotiation to configure itself with the highest link speed and communication mode allowed If auto negotiation fails either the 100TX Half feature or the 10T Half feature is set depending on the detected link speed of the hub switch port A 1000T half duplex selection is not supported 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10T Full 10
243. connector J302 on the DC controller PCA 4 Check the sensor flag on the right door open detection sensor If the flag is damaged replace the right door assembly Cooling device Description The product is cooling Recommended action No action necessary Data received To print last page press OK ENWW Description The product is waiting for the command to print the last page Recommended action Touch the OK button to print the last page of the job Tools for troubleshooting 469 Different paper sizes in job Description A job being sent to the HCO with a command for stapling or booklet making contains multiple sizes of media Recommended action Send the job in Stacker mode Change the media size of the pages EIO X disk initializing Description The specified EIO disk device is initializing Recommended action No action necessary EIO lt X gt disk not functional Description The specified EIO disk device is initializing For example if X 1 the disk in slot 1 is not functional Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Ifthe error persists turn the product off and then remove and reinstall the disk EIO X disk spinning up Description The EIO disk in slot X is spinning up its platter Jobs that require disk access must wait For example if X 1 the disk in slot 1 is spinning up Recommended action No action necessary Event log is empty Description No product event
244. control bias to primary charging roller developing roller and transfer roller e X Heat fuser roller to 190 C 374 F and pressure roller to 180 C 356 F e X Execute final check on initial rotation high voltage scanner motor pickup operation complete e Check jam door open failure sleep PRINT After the input of a print command until e Runfuser delivery drum scanner and fan motors the primary DC bias is turned off e Set fuser control to print temperature fuser 190 C 374 F e Send engine to formatter output signal e Send formatter to engine input signal e Run paper feed control e Run image control e Set high voltage control toner level output separation bias and pressure roller bias e Runnext pickup control to calculate the speed at which to move paper e Check jam door open failure LSTR last After the primary charging roller is turned e Run fuser delivery drum scanner and fan motors rotation off until each motor stops Complete high voltage control e Setfuser control to the standby temperature 180 C 356 F run fans 1 6 at full speed e Stop fuser delivery drum and scanner motors write in cartridge memory e Check jam door open failure await next pickup 4 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Formatter control system The formatter performs the following functions e Controlls sleep mode e Receiving and processing print data from the various product interfaces e Monitoring con
245. control panel e Ifthe sensor does not change state when the stapler unit is moved from the home position perform the following steps a b Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the chassis Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust band debris Make sure that connector J6 and interconnect J1040 on the stacker controller PCA is fully seated and not damaged Check the wiring at the sensor If the error persists replace the stapler assembly NOTE The stapler assembly includes the stapler shift home position sensor PI110 stapler unit shift position plate assembly and the flat flexible cable FFC System error FW error Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description System error 5 FW error Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description System error 6 FW error Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Tools for troubleshooting 441 66 80 57 66 80 58 66 80 59 66 80 60 66 80 61 66 80 62 Description System error 7 FW error Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description System error 8 FW error Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description System error 9 FW error Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description System error 10 inter page delay mismatch Recommended action Turn the produ
246. control panel scroll to and touch the Supplies button Check the status of the document feeder kit and replace it if necessary Prevent paper jams To reduce the number of paper jams try these solutions 1 2 Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product Use paper that is not wrinkled folded or damaged If necessary use paper from a different package Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on Make sure the tray is not overfilled If it is remove the entire stack of paper from the tray straighten the stack and then return some of the paper to the tray Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the product If you are printing on heavy embossed or perforated paper use the manual feed feature and feed sheets one at a time From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Trays button Verify that the tray is configured correctly for the paper type and size Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications 550 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Use manual print modes Try the following manual print modes to see if they solve the image quality problems Select a manual print mode 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration but
247. controller PCA switches sen 168 Stapler stacker with hole punch SSHP punch controller PCA switches sssssesseeneerenrennnen 169 Motors and solenoids product base 205 Rollers product Base either e tte Ree a nie E e a De Ru XR RA du RR 206 Switches and sensors product base ssssssssssssseeeeeeen nenne ennemis 207 Document feeder sensors M830 only ssssssssseesseeeneeee ene nnr enne 208 Jam sensors product base rtr ec re nd Eg ua RR a Lu RR DR RR 210 High capacity input HCI feeder jam sensors ssssssseeen enne 211 High capacity input HCI feeder cross section sssssssssseeeneeeneeeennn 212 xxxiii Figure 2 20 Figure 2 21 Figure 2 22 Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 25 Figure 2 26 Figure 2 27 Figure 2 28 Figure 2 29 Figure 2 30 Figure 2 31 Figure 2 32 Figure 2 33 Figure 2 34 Figure 2 35 Figure 2 36 Figure 2 37 Figure 2 38 Figure 2 39 Figure 2 40 Figure 2 41 Figure 2 42 Figure 2 43 Figure 2 44 Figure 2 45 Figure 2 46 Figure 2 47 Figure 2 48 Figure 2 49 Figure 2 50 Figure 2 51 Figure 2 52 Figure 2 53 Figure C 1 Figure C 2 Figure C 3 Figure C 4 xxxiv Stapler stacker SS and Stapler stacker with hole punch SSHP cross section 213 Booklet maker BM cross section sssssssssssseeeeennne eene 214 DG controller PGA CcOrinIectOrs oreste penu retenta A E E 215
248. correctly aligned with the PI48 and PI21 sensor bodies c Make sure that the sensors are securely fastened to the chassis d Carefully clean each sensor body with a clean lint free cloth or gently blow clean air across each sensor to remove dust and debris Tools for troubleshooting 447 e Make sure that connector J3 on the saddle stitcher controller PCA is fully seated and not damaged Check the wiring at the Pl4 sensor f Make sure that connector J18 on the saddle stitcher controller PCA is fully seated and not damaged Check the wiring at the PI21 sensor g Ifthe error persists replace sensor PI4 or PI21 h Ifthe error persists replace the saddle stitcher controller PCA e Ifthe folding rollers do not rotate correctly perform the following steps a Check the folding roller gears and connecting gears between the paper fold motor M2 and the folding rollers for damage Replace components as necessary b Check the folding rollers for wear and damage Replace components as necessary c If the error persists replace the motor mount assembly E NOTE The motor mount assembly includes the paper fold motor M2 and the paper fold motor clock sensor P14 d Ifthe error persists replace the saddle stitcher controller PCA 66 90 42 Description Booklet Paper Position Select Motor Error The paper positioning plate motor M4 located in the booklet making area of the finisher controls the up and down positioning of t
249. crypted disk Erase Unlock Select the Erase Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on the disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain access to it from any product NOTE The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled It erases the encryption key The encryption key is erased so the disk becomes a non encrypted disk Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available ENWW Preboot menu options 133 Table 2 3 Preboot menu options 3 of 6 Menu option Administrator continued First level Second level Third level Manage Disk Internal Device continued Description Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal device or get a status about the internal device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required This might take a long time NOTE The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled The ATA secure erase command erases the entire disk including firmware The disk remains an encrypted disk Erase Unlock Select the Erase Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow the user to gain access to it from any product NOTE The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled The HP High Performance Secure Hard Disk is erased Get Status External Device This item provides di
250. ct off and then on Description System error 11 lifter task trouble Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description System error 12 inter page delay mismatch Recommended action Turn the product off and then on 442 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 66 80 63 66 80 64 66 80 65 66 80 70 66 80 71 66 80 72 ENWW Description System error 13 FW error Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description System error 14 FW error Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description System error 15 FW error Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description Page info in flush Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description Flush request in PDLV Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Description Delivery notice error Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Tools for troubleshooting 443 66 80 73 Description Flush request in checking paper path Recommended action Turn the product off and then on 66 80 74 Description Checking paper path start in PDLV Recommended action Turn the product off and then on 66 80 75 Description Flush request in flush Recommended action Turn the product off and then on 66 80 76 Description Non flush complete Recommended action 1 Follow the instructions in online help 2 Turn he product off and turn it on
251. ctivating sensor SR103 Verify that the finisher is securely fastened to the engine Make sure that the finisher and Printer are correctly aligned Check the finisher entry point guides for damage a B VN Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 6 Verify that the sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body Tools for troubleshooting 341 7 Perform Sensor test on SR103 If not functioning or damaged replace Sensor 8 Check wiring from sensor SR103 to the Reverse Driver PCA connector for damage 9 Only if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the Reverse Driver PCA 13 69 Dz Description Switchback Registration Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the stapler stacker connection Media did not reach SR103 switchback path sensor after passing SR101 Switch Back inlet Sensor within the expected time period triggering the error The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms e 13 69 D1 e 13 69 D2 e 13 69 D3 Recommended action 1 Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be activating sensor SR103 2 Verify that the finisher is securely fastened to the engine Make sure that the finisher and Printer are correctly aligned 3 Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 4 Verify that the sen
252. curs when the folded booklet exits the folding rollers and does not reach the booklet delivery sensor PI11 within the expected time The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms e 13 94 D0 e 13 94 D3 346 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 96 33 13 97 33 ENWW Recommended action 1 Check the folder roller area for a jam or media wrapped around the rollers 2 Check sensor P111 for damage 3 Make sure that the sensor is not obstructed 4 Make sure that sensor PI11 is securely fastened to the chassis 5 Replace Motor or assembly as needed Description Stapler 2 Jam Booklet Staple Jam Front Jam in booklet stapler 2 Finisher jam front booklet stapler SW7 When the rear staple motor M7 is rotated forward the staple home position sensor SW7 does not turn back on after the prescribed time has elapsed after it goes off 0 4 seconds Recommended action 1 Check the front booklet stapler unit for jammed staples 2 Check the front booklet stapler unit for loose staples 3 Inspect the front booklet stapler unit for damage 4 Verify that HP approved staples for this stapler are being used 5 Verify that the wiring at the stapler unit and the connector are not damaged 6 Replace the staple cartridge E NOTE Replace both the front and rear cartridges at the same time so that the staple low sensors will properly detect the level of staples in the cartridges 7 Only if the error persists an
253. d Communication NFC radio The WiFi portion acts in Access Point mode ONLY and provides AP client connection capability NFC is used to pass NDEF tag data WiFi SSID WPA configuration data The latter is used to enable wireless direct print for mobile devices Frequency 2 4Ghz to 2 5Ghz ISM band WiFi Bandwidth 1Mhz Bandwidth WiFi 13 56mhz ISO IEC 18000 3 NFC 14Khz bandwidth 7Khz off center 13 56Mhz NFC Modulation DSSS OFDM modulation WiFi Effective Radiate Power ERP Power output max is 20dBm for WiFi Note Power out max for WiFi can be different in some regions and controlled by FW Power output is 23dBm into an 50 ohm transformer for NFC Note There will be some loss in the antenna and therefore this is not all radiated in to the air Specifications WiFi has 13 Channel support a spacing of 20MHz for B G amp N modes NFC is cable of reading writing via the following speeds 424 kbit s Manchester 10 ASK Manchester 10 ASK 212 kbit s Manchester 10 ASK Manchester 1096 ASK 106 kbit s Modified Miller 10096 ASK Manchester 1096 ASK Integrated module utilizes a USB 2 0 backplane interface Other Transmission Capabilities Does the device employ any other methods of non wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever e g anything other than standard hard wired TCP IP direct USB or parallel connections x Yes No If Yes please describe below Purpose
254. d period from when it detects the leading edge Switchback registration delay jam The switchback registration sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the switchback inlet sensor detects the trailing edge Switchback registration stay jam The switchback registration sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when it detects the leading edge ENWW Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 107 Switchback path residual jam The switchback path jam sensor does not detect a paper absence within a specified period from when it detects a paper presence during the residual paper detection or the automatic delivery operation Residual paper jam Both of the switchback inlet sensor and switchback path jam sensor detect a paper presence or both of the switchback registration sensor and switchback path jam sensor detect a paper presence during any of the following conditions e When the power is turned on e When the door is closed e During residual paper detection e During automatic delivery operation Hole puncher assembly jam detection The puncher assembly uses the following sensors to detect the presence of the paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed e Hole punch home position sensor P163 e X Hole punch motor clock sensor P162 e Trailing edge detection sensor LED5 PTR5 Figure 1 79 Hole punch as
255. d ID Total RAM Look on the main configuration page under Memory Duplex unit Look on the main configuration page Installed finishing accessory type under Paper Trays and Options Look on the main configuration page under Paper Trays and Options Engine cycles and event logs Total page counts and maintenance kit counts are important for ongoing product maintenance The configuration page lists only the three most recent errors To see a list of the 50 most recent errors print an event log from the Diagnostics menu Engine cycles Look on the main configuration page under Device Information Event log information Event log information Look on the main configuration page under Event Log Tools for troubleshooting 253 Print quality troubleshooting tools Repetitive defects ruler Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image quality problems Place the ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect on the page Find the distance between identical defects and use the table below to identify the component that is causing the defect Distance between defects Product components that cause the defect 44 mm Primary charging roller 45 mm Face down delivery roller 44 mm Product primary transfer roller 50 mm Duplex inlet roller Duplex switchback roller Duplex registration roller Duplex feed roller Duplex re pickup r
256. d action 1 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Remove and inspect the duplexer unit Clear and clean the duplexer as needed 4 Ifthe issue persists replace the duplexer Description Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the duplex delivery sensor PS2004 or the duplex residual sensor PS2005 at power on Recommended action 1 2 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam Tools for troubleshooting 373 3 Remove and inspect the duplexer unit Clear and clean the duplexer as needed 4 Ifthe issue persists replace the duplexer 13 D4 Az Description Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when the media stays at the duplex pre registration sensor PS2003 for a designated amount of time after it has reached the duplex pre registration sensor PS2003 13 D4 A2 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Normal 13 D4 A3 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Light 1 or Light 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode 13 D4 A4 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 1 13 D4 A5 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 2 13 D4 AB The fuser is printing in fuser mode Transparency 13 D4 AD The fuser is printing in fuser mode Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 see the event log secondary jam infor
257. d action Replace the specified supply Or configure the product to continue printing using the Manage Supplies menu on the product control panel Replace supplies Description This alert displays only if the product is configured to stop when a supply reaches the very low threshold The product indicates when a supply level is at its estimated end of life The actual life remaining might be different than estimated The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable The product can be configured to stop when the supply level is very low The supply might still be able to produce acceptable print quality When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life the HP Premium Protection Warranty on that supply ends e 10 00 70 event code Black toner cartridge e 10 23 70 event code Fuser Kit Recommended action Replace the specified supply Or configure the product to continue printing using the Manage Supplies menu on the product control panel Resend external accessory firmware Description An external accessory requires a firmware upgrade Printing can continue but jams might occur if the job uses the external accessory Recommended action Perform a firmware upgrade 484 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Resend Upgrade Description A firmware u
258. d level Third level Fourth level Values Billing Codes Enable Billing Codes Off On Description When billing codes are enabled a prompt displays that asks the user to enter the billing code for an outgoing fax This prompt does not appear if the Allow users to edit billing codes check box is not checked You can also use the billing codes report in the Reports menu to view the list of the billing codes that have been used for faxes that have been sent from the product The list is grouped by billing code and also shows fax details This feature can be used for billing or usage tracking Default Billing Code Specify a default billing code for faxing If you specify a default billing code this code displays in the Billing Code field when the user sends an outgoing fax If this field is blank no default billing code is provided for the user Minimum Length Range 1 16 Default 1 Specify the required length of the billing code Billing codes can be between 1 and 16 characters long Allow users to edit Off billing codes 286 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 46 Fax Settings menu M830 only continued First level ENWW Second level Default Job Options Third level Image Preview Resolution Fourth level Values Make optional Require preview Disable preview Standard 100 x 200dpi Fine 200 x 200dpi Superfine 300 x 300dpi Tools for tro
259. d none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the saddle stapler assembly Description Stapler 3 Jam Booklet Staple Jam Rear Jam in booklet stapler 3 Finisher jam rear booklet stapler SW5 When the rear staple motor M6 is rotated forward the staple home position sensor SW5 does not turn back on after the prescribed time has elapsed after it goes off 0 4 seconds Recommended action 1 Check the rear booklet stapler unit for jammed staples 2 Check the rear booklet stapler unit for loose staples Tools for troubleshooting 347 Inspect the rear booklet stitch stapler unit for damage Verify that HP approved staples for this stapler are being used Verify that the wiring at the stapler unit and the connector are not damaged o a ea Q Replace the staple cartridge 13 98 A3 Description Booklet Output Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the front left door booklet Occurs when the folded booklet exits the folding rollers and passes PI11 booklet delivery sensor but does not reach the booklet delivery sensor PI6 within the expected time Recommended action 1 Check the folder roller area for a jam or media wrapped around the rollers 2 Check sensor PI6 for damage 3 Make sure that the sensor is not obstructed 4 Make sure that sensor PI6 is securely fastened to the chassis 5 Replace sensor or assembly as needed 13 98 D3 Description Booklet Output Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the front left door bo
260. d then touch the OK button Engine diagnostics The product contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality paper path noise assembly and timing issues Defeating interlocks Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues For assembly or noise isolation you can run the diagnostic test when the front and upper right doors are open To operate the product with the doors open the door switch levers must be depressed to simulate a closed door position WARNING Be careful when performing product diagnostics to avoid risk of injury Only trained service personnel should open and run the diagnostics with the covers removed Never touch any of the power supplies when the product is turned on 1 Open the right and front doors 2 Insert a folded piece of paper into the upper right door sensor slot callout 1 NOTE The paper must be thick enough to depress and hold in place the sensor actuator arm Figure 2 7 Defeating interlocks 1 of 2 156 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 3 Insert a folded piece of paper into the front door switch callout 1 Wait until the product enters the Ready state Ef NOTE The paper must be thick enough to depress and hold in place the sensor actuator arm Figure 2 8 Defeating interlocks 2 of 2 Disable cartridge check Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the product when the tone
261. d tray does not match the size specified for that tray Recommended action 1 Load the correct paper 2 Make sure that the paper is positioned correctly 3 Close the tray and then make sure that the control panel lists the correct size and type for the specified tray 4 f necessary use the control panel menus to reconfigure the size and type settings for the specified tray 5 If error persists use the Tray Bin manual sensor test to test the switch Sleep mode on Description The product is in sleep mode Pressing a control panel button receiving of a print job or an error condition clears this message Recommended action No action necessary Staple Cartridge 2 and 3 very low warning Description The specified staple cartridge is at end of life After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold the HP premium protection warranty ends 486 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Replace the staple cartridge Staple Cartridge X low warning Description The specified staple cartridge is at end of life After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold the HP premium protection warranty ends Recommended action Replace the staple cartridge Staple Cartridge low Description The product indicates when a supply level is low 20 to 50 staples remain in the cartridge Recommended action Replace the staple cartridge Stapler Stacker staple jam Description There is a stapler stacker jam
262. default for the selected language Keyboard Layout Each language has a default keyboard layout To change it Select the default keyboard layout that matches the M830 only select from a list of layouts language you want to use How to Connect Button Display Use this menu item to display or hide the How to Connect Button M830 only Hide on the Home screen Network Address Button Display Use this menu item to display or hide the IP address on the M806 only Hide Home screen Date and Time M830 only Show Date and Time Hide Date and Time Select whether to display or hide the date and time on the control panel Home screen Inactivity Timeout Range 10 300 seconds Default 60 seconds Specifies the amount of time that elapses between any activity on the control panel and when the product resets to the default settings When the timeout expires the control panel display returns to the Home menu and any user signed in to the product is signed out 302 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 49 Display Settings menu continued First level Second level Values Description Clearable Warnings On Use this feature to set the period that a clearable warning Job displays on the control panel If the On setting is selected clearable warnings appear until the Clearable Warnings button is pressed If theJob setting is selected clearable warnings stay on the display during the job that genera
263. dentials 32 1C 07 event code Backup restore permissions error There was an error during the creation read or write of the restore file ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 393 32 1C 08 event code Not enough disk space to perform backup restore or network share issue There was an error during the creation read or write of the backup file 32 1C 09 event code Tried to restore a backup file that was not valid for this product The data in the backup file specified in the restore job ticket is no longer valid due to a corruption of the data or no loner present 32 1C 0A event code Backup file is invalid The data in the backup file specified in the restore job ticket is no longer valid due to a corruption of the data or no loner present 32 1C 0D event code Backup restore failed auto reboot failed or the product might be busy 32 1C 11 event code Backup restore timeout while communicating with the engine The backup was aborted because the product is busy 32 1C 13 event code and 32 1C 14 event code Not enough space exists to perform the backup The backup was aborted because the disk is at a critical level or full Scheduled backup failure 32 1C 15 event code Restore aborted because the backup file was created by a previous version of firmware no longer supported by the feature 32 1C 2E event code The restore was aborted because the product is busy 32 1C 2F event code Reset failure 32 1C 40 event
264. dge of the output bin is detected when no paper is stacked When the power is turned on the stacker controller PCA drives the output bin 1 shift motor M107 and output bin 2 shift motor M108 to return the output bin to home position If already at home position the output bin is moved from the home position and then returned If both output bins are at home position this is performed for output bin 1 and then for output bin 2 If the product specifies output bin 2 the stacker controller PCA shifts the output bin so that output bin 2 is at the delivery port When paper is stacked on the output bin a prescribed number of pulses drive the output bin 1 shift motor M107 or output bin 2 shift motor M108 to lower the output bin Then the output bin returns to home position to prepare for the next stack The upper and lower limits of the output bin are detected by six area sensors PS981 PS982 PS983 PS984 PS985 and PS986 on the output bin 1 and output bin 2 shift area sensor PCA If the area sensor PCA detects the upper or lower limit of the output bin it stops driving the output bin 1 shift motor M107 and output bin 2 shift motor M108 Also the on off 102 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW combinations of the area sensors PS981 PS982 PS983 PS984 PS985 and PS986 are used to detect over stacking according to the stack height for large size and mixed stacking e The stacker controller PCA stops supplying 24 V to the output
265. dia does not reach the face down bin full sensor PS1452 in a designated amount of time after the face down output sensor PS1451 sensed the leading edge e 13 E1 D2 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Normal e 13 E1 D3 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Light 1 or Light 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode e 13 E1 D4 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 1 e 13 E1 D5 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 2 e 13 E1 DB Tools for troubleshooting 375 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Transparency 13 E1 DD The fuser is printing in fuser mode Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode Recommended action 1 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam A Reseatthe connections to the DC controller 4 Make sure that the delivery flags move smoothly 5 Open the following menus e Administration e X Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 6 Test the face down bin full sensor PS1452 using the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify the sensor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the delivery sensor assembly 7 Touch Component Test 8 Inspect the Left Door Diverter Assembly Test the Diverter solenoids SL1 and SL2001 to verify that the diverter is functioning correctly 9 Manually toggle the white activation rod in the diverter
266. display The user must upload the firmware to the product in order for it to function again Z CAUTION The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk The operating system firmware files and third party files among other files will be completely lost HP does not recommend this action Partial Clean The Partial Clean option erases all partitions and data on the disk drive except for the firmware repository where a backup copy of the firmware file is stored This allows the disk drive to be reformatted without having to download a firmware upgrade file to return the product to a bootable state Characteristics of a Partial Clean e Customer defined settings third party solutions firmware files and the operating system are deleted e X Rebooting the product restores the firmware files from the Repository location but does not restore any customer defined settings e Forprevious HP products a Hard Disk Initialization is similar to executing the Partial Clean function for this product A CAUTION HP recommends backing up product configuration data before executing a Partial Clean if you need to retain customer defined settings See the Backup Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu Reasons for performing Partial Clean e The product continually boots up in an error state E NOTE Try clearing the error prior to executing a Partial Clean e The product will not respond to c
267. document feeder Description This is a feed jam in the document feeder and the motor is not turning Recommended action 1 2 3 4 Verify that the paper meets the product specifications Make sure that the document feeder input tray is not overloaded Check the event log for document feeder errors and then resolve any errors first Open and close the top cover to see if the pick motor turns without posting this error If there is no error then the motor is good Verify that the motor cables are connected 392 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 6 Reseat the document feeder to the SCB 7 Replace the document feeder 31 13 15 Description This is a duplex refeed jam in the document feeder The paper jam occurs on the back side copy The duplex refeed does not make it to the deskew sensor Recommended action 1 Remove the jammed paper 2 Verify that there is nothing in the paper path of the duplex refeed area 3 Retry the copy job 4 Replace the document feeder 32 08 XX Error Messages 32 08 A1 32 08 A2 32 08 A3 Description 32 08 A1 event code Shutdown event boot after abnormal shutdown 32 08 A2 event code Boot from normal shutdown event 32 08 A3 event code Regular boot event Recommended action No action necessary 32 1C XX Description 32 1C 05 event code The restore job ticket was submitted with invalid credentials 32 1C 06 event code The backup job ticket was submitted with invalid cre
268. door 544 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 2 Move the lower delivery guide handle to the right and then remove any paper 3 Move the lower delivery guide handle to the left 4 Grasp the green handle and pull the staple carriage out 5 Pull the green handle of the stapler unit toward you and rotate it upward Push the handle in to lock it in the open position ENWW Clear jams 545 6 Grasp the edges of each staple cartridge and firmly pull up to remove the staple cartridges from the staple cartridge unit 7 Press down on the jam release at the back of the saddle staple cartridge push up on the plate at the front of the cartridge and then remove any jammed staples 8 Press down on the front of the saddle staple cartridge close it 546 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 9 Insert the staple cartridges 10 Pull the handle of the staple cartridge unit toward you and rotate it downward to its original position Lock it into position by pushing in the handle ENWW Clear jams 547 11 Push the saddle stitch carriage in NOTE If the saddle stitch carriage does not easily slide into the finisher the staple unit is not closed properly Pull the saddle stitch carriage out of the finisher and reseat the stapler unit 12 Close the front left door 548 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed The product does not pick up paper The product picks up multip
269. down This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 279 Table 2 45 Scan Digital Send Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Color Black Fourth level Values Automatically detect Color Black Gray Black Description Use to enable or disable color scanning Automatically detect Automatically scans documents in color if at least one page has color Color Scans documents in color Black Gray Scans documents in grayscale Black Scans documents in black and white with a compressed file size Original Size Selelct from a list of supported sizes Use to describe the page size of the original document Notification Do not notify Notify when job completes Notify only if job fails Configure to receive notification about the status of a sent document Do not notify Turns off this feature Notify when job completes Select to receive notification for this job only Print E mail Notify only if job fails Select to receive notification only if the job is not sent successfully Print Select to print the notification at this product Include Thumbnail NOTE When sending an analog fax select Include Thumbnail to receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification 280 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 45 Scan Di
270. down position 3 Grasp the handle of the toner cartridge and pull out to remove it ENWW Clear jams 497 4 Turn the green knob counter clockwise and then remove the jammed paper 5 Align the toner cartridge with its slot and then insert the toner cartridge into the product The toner cartridge will drop slightly when it is in place 498 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 6 Push the button on the lever and then rotate the toner cartridge lever to the up position 7 Close the front door ENWW Clear jams 499 Clear jams in Tray 1 1 If jammed paper is visible in Tray 1 clear the jam by pressing the jam release button under the tray and gently pulling the paper straight out 2 If you cannot remove the paper or if no jammed paper is visible in Tray 1 open the right door 3 If jammed paper is in the Tray 1 feed area lift the jam access cover and remove the paper 500 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 4 Pull the jam access cover lever out and then lift it to open it 5 Gently pull the paper out of the pickup area ENWW Clear jams 501 6 Pull the jam access cover lever out and then lower it to close it 7 Close the right door 502 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the right door 1 Open the right door 2 If there is jammed paper in the door lift the jam access cover and then gently pull the paper straight out Y X VC 3 If there is jamm
271. dress changes Solve problems ENWW 3 If you installed the product using a Microsoft standard TCP IP port use the hostname instead of the IP address 4 Ifthe IP address is correct delete the product and then add it again The computer is unable to communicate with the product 1 Test network communication by pinging the network a Opena command line prompt on your computer For Windows click Start click Run type cmd and then press Enter b Type ping followed by the IP address for your product For Mac OS X open the Network Utility and then supply the IP address in the correct field in the Ping pane c H the window displays round trip times the network is working 2 Ifthe ping command failed verify that the network hubs are on and then verify that the network settings the product and the computer are all configured for the same network The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network Hewlett Packard recommends leaving these settings in automatic mode the default setting If you change these settings you must also change them for your network New software programs might be causing compatibility problems Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct print driver The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly 1 Check the network drivers print drivers and the network redirection settings 2 Verify that the operating system i
272. drive roller and the deskew pinch rollers The paper is driven a preset distance past this point to create a buckle of paper allowing for skew correction 7 The deskew motor rotates to drive the deskew drive roller which pulls paper towards the prescan drive roller 8 The pick motor stops turning and allows both the pick and separator rollers to free spin while paper is being pulled in by the deskew drive roller 9 The feed motorrotates to drive paper into the prescan sensor The firmware registers the paper leading edge position as the prescan7 sensor is triggered 10 The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the paper leading edge a calibrated distance from prescan7 sensorto the simplex scan area The simplex scanner begins capturing scan data 11 Ifthe u frasonic sensor detects the trailing edge of the page and paper presence sensoris still activated more than one page was loaded in the input tray and the next page is fed starting with step 3 This is repeated for all pages loaded in the document feeder input tray 12 The prescan7 sensoris de activated when trailing edge of paper passes it The firmware registers this position as the trailing edge of the paper 13 The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the paper trailing edge through the preset distance from prescan7 sensorto the scan area The simplex scanner stops capturing scan data 14 The feed motor continues to rotate until the input trayis empty and all pages have be
273. drive assembly 59 05 50 or 59 05 60 Description A printer motor error occurred Main motor error e 59 05 50 Drum motor start up error e 59 05 60 Drum motor rotation error 422 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Run the drum motor test in the actuator drive mode to make sure that the drum motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the drum motor 3 Check the connector J60 of the drum motor and connector J222 on the DC controller PCA 4 If grinding or clicking noises occur with the error there might be other parts of the drive assembly causing the issue e Registration assembly e Drum feed drive assembly e PIU of Tray 2 and Tray 3 5 If this is the suspected cause and the exact part causing the issue cannot be determined all three parts should be replaced at the same time 6 If no noises are associated with the error and the drum motor has already been replaced replace the DC controller 60 00 0Y 62 00 00 Error Messages 60 00 02 Tray 2 lifting error Description Lifter driver assembly Tray 2 failure A tray lift motor error has occurred Recommended action 1 Onthe product control panel open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 2 Use the Tray Bin manual sensor test to make sure that the Tray 2 paper PS1409 and PS1410 surface sensors are functioning correctly 3 fthis part has been removed or
274. duct state When the product is initializing see Heartbeat LED product initialization on page 152 When the product is in Ready mode see Heartbeat LED product operational on page 155 Heartbeat LED product initialization The following table describes the heartbeat LED operation while the product is executing the firmware boot process Ey NOTE When the initialization process completes the heartbeat LED should be illuminated solid green If after initialization the heartbeat LED is not solid green see Heartbeat LED product operational on page 155 Table 2 10 Heartbeat LED product initialization Product initializing state Heartbeat LED normal state Heartbeat LED error state No power power cable Off Not applicable disconnected or power Switch off Power on immediately Red solid Red solid after the power switch pressed e Duration should be 1 second or less e Firmware error problem finding hardware and booting the serial peripheral interface flash memory Boot process halted Replace the formatter Serial peripheral Green solid Red solid interface SPI flash memory boot e Firmware error problem corrupt or missing SPI flash memory 152 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW Table 2 10 Heartbeat LED product initialization continued Product initializing state Heartbeat LED normal state Heartbeat LED error state E Boot process halted Replace the formatter
275. dware components sss eere ret ene nnne teen rer trn nn nn nennen 5 Table 1 3 eeler CT 8 Table 14 MOONS e dai 11 IUD o M P 12 Table 1 6 Fuser components EE 13 Table 1 7 Fuser control FUNCTIONS rrt aea oen o ERR ARP eR NE d ENEE ENEE dE 15 Table 1 8 Low voltage power supply functions sss enne 18 Table 1 9 High voltage power supply circuits sssssssssssseseeenee nennen 20 Table 1 10 Image formation process cccccececeeecceeeeeceeeeeeee eee ceceaeaaeaeeceeeeeeeeeeesecaaaaaeeeseeeeeeseeseceuccaeaeeeeeeeeeess 23 Table 1 11 Toner cartridge components ssssssssssessssee eene eene NEE AAEN EEE Ea e 24 Table 1 12 Document feeder sensors A 28 Table 1 13 Photo sensors and switches ccceceeceeeeeceeeeceeccaeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaccecsaecaaaaaecaeeeeeeeeeeseess 40 Table 1 14 Motors and solenoids paper path 42 Table 1 15 Tray 1 Jamrdetectlon 2r rer teer tne d Duke hi ex ee REL Rene e EE Ree M dne e bu 45 Table 1 16 Stapler stacker delivery modes sssssssssssssseeeeeneeeeeneen ener nnnm enne enn 49 Table La gue de EE 53 Table 1 18 Jams detected by the DC controller ennemis 54 Table 1 19 Jam detection ssssssssssssssssssssssseeeeeee eren ere nennen nnn nnnnn nennen nns n nsns s nnns nnne nnn EEEE EEEn sen nns 5
276. e lfyouare continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe main controller PCA set DIPSW4 to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 OFF e Switch 3 through switch 5 ON e Switch 6 and switch 7 OFF e Switch 8 ON 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following e First press of SW3 The switchback inlet flapper solenoid activates listen for the solenoid to activate e Second press of SW3 The switchback inlet flapper solenoid deactivates listen for the solenoid to deactivate Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to cause the solenoid to repeatedly activate and then deactivate 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSWA switches to the OFF setting x TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the solenoid is deactivated before continuing 6 If the solenoid fails the test replace the solenoid ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 189 Switchback roller alienation solenoid test 1 Do one of the following e l fthis is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e Ifyou are continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 On the main controller PCA set DIPSW4 to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 OFF e Switch 3 t
277. e paper Four off centering cams are on the hole punch shaft two off centering cams with punches for 2 hole punching and two off centering cams with punches for outside 4 hole punching The sensor flag is also on the hole punch shaft and the hole punch home position sensor detects the home position of the hole punch shaft When the hole punch shaft is at home position the hole punch home position sensor is turned on The hole punch motor clock sensor counts the clock pulse of hole punch motor by the encoder on the shaft so that the hole punch controller stops the hole punch motor at its home position Accordingly the hole punch shaft stops the home position for either 2 hole punching or 4 hole punching A 2 hole punch is operated by turning the hole punch shaft 180 degrees from its home position A 4 hole punch is operated by turning the hole punch shaft 360 degrees from its home position first to punch the inside 2 holes and then the outside 2 holes The hole punch chips are collected into the hole punch chip box The hole punch chip box full sensor detects if the box is filled with punch chips The operational sequence of the hole punching operation for 4 hole punching in a sheet of paper is as follows 1 The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the hole punch shaft 90 degrees clockwise 2 The inside 2 holes punching is operated 3 The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the hole punch shaft 18
278. e Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Print Stop Test 3 Enter a range and then touch the OK button After the print job is completed press OK button to return to the Troubleshooting menu before the timer times out After the timer times out touch the Stop button Activate the door switch to restart the engine and return it to a normal state EY NOTE If a jam message displays on the control panel during testing activate the door switch Component tests Control panel tests From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests Available control panel tests e LEDs test the LEDs on the control panel e Display sequence through display tests ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 163 e Buttons tests the keypad and other control panel buttons e Touchscreen tests the control panel touchscreen For control panel diagnostics see Control panel checks in the product troubleshooting service manual Component test special mode test This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly If you turn on the Repeat option from the drop down menu the test cycles the component on and off This process continues for two minutes and then the test terminates Ef NOTE The front or side door interlocks must be defeated to
279. e Make sure that the grounding frame assembly the bar with the wheel located between the engine and the finisher is in the down position with the wheel touching the floor and that the grounding plate is not damaged Ey NOTE The grounding frame assembly is in the up position when the finisher is shipped It must be lowered when the finisher is installed Make sure that the communication cable from the finisher to the engine is installed correctly Make sure that all packing materials have been removed from the paper handling accessory Make sure that the connectors on the PCA s for the device are fully seated and not damaged oa 2 Q Only if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the controller PCA in question 66 WX YZ Error Messages 66 00 20 Description Over Current Error This is an output device failure related message Recommended action There is no recommended action at this time 66 00 40 Description NVRAM Error This is a finisher control board NVRAM error The checksum for the finisher stacker controller PCA has an error when the power is turned on Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Make sure that the finisher is grounded correctly e Make sure that the finisher is latched and locked to the engine by tightening the thumbscrew inside the front door e Make sure that the grounding frame assembly the bar with the wheel located between the engi
280. e all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed If you are continuing from a previous saddle controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe saddle controller PCA set DIPSW to the following settings Switch 1 OFF Switch 2 ON Switch 3 and switch 4 OFF Switch 5 through switch 8 not used 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the saddle controller PCA press and release SW1 and then observe the following First press of SW1 The saddle feed motor rotates at a slow rate 130 mm sec 5 12 in sec Listen for the motor to slowly rotate Second press of SW1 The saddle feed motor rotates at a fast rate 200 mm sec 7 87 in sec Listen for the motor to increase rotation speed Third press of SW1 The saddle feed motor stops Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW1 to cause the motor to repeatedly rotate and then stop 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW switches to the OFF setting E 29 TIP that the motor is stopped before continuing If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure 6 Ifthe motor fails the test replace the defective assembly 192 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Paper folding motor test 1 Do one of the following e _If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e lfyouare continuing from a pre
281. e control panel A firmware download must be performed to return the system to a bootable state This item reinitializes the disk removing all data except the firmware repository where the master firmware bundle is downloaded and saved CAUTION Selecting the Partial Clean item removes all data except the firmware repository A delete confirmation prompt is not provided This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing the firmware image from the active directory without having to download new firmware code product remains bootable Change Password Select this item to set or change the administrator password Clear Password 132 Chapter2 Solve problems Select the Clear Password item to remove a password from the Administrator menu Before the password is actually cleared a message will be shown asking to confirm that the password should be cleared Press the OK button to confirm the action When the confirmation prompt displays press the OK button to clear the password ENWW Table 2 2 Preboot menu options 2 of 6 Description Select the Clear disk item to disable using an external device for job storage Job storage is normally enabled only for the Boot device This will be grayed out unless the 99 09 68 error is displayed Menu option First level Second level Third level Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk continued Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock mate a new secure disk
282. e date of purchase for the period specified above due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free If HP is unable within a reasonable time to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from a improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration b software interfacing parts or supplies not supplied by HP c unauthorized modification or misuse d operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product or e improper site preparation or maintenance TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty so the above lim
283. e displays only if the multipurpose tray is empty Size Type Prompt Display Do not display Controls whether the tray configuration message displays whenever a tray is closed Two options are available Display Shows the tray configuration message when a tray is closed The user is able to configure the tray settings directly from this message Do not display Prevents the tray configuration message from automatically appearing Use Another Tray Enabled Disabled 308 Chapter 2 Solve problems Use to turn on or off the control panel prompt to select another tray when the specified tray is empty Two options are available Enabled When this option is selected the user is prompted either to add paper to the selected tray or to choose a different tray Disabled When this option is selected the user is not given the option of selecting a different tray The product prompts the user to add paper to the tray that was initially selected ENWW Table 2 51 Manage Trays menu continued First level Values Description Alternative Letterhead Mode Disabled Use to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way for all print jobs Enabled whether you are printing to one side of the sheet or to both sides of the sheet When this option is selected load the paper as you would for printing on both sides See the user documentation that came with the product for instructions about loading letterhe
284. e drum pitch Fuser Temp Mode If you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated at the bottom of the page or on the following page first make sure the paper type Adjust Paper Types menu and Print Mode settings are correct for the type of paper you are using If you continue to see ghost images on your print jobs set the Fuser Temp feature to one of these settings Normal Up Down Paper Curl Mode Use in high humidity and high temperature environments The Alternate setting decreases fuser temperature and increases the interpage gap Table 2 59 MP modes under the Optimize submenu Joe a e v X Xnt Environment Set to Normal if the product is operating in a low temperature environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image Background Set to Alternate when a background occurs all over the page Pre Rotation Set to Alternate when horizontal banding occurs with the drum pitch Line Detail Set to Alternate when color misregistration occurs Moisture Control Restore Optimize Use this item to reset the menu defaults 552 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Solve image quality problems Often print quality problems can be resolved easily by making sure that the product is maintained using paper that meets HP specifications or running a cleaning page Image defects tab
285. e event log for 31 03 30 errors and and then resolve those errors first Clean the document feeder roller o o n ogg bh Oo DN Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Scanner Tests 10 Actuate the Pick Success Sensor If the sensor does not show functionality when tested replace the document feeder Description The paper passed the pick success sensor and then jammed in the document feeder paper path Recommended action 1 Clear the paper path and try feeding the page again 2 Verify that the paper meets the product specifications 3 Check the paper guides and make sure that they are set to the correct paper width 4 Verify that the paper path is clear Tools for troubleshooting 391 31 13 13 Check for motor stall 31 03 31 and 31 03 32 errors Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Scanner Tests Actuate the Paper Path Sensor 1 If the sensor does not show functionality when tested replace the document feeder Description The jam access door is open Recommended action 1 2 3 4 31 13 14 Verify that the jam access cover is closed Try feeding the paper again Verify that the flag is not broken off Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Scanner Tests Actuate the ADF Jam Cover Sensor If the sensor does not show functionality when tested replace the
286. e installed After evaluating the configuration pages see step 5 Are all the accessories installed Yes 4 5 Does the print quality meet the customer s Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect requirements tables See the images defects table in the product service Print quality manual Yes No After the print quality is acceptable see step 6 6 Can the customer print successfully from the Verify that all I O cables are connected correctly and that a valid host computer IP address is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page Interface Yes This is the end of No gt If error messages display on the control panel when you try to the troubleshooting print an event log see the control panel message section of the process service manual When the customer can print from the host computer this is the end of the troubleshooting process Power subsystem Power on checks The basic product functions should start up when the product is connected into an electrical outlet and the power switch is pushed to the o7 position If the product does not start use the information in this section to isolate and solve the problem If the control panel display remains blank random patterns display or asterisks remain on the control panel display perform power on checks to find the cause of the problem Power on troubleshooting overview During normal operation a cooling fan begins to spin brief
287. e product was refurbished Document Feeder Kit Count Total number of pages since the document NOTE M830 product only feeder kit was replaced Document Feeder Kit Interval Use this item to set the interval that causes the NOTE M830 product only product to prompt the customer to replace document feeder maintenance kit Clean Rollers Count Total number of pages since the document NOTE M830 product only feeder rollers were cleaned 564 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW First level Second level Clean Rollers Interval NOTE M830 product only Value Description Use this item to set the interval that causes the product to prompt the customer to clean the document feeder rollers and separation pad ADF Count NOTE M830 product only Flatbed Count NOTE M830 product only Set the total pages fed through the document feeder Set the total pages scanned from the flatbed ADF Simplex Count NOTE M830 product only Set the total single sided pages fed through the document feeder ADF Duplex Count NOTE M830 product only Copy Scan Count NOTE M830 product only Set the total two sided pages fed through the document feeder Set the total copy pages that have been scanned Send Scan Count NOTE M830 product only Set the number of scanned pages sent to email Fax Scan Count NOTE FAX models only Set the number of scanned pages tha
288. e puncher assembly Figure 1 80 Stapler stacker assembly sensors The stapler stacker detects the following stapler stacker jams Inlet delay jam e When the paper is fed switched back and hole punching is not operated ENWW Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 109 The inlet sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the switchback inlet sensor detects the trailing edge e When the paper is fed straight and hole punching is not operated The inlet sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the switchback inlet sensor detects the leading edge e When hole punching is operated The inlet sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period of time from when the trailing edge detection sensor detects the leading edge 110 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Booklet maker The booklet maker is an optional accessory that can be installed on the left side of the product The booklet maker delivers the printed paper to the output bin or saddle output bin There are three types of delivery method simple stacking stack job offset and staple delivery The stacker controller and saddle stitcher controller control the operational sequence of the booklet maker The product ENWW separation sensor detects whether the booklet maker is connected to the p
289. e that the fan runs briefly which indicates that the power supply is operational Make sure that the control panel display wire harness is connected 9v de wx UM Make sure that the formatter is seated and operating correctly Turn off the product and remove the formatter Reinstall the formatter make sure the power switch is in the on position and then verify that the heartbeat LED is blinking 6 Remove any external solutions and then try to turn the product on again A NOTE If the control panel display is blank but the main cooling fan runs briefly after the product power is turned on try printing an engine test page to determine whether the problem is with the control panel display formatter or other product assemblies Control panel checks The product includes a diagnostic test mode for the control panel This mode allows you to troubleshoot issues with the touchscreen the Speaker and the Home button xX TIP To diagnose control panel problems see Control panel diagnostic flowcharts on page 144 Ey NOTE Some of the diagnostic tests are for factory use only Open diagnostic mode e Tilt the control panel forward On the back side of the control panel remove the round black rubber cover near the center of the control panel and then press the button inside the hole to access the diagnostic mode Repeatedly pressing the button will scroll through additional screens on the control panel display Continu
290. e to press the button to scroll back to the diagnostic mode main test screen Exit diagnostic mode Do one of the following Touch the Cancel G9 button e Wait 20 seconds The control panel will return to the Home screen Table 2 8 Control panel diagnostic functions Item Description Remarks Exits a test Cancel button ENWW Troubleshooting process 141 Table 2 8 Control panel diagnostic functions continued Item Description oleaje HS Lois Keypad Selects test settings in some of the test windows Remarks Verifies that all areas respond to a touch Red grid touch test Checks calibration Calibration touch test Selects a test pattern to view on the display Touchscreen LED display test Speaker test Tests sounds Use this item to check the accuracy of the touch screen Use a finger or 3 mm 118 in conductive stylus to trace between the grid lines to check the accuracy of the touchscreen calibration NOTE The gap between the grid lines is 6 mm 236 in When the screen is touched a line or a dot displays on the screen the X and Y coordinates of the position on the screen are also displayed Use this item to determine if the touchscreen calibration is within the acceptable range When selected ten target points and the X and Y coordinates of the position of the target point display on the screen Touching a target causes the X and Y coordinate
291. e to select it 4 Touch the View button to view the information on the control panel or touch the Print button to print the pages NOTE The View button is available only for the M830 product Figure 2 52 Configuration page Configuration Page HP LaserJet M806 Device Information O Memory Product Name HP LaserJet M806 Total RAM 1024 MB n Nane p o des Ki Model Number DC Control ler Version 6 117 QO Event Log Tray 1 Version 3 103 Number of Entries in Use 4 Duplex Unit Version 2 103 Three Most Recent Entries HCI Tray Version 3 101 Number Cycles Event Device Serial Number MT10100145 4 4543 10 99 40 Formatter Number WT001D 3 4508 10 99 40 Firmware Version FutureSmart 3 Beta 2 0 10 00 15 2354063 383867 Dr Revision DRA irmare Datecode Securit Service 10 23142 Q ep ty Ms e PS Wait Time out 300 seconds Hard Disk Encryption Status Engine Cycles 4661 Interna Disk Drive is not yet encrypted Not weighted for billing Job Data Encryption Status Encrypted Job Data Persistence Persistent not volatile e Installed Personalities and Options TOS POR Non Secure Fast Erase No PCL 20010402 Contro Panel Password Disabled PCLXL 20010402 Support Key FCEA R amp WB DSYN POSTSCRIPT 20010402 Host USB plug and play Enabled POF 20050131 Device US8 Enabled AirPrint 2040201 Interna Disk Hand Disk Enabled Serial Number WOVSCH49 Q Paper Trays and Options Model HP Secure Hard Disk Defau
292. e white foam reflector Click here for more details 2 If the 30 01 02 message cannot be cleared a sensor might still be blocked by a piece of paper There are two other sensors used to detect media jammed in the document feeder Continue with the following troubleshooting Troubleshooting the internal jam sensors There are two other sensors that need to be checked when a 31 01 02 is persistent The feed sensor is located in the paper path just before the ADF float The exit sensor is located just after the ADF float A business card can be used to flush the area around the sensors to determine if a scrap of paper or possibly a paper clip is causing a false jam indication If either sensor is found defective the ADF must be replaced a Open the ADF top cover and insert a business card from above to clear the feed sensor b Insert a business card from below to clear the exit sensor 31 01 03 Document feeder pick error Description The document feeder pick or mis pick error occurs when a page cannot be fed from the input tray Recommended action 1 Verify that the roller assembly and separation pad are installed correctly a Open the top cover of the ADF b Push down on the separation pad and then release it It should spring back up If it does not the spring might be missing NOTE The separation pad assembly is mounted to a spring loaded paper access guide which also moves when pushed down c Close the ADF to
293. ear its end of life can cause this event code 10 XX 34 Used Supply In Use Description The toner cartridge is used 10 00 34 event code Black toner cartridge Recommended action If you believe this is a genuine HP supply go to www hp com go anticounterfeit Removing a cartridge from one product and then installing it in a different product for testing functionality will cause this event code 10 XX 40 Genuine HP Supplies Installed Description A genuine HP toner cartridge has been installed 10 00 40 event code Black toner cartridge Recommended action No action necessary 10 XX 41 Unsupported Supply in Use Description The installed toner cartridge is for a different product 10 00 41 event code Black toner cartridge Recommended action Remove the toner cartridge and then install the correct cartridge for this product See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct cartridge part number 10 XX 70 Printing past very low Description The product indicates when a supply level is very low The actual remaining toner cartridge life might vary 332 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW You do not need to replace the toner cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold the HP premium protection warranty ends 10 00 70 event code Black toner cartridge Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable replace the toner cartridge
294. ececc nusnccncecissstetencceaeeyssstencncnedenpesnuanendacetedevennnctces Printing stoppe Printing Supplies Status Page Printing Usage Page axe tet co Dei otim ile Printing engine test ssssssssssseee ee Processing job from tray X Do not grab paper until job elle EE Processing EE Processing copy X of ey RAM disk device failure To clear touch OK sssssss RAM disk file operation failed To clear touch OK RAM disk file system is full To clear touch OK ecce RAM disk is write protected To clear touch OK ssesssessssesssessen RAM disk not initialized sssssssss HH xix XX Reinsert duplexver cece cece eee e eee e aaa teeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 483 Remove one toner cartridge ceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeentaeeeeeeeeeenaaees 483 Remove USB accessoty oet dt geek tee P bee gie 483 Replace Supply sss 483 Replace supplies sss 484 Resend external accessory firmware sees 484 Resend Upgrade rp DEED REPRE 485 Restore Factory Settings ssssssseen 485 ROM disk device failed To clear touch ORT 485 ROM disk file operation failed To clear touch OK 485 ROM disk file system is full To clear touch OK 485 ROM disk is write protected To clear touch OK 485 ROM disk
295. ectronic hardware recycling 600 embedded web server 576 end of life disposal 599 engine diagnostics 156 test page 158 engine control system 7 environmental stewardship program 597 Eurasian conformity 613 event log clear 495 564 information 253 print 495 view 495 event log messages 494 F fans 12 fax feeding problems 574 FCC regulations 596 feed and delivery operation booklet maker 119 feedsystem 39 feed and delivery operation hole punch 74 hole puncher assembly 81 stapler stacker 74 stapler stacker assembly 87 switchback assembly 77 feeding problems 574 Finnish laser safety statement 610 firmware 576 date codes 253 determine installed revision 576 upgrade 576 version information 251 flash memory card 5 formatter lights 151 resets after replacing 564 formatter control system 5 formatter lights 151 fraud Web site 583 front door jams 497 fuser jams 516 fuser heater protection 15 fuser control circuit 13 H hardware integration pocket HIP is not functionin 150 HCI 3 500 sheet high capacity input 57 cassette media size detection and cassette presence detection 65 motor control 61 motor failure 62 pickup feed operation 63 HCI feeder controller PCA connectors 217 high voltage power supply HVPS 19 hole punch feed and delivery operation 74 jam detection 105 motor failure detection 72 motors 72 hole punch accessory connection jams 530 jams 527 hole punch motor failure 73 hole puncher assembly fe
296. ects the leading edge HCI no pick jam 4 The MP tray Tray 1 media feed sensor in the product does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the media feed sensor detects the leading edge 66 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Jam HCI Residual paper jam Causes and conditions Any one of the following sensor detects a paper presence when the product is turned off when the door is closed or when the product is released from Power save mode Sleep mode active off or inactive off e Media feed sensor e Right cassette media feed sensor e Leftcassette media feed sensor HCI right door open jam The right door open is detected during a paper feed operation 3 500 sheet high capacity input HCI feeder 67 Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch The stapler stacker is optionally installed at the side of the product The stapler stacker delivers the printed paper to the output bin or delivers the set of printed paper after stapling The stapler stacker with hole puncher assembly operates hole punching in addition to the standard stapler stacker function The stacker controller controls the operational sequence of the stapler stacker The stacker controller and the hole punch controller control the operational sequence of the stapler stacker with hole puncher assembly The product separation sensor detects whether the stapler stacker is connected to the product Fi
297. ed and delivery system Figure 1 23 Photo sensors and switches PS1452 PS2501 PS2502 OO a AQ C2 PS502 Xe PS9 AO Aa PS2 PS3 fa S A PS2 s2003 N O A A Pss V PS2004 PS2005 OO Ps1409 PS1402 Ps1410 V VO PS1401 PS1405 P1406 CO PS1413 V PS1411 Tm PS1412 V VO NC PS1407 xc E S arg Table 1 13 Photo sensors and switches i Abbreviation Component name Sw2 Tray 2 media length switch Sw3 Tray 2 media width switch SW4 Tray 3 media length switch SW5 Tray 3 media width switch PS1 Right media width sensor PS2 Left media width sensor PS3 Center media width sensor PS4 TOP sensor PS8 Tray 2 feed sensor C PS9 Loop sensor PS502 Fuser delivery sensor 40 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Table 1 13 Photo sensors and switches continued Abbreviation Component name PS1401 Tray 2 feed sensor B PS1402 Tray 2 feed sensor A PS1403 Tray 3 feed sensor B PS1404 Tray 3 feed sensor A PS1405 Tray 2 media level sensor 1 PS1406 Tray 2 media level sensor 2 PS1407 Tray 3 media level sensor 1 PS1408 Tray 3 media level sensor 2 PS1409 Tray 2 media surface sensor PS1410 Tray 2 media presence sensor PS1411 Tray 3 media surface sensor PS1412 Tray 3 media presence sensor PS1413 Cassette pickup roller home position sensor PS1451 Face down tray delivery senso
298. ed E 78 Figure 1 44 Switchback feed to the pass through assembly hole puncher assembly without hole PUNCHING GPELAUOM Mec EET 79 Switchback feed to the hole puncher assembly with hole punching operation 80 Hole puncher assembly 22 visage e rete Weave Eege aaa d RET RE eee Eve ead en ccn 81 Operation of 4 hole punching nn en rnm nnn nnn nn nn sn annann anneren tnnt 86 Paper path when set to non sort ecceccececeeeeeeeeeceeaecaaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeaaeeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeneeaeess 87 Paper path for sizes other than A4 B5 or TR 88 Paper patil Of 5 titii rac nit stt but iita ete ter lt uh 89 Paper path 2 of 5 pss ede Le dte LL Lets esee E ve ue EE e tau aiia ne Ee Y ce ds 89 Paper pamti OT 5 eiii cedere e ertt edet e Bet der adc ee dort ca ele 89 aper Batter Seege Reeder eoo bat nibhut ciuis ase debe ti Duns 90 Paper path 5b of 5 edocet LR EE DOE eaae OR ede d o de dd 90 Stapler stacker assernbly 4 ect d tae ee dece a Ata eodd e tee ennt 91 PROCESS OUTPUT DIM tte ETE 91 Motors and sensors for stack job offset eee ceeeeeceeeeee eter eeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeseeeaaeeeeeeseenaeeeeeeneeaaes 92 Stack job offset lune 92 Job offset operation 1 Of 2 EE 92 Job offset operation 2 of 21 93 Stack trailing edge assist operation essssssnneenne eene nennen 94 ele EE 94 iae REP 95 Staple locationys M ML V M Geta 95 Pape
299. ed action 1 Touch the OK button to clear the error 2 Ifthe error persists turn off the product and then remove and reinstall the hard drive 3 Turn on the product 4 If the error persists replace the internal hard drive Internal disk file operation failed Description A PJL system command attempted to perform an invalid operation such as downloading a file to a nonexistent directory Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error 474 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Internal disk file system is full Description A PJL system command attempted to write data to the internal disk but failed because the disk is full Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error Internal disk is write protected Description The internal disk is write protected and no new files can be written to it Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error Internal disk not found Description The internal disk was not found at start up Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Internal disk not functional Description 82 0X YY event code The internal hard drive is not functioning correctly Recommended action 1 Turn off the product and then remove and reinstall the hard drive 2 Turn on the product 3 Ifthe error persists replace the internal hard drive Internal disk not initialized Description The file system on the internal disk must be initialized before it can be used Recomme
300. ed and delivery operation 81 hole uncher assembly jam detection 108 home button is unresponsive 149 HP Customer Care 590 HP embedded Jetdirect page 251 HP fraud Web site 583 HP Jetdirect Inside JDI 5 HP Jetdirect print server configuration page 251 lights 151 HVPS high voltage power supply 19 l image quality issues examples and solutions 553 image formation process 23 system 22 imaging drums diagnostic test 157 individual component disagnostics 151 initial rotation INTR state 3 installation date calculation 566 interlocks defeating 156 INTR initial rotation state 3 IPv4 information 252 IPv6 information 252 J jam detection booklet maker 125 hole puncher assembly 108 stapler stacker 105 stapler stacker assembly 109 switchback assembly 106 jams auto navigation 496 booklet maker 538 causes of 496 550 detection 53 diagnostic test for 158 duplexer 511 front door 497 hole punch accessory 527 hole punch accessory connection 530 left door fuser area 516 paper 550 right door 503 staple in hole punch accessory 523 534 542 stapler stacker 521 522 541 staples in booklet maker 544 Tray 1 500 Tray 2 and Tray 3 506 Tray 4and Tray5 507 Japanese VCCI statement 609 JDI HP Jetdirect Inside 5 Jetdirect Inside JDI 5 Jetdirect print server 251 lights 151 K Korean EMC statement 610 L laser safety statements 609 610 laser scanner operations 21 system 21 last rotation LSTR state 3 LCD contr
301. ed paper visible at the bottom of the door gently pull it straight down ENWW Clear jams 503 4 Pull the jam access cover lever out and then lift it to open it 5 Gently pull the paper out of the pickup area 504 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 6 Pull the jam access cover lever out and then lower it to close it 7 Close the right door ENWW Clear jams 505 Clear jams in Tray 2 and Tray 3 Ef NOTE The procedure to clear jams for Tray 3 is the same as for Tray 2 Only Tray 2 is shown here 1 Open the tray 2 Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper 3 Reinsert and close the tray 506 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in Tray 4 and Tray 5 1 Open the right and left trays NOTE You do not need to load both trays at the same time 2 Remove the paper from the trays and discard any damaged sheets 3 Above the right side tray press the green button to release the jam access plate ENWW Clear jams 507 4 If jammed paper is in the feed area pull it down to remove it 5 Push up on the jam access plate to close it 6 Load full reams of paper into each side of the tray The right side holds 1 500 sheets of paper The left side holds 2 000 sheets of paper NOTE For best results load full reams of paper Avoid dividing reams into smaller sections 508 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 7 Close the right and left trays 8 Open the jam access
302. edge motor M109 has been turned on for 3 seconds Recommended action 1 Onthe product control panel open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Component Test 2 Testtrailing edge motor M109 stack trailing edge assist motor 3 If the trailing edge assist guide does not move perform the following steps 4 Make sure that connector J4 on the stacker controller PCA is fully seated and not damaged also check the wiring at motor M109 and sensor P1109 5 Replace the operation tray assembly processing tray 6 Onlyifthe error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the Stacker Description Stacker CPU Communication error Occurs when the finisher s stacker controller board has had an internal communication problem between the two processors on the board Tools for troubleshooting 435 Recommended action 1 Make sure that the finisher is properly grounded 2 Ensure that the finisher is latched and locked to the engine by tightening the thumbscrew inside the front door 3 Ensure that the grounding frame assembly the bar with the wheel located between the engine and the finisher is in the down position with the wheel touching the floor 66 60 50 Description Stacker CPU sequence error Occurs when the finisher s stacker controller board has had an internal sequence problem Recommended action 1 Make sure that the finisher is properly grounded 2 Ensure that
303. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneees 43 Media level detectionm i e EA oet EE ak bet apie bate pedit a tan 43 Multi feed prevention sssssssssssssssssessesee nennen nent 43 Transparency media detection enne 44 Fuser wrapping jam detection ssssseeeenm emm eene 44 RUNE EDT MEE NEEDED EET DES 44 Tray 1 driver POR iiec decies eerte di eee vb amete E 44 Fray power Supply TTT 44 Tray 1 sequence of operation ssssssssssssssssssssssseseeern erret 45 Tray 1 pickup and feed 45 Tray ee e ET 45 BAY 2 ANG T ray 3 s E 46 Tray 2 cassette pickup sssssssssssssssseeeene eene nenne 46 Tray 2 cassette multiple feed prevention sssssseseessseseeseeee 48 Tray 2 cassette media size detection and Tray 2 cassette presence detection UTE 49 Tray 2 cassette lift up operation ssssssssssssseeeeeenees 50 Tray media presence detection sssssssssseeenenn 52 Jam detection RTE 53 3 500 sheet high capacity input HCI feeder nennen 57 HCI electrical components eene eene er m nmn nens sn nnne nnn entere 59 HCI motor control 1 cued ed eee eval epe i e a ed o ae De addres 61 HCI motor failure detection sssssssseeeeeeeeee nnne 62 HCI pickup and feed operation ee en neret nnne nennen 63 HCI lift up operation sssssesseseseennenne nnnm nnne nennen 64 HCI cassette media size detection and cassette presence detection
304. ege ee een ec oed 444 GEI EE 445 Sho a S 446 60 904 RE 447 GEET 448 66 90 43 Lan io eletti qt tbt a et ueni detect 449 Ee MM Le AMETS T ori ca 449 66 90 45 tani nasal HE d e de re vedas C EDIT HOO 450 ET 451 Glen RM LEE 452 69 1 En CEET 452 ZU ee Y Error Messages oe pt e e e bea i ee be e e o ER 453 70 00 00 Error To continue turn off then on sssssssss 453 80 XX YY 82 XX YY Error Messages sssese een 453 80 0X YY Embedded Jetdirect Error AAA 453 82 3 40 E 454 98 0X 0Y Error Messages eene nnn 454 98 00 01 or 98 01 00 Corrupt data in firmware volume 454 98 00 02 Corrupt data in the solutions volume 454 98 00 03 Corrupt data in the configuration volume 455 98 00 04 Corrupt data in the job data volume 455 99 XX Y Y Error Messages teet DH DRE IEEE DIU RR e Da EST ER ER 455 99 00 01 Upgrade not performed file is corrupt 455 99 00 02 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive 455 99 00 03 Upgrade not performed error writing to disk 456 99 00 04 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive 456 99 00 05 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive 456 99 00 06 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade 456 99 00 07 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade
305. ei met tices Eal IE d 2 i a mr wel OI e onoj CO QNS a Ss ua3 T7 ano was T ed EL E3 no veria em Soo 4 Cl oe Se EE E Beie BEA o ser El S ze vw OND WU el 5 le NI TE SIS SITES Va SE o El zem Fer ES FF od I g I T xro AE fet oe wot E e Edo RE S om UNS 2 em i ZORI 18 amp TORT Lais Ki El e g 8 8 La ln D mes 8L E Eg 5 E ms SC um tid 1 I I i mm suer sor m HMMM HHH CECH vtstztetztz FETU l a a EEE a EREE BER PEE BEER Ip BER I PPENEEEE BEE BEER EERE 3g 3g EEEE EEEEEREE EEBBEREBED alee l l l l l l l l ELLA m v Em H H n V E T weis oO 238 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Figure 2 44 General circuit diagram finishing accessories 1 of 6 e o l m lt x O a t 3 UNS 8 T S H e dqTisna 4 o gt e a I e Lao Sam zi S al q o 3 a o9 ke a E ni 3 2 A S Semer S E E 8 Ki Wid asa fe S stoe e o o 2 5 Sch c a GL E r UNS USSSU TNI mes P ASF 3 o TST ese S a IW mem TUS n E e a ELGA UNS men 4 UTWOH E Two Lig erem S NaS dH HONNd SS c r A z 5 B UNS 3 E id D Hj NaS 10 HONNA as g H E TDI 8 Wee TES A N NHM N3S dH 93H vt Y e NHM Y NDS Le Es RSS SOOT VE g x A E D H z
306. en an browser window 2 Enterthe product IP address in the URL line 3 Select the Firmware Upgrade link from within the Troubleshooting tab Ey NOTE If you get a warning screen follow the instructions for setting an administrator password from the Security tab 4 Browse to the location that the firmware upgrade file was downloaded to and then select the firmware file Select the Install button to perform the upgrade Ey NOTE Do not close the browser window until the HP Embedded Web Server EWS displays the confirmation page 5 Select Restart Now from the EWS confirmation page or turn the product off and then on again using the power switch 576 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW USB flash drive Preboot menu ENWW 1 Copy the xxxxxxx bd1 file to a portable USB flash drive 2 Turn the product on 3 The HP logo displays on the product control panel When an underscore displays below the HP logo touch the logo to open the Preboot menu 4 Touch the down arrow button to highlight Administrator and then touch the OK button 5 Touch the down arrow button to highlight Download and then touch the OK button 6 Insert the USB flash drive with the xxxxxxx bd1 file on it B NOTE If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found displays on the control panel display you might need to connect the storage device to the external USB connection on the formatter or try using a different portable storage device 7 To
307. en fed through the document feeder 15 The ff motor rotates to lower the lift plate to the home position and the document feeder is in a ready state for the next scan operation Document feeder duplex operation Following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder duplex job Figure 1 14 Duplex operation paper path SCH Simplex scan 30 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 The paper presence sensor is activated when paper is loaded onto the input tray The ff motor rotates to raise the lift plate until the maximum height is reached or the sfack height sensoris triggered The pick motor rotates to lower the pick roller and start picking the loaded paper The ultrasonic sensor detects if more than one page passes the separation roller If there is a multipick the document feeder stops and an error message appears on the control panel display The deskew sensor is activated when the leading edge of the paper is driven passed it The firmware registers the leading edge of the paper position The leading edge of the paper is continues to be driven into the pinch point of the deskew drive roller
308. enable wireless direct print for mobile devices Frequency 2 4Ghz to 2 5Ghz ISM band WiFi 13 56mhz ISO IEC 18000 3 NFC Bandwidth 1Mhz Bandwidth WiFi 14Khz bandwidth 7Khz off center 13 56Mhz NFC Modulation DSSS OFDM modulation WiFi Effective Radiate Power ERP Power output max 20dBm WiFi Power output is 23dBm into an 50 ohm transformer NFC which translates to a lower Note Power out max for WiFi can be different in some regions and controlled by FW Specifications WiFi has 13 Channel support a spacing of 20MHz for B G amp N modes NFC is cable of reading writing via the following speeds 424 kbit s Manchester 10 ASK Manchester 10 ASK 212 kbit s Manchester 10 ASK Manchester 10 ASK 106 kbit s Modified Miller 100 ASK Manchester 10 ASK Integrated module utilizes a USB 2 0 backplane interface Other Capabilities Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data whatsoever Yes x No If Yes please describe below Purpose Specifications Author Information Name Title Email Business Unit Security Technical IPG Marketing Engineer Date Prepared 08 12 13 608 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Safety statements Laser safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for
309. ensitive drum is dirty Replace the toner cartridge The fuser roller or pressure roller is dirty Execute a Pressure roller clean mode procedure If the dirt does not come off replace the fuser NOTE Cleaning the fuser with HP tough paper provides better results than with plain paper You might need to execute the cleaning process several times to remove all contaminants on the fuser Repetitive horizontal lines appear See repetitive image defect ruler Clean the indicated roller If the contaminant does not come off replace appropriate roller or assembly Pages have flecks of toner on them AOBBCO Abt ef AoeBGe AIR Execute a cleaning page to clean the contaminant off the fuser The cleaning page might need to be run several time to clean the fuser Do not replace the fuser NOTE Cleaning the fuser with HP tough paper provides better results than with plain paper You might need to execute the cleaning process several times to remove all contaminants on the fuser 556 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 60 Image defects table continued Problem Sample Cause Solution Vertical density variations The surface of the Replace the toner cartridge appear on the page photosensitive drum has deteriorated The laser scanner is Replace the laser scanner defective assembly Repetitive white spots appear in the image Repetitive white spots appear See repetitive image defect
310. eplace the Fuser Drive Assembly 8 Inspect the Left Door Diverter Assembly Test the Diverter solenoids SL1 and SL2001 to verify that the diverter is functioning correctly If it is not replace the assembly 9 Testand check the intermediate delivery roller Replace the face down delivery assembly as needed 13 B9 Bz Description Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when a near complete overlap less than 5 to 15 mm of non overlap multi feed jam is detected A multi feed jam 13 B9 Bz can be related to the following codes 41 03 Az size misprint 50 9x yz fuser error 364 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 B2 Az jam bad media in source tray 13 B9 B1 Multi Feed jam is detected when printing from Tray 1 13 B9 B2 Multi Feed jam is detected when printing from Tray 2 13 B9 B3 Multi Feed jam is detected when printing from Tray 3 13 B9 B4 Multi Feed jam is detected when printing from Tray 4 13 B9 B5 Multi Feed jam is detected when printing from Tray 5 13 B9 BD Multi Feed jam is detected when printing from the Duplexer Recommended action 1 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Make sure the media meets HP specifications and is loaded in the trays correctly 4 Make sure that the pickup feed and separation roller for the specified tray are installed correctly and show no damage or wear 5 Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers
311. eplace the SCB Tools for troubleshooting 381 30 01 15 Description Scanner did not initialize internal error The scanner failed to be initialized due to an internal error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Verify that all covers are installed correctly and that the ADF and ADF jam cover are closed 3 Check all sensors on the scanner to ensure they are not blocked 4 Ifthe error persists replace the scanner flatbed assembly 30 01 18 Description Scanner internal optical sensor error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Make sure that all the connectors on the SCB are seated fully 3 Make sure that the MFP has the latest SCB firmware version 4 replace the SCB 5 Ifthe error persists replace the optics or the entire scanner unit 30 01 19 Description Scanner internal lamp sensor error Recommended action 1 2 3 Turn the product off and then on again Test the lower lamp using the Scanner test located in the Diagnostics menu Replace the scanner lamp 30 01 23 Scanner calibration failure Description The scanner calibration failed 382 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 After the product warms up repeat the calibration process 3 If the error persists replace the scanner 30 01 30 or 30 01 32 30 01 36 30 01 41 30 01 42 ENWW Description HP
312. er and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e Ifyou are continuing from a previous saddle controller PCA test go to step 2 2 On the saddle controller PCA set DIPSW to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 and switch 3 OFF e Switch 4 ON e Switch 5 through switch 8 not used 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the saddle controller PCA press and release SW1 and then observe the following e First press of SW1 The booklet alignment plate moves to the home position listen for the plate to move e Second press of SW1 The booklet alignment plate moves to the A4 P pre position listen for the plate to move e Third press of SW1 The booklet alignment plate moves to the A4 P alignment position listen for the plate to move Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW1 to cause the plate to move from position to position 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW switches to the OFF setting o TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the plate is in the home position before continuing 6 Ifthe plate fails the test replace the defective assembly 196 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Paper position plate test 1 Do one of the following e _ If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e lfyouare continuing from a pr
313. er Selection Values Automatic Select from a list of the trays Description Sides 1 sided 2 sided Use to describe the layout for each side of the original document First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides Then touch the Orientation setting to indicate whether the original has portrait or landscape orientation If it is printed on both sides also select the 2 sided format that matches the original document Enable Fax Forwarding Fax Forwarding Disabled Enabled Use to forward received faxes to another fax machine Type of Fax Job to Forward All faxes Sent faxes Received faxes Fax Forwarding Number Clear Fax Activity Log Clears all events from the Fax Activity Log list 296 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW General Print Settings menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the General Print Settings menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 47 General Print Settings menu First level Manual Feed Courier Font Wide A4 Values Enabled Disabled Regular Dark Enabled Disabled Description Use to enable or disable the manual feed feature which allows the user to feed paper into the product by hand When this feature is enabled the user can select manual feed from the control panel as
314. er according to the MEDIA SIZE signal sent from the product 82 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW 3 The hole punch controller drives the side registration motor so that the hole punch slide assembly moves further toward the front side of the staple stacker to its specified position Side registration sensor 1 LED1 PTR1 e Detects side edge of A3 A4 R Ledger and Letter R sized paper ine Side registration sensor 2 LED2 PTR2 Detects side edge of B4 B5 R Legal and Letter sized paper Side registration sensor 3 LED3 PTR3 Detects side edge of A4 sized paper Side registration sensor 4 LED4 PTR4 Detects side edge of B5 sized paper 4 When the trailing edge sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper the hole punch controller stops the hole punch feed motor accordingly and the paper stops 5 The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to punch holes in the paper Trailing edge sensor LEDS PTR5 Punch hole 6 When the hole punching operation is completed the hole punch controller drives the hole punch feed motor and reverses the side registration motor so that the hole punch slide assembly moves back to its home position If the following paper requires a hole punching operation the hole punch slide assembly moves back to its home position every paper and steps 1 to 6 are repeated Hole punching operation 2 hole 3 hole puncher assembly The
315. er and return roller and delivers the paper to the processing output bin The paper in the processing output bin is detected by the processing output bin paper sensor PI08 When the paper is delivered to the processing output bin the swing motor M106 starts and raises the swing guide When the swing guide home position sensor PI05 detects the rising of the swing guide the swing guide motor stops and holds the swing guide at the raised position After the processing output bin paper sensor detects the paper the aligning motor M103 M104 starts and aligns the paper Figure 1 65 Paper path for stapling Stack ejection roller Swing guide 1st delivery roller Nimm Processing tray Stapler 96 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Figure 1 66 Rollers and sensors for stapling Swing guide home position sensor P105 Stack ejection roller upper Stack ejection roller lower foy bi Stack ejection lower roller cluch CL102 Stack ejection motor M32 The stacker controller PCA starts the swing motor M106 and lowers the swing guide when the rear of the second paper passes the first delivery roller The stack delivery motor is reversed The stack delivery motor rotates the stack delivery roller upper and return roller and sends the paper to the processing output bin At this point the stack delivery roller lower does not rotate because the st
316. er cartridge limited warranty statement This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship This warranty does not apply to products that a have been refilled refurbished remanufactured or tampered with in any way b experience problems resulting from misuse improper storage or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or c exhibit wear from ordinary use To obtain warranty service please return the product to place of purchase with a written description of the problem and print samples or contact HP customer support At HP s option HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO Y
317. er path entry point is aligned with the Printer exit point 9 Check the finisher entry point guides for damage 10 Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 11 Verify that the sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body 12 Perform Sensor test on SR101 If not functioning or damaged replace the Sensor 13 Check wiring from sensor SR101 to the Reverse Driver PCA connector for damage 14 Only if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the Reverse Driver PCA Description Switchback Initial Jam Jam in the stapler stacker connection When the engine is powered on the finisher s Switchback inlet sensor SR101 is activated suggesting that there is paper in the upper paper path of the finisher at sensors SR101 Recommended action 1 2 3 4 Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be activating sensor SR101 Verify that the finisher is securely fastened to the engine Check the finisher entry point guides for damage Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris Tools for troubleshooting 339 5 Verify that the sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body 6 Perform Sensor test on SR101 If not functioning or damaged replace Sensor 7 Check wiring from sensor SR
318. er to rotate and stop 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW4 switches to the OFF setting xX TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the swing guide is closed and that the stapled job output motor and the returning roller are stopped before continuing 6 Ifthe returning roller fails the test replace the defective assembly 186 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Switchback motor test 1 Do one of the following e _If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e lfyouare continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe main controller PCA set DIPSW4 to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 OFF e Switch 3 and switch 4 ON e Switch 5 OFF e Switch 6 through switch 8 ON 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following e First press of SW3 The switchback motor rotates in the feed direction at a slow rate 118 mm sec 4 65 in sec Listen for the motor to slowly rotate e Second press of SW3 The switchback motor rotates in the feed direction at a medium rate 235 mm sec 9 25 in sec Listen for the motor to increase rotation speed e Third press of SW3 The switchback motor rotates in the feed direction at a fast rate 700 mm sec 27 5
319. errors Print only after fax receive errors Use to print or configure the fax T 30 trace report T 30 is the standard that specifies handshaking protocols and error correction between fax machines Configure the T 30 report to print after certain events You can choose to print the report after every fax job every fax job sent every fax job received every send error or every receive error 322 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 54 Troubleshooting menu continued First level Second level Fax V 34 Third level Fourth level Values Normal Off Description Use to disable V 34 modulations if several fax failures have occurred or if phone line conditions require it Fax Speaker Mode Fax Log Entries Normal Diagnostic Off Used by a technician to evaluate and diagnose fax issues by listening to the sounds of fax modulations The standard fax log includes basic information such as the time and whether the fax was successful The detailed fax log shows the intermediate results of the redial process not shown in the standard fax log Print Quality Pages Print Fuser Test Page Print Use to print pages that help you resolve problems with print quality Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Sensors Paper Path Test Print Test Page Select from a list of the product sensors Initiates a test of the paper path sensors Source Tray
320. es replace the saddle stapler assembly e Ifthe error persists but no damage is found proceed to the next step 3 Make sure that connector J8 on the saddle stitcher controller PCA is fully seated and not damaged 4 Check the wiring at the front saddle stitch stapler and the saddle stapler assembly for damage and correct seating 5 Check the connector that the saddle stitch stapler assembly engages inside the finisher for damage and foreign material as well as for correct seating with the saddle stitch stapler assembly 6 Ifthe error persists replace the saddle stitcher controller PCA Description Booklet Nip Motor Error The paper fold motor M2 which is located in the booklet making area of the finisher drives the rotation of the folding rollers to create desired fold in the paper The error occurs when the number of pulses by the paper fold motor clock sensor P14 is less than the expected standard value This error also occurs when the status of the paper fold home position sensor PI21 does not change when the paper fold motor M2 has driven for 3 seconds Recommended action 1 Check the area around the folding rollers for a jam 2 Test the paper fold motor M2 using the finisher component test from the product control panel e If the folding rollers rotate correctly perform the following steps a Check sensor PI4 and sensor PI21 for damage b Make sure that the sensor flags are not damaged move freely and are
321. es Low Message On Use to configure whether a message Off displays on the control panel when supplies are getting low but have not yet reached the low threshold Reset Supplies New Document Reset Select this option if Feeder Kit M830 you have installed a Cancel new document feeder New Maintenance kit M830 or Kit M806 maintenance kit M806 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 307 Manage Trays menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Manage Trays menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 51 Manage Trays menu First level Values Use Requested Tray Exclusively First Manually Feed Prompt Always Unless loaded Description Controls how the product handles jobs that have specified a specific input tray Two options are available Exclusively The product never selects a different tray when the user has indicated that a specific tray should be used even if that tray is empty First The product pulls from another tray if the specified tray is empty even though the user specifically indicated a tray for the job Indicate whether a prompt should appear when the type or size for a job does not match the specified tray and the product pulls from the multipurpose tray instead Two options are available Always A prompt always displays before using the multipurpose tray Unless loaded A messag
322. es in the same manner Figure 1 33 HCI electrical components PS3305 PS3307 V v v PS3301 V Sw3301 PS3203 M PS3306 PS3201 V v PS3103 V PS3202 PS3101 PS3102 PS3309 V PS3308 V SW3303 PS3304 SW3302 PS3303 V V Table 1 21 HCI electrical components Abbreviation Component name Signal M3301 Right cassette pickup motor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal M3302 Right cassette lifter motor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal M3303 Left cassette lifter motor HCI LEFT CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal M3304 Left cassette pickup motor HCI LEFT CASSETTE PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal L3301 Right cassette pickup solenoid HCI RIGHT CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID signal ENWW 3 500 sheet high capacity input HCI feeder 59 Table 1 21 HCI electrical components continued Abbreviation Component name Signal SL3302 Left cassette pickup solenoid HCI LEFT CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID signal CL3301 Right cassette pickup clutch HCI RIGHT CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH signal CL3302 Left cassette pickup clutch HCI LEFT CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH signal SW3301 Right door open detection switch HCI RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal SW3302 Right cassette open detection switch HCI RIGHT CASSETTE OPEN DETECTION signal SW3303 Left cassette open detection switch HCI LEFT
323. eshooting e Diagnostic Tests 7 Test PS3302 using the Tray Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor are functioning correctly 8 Touch Component Test 9 Runthe Tray 4 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the tray pickup assembly 10 If the error persists replace the tray pickup assembly 13 A4 FF Description Residual Media Jam in Tray 4 This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Tray 4 feed sensor PS3302 at power on Recommended action 1 Open Tray 4 remove any jammed paper and then close the tray 2 Open and close the HCI right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Make sure that the Tray 4 pickup feed and separation roller are installed correctly and show no damage or wear 4 Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers as needed 5 Check the connectors at the sensor feed motor and the HCI controller PCA 6 Openthe following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 7 Test PS3302 using the Tray Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensors are functioning correctly 8 Touch Component Test 9 Runthe Tray 4 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the tray pickup assembly 10 Ifthe error persists replace the tray pickup assembly 13 A5 D5 Description Jam In Tray 5 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 353 This
324. essage varies depending on the cause but the solution for each message is the same e 66 00 80 Delivery Notice with PagelD 0x00 e 66 00 81 Delivery Notice with proper Pagelnfo e 66 00 82 Paper delivered with unexpected timing e 66 00 83 PAGE INFO Change without PAGE INFO New Recommended action 1 Follow the instructions in the online help 2 Turn the product off and then on 3 Ifthe error persists see the output finishing device service manual for detailed instructions 66 12 46 Description Finisher Communication Lost with Stitcher Controller PCA 428 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 66 40 YZ 66 50 00 ENWW This error occurs when communication between the stacker controller board and the saddle stitcher controller board is lost or interrupted Recommended action 1 Make sure that the finisher is grounded correctly e Make sure that the finisher is latched and locked to the engine by tightening the thumbscrew inside the front door e Make sure that the grounding frame assembly the bar with the wheel located between the engine and the finisher is in the down position with the wheel touching the floor and that the grounding plate is not damaged E NOTE The grounding frame assembly is in the up position when the finisher is shipped It must be lowered when the finisher is installed 2 Make sure that the connector J730 on the stacker controller PCA and the wiring between connector J22 on the saddle stit
325. esult of installing a new disk or performing a Clean Disk operation from the Preboot menu Recommended action 1 Press any button to continue to the main Preboot menu 2 Press the Help button to see the help text for the error 3 Select the Administration menu Ey NOTE If there is a password assigned to the Administrator a prompt to enter the product displays Enter the password to proceed 4 Select the Download item and then download the latest firmware The user can now download a new firmware bundle to the product 99 XX YY Description A message of this form indicates a firmware installation error Recommended action Reload the firmware Alpha Error Messages lt binname gt full Remove all paper from bin Description The specified output bin is full Recommended action Empty the bin to continue printing Supply low OR Supplies low Description The product indicates when a supply level or more than one supply is low Actual toner cartridge life might vary You do not need to replace the toner cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable 462 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW When multiple supplies are low more than one event code is recorded e 10 00 60 event code Black toner cartridge e 10 23 60 event code Fuser Kit Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable replace the supply HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to in
326. evious saddle controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe saddle controller PCA set DIPSW to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 OFF e Switch 3 ON e Switch 4 OFF e Switch 5 through switch 8 not used 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the saddle controller PCA press and release SW1 and then observe the following e First press of SW1 The paper position plate moves to the home position listen for the plate to move e Second press of SW1 The booklet alignment plate moves to the A4 P folding position listen for the plate to move e Third press of SW1 The booklet alignment plate moves to the A4 P staple position listen for the plate to move E NOTE Press and hold down SW1 to cause the plate to move from position to position 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW switches to the OFF setting x TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the plate is in the home position before continuing 6 Ifthe plate fails the test replace the defective assembly ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 197 Guide plate test 1 Do one of the following e l fthis is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e Ifyou are continuing from a previous saddle controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe saddle controller PCA set DIPSW to the fo
327. f On On Stack count 1 700 sheet limit exceeded Off Off On Output bin 2 lower limit Off On Off 104 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Shutter operation To prevent the delivery section from catching stacked paper in output bin 1 when it passes a shutter is provided at the delivery section The shutter closes when output bin 1 passes even when no paper is stacked When the shutter clutch CL101 and stack ejection lower roller clutch CL102 are on the shutter moves up closes when the stack ejection motor M102 turns forward and moves down open delivery enabled which occurs when the motor turns backward The shutter home position sensor P115 detects the opening and closing of the shutter Figure 1 76 Shutter location EM Stack ejection lower roller clutch CL102 Stack ejection roller lower de Stack ejection Shutter home position sensor P145 Shutter Shutter clutch CL101 Jam detection Stapler stacker jam detection ENWW The following sensors detect paper and determine whether paper is delivered properly e Stacking paper path entry sensor P1103 e Stacking paper path delivery sensor P1104 A jam is identified by checking whether paper is present at each sensor at the timing programmed in the memory of the microcomputer CPU o
328. fer feed assembly for debris or damage If necessary replace the transfer feed assembly If the media stopped in or at the fuser try the following steps 1 2 3 Open the front door and the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam Remove the fuser and inspect the fuser sleeve pressure roller and delivery roller for blockage and or damage Replace the fuser as needed Z CAUTION The fuser might be HOT Tools for troubleshooting 367 4 Open the following menus e Administration e X Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 5 Test the Fuser Delivery sensor PS502 using the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify the sensor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the fuser 6 Touch Component Test 7 Run the Fuser motor DCM drive test to verify that the Fuser Drive and Gears are functioning correctly If they are not replace the Fuser Drive Assembly 13 B9 FF Description Residual Media jam Fuser Output Sensor This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Fuser Output sensor PS502 at power on Recommended action 1 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Remove the fuser and inspect the fuser sleeve pressure roller and delivery roller for blockage and or damage Replace the fuser as needed AA CAUTION The fuser might be HOT 4
329. following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 45 Scan Digital Send Settings menu M830 only First level E mail Settings Default Save to Network Folder Options Default Save to USB Options NOTE The same options are available for each of these features except where noted Second level E mail Setup NOTE Email Settings only Third level E mail Setup Wizard Fourth level Values Description Use to configure settings that apply to sending documents through email or saving documents to a folder on the network or on a USB multi drive The E mail Setup Wizard feature configures the product to send scanned images as email attachments To open the product HP Embedded Web Server and set up the email notification Server enter the product IP address into a Web browser ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 273 Table 2 45 Scan Digital Send Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Default Job Options Image Preview Make optional Defines the default job options for each Require preview function If you do not specify the job Disable preview options when creating the job the default options are used For complete setup go to the HP Embedded Web Server by typing the IP address of the product into a Web browser Use the Image Preview feature to scan a document and display a preview before c
330. fthe error persists upgrade the product firmware 3 Ifthe issue persists continue troubleshooting with the flowcharts for either Intermittent or Persistent 49 error troubleshooting whichever is appropriate in document c03122817 HP LaserJet FutureSmart Devices 49 Error Troubleshooting Persistent and Intermittent 49 XX YY Error Messages 49 XX YY Error To continue turn off then on Description A firmware error occurred Corrupted print jobs software application issues non product specific print drivers poor quality USB or network cables bad network connections or incorrect configurations invalid firmware operations or unsupported accessories can cause this error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Ifthe error persists check the following e The error might be caused by a network connectivity problem such as a bad interface cable a bad USB port or an invalid network configuration setting e The error might be caused by the print job due to an invalid print driver a problem with the software application or a problem with the file being printed e Upgrading the product firmware might help resolve the error See the product user guide for more information When a 49 error occurs the user sees a 49 XXXX message on the control panel where XXXX is replaced by a combination of letters and numbers A 49 error might happen at any time for multiple reasons Although some types of 49 errors can be
331. g 257 Table 2 43 General Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level A list of scheduled events displays Energy Settings Sleep Schedule M830 product Values Add Edit Delete Description Use to configure the product to automatically wake up or go to sleep at specific times on specific days Using this feature saves energy NOTE You must configure the date and time settings before you can use this feature Event Type Wake Sleep Select whether to add or edit a Wake event or a Sleep event and then select the time and the days for the wake or sleep event Event Time Event Days Select days of the week from a list Sleep Timer Settings Sleep Mode Auto Off After Range 1 to 120 minutes Default 60 minutes Set the number of minutes after which the product enters Sleep or Auto Off mode Use the arrow buttons on the control panel to increase or decrease the number of minutes Wake Auto On to These Events Energy Settings Sleep Timer Sleep Auto Off Settings Timer M806 product All Events Network port Power button only Enabled Disabled Enable or disable the product sleep or auto off function Sleep Mode Auto Off After Range 1 to 120 minutes Default 60 minutes Set the number of minutes after which the product enters Sleep or Auto Off mode Use the arrow buttons on the control panel to
332. ge 0 9 Default 2 Redial on No Range 0 2 Answer Default 0 284 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 46 Fax Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Redial on Busy Values Range 0 9 Default 3 Description General Fax Send Settings Fax Number Confirmation Enabled Disabled If this feature is enabled you must enter the fax number twice PC Fax Send Enabled Disabled Enables users who have the correct driver installed to send faxes through the product from their computers JBIG Compression Enabled Disabled The JBIG compression reduces fax transmission time which can result in lower phone charges However using JBIG compression sometimes causes compatibility problems with older fax machines If this occurs turn off the JBIG compression Error Correction Mode Enabled Disabled When error correction mode is enabled and an error occurs during fax transmission the product sends or receives the error portion again Fax Header Prepend Overlay Use to prepend or overlay the fax header page Fax Number Speed Dial Matching Enabled Disabled Use this item to match the fax number that you type to numbers that are saved as a speed dial ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 285 Table 2 46 Fax Settings menu M830 only continued First level Secon
333. ges Industry Canada CS 03 requirements Notice The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirement document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible for the equipment to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution can be particularly important in rural areas A CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection author
334. gh voltage power supply e Drum motor e Fuser motor e Scanner motor e Duplex unit e Face up solenoid M806 only e Laser driver WARNING The remote switch control circuit turns on or off the product power so that the AC power flows even if the power switch is turned off You must unplug the product power cord before servicing the product A WARNING If you believe the over current or over voltage protection circuits have been activated do not connect the product power cord or turn on the product power until the cause of the failure is found and corrected Table 1 8 Low voltage power supply functions Function Supported feature Sleep mode No Power supply voltage detection Yes Automatic power OFF No Automatic power ON OFF No Active OFF Yes Inactive OFF Yes Network mode No Power switch illumination Yes Low voltage power supply failure detection Yes Power save mode Yes 18 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW High voltage power supply The high voltage power supply HVPS applies biases to the following components e Primary charging roller e Developing roller e Transfer roller e Static charge eliminator e Fuser sleeve e Pressure roller e XPre transfer guide The following figure shows the system block diagram of the high voltage power supply EY NOTE The primary charging roller and the developing roller are in the cartridge ENWW Engine control system 19 Figure 1 7 High volt
335. gital Send Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Notification E mail address Values Description E mail Select to receive the notification in an email Touch the text box following Email Address and then type the email address for the notification Image Adjustment Darkness Contrast Background Cleanup Use to improve the overall quality of the copy Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors Adjust the Contrast setting to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and darkest color on the page Adjust the Background Cleanup setting if you are having trouble copying a faint image Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image For example increasing the sharpness could make text appear crisper but decreasing it could make photographs appear smoother Automatic Tone Default Select this to make the selected Image Adjustment setting the default value ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 281 Table 2 45 Scan Digital Send Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Job Build Fourth level Values Job Build off Job Build on Description Use to combine several original documents into one job Also use to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder
336. glass The duplex selector is removable so that the surfaces of the selector and the scanner can be cleaned if scans start to have lines in them To access the seclector open the cover hatch raise the input tray push on the green latches and then pull duplex selector out of the document feeder Theory of operation ENWW Document feeder hinge Figure 1 20 Document feeder closed book mode e The hinges of the document feeder allow the document feeder to move vertically and accommodate the placement of books and other objects up to 40 mm 1 57 in in height onto the flatbed scanner window while still being able to close on top of the book or object with the bottom of the document feeder mostly parallel to the flatbed scanner window e The document feeder hinge provides a height adjustment of at least 40 mm 1 57 in when a maximum downward force of 5 kg 11 Ib is applied at front edge of the document feeder with the fulcrum such as the spine of a book centered in the scan window and parallel to its long axis e The document feeder is can withstand a downward force of at least 15 kg 33 Ib applied at the front edge center of the document feeder and the fulcrum such as the spine of a book oriented parallel to the long axis of the scan window but located anywhere within the scan window without breaking deforming detaching or experiencing performance degradation e The document feeder hinge supports the document feeder in t
337. gure 1 38 Stapler stacker paper path Output bin Printer separation sensor SR104 e 88 Staple stacker ass y Pass through ass y Switch back ass y 68 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Figure 1 39 Hole punch paper path Output bin Printer separation sensor SR104 amp 9 Staple stacker ass y A Puncher ass y Switch back ass y The stapler stacker supports the following delivery modes for both the straight through paper path and the duplex paper path e Staple e Offset These delivery modes are independent of each other and can be used in any combination Table 1 25 Stapler stacker delivery modes Feed Staple Punch Offset Supported feature Straight No N A No Yes Straight No N A Yes No Straight Yes N A No No Straight Yes N A Yes No Switchback No N A No Yes Switchback No N A Yes Yes Switchback Yes N A No Yes Switchback Yes N A Yes No The stapler stacker with hole punch supports the following delivery modes for both the straight through paper path and the duplex paper path Stapler sta
338. gure below shows the inner upper cover removed This cover does not need to be removed to perform this test 4 Turn the product power on 5 Onthe controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following e First press of SW3 The staple sub assembly moves to the home position unless it is already in the home position as shown in the figure above e Second press of SW3 The staple sub assembly moves to the rear position unless it is already in the rear position NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to continuously move the staple sub assembly from position to position 6 Ifthe staple sub assembly correctly functions press and release SW3 until the staple sub assembly is in the home position 174 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 7 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSWA switches to the OFF setting Ee TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the staple sub assembly is in the home position before continuing 8 If the staple sub assembly fails the test replace the staple assembly this is the plate that the staple sub assembly is mounted on ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 175 Staple sub assembly motor test 1 Do one of the following e l fthis is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e Ifyou are continuing from a previous
339. h 158 paper path sensors 159 print stop 163 scanner M830 202 scanner tests 202 tray bin manual sensor 161 timing chart 234 tips iii toner cartridge 24 design 24 memory 25 seal 25 toner level detection 25 toner cartridges diagnostic test 157 memory chips 584 non HP 582 recycling 597 warranty 581 touchscreen blank white or dim no image 145 touchscreen control panel 6 touchscreen has an unresponsive zone 147 touchscreen is slow to respond 146 Tray 1 jams 500 Tray 2 and Tray 3 jams 506 Tray 4 and Tray 5 clear jams 507 tray selection use requested tray 308 troubleshooting checklist 128 clean the paper path 248 configuration page 151 configuration pages 249 connectivity problems 562 control panel 163 control panel checks 141 copying quality 553 127 151 demo page 151 determine problem source 139 562 direct connect problems 562 eventlog 151 flowchart 139 image quality issues 553 jams 496 550 LED diagnostics 151 network problems 562 paper feed problems 549 performance problems 561 power 140 power on overview 140 print quality 245 254 print quality issues 553 process 139 repeating defects 254 repetitive defects ruler 254 reports and tools 151 scanner calibration 150 scanning subsystem 150 solving paper pickup problems 549 status page 151 wired network 562 with lights 151 U understand the lights on the formatter connectivity LED 155 heartbeat LED 152 heartbeat LED product 152 heartbea
340. h home position sensor turns on and the hole punching operation in the first sheet is completed Punch a hole in the first sheet Punch motor clock sensor Encoder 8 WI Sensor flag M Punch home SM position sensor Off centering cam e for 3 hole COT e Off centering anc s Punch shaft for 2 hole Punch 4 T Punch chip Paper E Punch shaft stops Punch shaft turns 90 degrees cw Punch shaft turns 180 degrees cw Home position for 2 hole Operates 2 hole punching Punching operation is completed 3 The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the hole punch shaft 180 degrees counterclockwise 84 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW 4 The hole punch home position sensor turns on and the punching operation in the second sheet is completed Punch a hole in the second sheet Punch shaft stops Punch shaft turns 90 degrees ccw Punch shaft turns 180 degrees cw Home position for 3 hole Operates 2 hole punching Punching operation is completeed When operating 3 hole punching in 2 sheets of paper the hole punch shaft for 3 hole punching is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise from its home position and then for 180 degrees clockwise Hole punching operation 2 hole 4 hole puncher assembly ENWW The 2 hole 4 hole hole puncher assembly punches 2 holes or 4 holes in the trailing edge of th
341. harging roller applies a uniform negative charge to the photosensitive drum surface 3 The laser beams modulated by signals from the formatter focus on the photosensitive drum surface to form a latent image 4 Toner on the developing cylinder converts the latent image into a visible image which is transferred onto paper by the transfer charging roller 5 The fuser applies heat and pressure to the toner image on the paper to make the image permanent 6 The cleaning blade scrapes residual toner from the photosensitive drum 7 The primary charging roller applies a new charge to the photosensitive drum for the next image 22 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Image formation process Each of the following processes functions independently and must be coordinated with the other product processes Figure 1 9 Image formation process Electrostatic latent image formation block a Paper path 4 Direction of drum Developing block PM UR CR M Registration ipee Transfer block Cassette pickup Image formation consists of the following processes Table 1 10 Image formation process Step Process Step 1 Primary charging The primary charging roller which is made of conductive rubber is located inside the toner conditioning cartridge An AC bias applied to it erases residual charges from the previous image Then a negative DC bias applied to it creates a uniform negative potential on the photosensitive d
342. he DC controller receives a print command the pickup roller starts rotating and lowers to the paper surface This feeds a sheet of paper to the feed rollers and to the pre registration roller which corrects the skew After a short time the sheet is fed to the photosensitive drum where the image is transferred onto the sheet Then the sheet is fed to the fuser and delivered to a bin Media size detection The pickup and feed system includes a custom standard switch and two media size detection switches because either tray can accommodate custom paper sizes If custom standard switch is set to standard the DC controller determines the width and length of the paper according to the size detection switches If the custom standard switch is set to custom the system requires the dimensions to be configured in the control panel The width detection switches also sense the presence of trays If all of the width detection switches are off the DC controller assumes that a tray is missing Media level detection The lifter detects the paper level in the trays using a blocking plate and two sensors The lifter position indicates the paper level by shutting off the sensors Paper level is based on the approximate number of sheets in the tray full 200 or more sheets high 100 to 200 sheets middle 50 to 100 sheets or low less than 50 sheets Multi feed prevention The product prevents feeding of multiple sheets using a torque limited separation r
343. he error persists perform a Partial Clean using the Preboot menu 32 1C 56 event code No action necessary 32 10 57 event code No action necessary 32 1C 58 event code No action necessary 32 1C 60 event code No action necessary 32 1C 61 event code Review the error log to see specific details about the failure 32 1C 62 event code Review the error log to see specific details about the failure 32 1C 68 event code Check that a share was provided as part of the network path not blank Check that the server and the share exist Check that the user has permission to access the share on the provided server Check that the path includes the compressed ZIP file name as part of the path 32 1C 69 event code Verify the encryption personal identification number PIN is the same PIN used to encrypt the backup file 32 1C 6A event code Retry the job 32 1C 6D event code Retry the job 398 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 40 XX YZ Error Messages 40 00 01 USB I O buffer overflow To continue touch OK Description The USB buffer has overflowed Recommended action 1 Touch the OK button to print the transferred date some data might be lost 2 Check the host configuration 40 00 02 Embedded UO buffer overflow To continue touch OK Description The product has experienced a JetDirect buffer overflow Recommended action 1 Touch the OK button to print the transferred date some data migh
344. he fuser After replacing the fuser reset the fuser page counter by selecting New Fuser Kit in the Reset Supplies sub menu Fuser Kit very low To continue touch OK Description 10 23 70 event code The product indicates when a supply is very low After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended Recommended action Replace the fuser After replacing the fuser reset the fuser page counter by selecting New Fuser Kit in the Reset Supplies sub menu Gateways failed Description There is an incorrect gateways configuration Recommended action Use the EIO X Jetdirect menu to configure the default gateway Gateways OK Description The gateways are configured correctly Recommended action No action necessary Genuine HP cartridge installed Description A new HP toner cartridge has been installed The message appears for about 6 seconds before the product returns to the Ready state 472 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action No action necessary Genuine HP supply installed Description 10 XX 40 event code A new genuine HP toner cartridge has been installed Recommended action Touch the Hide button to remove this message HP Secure hard drive disabled Description The drive has been encrypted for another product Recommended action Remove the drive or use the HP Embedded Web Server for more information Incompatible Supply
345. he main controller PCA set DIPSW4 to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 OFF e Switch 3 through switch 5 ON e Switch 6 through switch 8 OFF 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following e First press of SW3 The registration motor rotates at a slow rate 118 mm sec 4 65 in sec Listen for the motor to slowly rotate e Second press of SW3 The registration motor rotates at a medium rate 500 mm sec 19 69 in sec Listen for the motor to increase rotation speed e Third press of SW3 The registration motor rotates at a fast rate 700 mm sec 27 56 in sec Listen for the motor to increase rotation speed e Fourth press of SW3 The registration motor stops Eyf NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to repeatedly cause the registration motor to rotate at a slow to fast rate and then stop 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW4 switches to the OFF setting Ee TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the registration motor is stopped before continuing 6 Ifthe motor fails the test replace the motor 188 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Switchback inlet flapper solenoid test 1 Do one of the following e _If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed
346. he open position and will prevent the document feeder from damage by being slammed e The hinge will hold the document feeder static in all positions higher than 125 mm 4 92 in as measured at the front of the document feeder The force required to open or close the document feeder is less than 2 27 kg 5 Ib e Thehinge allows the document feeder to open to an angle of 70 from the horizontal ENWW Scanning image capture system 37 Figure 1 21 Document feeder open max opening 70 38 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Pickup feed and delivery system The DC controller controls the pickup feed and delivery system according to commands from the formatter The DC controller controls each block to pickup feed and deliver paper The pickup feed and delivery system consists of following three functional blocks e X Pickup and feed block From each pickup source to the fuser inlet e Fuser and delivery block From the fuser to each delivery destination e Duplex block From the duplex switchback assembly to duplex re pickup assembly Figure 1 22 Pickup feed and delivery system blocks Fuser and delivery block Simplex paper path zess Duplex paper path CO D S IN Seana Duplex block Pickup and feed block ENWW Pickup feed and delivery system 39 Photo sensors and switches The following figure shows the sensors and switches for the pickup fe
347. he stacked paper for stitch stapling and folding The error occurs when the paper positioning plate home position sensor PI7 does not turn on when the paper positioning plate motor M4 has driven for 1500 pulses This error also occurs when the paper positioning plate home position sensor PI7 does not turn off when the paper positioning plate motor M4 has driven for 300 pulses Recommended action Control panel diagnostics M4 guide plate motor paper positioning plate motor 1 Test he paper positioning plate motor M4 using the finisher component test from the product control panel During the test observe the movement of the booklet maker guide plate and make sure it is not obstructed or damaged 2 Remove the booklet maker output bin to gain access to the paper position plate home position sensor PI7 and delivery door 3 Remove the plate that holds PI7 and then carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 4 Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the plate 5 Check the wiring at the sensor 448 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 66 90 43 66 90 44 ENWW 6 Ifthe error persists replace sensor PI7 and the positioning plate assembly together 7 Ifthe error persists replace the stacker controller PCA Description Booklet Paper Guide Motor Error The guide motor M3 located in the booklet making area of the finisher controls the position of
348. his is a general misprint error Either media is loaded off center with the side guides in the tray or a media width sensor failure occurred from an unknown tray The error will be one of the following 41 03 F0 41 03 F1 41 03 F2 41 03 F3 41 03 F4 41 03 F5 41 03 FD Recommended action 1 2 Reload the tray verifying that the guides in the tray are flush with the loaded media in the tray Try the print job again Watch the mechanism to see if it is functioning correctly If the linkage is broken replace the paper tray If the error persists print a Configuration Page and note the paper size for the tray in question e If the size is not reported correctly run the tray size sensor test in the Diagnostic menu e Ifthe tray size sensors test as GOOD replace the paper tray e Ifthe tray size sensors test as BAD check the cable connections between the tray size sensor and the DC Controller If the cable connections are plugged in correctly and the cables are not compromised replace the correct component that contains the tray size sensing switches 41 03 YZ Unexpected size in envelope feeder To use another tray touch Options Description The product detected a different paper size than expected Y Type Z Tray Y 0 Size mismatch Detected media is longer or shorter than expected Y A Size mismatch Detected media too long Y B Size mismatch Detected media too short Y C Size mismatch Inter page gap erro
349. hole punch to activate the punch operation drills go up and down o LED601 and LED602 alternate flashing e Press SW602 for a 3 hole or 4 hole punch or SW603 for a 2 hole punch to stop the LEDs from flashing o LED601 is off LED602 is flashing Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW switches to the OFF setting If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure If the punch side registration fails the test replace the defective assembly Tools for troubleshooting 201 Scanner tests M830 Use these diagnostic tests to manually test the document feeder and scanner sensors Scanner tests This section lists the sensors available in the Scanner Tests Use the scanner tests The Scanner Tests screen shows the sensor name sensor state active or inactive and the number of times the sensor has been toggled activated 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Scanner Tests e Sensors Touch the sensor name on the Scanner Tests screen to display a sensor location graphic on the control panel display Activate the desired sensor and then check the control panel display to verify the sensor state active or inactive e The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the sensor
350. how no damage or wear Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers as needed Check the connectors at the sensor feed motor and the HCI controller PCA Open the following menus 354 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 A7 D4 ENWW e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 7 Test PS3305 using the Tray Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensors are functioning correctly 8 Touch Component Test 9 Runthe Tray 5 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the tray pickup assembly 10 If the error persists replace the tray pickup assembly Description Jam in lower Right Door From Jam Tray 4 This jam occurs when the media does not reach the HCI Exit sensor PS3301 in the designated amount of time after the Tray 4 feed sensor PS3302 sensed the leading edge of the paper when printing from Tray 4 Recommended action 1 Clearthe jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Make sure that the Tray 4 pickup feed and separation roller are installed correctly and show no damage or wear 4 Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers as needed 5 Check the connectors at the sensor feed motor and the HCI controller PCA 6 Openthe following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 7 Test PS3301 using the Tray Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor are funct
351. hrough switch 5 ON e Switch 6 OFF e Switch 7 ON e Switch 8 OFF 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following e First press of SW3 The switchback roller alienation solenoid activates listen for the solenoid to activate e Second press of SW3 The switchback roller alienation solenoid deactivates listen for the solenoid to deactivate Eyf NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to cause the solenoid to repeatedly activate and then deactivate 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW4 switches to the OFF setting Eo TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the solenoid is deactivated before continuing 6 Ifthe solenoid fails the test replace the solenoid 190 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Saddle solenoid test 1 5 6 ENWW Do one of the following e l fthis is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e lfyouare continuing from a previous saddle controller PCA test go to step 2 On the saddle controller PCA set DIPSW to the following settings e Switch 1 through switch 3 OFF e Switch 4 ON e Switch 5 through switch 8 not used Turn the product power on On the saddle controller PCA press and release SW1 and then observe the following e First press
352. ht door open closed Switch cable PS3305 Tray 5 feed sensor Paper pickup assembly PS3301 HCI feed sensor PS3302 Tray 4 feed sensor PS1403 4 Tray 3 feed sensor PS1401 2 Tray 2 feed sensor Crossing paper feed assembly Paper pickup assembly Paper pickup assembly Paper pickup assembly PS2502 Tray 1 feed sensor Paper pickup assembly PS4 TOP sensor Registration sensor assembly PS1 2 3 Paper Width Sensor PS9 Fuser loop 1 sensor Fuser PS502 Fuser output sensor Fuser PS2002 3 Duplex switchback sensor Duplexer PS2004 5 Duplex refeed sensor Duplexer PS1451 Output sensor Fuser drive assembly PS1452 Output bin full PS3307 PPCA sensor Fuser drive assembly Photointerrupter Tray bin manual sensor test The table in this section lists the sensors and switches available in the Tray Bin Manual Sensor Test Use the tray bin manual sensor test The Tray Bin Manual Sensor Test screen shows the sensor number sensor name sensor state active or inactive and the number of times the sensor has been toggled activated ENWW 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Tray Bin Manual Sensor Test 3 Touch the sensor number and name on the Tray Bin Manual Sensor Test screen to display a sensor location graphic on the control panel display Tools f
353. icates with the host computer The basic product operation comprises the following systems e The engine control system which includes the DC controller printed circuit assembly PCA the low voltage and high voltage power supplies and the fuser control e Thelaser scanner system which forms the latent image on the photosensitive drum e The image formation system which transfers a toner image onto the paper e The paper feed system which uses a system of rollers and belts to transport the paper through the product e A Accessories Figure 1 1 Relationship between the main product systems Laser scanner system Image formation system Pickup feed and delivery Input accessory i 1 i I i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i I i 1 i I i 1 i 1 i Formatter K i 1 i 1 i I i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i I i 1 i I i 1 i 1 I 2 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Sequence of operation The DC controller in the engine control system controls the operational sequences of the product The following table describes durations and operations for each period of a print operation from the time the product is turned on until the motor stops rotating Normal sequence of operation Ey NOTE The following sequence of operation applies to the engine portion of the product Table 1 1 Sequence of operation product base Name Timing Purpose WAIT The time required for the fuser surface e Initialize CPU and ASIC and ro
354. ifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this equipment please see the numbers in this manual for repair and or warranty information If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved The customer can do the following repairs Replace any original equipment that came with the device This includes the toner cartridge the supports for trays and bins the power cord and the telephone cord It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges Telephone Consumer Protection Act US The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business other entity or individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business or other entity or individual The telephone number provided cannot be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission char
355. image ASIC error Recommended action Turn the product off and then on again Description Scanner firmware upgrade error Recommended action 1 Resend the scanner firmware upgrade 2 Ifthe error persists replace the SCB Description The formatter lost connections with the SCB or communication was corrupted Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on Reseat the formatter Upgrade the firmware Fb oa N SCB Verify that the SCB has power Replace the SCB Replace the formatter o N O gom Replace the interconnect board Description Internal product communication error Verify that all cables are connected to the product and to the interconnect board formatter and Tools for troubleshooting 383 Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Ifthe error persists turn the product off and then check the SCB connectors 3 Ifthe error persists replace the SCB 30 01 43 Description Scan memory error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Ifthe error persists turn the product off and then reseat the formatter 3 Ifthe error persists replace the formatter 30 01 44 Description Internal product communication error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Ifthe error persists turn the product off and then check the scanner cable 3 Upgrade the firmware 4 Ifthe error persists turn the product off and the
356. in the document feeder Clear the jam and send the fax again The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too low The volume setting needs to be adjusted Adjust the volume in the Fax Send Settings menu and the Fax Receive Settings menu ENWW Solve fax problems 575 Product upgrades To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the product go to e Inthe US go to www hp com support ljM806 and or www hp com support ljflowMFPMS830 Click Drivers amp Software e Outside the US follow these steps 1 Goto www hp com support 2 Select your country region 3 Click Drivers amp Software 4 Enter the product name HP LaserJet Enterprise M806 and or HP LaserJet Enterprise Flow MFP M830 and then select Search Determine the installed revision of firmware Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware On the configuration page look in the section marked Device Information for the firmware datecode and firmware revision Firmware datecode and firmware revision examples e 20100831 firmware datecode e 103067 104746 firmware revision Perform a firmware upgrade The firmware bundle is a xxxxxxx bd1 file This file requires an interactive upgrade method You cannot upgrade the product using the traditional FTP LPR or Port 9100 methods of upgrading Use one of the following methods to upgrade the firmware for this product HP Embedded Web Server 1 Op
357. ing plate motor M8 located in the lower right front corner of the finisher associated gears and the paper pushing plate for proper motion e f motor M8 does not rotate replace the motor mount assembly Ey NOTE The motor mount assembly includes the paper pushing plate motor M8 e f motor M8 does rotate but the paper pushing plate does not move or moves erratically check the drive gears and paper pushing plate for wear or damage Replace components as necessary e f motor M8 does rotate and the paper pushing plate moves correctly the plate movement sensors might have failed a 66 90 49 Description Inspect the paper pushing plate home position sensor PI14 pushing plate leading edge position sensor PI15 and paper pushing motor clock sensor PI1 Make sure that the sensors are securely fastened to the chassis Check sensor P14 sensor PI15 and sensor P11 for damage Make sure that connectors J6 J9 and J23 on the saddle stitcher controller PCA are fully seated and not damaged Check the wiring at the sensors If the error persists replace the saddle stitcher controller PCA Booklet Nip Motor Error or Booklet Push Motor Error Finisher paper pushing plate motor M8 Error occurs when the paper pushing plate home position sensor P114 or PI 15 does not turn on when the paper pushing plate motor M8 has been driven for 0 3 seconds Also occurs when the paper pushing plate home position sensor P114 or PI
358. ing position and paper size The stapler unit waits at the following points when staple mode is selected Figure 1 71 Front 1 point stapling Rear aligning plate Feeding direction Stapling position Wait position Front aligning plate Figure 1 72 Rear 1 point stapling Rear aligning plate Stapling position Wait position Stopper Front aligning plate 100 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1 73 2 point stapling o Rear aligning plate Stopper Ze Stapling position eg 1125 Stopper d i 20 Feeding direction I Stapling position Wait position na Stopper Front aligning plate ENWW Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 101 Stack operation stapler stacker and booklet maker Output bin operation This accessory has an upper output bin output bin 1 and a lower output bin output bin 2 The output bin 1 shift motor M107 and output bin 2 shift motor M38 move output bin 1 and output bin 2 up and down independently The output bin 1 paper sensor P1111 and output bin 2 paper sensor P1112 detect paper stacked on the output bin The output bin 1 paper surface sensor P141 and output bin 2 paper surface sensor P148 detect the home positions of output bin 1 and output bin 2 The home position is the top surface of the paper when paper is stacked on the output bin or the position where the e
359. installed and operational however the HP Digital Sending utility has either disabled the product fax feature or has enabled LAN fax When LAN fax is enabled the analog fax feature is disabled Only one fax feature either LAN fax or analog fax can be enabled at a time NOTE If LAN fax is enabled the Fax feature is unavailable on the product control panel Non Operational Enabled Disabled The product has detected a firmware failure Upgrade the firmware Damaged Enabled Disabled The fax accessory has failed Reseat the fax accessory card and check for bent pins If the status is still DAMAGED replace the analog fax accessory card 1 ENABLED indicates that the analog fax accessory is enabled and turned on DISABLED indicates that LAN fax is enabled analog fax is turned off ENWW Solve fax problems 573 General fax problems The following are some common fax problems The fax failed to send JBIG is enabled and the receiving fax machine does not have JBIG capability Turn off the JBIG setting An Out of Memory status message displays on the product control panel The product storage disk is full Delete some stored jobs from the disk From the Home screen on the product control panel touch the Retrieve from Device Memory button Open the list of stored jobs or stored faxes Select a job to delete and then touch the Delete button Print quality of a photo is poor or prints as a gray box You are using the wrong
360. int Options menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 48 Default Print Options menu First level Second level Number of Copies Values Range 1 32000 Default 1 Description Sets the default number of copies for a copy job This default applies when the Copy function or the Quick Copy function is initiated from the product Home screen Default Paper Size Select from a list of sizes that the product supports Configures the default paper size used for print jobs Default Custom Paper Size X Dimension Range 3 8 5 inches Configures the default paper size that is used when the user Default 8 5 inches selects Custom as the paper size for a print job Y Dimension Range 5 14 inches Default 14 inches Use Inches Enabled Disabled Sides 1 sided Use to indicate whether the original document is printed on 2 sided one or both sides and whether the copies should be printed on one or both sides For example select the 1 sided original 2 sided output option when the original is printed on one side but you want to make two sided copies Select the Orientation setting to specify portrait or landscape orientation and to select the way the second sides are printed 300 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 48 Default Print Options menu continued First level Second level Values Description 2 Sided Format Book style Configures the defaul
361. int Quality issue mausam reais ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 245 Figure 2 51 Black print quality troubleshooting page M en E E E EH E in F E Ed L ion E L P L P E ix f lu E E I F ET F f P foo is f E P E E i E E Ez i xi 1 D Krier EE E Trag a8 ag imn 1 Grids The grids are in inches and millimeters They are labeled with letters and numbers so that defects can be described by position and by distance between repeats 3 Grey scale ramp patches Used to detect offset for the OPC or developer in the toner cartridge or offset in the fuser 246 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Fuser test page Use the fuser test page to evaluate problems with fuser print quality 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Print Quality Pages e Fuser Test Page 3 Touch the Print button H 1 1 1 1 Meta sraa Sa Pt ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 247 Cleaning page 1 3 4 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button Open the following menus e Calibration Cleaning e Cleaning Page Touch the Print button to print the page The cleaning process can take several minutes When it is finished discard the printed page Enable and configure auto cleaning Use the pro
362. inued help troubleshoot formatter problems Short Long Disk Do Not Run Short Long Optimized Raw Smart ICB CPB Interconnect Run Selected Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to gain access to the product remotely to troubleshoot issues Stop Telnet Refresh IP 136 Chapter2 Solve problems Table 2 6 Preboot menu options 6 of 6 continued Menu option First level Second level Third level Description System Triage Copy Logs If you cannot print the error logs the System Triage item allows you to copy the error logs to a flash drive on the next startup The files can then be sent to HP to help determine the problem Service Tools This item requires the service access code If the product does not reach the Ready state you can use this item to print the error logs The logs can be copied to a USB drive when the product is initialized and then these files can be sent to HP to help determine what is causing the problem Reset Password Use this item to reset the administrator password Subsystems For manufacturing use only Do not change these values Developer Tools Netexec ENWW Preboot menu options 137 Current settings pages Printing the current settings pages provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful in the troubleshooting process 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button
363. ion ready Get 24 hour Internet support D In the US go to www hp com support IjM806 and or www hp com support ljflowMFPMS830 e Outside the US go to www hp com support Select your country region Click Product Support amp Troubleshooting Enter the product name and then select Search Download software utilities drivers and electronic e Inthe US go to www hp com support IjM806 and or information www hp com support ljflowMFPMS830 Click Drivers amp Software e Outside the US go to www hp com support Select your country region Click Drivers amp Software Enter the product name for example LaserJet M575 and then select Search Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements www hp com go carepack Register your product www register hp com 590 Appendix A Service and support ENWW B Product specifications e Physical specifications e Power consumption electrical specifications and acoustic emissions e Environmental specifications ENWW 591 Physical specifications HP LaserJet Enterprise M806 Table B 1 Physical specifications with toner cartridge Product Height Depth Width Weight M806dn 601 mm 23 7 in 648 mm 25 5 in 1103 mm 43 4 in 76 1 kg 168 Ib M806x 1000 mm 39 4 in 715 mm 28 1 in 1103 mm 43 4 in 108 4 kg 239 Ib Table B 2 Product dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened Product Height Depth Width M806dn 664
364. ion where the product is sold Do not convert operating voltages This will damage the product and void the product warranty Environmental specifications Table B 7 Operating environment specifications Environment Recommended Allowed Temperature 17 to 25 C 62 6 to 77 F 15 to 30 C 59 to 86 F Relative humidity 30 to 70 relative humidity RH 10 to 80 RH Altitude Not applicable 0 to 3048 m 0 to 10 000 ft ENWW Power consumption electrical specifications and acoustic emissions 593 594 Appendix B Product specifications ENWW C Regulatory information e FCC regulations e Environmental product stewardship program e Declaration of conformity M806 e Declaration of conformity M830 e Certificate of Volatility M806 e Certificate of Volatility M830 e Safety statements e Additional statements for telecom fax products ENWW 595 FCC regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is li
365. ional 32 1C 60 event code The restore operation completed successfully informational 32 1C 61 event code The restore operation encountered an error 32 1C 62 event code The restore operation completed but with a warning message 32 1C 68 event code Tools for troubleshooting 395 The restore job ticket was submitted using an invalid network path 32 1C 69 event code The restore job ticket was submitted with a bad encryption personal identification number PIN 32 1C 6A event code An error occurred when creating the temporary directories used to store the restore files in transition to and from the compressed ZIP file 32 1C 6D event code An unusual error occurred when running the restore Recommended action 32 1C 05 event code Verify the credentials that were submitted Check the domain user name and password 32 1C 06 event code Verify the credentials that were submitted Check the domain user name and password 32 1C 07 event code Retry the job 32 1C 08 event code e Retry the job e Remove stored jobs and retry e Use a larger capacity storage device e Check the network share Remove any stored jobs and then retry If the error persists try using a larger capacity storage device and check the network share settings 32 1C 09 event code Use a valid backup file 32 1C 0A event code Use a valid backup file Reboot and then observe the state of the product If the e
366. ioning correctly 8 Touch Component Test 9 Runthe Tray 4 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the pickup drive assembly 10 Ifthe error persists replace the tray pickup assembly Tools for troubleshooting 355 13 A7 D5 Description Jam in lower Right Door From Jam Tray 5 This jam occurs when the media does not reach the HCI Exit sensor PS3301 in the designated amount of time after the Tray 5 feed sensor PS3305 sensed the leading edge of the paper when printing from Tray 5 Recommended action 1 Clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Make sure that the Tray 5 pickup feed and separation roller are installed correctly and show no damage or wear 4 Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers as needed 5 Check the connectors at the sensor feed motor and the HCI controller PCA 6 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 7 Test PS3301 using the Tray Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor are functioning correctly 8 Touch Component Test 9 Runthe Tray 5 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the pickup drive assembly 10 Ifthe error persists replace the tray pickup assembly 13 A7 FF Description Residual Media Jam in High Capacity Input HCI This
367. ioning plate Guide plate The paper pushing plate moves the stack to the paper folding rollers that hold the stack at its center and fold it The paper folding rollers and delivery roller then output the stack to the output bin 116 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1 87 Fold and deliver the stack Paper folding roller Booklet delivery roller Construction of the booklet maker unit control system e The paper output mechanism keeps paper from the stacker unit in place for stapling and folding e The No 1 flapper and the No 2 flapper of the paper inlet configure the paper path to fit the paper size e The paper positioning plate is kept at a predetermined location to fit the paper size e The paper positioning plate motor M4 drives the paper positioning plate and the position of the plate is identified by the number of motor pulses coming from the paper positioning plate home position sensor PI7 e The feed rollers and the crescent roller handle paper moved by the inlet roller and held in a predetermined position e The feed plate moves paper by coming into contact with or moving away from paper as needed e The alignment plates order the stack when paper is output The alignment motor M5 drives the alignment plates The position of the alignment motor M5 is identified by the number of motor pulses sent from the alignment plate home position sensor P15 e The guide plate covers the folding rollers to
368. is active e The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted activated or deactivated For example opening the flatbed cover increments the Flatbed cover Toggle item count two times once when the door is opened and once when the door is closed Touch the Reset Sensors button to reset the Toggle count item Or Touch the Cancel button to exit the Scanner Tests screen and then touch the Cancel button again to return to the Diagnostic Tests menu Scanner tests sensors ADF paper present ADF length short ADF length long ADF slider 1 ADF slider 2 202 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW ADF slider 3 ADF jam cover ADF paper path deskew ADF paper path pick success Paper path sensor 1 unreachable Flatbed Y length short Flatbed Y length long Flatbed cover Tools for troubleshooting 203 Diagrams e Block diagrams e Location of connectors e Plug jack locations e Locations of major components e General timing chart e Circuit diagrams 204 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Block diagrams Figure 2 13 Motors and solenoids product base Table 2 16 Motors and solenoids paper path Item Description Item Description
369. is and wiring is properly connected to sensor Ef NOTE Sensor PI104 is located on the front frame of the finisher directly over the primary stapler Tools for troubleshooting 337 5 Verify that the wiring at the sensor is not damaged and that the connector J2 on the stacker controller PCA is fully seated 6 Only if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the stacker controller PCA 13 67 Az Description Switchback Entrance Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the stapler stacker connection Switchback entrance sensor SR101 remains activated longer than expected suggesting that paper has jammed at the sensor The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms e 13 67 A1 e 13 67 42 e 13 67 43 Recommended action 1 Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be activating sensor SR101 2 Verify that the finisher is securely fastened to the engine 3 Make sure that the finisher and Printer are correctly aligned 4 Check the finisher entry point guides for damage 5 Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 6 Verify that the sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body 7 Perform Sensor test on SR101 If not functioning or damaged replace Sensor 8 Check wiring from sensor SR101 to the Reverse Driver PCA connector for damage 9 Only if the error persists
370. is installed correctly 4 Make sure that the connectors on the stacker controller PCA are fully seated and not damaged 5 Only if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the stacker controller PCA Description This is a JetLink communication error The product has lost JetLink communication with the output device Tools for troubleshooting 427 Recommended action 1 Turn off the product and then disconnect the finisher 2 Make sure that the grounding frame assembly the bar with the wheel located between the engine and the finisher is in the down position with the wheel touching the floor and that the grounding plate is not damaged Ey NOTE The grounding frame assembly is in the up position when the finisher is shipped It must be lowered when the finisher is installed 3 Reconnect the finisher to the product 4 Inspect and reconnect the JetLink cable power and communication cable from the finisher to the product 5 Turn the product on 6 Ifthe error persists replace the stacker controller PCA If the error was caused by exchanging finishers while the product was still on perform the following steps 1 Turn the product off and then disconnect the finisher 2 Make sure that the finisher is designed to be used with the product 3 Reconnect the finisher to the product 4 Turn the product on 66 00 8Z Description There is an issue with paper delivery The specific m
371. is very low The actual remaining fuser kit life might vary You do not need to replace the fuser kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold the HP premium protection warranty ends Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable replace the fuser kit See the parts chapter in the service manual for the fuser kit part number Advise the customer that HP recommends that they have replacement supplies available to install when the print quality is no longer acceptable 10 32 00 Unauthorized supply ENWW Description This error message displays when a supply or supplies has been inserted into the product and the product determines that HP is in the OEM field but the supply or supplies does not pass the new authentication test This error will only be shown if the product currently has all genuine supplies Recommended action Choose to continue past this error by touching OK If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply go to www hp com go anticounterfeit Any product repair required as a result of using non HP or unauthorized supplies is not covered under warranty Tools for troubleshooting 331 10 XX 33 Used Supply In Use Description The toner cartridge is used 10 00 33 event code Used toner cartridge Recommended action If you believe this is a genuine HP supply go to www hp com go anticounterfeit Using a cartridge that is n
372. it passes between the heated fuser roller and the pressure roller This melts the toner and presses it into the paper Step 8 Drum cleaning After the separation process the drum is cleaned and conditioned for the next image The cleaning blade which is always in contact with the surface of the drum scrapes off excess toner The excess toner is stored in the waste toner receptacle ENWW Image formation system 23 Toner cartridge The product has one toner cartridge The cartridge consists of the following components Figure 1 10 Layout of the toner cartridge Table 1 11 Toner cartridge components Item number Component name 1 Primary charging roller 2 Laser beams 3 Blade 4 Developing cylinder 5 Developing cylinder 6 Cartridge memory 7 Flat antenna 8 Plate antenna 9 Transfer charging roller 10 Static charge eliminator 11 Photosensitive drum roller 12 Cleaner blade 13 Waste toner reservoir Toner cartridge design The toner cartridge contains three cylindrical toner reservoirs callout 5 that interconnect Cylindrical hoppers eliminate packing and accumulation in areas where the toner does not reach the development area callout 4 Stirrers rotating within each of the cylinders unpack the toner allowing it to be displaced easily into the development area 24 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW No shake toner The geometry of the hoppers and stirrers automatically redistrib
373. itation or exclusion might not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country region to country region state to state or province to province HP s limited warranty is valid in any country region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards HP will not alter form fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU 580 Appendix A Service and support ENWW HP s Premium Protection Warranty LaserJet ton
374. ity or electrician as appropriate The Ringer Equivalence Number REN of this device is 0 0B ENWW Additional statements for telecom fax products 615 This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications Le pr sent mat riel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d Industrie Canada Notice The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Number of all the devices does not exceed five 5 0 L indice d quivalence de la sonnerie IES sert indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent tre raccord s une interface t l phonique La terminaison d une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs la seule condition que la somme d indices d quivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n exc de pas cinq The standard connecting arrangement code telephone jack type for equipment with direct connections to the telephone network is CA11A Vietnam Telecom wired wireless marking for ICTQC Type approved products Y ICT HP B00502010 Japan Telecom Mark zum 11A08 0138004 616 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Index Symbols Numerics
375. jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 5 feed sensor PS3305 in the designated amount of time after the start of media pick up from Tray 5 This is a no pick jam from Tray 5 Recommended action 1 Open Tray 5 remove any jammed paper and then close the tray 2 Open and close the HCI right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Make sure that the Tray 5 pickup feed and separation roller are installed correctly and show no damage or wear 4 Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers as needed 5 Check the connectors at the sensor feed motor and the HCI controller PCA 6 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 7 Test PS3305 using the Tray Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor are functioning correctly 8 Touch Component Test 9 Runthe Tray 5 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the tray pickup assembly 10 Ifthe error persists replace the tray pickup assembly 13 A5 FF Description Residual Media Jam in Tray 5 This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Tray 5 feed sensor PS3305 at power on Recommended action 1 2 Open Tray 5 remove any jammed paper and then close the tray Open and close the HCI right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam Make sure that the Tray 5 pickup feed and separation roller are installed correctly and s
376. job output motor to repeatedly rotate and then stop 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW4 switches to the OFF setting xX TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the stapled job output motor is stopped before continuing 6 Ifthe stapled job output motor fails the test replace the defective assembly 178 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Trailing edge assist motor test 1 Do one of the following e _ If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e lfyouare continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe main controller PCA set DIPSWA to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 through switch 4 OFF e Switch 5 ON e Switch 6 OFF e Switch 7 and switch 8 ON 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following e First press of SW3 The trailing assist assembly moves to the home position unless it is already in the home position e Second press of SW3 The trailing assist assembly moves to the forward position unless it is already in the forward position Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to continuously move the trailing assist assembly from position to position 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW4 switches
377. k settings are incorrect 563 Service mode TUnctlons TEE 564 Servicemenu io nsn EET 564 Product reSets EE 567 Restore factory set defaults eiie pente ttn deni 567 Restore the service ID 568 Product cold reset sasi nii ae an eia teria tenete nnne nennen nnn 568 Format Disk and Partial Clean functions ssssssssssssssssseeeeeeene 569 Active and repository firmware locations eseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeresseerrressrrrsssrernnnn 569 Partial Cleat ech ain LI Ree nae e Los HT Ee 569 Execute a Partial Clean i iret dts beet 570 Fommat BISK aiite otn teli uci sto Es xe ots imi os D tent 570 Execute a Format Disk 571 ei ME PrOD OM ET 572 Checklist for solving fax problems ssssssss eene eene 572 What type of phone line are you using sssseseeesesesrsssesrrrssetrrrsssrenrnsssrenne 572 Are you using a surge protection device ssesesssseeersssererrressrtrrrsssrerrnnssnt 572 Are you using a phone company voice messaging service or an answering machine ET 572 xxii ENWW Does your phone line have a call waiting feature eeeeeeeeeeeeeeen 573 Check fax accessory status ssssssssssssseeeeeeen eee 573 General fax ele E EE 574 The fax failed to send inisinia aai aaa a a eaa 574 An Out of Memory status message displays on the product control panel 574 Print quality of a photo is poor or prints as a gray box sseeses
378. kely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense E NOTE Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules 596 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Environmental product stewardship program Protecting the environment Hewlett Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment Ozone production The airborne emissions of ozone for this product has been measured according to a generally recognized method and when these emissions data are applied to a generic office model exposure scenario HP is able to determine there is no appreciable amount of ozone generated during printing that exceeds any current indoor air quality standards or guidelines Test method for the determination of emissions from hardcopy devices with respect to awarding the environmental label for office devices with printing function RAL UZ 171 BAM July 2012 Based on ozone concentration when printing 2 hours per day in a 32 cubic meter room with a ventilation rate of 0 72 air changes per hour with HP printing supplies Power consumption Power us
379. king copies of printed pictures ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 291 Table 2 46 Fax Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Job Build Job Build off Use to divide a complex job into Job Build on smaller segments This is useful when you are copying or scanning an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can hold or when you want to combine pages that have different sizes into one job You can use either the glass or the document feeder to scan the original documents Blank Page Disabled Prevents blank Suppression pages in the original Enabled document from being included in the output document Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ringer Volume Off Use to configure Settings settings for receiving Low faxes High Rings To Answer Range 1 6 Default 1 Fax Receive Speed Fast Medium Slow Ring Interval Ring Frequency Range 220 600 ms Default 600 ms Range 1 200 Default 68hz 292 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 46 Fax Settings menu M830 only continued First level Third level Fourth level Values Description Always store faxes If you have concerns about the security of Always print faxes private faxes use this feature to store Use Fax Printing faxes rather than Schedule having them automatically print Select Incoming Fax Options and then you can choose to always store faxes
380. le The following examples depict letter size paper that has passed through the product short edge first These examples illustrate problems that would affect all the pages that you print whether you print in color or in black only Table 2 60 Image defects table Problem Print is light or faded on entire page Cause Poor secondary transfer roller contact with the roller shaft Solution Clean the contacts If the problem remains after cleaning check the contacts for damage Replace any deformed or damaged parts Print is too dark The page is all black Poor drum grounding contact with the toner cartridge Poor primary charging bias contacts with the toner cartridge Poor primary charging bias contacts with the toner cartridge The primary charging bias roller is damaged Clean the contacts If the problem remains after cleaning check the contacts for damage Replace any deformed or damaged parts Clean the contacts If the problem remains after cleaning check the contacts for damage Replace any deformed or damaged parts DS Page is blank The laser shutter open close Replace the toner cartridge projection on the toner cartridge is damaged The laser shutter arm or laser Replace any deformed or damaged shutter is not working or parts damaged Poor developing bias Clean the contacts If the problem contacts with the toner remains after cleaning check the cartridge
381. le 2 11 Table 2 12 Table 2 13 Table 2 14 Table 2 15 Table 2 16 Table 2 17 Table 2 18 Table 2 19 Table 2 20 Table 2 21 Table 2 22 Table 2 23 Table 2 24 Table 2 25 Table 2 26 Table 2 27 Table 2 28 Table 2 29 Table 2 30 Table 2 31 Table 2 32 Table 2 33 xxviii Output bin 1 shift area sensor PDCA eer eene nennen nnne nennen 104 Output bin 2 shift area sensor PDCA eer e enne nnne nnn nennen nnns 104 Delve MODES e 111 Booklet maker motors Ed niei n dita cita ilie ain dita 118 Booklet maker motors 4 enean dade edad eed daN ee c Eaa A eaae a ua ue v e a dnd 121 eau Tee 122 Booklet maker jam Sensors 1 3 i iir pido P OT PG o epa dioe agar this 125 Booklet maker delivery modes AAA 126 Prepoot menw options 1 Of Ofsi nq rh eer pe ke Hee Bb a enge rie tub sb Pe te 131 Preboot menu options 2 Of 6y cte ettet easiest a ete unte Rake dun a 133 Preboot menu options 3 of 134 Preboot menu ptions 4 Of 6 m Let pp E t gt e eU E EE RE M CEPR ee REES 135 Preboot menu options bof 6 eed tette ne Pet Rn Ee ERR a 135 Preboot menu options 6 of 136 Troubleshooting TOW CMA tas 5 Loo EH rene Hood ee egeta Stee eta E 139 Control panel diagnostic functions ssssssssssssessseeeeneeen emen en nenne enne nemen nanat ennnen 141 Product environment spacing eiaa deana EN emen enne en nennen se nennen ener 151 Heartbeat LED product initialization
382. le sheets of paper The document feeder jams skews or picks up multiple sheets of paper M830 Prevent paper jams The product does not pick up paper If the product does not pick up paper from the tray try these solutions d 2 3 4 Open the product and remove any jammed sheets of paper Load the tray with the correct size of paper for your job Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the product control panel Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper Adjust the guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray Check the product control panel to see if the product is waiting for you to acknowledge a prompt to feed the paper manually Load paper and continue The rollers above the tray might be contaminated Clean the rollers with a lint free cloth dampened with warm water The product picks up multiple sheets of paper If the product picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray try these solutions 1 6 Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it rotate it 180 degrees and flip it over Do not fan the paper Return the stack of paper to the tray Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product Use paper that is not wrinkled folded or damaged If necessary use paper from a different package Make sure the tray is not overfilled If it is remove the entire stack of paper from the tray straighten the stack and then
383. let maker 112 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Electrical circuitry for the booklet maker unit The saddle stitcher controller PCA has a microprocessor that controls the sequence of operations and that handles serial communications with the stacker controller PCA This includes driving solenoids and motors in response to the commands from the stacker controller PCA The saddle stitcher controller PCA communicates the state of various sensors and switches to the stacker controller PCA in serial The functions of the major ICs mounted on the saddle stitcher controller PCA are as follows e IC7 CPU Controls the sequence of operations Contains the sequence program e C8 communications IC Communicates with the finisher unit e C512 regulator IC Generates 5 V e 1010 regulator IC Communicates with the product Figure 1 82 Booklet maker signal flow Saddle stitcher controller PCA IC7 CPU IC512 Regulator IC IC10 Regulator IC IC8 Communi cations IC Stacker controller E Basic operation of the booklet maker ENWW Product Host machine e When receiving paper from the stacker unit the booklet maker unit outputs paper in a vertical orientation to a vertical path e Two paper deflecting plates configure the path Booklet maker 113 e The paper positioning plate sets the position of the paper so that the center of the stack matches the stapling folding po
384. livery system 47 Tray 2 cassette multiple feed prevention The product uses a separation roller method to prevent multiple sheets of print media from entering the paper path The Tray 2 cassette separation roller does not have its own driving force Therefore the Tray 2 cassette separation roller follows the rotation of the Tray 2 cassette pickup roller During normal feed when the product picks up one piece of paper the Tray 2 cassette separation roller is driven by the Tray 2 cassette pickup roller through one sheet of paper Thus the separation roller rotates in the paper feed direction During multiple feed when the product picks up more than one piece of paper the low friction force between the sheets weakens the driving force from the Tray 2 cassette pickup roller In addition some braking force is always applied to the Tray 2 cassette separation roller so the weak rotational force of the pickup roller is not enough to rotate the separation roller Therefore the separation roller holds back any multiple fed sheets and one sheet of paper is fed into the product Figure 1 27 Tray 2 cassette multiple feed prevention y CST Pickup roller Print media CST separation roller Lifting plate The separation roller does not rotate lt Normal feed gt lt Multiple feed gt 48 Chapter1 Theory of operation ENWW Tray 2 cassette media size detection and Tray 2 cassette presence detection The DC controller detects the size of
385. llers to reach target temperatures after the product is turned on four e Run fans 1 6 for 30 seconds run duplexer fan for 3 minutes or less seconds Start formatter interface communication Start fuser heaters Start cartridge check Check toner level memory Start communication with optional interfaces duplexer Tray 1 Tray 4 Check cassette lifting and loading status Check jam status auto flush eject Check for fuser wrapping jam Check door open sleep Start fuser roller temperature control and delivery motor STBY After the WAIT state or after the Last e standby Rotation state until a print reservation command comes from the formatter Run fuser control fuser roller temperature at 180 C 356 F pressure roller at 140 C 285 F Await print reservation command await INTR sequence Run fan motors 1 5 at half speed with fan 6 off After five minutes or more run the fuser delivery motor for about 0 08 seconds to prevent deformation of the pressure roller ENWW Basic operation 3 Table 1 1 Sequence of operation product base continued Name Timing Purpose INTR initial After a print reservation command until e Run scanner motor rotation the laser scanner enters a ready state e Runfuser delivery motor e Run drum motor e Run high voltage control negative bias to transfer roller e Receive print command e Run fan motors 1 6 at full speed e Start pickup operation e A Apply high voltage
386. llowing settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 OFF e Switch 3 and switch 4 ON e Switch 5 through switch 8 not used 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the saddle controller PCA press and release SW1 and then observe the following e First press of SW1 The guide plate moves to the down position listen for the plate to move e Second press of SW1 The guide plate moves to the up position listen for the plate to move Eyf NOTE Press and hold down SW1 to cause the plate to move from position to position 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW switches to the OFF setting xX TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the plate is in the home position before continuing 6 Ifthe plate fails the test replace the defective assembly 198 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Punch aging test 1 Do one of the following e _If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e lfyouare continuing from a previous punch controller PCA test go to step 2 2 On the punch controller PCA set DIPSW to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 through switch 4 OFF 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the punch controller PCA press and release SW602 and then observe the following e First press of SW602 The following aging sequence begins and
387. low Type Flash EEPROM etc Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory SPI Flash 4 MB Yes L No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear this factory product configuration data data required for the device to function User modifications are limited to downloading digitally signed HP firmware images Type Flash EEPROM etc Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory ICB EEPROM 32KB DX Yes No Backup device for critical There are no steps to clear this system counters and product data configuration information Type Flash EEPROM etc Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory None LI Yes LJ No Mass Storage Does the device contain mass storage memory Hard Disk Drive Tape Backup KI Yes J No If Yes please describe the type size function and steps to clear the memory below Type HDD Tape etc Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory Self encrypting Hard 320GB K Yes No Stores customer data OS There are several ways to drive SATA2 applications digitally signed erase this firmware images persistent 1 Secure Storage Erase data and temporary data used Erases temporary files and job for processing and system data by overwriting information functions one or three times 3 Secure Disk Erase Industry standard ATA Secure Erase Overwrites all data on the hard drive 4 Secure
388. lt Paper Size Letter Capacity 305245 M8 Tray 1 Size Any Size Hard Disk Encryption Status Orive is not yet Tray 1 Type Any Type encrypted Tray 2 Size Ledger 11x17 Embedded HP JetDirect J8028E 10 10 48 33 Tray 2 Type Plain Trey 1 SM DS ray 3 Type Plain oe HP Web Services S T Tray 4 Size Letter HP Web Services Disabled Tray 4 Type Plain ePrint Disabled Tray 5 Size Letter Tray 5 Type Plain Duplex Unit Device Name HP LaserJet Stapler Stacker and 2 3 Hole Puncher Mailbox Model CZ995A Manufacturer HEWLETT PACKARD Firmware Revision MT02 04 02 28 02 39 1 Output Bin 1 300 Sheets Standard bin 1 Output Bin 2 1300 Sheets Upper left bin 2 Output Bin 3 1700 Sheets Lower left bin MEM 3 PTHIULASCI2948 porren English United States 1 Device information 2 Installed personalities and options 3 HP Web services 4 Memory 5 Event log 250 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Security 7 Paper trays and options HP embedded Jetdirect page ENWW The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page which contains the following information Always make sure the status line under the general information line indicates UO Card Ready Figure 2 58 HP embedded Jetdirect page Embedded Jetdirect Page General Information Status mM Model Number Hardware Address Fireware Version LA Port Config Auto Manufacturing ID Date Manufactured L WS Regis
389. lve problems ENWW Does your phone line have a call waiting feature If the fax telephone line has an activated call waiting feature a call waiting notice can interrupt a fax call in progress which causes a communication error Ensure that a call waiting feature is not active on the fax telephone line Check fax accessory status If the analog fax accessory does not appear to be functioning print a Configuration Page report to check the status 1 From the Home screen scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Reports e Configuration Status Pages e Configuration Page 3 Touch the Print button to print the report or touch the View button to view the report on the screen The report consists of several pages Ey NOTE The product IP address or host name is listed on the Jetdirect Page On the Fax Accessory Page of the Configuration Page under the Hardware Information heading check the Modem Status The following table identifies the status conditions and possible solutions EY NOTE If the Fax Accessory Page does not print there might be a problem with the analog fax accessory If you are using LAN fax or Internet fax those configurations could be disabling the feature Operational Enabled The analog fax accessory is installed and ready Operational Disabled The fax accessory is installed but you have not configured the required fax settings yet The fax accessory is
390. ly Alternate having problems with light weight paper during duplex print jobs Pre Rotation Off Mode On M806 only Fuser Temp Mode Up Use this feature to eliminate ghost M806 only Down images on printed pages Normal Paper Curl Mode Normal Use this setting to reduce paper curl in M806 only Alternate 1 print jobs Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Optimize Environment Normal Enable if the product is operating in a low M830 only Low Temp temperature environment and you are having problems with print quality Such as blisters in the printed image Line Detail Normal Use this setting if you have scattered M806 only Alternate 1 lines in printed pages Off Restore Optimize Use to return all the settings in the Optimize menu to the factory default values ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 261 Table 2 43 General Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Resolution 300 x 300 dpi M830 Sets the resolution at only which the product prints 600 x 600 dpi FastRes 1200 ProRes 1200 REt On Use this setting to enable or disable Off Resolution Enhancement technology REt which produces smoother angles curves and edges Economode On Use this setting to enable or disable the Off Economode feature which conserves toner Toner density Lighter print M830 Darker print M830 Range 1 to 5 M806 default 3 262 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW
391. ly after the product power is turned on Place your hand over the vents in the left side cover above the formatter If the fan is operating you will feel air passing out of the product You can lean close to the product and hear the fan operating You can also place your hand over the vents on the right side of the rear cover If the fan is operating you should feel air being drawn into the product After the fan is operating the main motor turns on unless the right or front cover is open a jam condition is sensed or the paper path sensors are damaged You might be able to visually and audibly determine if the main motor is turned on If the fan and main motor are operating correctly the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine formatter and control panel problems Perform an engine test If the formatter is damaged it might interfere with the engine test If the engine test page does not print try removing the formatter and then performing the engine test again If the engine test is then successful the problem is almost certainly with the formatter the control panel or the cable that connects them If the control panel is blank when you turn on the product check the following items 140 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 1 Make sure that the product is connected directly into an active electrical outlet not a power strip that delivers the correct voltage Make sure that the power switch is in the o7 position Make sur
392. m Length feature to select the user soft default vertical form length Orientation Portrait Landscape Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan originals Select the Portrait option if the short edge is at the top or select the Landscape option if the long edge is at the top Font Source Internal Selects the font source for the user soft default font The list of available options varies depending on the installed product options Font Number Font Pitch Range 0 110 Default 0 Range 0 44 99 99 Default 10 Specifies the font number for the user soft default font using the Source that is specified in the Font Source menu The product assigns a number to each font and lists it on the PCL font list The font number displays in the Font column of the printout If the Font Source option and the Font Number setting indicate a contour font then use this feature to select a default pitch for a fixed spaced font Font Point Size Symbol Set Range 4 00 999 75 Default 12 00 Select from a list of symbol sets If the Font Source option and the Font Number setting indicate a contour font then use this feature to select a default point size for a proportional spaced font Select any one of several available symbol sets from the control panel A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font The factory default value for
393. main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 On the main controller PCA set DIPSW4 to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e SWitch 2 through switch 5 OFF e Switch 6 ON e Switch 7 and switch 8 OFF 3 Remove the staple cartridge from the staple subassembly 4 Turn the product power on 5 Onthe controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following e First press of SW3 The staple sub assembly clinches a staple Eyf NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to cause the staple sub assembly to continuously clinch the staple 6 Reinstall the staple cartridge from the staple sub assembly 7 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW4 switches to the OFF setting xX TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test 8 Ifthe staple sub assembly motor fails the test replace the staple sub assembly 176 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Stacker entrance motor test 1 Do one of the following e _If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e lfyouare continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe main controller PCA set DIPSWA to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 through switch 5 OFF e Switch 6 ON e Switch 7 OFF e Switch 8 ON 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe
394. make sure that the connector J221 on the DC controller PCA and the intermediate connectors J55 and J16 between the DC controller and the fan are connected correctly and undamaged 4 Ifthe error persists replace the controller fan assembly FM2 57 00 03 Error To continue turn off then on Description Rear delivery fan FM 3 malfunction M806 only Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Listen for fan noise at the left side upper back of the product 3 If no noise is heard make sure that the connectors J1453 and J1451 on the intermediate PCA and connector J205 on the DC controller are connected correctly and undamaged 4 Ifthe error persists replace the face down delivery assembly 57 00 03 Error To continue turn off then on Description Rear delivery fan FM 3B malfunction M830 only Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Listen for fan noise at the left side upper back of the product 3 If no noise is heard make sure that the connectors J1453B and J1451B on the intermediate PCA and connector J205 on the DC controller are connected correctly and undamaged 4 Ifthe error persists replace the delivery fan assembly 57 00 04 Error To continue turn off then on Description Front delivery fan FM 4 malfunction M806 only Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Listen for fan noise at the left side upper front of the product ENWW Tools for trou
395. mation digits for specific mode Recommended action Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Remove and inspect the duplexer unit Clear and clean the duplexer as needed 4 Ifthe issue persists replace the duplexer 13 D4 Dz Description Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when the media does not reach the duplex pre registration sensor PS2003 in a designated amount of time after the duplex switchback sensor PS2002 sensed the leading edge 13 D4 D2 374 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 13 E1 Dz ENWW The fuser is printing in fuser mode Normal e 13 D4 D3 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Light 1 or Light 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode e 13 D4 D4 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 1 e 13 D4 D5 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 2 e 13 D4 DB The fuser is printing in fuser mode Transparency e 13 D4 DD The fuser is printing in fuser mode Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode Recommended action 1 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Remove and inspect the duplexer unit Clear and clean the duplexer as needed 4 If the issue persists replace the duplexer Description Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when the me
396. max outstanding packet header field e 80 01 8C event log Invalid channel mapping response e 80 03 01 event log No PGP buffers e 80 03 02 event log Channel table full e 80 03 03 event log Producer index not reset e 80 03 04 event log Consumer index not reset e 80 03 05 event log Queue position size too small e 80 03 06 event log Transport overflow e 80 03 07 event log No overflow packets e 80 03 08 event log Invalid identify response e 80 03 09 event log Invalid channel map return status e 80 03 10 event log Invalid reclaim return status e 80 03 12 event log Datagram invalid buffer e 80 03 13 event log Max stream channels Tools for troubleshooting 453 80 03 14 event log Max datagram channels 80 03 15 event log Card reset failed 80 03 16 event log Self test failure 80 03 17 event log Unknown PGP packet 80 03 18 event log Duplicate I O channel Recommended action 1 2 3 4 5 Turn the product off and then on Remove the RJ45 cable Turn the product off and then on Reconnect the RJ45 cable If the error persists replace the formatter 82 73 46 82 73 47 Description A hard disk or compact flash disk cleaning failed This error is usually caused by a failure of the disk hardware Recommended action 1 2 Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu 3 Reload the firmware 98 0X 0Y Error Messages Turn the product off and then on 98 00 01
397. memory below Type Flash EEPROM etc SPI Flash Size User Modifiable Function 4 MB Kl Yes L No Contains the boot code and factory product configuration data required for the device to function User modifications are limited to downloading digitally signed HP firmware images Steps to clear memory There are no steps to clear this data Type Flash EEPROM etc ICB EEPROM Size User Modifiable Function 32KB Dd Yes No Backup device for critical system counters and product configuration information Steps to clear memory There are no steps to clear this data Type Flash EEPROM etc None Size User Modifiable Function O Yes L No Steps to clear memory Mass Storage Does the device contain mass storage memory Hard Disk Drive Tape Backup DI Yes No If Yes please describe the type size function and steps to clear the memory below Type HDD Tape etc Size User Modifiable Function Self encrypting Hard 320GB K Yes JNo Stores customer data OS drive SATA2 applications digitally signed firmware images persistent data and temporary data used for processing and system functions HDD used on the M806dx bundle only Steps to clear memory There are several ways to erase this 1 Secure Storage Erase Erases temporary files and job data by overwriting information one or three times 3 Secure Disk Erase Industry standard
398. message will appear Turn the power off and then on again to restart the initialization process If the error persists perform a firmware upgrade Tools for troubleshooting 153 Table 2 10 Heartbeat LED product initialization continued Product initializing state Heartbeat LED normal state Heartbeat LED error state Control panel Not applicable Yellow fast flash connection interrupted after the product is e Control panel not connected operational Sleep Mode Green slow blink Not applicable Approaching Sleep Green slow blink Not applicable Mode Wake up from Sleep Follows initialization progression Follows initialization progression Mode Approaching wake up Follows initialization progression Follows initialization progression from Sleep Mode 154 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Heartbeat LED product operational The following table describes the heartbeat operation when the product completes the firmware boot process and is in the Ready state Table 2 11 Heartbeat LED product operational LED color Description Green e Normal operation o Formatter is operating normally o Firmware is operating normally o Control panel is connected Yellow e Formatter cannot connect to the control panel o Check control panel connections E Verify control panel functionality Red e Formatter error or failure o Serial peripheral interface SPI flash memory boot error o Power on self test formatter failed o
399. mm 26 1 in 1128 mm 44 4 in 1363 mm 53 7 in M806x 1036 mm 40 8 in 1195 mm 47 in 1363 mm 53 7 in HP LaserJet Enterprise Flow M830 Table B 3 Physical specifications with toner cartridge Product Height Depth Width Weight M830z 1203 mm 47 4 in 761 mm 30 in 1103 mm 43 4 in 136 kg 300 Ib Table B 4 Product dimensions with all doors trays and document feeder fully opened Product Height Depth Width M830z 1593 mm 62 7 in 1196 mm 47 1 in 1363 mm 53 7 in 592 Appendix B Product specifications ENWW Finishing accessories Table B 5 Accessory specifications Product Height Depth Width Weight Stapler stacker 1093 mm 43 in 783 mm 30 8 in 674 mm 26 5 in 68 kg 150 Ib Stapler stacker 1093 mm 43 in 783 mm 30 8 in 674 mm 26 5 in 73 kg 161 Ib with hole punch Booklet maker 1093 mm 43 in 783 mm 30 8 in 674 mm 26 5 in 87 kg 192 Ib Table B 6 Accessory dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened Product Height Depth Width Stapler stacker 1093 mm 43 in 783 mm 30 8 in 1094 mm 43 1 in Stapler stacker with 1093 mm 43 in 783 mm 30 8 in 1094 mm 43 1 in hole punch Booklet maker 1093 mm 43 in 783 mm 30 8 in 1094 mm 43 1 in Power consumption electrical specifications and acoustic emissions SSee www hp com support IjM806 and www hp com support ljflowMFPM830 for current information A CAUTION Power requirements are based on the country reg
400. n all of the DIPSW4 switches to the OFF setting o TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the shutter assembly is in the home position before continuing 6 Ifthe shutter assembly fails the test replace the defective assembly 182 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW First tray test upper stack output bin 1 Do one of the following e _If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e lfyouare continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe main controller PCA set DIPSW4 to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 and switch 3 OFF e Switch 4 ON e Switch 5 through switch 8 OFF 3 Remove all paper from the stack upper and lower output bins 4 Turn the product power on 5 Onthe controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following A CAUTION mmediately unplug the product power cord if you hear any abnormal sounds when the bins are moving e First press of SW3 The stack upper and lower output bins move to the paper out position for the upper output bin position e Second press of SW3 The stack upper output bin moves to the detecting bin surface position Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to repeat moving the stack upper output bin to the detecting bin surface position 6 Turn the product power off and
401. n deactivate Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to cause the clutches to repeatedly activate and then deactivate in the order listed above 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSWA switches to the OFF setting x TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the clutches are deactivated before continuing 6 Ifa clutch fails the test replace the appropriate clutch ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 181 Shutter assembly test 1 Do one of the following e _If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e l fyouare continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 On the main controller PCA set DIPSW4 to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 through switch 4 OFF e Switch 5 switch 6 and switch 7 ON e Switch 8 OFF 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following e First press of SW3 The shutter assembly moves to the home position unless it is already in the home position e Second press of SW3 The shutter assembly moves to the close position unless it is already in the close position Ef NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to continuously move the shutter assembly from position to position 5 Turn the product power off and then retur
402. n reseat the formatter 5 If the error persists replace the SCB or the formatter 30 01 45 Description Internal CPB communication error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Ifthe error persists turn the product off and then reseat the formatter 3 Upgrade the firmware 4 Ifthe error persists replace the SCB 5 If the error persists replace the formatter 384 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 30 01 46 30 01 47 30 01 48 30 01 49 ENWW Description Internal CPB communication error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 If the error persists turn the product off and then reseat the formatter 3 Ifthe error persists replace the SCB Description Document feeder error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 If the error persists turn the product off and then check the document feeder wire harness connectors 3 Ifthe error persists replace the document feeder assembly 4 Ifthe error persists replace the formatter Description Scanner error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 If the error persists turn the product off and then check the scanner wire harness connectors and the scanner power supply fan 3 Ifthe error persists replace the scanner power supply or the scanner power supply fan Description Scanner inverter fan error Recommended action 1 Turn the produc
403. n subject to change without notice Residents of Alaska and Hawaii Do not use the UPS label Call 1 800 340 2445 for information and instructions The U S Postal Service provides no cost cartridge return transportation services under an arrangement with HP for Alaska and Hawaii Non U S returns Paper To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program just follow the simple directions in the recycling guide found inside the packaging of your new product supply item or visit www hp com recycle Select your country region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet printing supplies This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281 2002 Material restrictions ENWW This HP product does not contain added mercury This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end of life The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett Packard for this product include the following HP LaserJet Enterprise M806 and or HP LaserJet Enterprise Flow MFP M830 Type Carbon monofluoride lithium Weight 0 8g Location On formatter board User removable X Be SS th as SU For recycling information you can go to www hp com recycle or contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance www eiae org
404. n the stacker controller PCA When the CPU identifies a jam it suspends the stacker s delivery operation and informs the product of the jam When all doors are closed after the paper jam is removed the stacker use the two sensors stacking paper path entry sensor and stacking paper path delivery sensor to check for further jams If the sensors detect Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 105 paper the stacker determines that the paper jam has not been removed and sends another jam removal signal to the product Figure 1 77 Jam detection sensors Switchback assembly jam detection The switchback assembly uses the following sensors to detect the presence of the paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed 106 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW e Switchback inlet sensor SR101 e Switchback registration sensor SR102 e Switchback path jam sensor SR103 Figure 1 78 Switchback assembly sensors The stapler stacker detects the following switchback jams Switchback inlet delay jam The switchback inlet sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the stacker controller receives the DELIVERY signal from the product Switchback inlet stay jam The switchback inlet sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specifie
405. n to initialize the USB device USB storage accessory removed Clearing any associated data Description This message displays for about 6 seconds after a USB device is removed Recommended action Touch the Hide button to remove this message USB storage device failure To clear touch OK Description The specified device failed Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear this error USB storage file operation failed To clear touch OK Description A PJL file system command was received that attempted to perform an invalid operation such as downloading a file to a nonexistent directory Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear this error USB storage file system is full To clear touch OK ENWW Description The file system on the installed USB device is full Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear this error Tools for troubleshooting 493 Used supply installed To continue touch OK OR Used supply in use Description Description One of the toner cartridges or supplies has been previously used Recommended action If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply go to www hp com go anticounterfeit Verifying Please Wait Description This message displays when the product is retrieving a print job from device memory but can cause the product control panel to lock up The user enter the Retrieve from Device Memory menu to print a job After selecting the desired print jobs
406. nal Some PBX systems are digital and might not be compatible with the fax accessory You might need an interfacing Analog Telephone Adapter ATA to connect the fax machine to digital PBX systems e X Roll over lines A phone system feature where a new call rolls over to the next available line when the first incoming line is busy Try attaching the product to the first incoming phone line The fax accessory answers the phone after it rings the number of times set in the rings to answer setting Are you using a surge protection device A surge protection device can be used between the wall jack and the fax accessory to protect the fax accessory against electrical power passed through the phone lines These devices can cause some fax communication problems by degrading the quality of the phone signal If you are having problems sending or receiving faxes and are using one of these devices connect the product directly to the phone jack on the wall to determine whether the problem is with the surge protection device Are you using a phone company voice messaging service or an answering machine If the rings to answer setting for the messaging service is lower than the rings to answer setting for the fax accessory the messaging service answers the call and the fax accessory cannot receive faxes If the rings to answer setting for the fax accessory is lower than that of the messaging service the fax accessory answers all calls 572 Chapter2 So
407. nce of operation sssssseseeiennenrsenstersetttttttttttnnnnn nnen nnna snene nennt 3 Formatter control SySter iioii rie ege rites HER AER 5 Formatter Ee D LC 5 Control Panel 6 ul Ier e E E 7 Bez 8 MOLOIS EE 11 tcp M 12 FUSEF CONTIOM CINCUIE E 13 Fuser heater protection ccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeccaaeaaecaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetees 15 Low voltage power supply cccccccceccee cece eee e eee eedeeeeceaeaaaaeaeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeteeeeeneenes 16 Over current over voltage protection en 18 High voltage power supply mee ene ennemi nn nnns nennen ens 19 Laser scanner System EE 21 Image formation SyStelm cte tended saevit te eret re e Ead obe er d te bu bd teque ote ebd quo evt lag 22 Image formation process ssssssssssseseeenerenn nennen nne nsn ener rennen nnne senis 23 Toner cartridge E 24 Toner cartridge desig icit cite titre cd te redde qe bab de E EES dd 24 No shake toner em neret n nenne rerrtmrrtr sns nnns 25 Toner cartridge memory chip sssesssseeee en eene 25 Toner Seal tete onto de DI EES EES 25 Toner level detection ccccccecceeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaee
408. nd Settings menu M830 only eessesssssseeeeeeeneeennrn nnn 273 Table 246 Fax Settings menu M8330 ohly EE 284 Table 2 47 General Print Settings moenu iniecit seed ii iai didit pae cdd ta NEEE En 297 Table 2 48 Default Print Options meri sccedcee nore rt Rn RR ee ey n Rea n rama daa ER Rape Che E EENS TUER RR Rua dE 300 Table 2 49 Display SSulhgs MON ET 302 Table 2 50 Manage Supplies menu EEN 304 Table 2 51 Manage Trays Menu secco ete nete Urge andere eu patet ask iota este 308 Table 2 52 eben SStUINGS Menu DC 310 Table 2 53 Jetdirect Meng M 310 Table 2 4 CTroubleshiootirg MON E 322 Table 2 55 enen EE erter MENU areri levees cei pecore ee tr peni e perdi ba eere b eram ges epee 325 Table 2 56 Calibration Cleaning menu M830 eessssissseesssssseeeeeeeee nennen nennen nennen nnns 326 Table 2 5 alibration Gleanitig menu coercere tena rente ntt tah ora cede d daa RARE ce a RD aud 328 Table 2 58 Print modes under the Adjust Paper Types submenu sssseenn 551 Table 2 59 MP modes under the Optimize submenu sssssssssssssssssssseeeereeer eene nnns 552 Table 2 60 Image defects table ci e e tte e bg Y xcu eX YR Mraz XY RR R AYER ORARE pd 553 Table 2 61 Solve performance problems ssssossssssnnstntrrtnrtrnsttesttesttetttttntnntnnnnnnnnnnsaneensttentnnnn nnmnnn nenene 561 Table B 1 Physical specifications with toner cartridge
409. nd services that are environmentally sound from product design and manufacturing to distribution customer use and recycling When you participate in the HP Planet Partners program we ensure your HP LaserJet toner cartridges are recycled properly processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from landfills Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials it will not be returned to you Thank you for being environmentally responsible Ey NOTE Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet toner cartridges only Please do not use this label for HP inkjet cartridges non HP cartridges refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty returns For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to http www hp com recycle Return and recycling instructions United States and Puerto Rico The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more HP LaserJet toner cartridges after use Please follow the applicable instructions below Multiple returns more than one cartridge 1 Package each HP LaserJet toner cartridge in its original box and bag 2 Tape the boxes together using strapping or packaging tape The package can weigh up to 31 kg 70 Ib 3 Use a single pre paid shipping label OR 1 Use your own suitable box or request a free bulk collection box from www hp com recycle or 1
410. nded action Initialize the file system on the internal disk Internal disk spinning up Description The internal disk device is spinning up its platter Jobs that require disk access must wait ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 475 Recommended action No action is necessary Jam in document feeder Description A document feeder jam has occurred Recommended action Clear the jam See the clear jams section in the service manual Job not stapled due to mixed sizes Description This message displays when the job to staple has more than one paper size paper width Recommended action Paper with different widths cannot be stapled Use the same width paper for the entire print job Load Tray X Type Size To use another tray press OK Description This message displays when the indicated tray is selected but is not loaded and other paper trays are available for use It also displays when the tray is configured for a different paper type or size than the print job requires Recommended action 1 Load the correct paper in the tray 2 If prompted confirm the size and type of paper loaded 3 Otherwise press the OK button to select another tray 4 If error persists use the cassette media present sensor test in the Tray bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly 5 Make sure that the sensor flag on the media presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely Loading program XX De
411. ndicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Make sure that the Tray 2 pickup feed and separation roller are installed correctly and show no damage or wear 4 Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers as needed 5 Check the connectors at the sensor feed motor and the DC controller PCA 6 Openthe following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 7 Test PS1402 using the Tray Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly 8 Touch Component Test 9 Runthe Tray 2 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the pickup assembly Tools for troubleshooting 357 10 Run the Tray 2 intermediate feed motor M3 drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning 11 13 A8 D3 correctly If it is not replace the pickup assembly If the error persists replace the paper pickup assembly Description Jam in Upper Right Door This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 2C feed sensor PS8 in the designated amount of time after the Tray 3B feed sensor PS1403 sensed the leading edge of the paper when printing from Tray 3 Recommended action 1 2 10 11 Clear the jam in the indicated area Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam Make sure that the Tray 3 pickup feed and separation roller are installed correctly and sh
412. ndividual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot product problems Understand lights on the formatter Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the product is functioning correctly 1 Connectivity LED 2 Heartbeat LED 3 HP Jetdirect LEDs ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 151 Heartbeat LED The heartbeat LED provides information about product operation If a product error occurs the formatter displays a message on the control panel display However error situations can occur causing the formatter to control panel communication to be interrupted E NOTE HP recommends fully troubleshooting the formatter and control panel before replacing either assembly Use the heartbeat LED to troubleshoot formatter and control panel errors to avoid unnecessarily replacing these assemblies Formatter to control panel communication interruptions e The firmware does not fully initialize and configure the control panel interface e The control panel is not functioning either a failed assembly or power problem e Interface cabling between the formatter and control panel is damaged or disconnected 29 TIP If the heartbeat LED is illuminated by an error condition or normal operation the formatter is fully seated and the power is on The pins for the LED circuit in the formatter connector are recessed so that this LED will not illuminate unless the formatter is fully seated The heartbeat LED operates according to the pro
413. ne and the finisher is in the down position with the wheel touching the floor and that the grounding plate is not damaged Ey NOTE The grounding frame assembly is in the up position when the finisher is shipped It must be lowered when the finisher is installed 426 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 66 00 50 66 00 77 66 00 79 ENWW 3 Turn the engine power off and then on to try to clear the error 4 Ifthe error persists replace the stacker controller PCA Description This is a CAN CPU sequence error Recommended action There is no recommended action at this time Description This is a device communication error The communication between the print engine and the finisher has been interrupted or lost Recommended action 1 Make sure that the latest firmware updates are installed for the engine and the finisher 2 Make sure that the finisher is grounded correctly e Make sure that the finisher is latched and locked to the engine by tightening the thumbscrew inside the front door e Make sure that the grounding frame assembly the bar with the wheel located between the engine and the finisher is in the down position with the wheel touching the floor and that the grounding plate is not damaged Ey NOTE The grounding frame assembly is in the up position when the finisher is shipped It must be lowered when the finisher is installed 3 Make sure that the communication cable from the finisher to the engine
414. nent type Abbreviation Component name Motor M3301 HCI right cassette pickup motor M3302 HCI right cassette lifter motor M3303 HCI left cassette lifter motor M3304 HCI left cassette pickup motor M3305 HCI intermediate feed motor Solenoid SL3301 HCI right cassette pickup solenoid SL3302 HCI left cassette pickup solenoid Photointerrupter PS3101 HCI right cassette lift up media surface sensor PS3102 HCI right cassette pickup coordinate media surface sensor PS3103 Right cassette media presence sensor PS3201 HCI left cassette lift up media surface sensor PS3202 HCI left cassette pickup coordinate media surface sensor PS3203 HCI left cassette media presence sensor PS3301 HCI media feed sensor PS3302 HCI right cassette media feed sensor PS3303 HCI right cassette media size sensor PS3304 HCI left cassette media size sensor PS3305 HCI left cassette media feed sensor PS3306 HCI side feed guide open detection sensor PS3307 HCI intermediate unit presence sensor PS3308 HCI right cassette media level sensor PS3309 HCI left cassette media level sensor 58 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Table 1 20 HCI electrical components continued Component type Abbreviation Component name Switch SW3301 HCI right door open detection switch SW3302 HCI right cassette open detection switch SW3303 HCI left cassette open detection switch HCI electrical components The 3 500 sheet high capacity input HCI feeder has two cassettes and each of them operat
415. ng assembly 66 60 25 Description Stacker Shutter Motor Error When the shutter clutch CL101 and stack ejection lower roller clutch CL102 are on the shutter moves up closed when the stack ejection motor M102 turns forward and moves down open delivery enabled when the motor turns backwards This error occurs when the shutter home position sensor P1113 indicates no change when the stack ejection motor M102 is activated for 3 seconds indicating the shutter is not moving Recommended action 1 Inspect the shutter for damage If the shutter cannot move freely replace the shutter assembly 2 Remove the lower guide grate shaped and check sensor P1113 for damage 3 Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the chassis 4 Check for proper alignment of the shutter mounted on the back of the grate shaped lower guide and the left mechanism on the finisher chassis 5 Make sure that connector J6 and J19 on the stacker controller PCA is fully seated and not damaged 6 Check CL101 during operation and make sure that it is functioning correctly by activating prior to the error Replace CL102 if necessary 7 Ifthe error persists replace the stacker controller PCA 430 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 66 60 27 66 60 28 66 60 31 ENWW Description Stacker Align Motor Error Front M103 In order to neatly align the paper stack for either stapling or offsetting to take place the front and rear aligning plats
416. nment plate moves to the home position unless it is already in the home position e Second press of SW3 The pre alignment plate moves to the A4 landscape position if it was in the home position e Third press of SW3 The pre alignment plate moves from to the A4 portrait position if it was in the A4 landscape position NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to continuously move the pre alignment plate from position to position 5 If the pre alignment plate correctly functions press and release SW3 until the plate is in the home position 6 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSWA switches to the OFF setting x TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the pre alignment plate is in the home position before continuing 7 Ifthe pre alignment plate fails the test replace the defective assembly ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 171 Post alignment plate motor test 1 Do one of the following e l fthis is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e Ifyou are continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 On the main controller PCA set DIPSW4 to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e SWitch 2 through switch 7 OFF e Switch 8 ON 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe
417. nsor P106 Aligning plate front Figure 1 58 Stack job offset example Results Delivering 4 sets 4th set 2nd set Direction of delivery Figure 1 59 Job offset operation 1 of 2 Front aligning plate Tray 92 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Figure 1 60 Job offset operation 2 of 2 nd Rear aligning plate P Sheet to be offset Front aligning plate IE sc Table 1 30 Motors for the stack job offset Tray Motor Front aligning plate motor M103 Rear aligning plate motor M104 Swing motor M106 Function Aligns paper in the processing output bin to the front Aligns paper in the processing output bin to the rear Moves the swing guide up down Stack trailing edge assist motor M109 Carry the stack end during stack ejection Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 93 Stack trailing edge assist operation To improve stacking performance when ejecting jobs delivered to the processing output bin a stack trailing edge assist guide supports the back of the stack during stack ejection Figure 1 61 Stack trailing edge assist operation Stack trailiing edge assist home position sensor PI39 Processing tray stopper Stack trailing edge assist guide Stack trailing edge assist motor M109 Processing tray stopper Stack delivery operation The stack is ejected each time 2 4 large sheets or 2 6 small sheets are offset on the processing outpu
418. nsor PS501 within 1 6 seconds after the VSYNC signal Fuser delivery stationary jam The trailing edge fails to clear the fuser delivery sensor PS502 within the specified time 3 4 seconds for A3 media or 2 5 seconds for A4 media after the VSYNC signal Face down delivery delay The leading edge fails to reach the face down bin delivery sensor PS1451 within 2 4 jam seconds after the VSYNC signal Face down delivery The leading edge fails to clear the face down bin delivery sensor PS1451 within the stationary jam specified time 4 3 seconds for A3 media or 3 4 seconds for A4 media after the VSYNC signal ENWW Pickup feed and delivery system 55 Table 1 19 Jam detection continued Jam Door open jam Causes and conditions The following sensors detect media in the system when the door is opened or closed Registration paper sensor PS2 Fuser delivery sensor PS501 Fuser jam sensor PS502 Face down bin delivery sensor PS1451 Tray 2 feed sensor A PS1401 Tray 2 feed sensor B PS1401 Tray 3 feed sensor A PS1404 Tray 3 feed sensor B PS1403 Residual jam The following conditions indicate a residual jam The product is turned on and the fuser delivery sensor PS502 and the fuser jam sensor PS501 have detected media during the startup process The DC controller has not received an automatic delivery command three minutes after a jam that should include the command was cle
419. nt name Abbreviation J5 Feed motor M1 J23 Paper folding motor M2 J12 Guide motor M3 J7 Paper positioning plate motor M4 J7 Alignment motor M5 J8 Stitcher motor rear M6 J8 Stitcher motor front M7 Booklet maker 121 ENWW Table 1 37 Booklet maker motors continued Abbreviation Component name Saddle stitcher controller PCA M8 Paper pushing plate motor J23 M9 Saddle inlet motor J34 Figure 1 92 Booklet maker sensors Saddle stitcher controller PCB 1 2 Delivery detection signal DEIV Output bin paper detection signal TRYPAR Vertical path paper detection signal VPJM 7 Guide plate home position detection signal GIDHP Crescent roller position detection signal FDRLHP Paper positioning plate paper detection signal PPOSPAR Paper folding home position detection signal PAFLDHP Paper positioning plate home position detection signal PAPPOS mm S o D kK LI n lt z o oa lt E cl o I a n Bg Lu W Q a Ec 9 o0 oO ra Si o oz z e N Im DOD wt d EE 3 y g g o 1 K E a o o 5 GO e m D D D 95 CS E c co PI7 PE o2 S S olo SEN Ki ke Be Be 5 o o S a9 a o g 2 a oto D5 Kg o Gc Sol 9 o o ole 59 19 5 bg o 2 50 So a Q arc Qe a s pm O ZS a a 2 oz os e N S Oo Oo d ol Si Oo oo o o o D aa
420. nter the IP addresses Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask Default Use this item to manually enter the default gateway Gateway Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings Table 2 5 Preboot menu options 5 of 6 Menu option First level Second level Third level Description Administrator Startup Select the Startup Options item to specify options that can be Options set for the next time the product is turned on and initializes to continued the Ready state Show Revision Not currently functional Select the Show Revision item to allow the product to initialize and show the firmware version when the product reaches the Ready state Once the product power is turned on the next time the Show Revision item is unchecked so that the firmware revision is not shown Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address and all customer settings This item also returns all settings to factory defaults NOTE Items in the Service menu are not reset Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed third party applications Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to initialize the product the next time the power is turned on without calibrating Lock Service CAUTION Select the Lock Service item to lock the Service menu access both in the Preboot menu and the Device Maintenance menu Service personnel must have the administrator remove the L
421. ntroller PCA connectors ssse m 218 Plug jack locations M806 nennen nenne E nennen inen T 220 Pl g jack locations M830 5 pe rte spia ien dd deed d dech 220 M830 product integrated scanner assembly ISA sssssseee e 222 Base product Covers E th 223 Base product main assemblies 1 Of 31 224 Base product main assemblies 2 of 31 225 Base product main assemblies 3 of 31 226 ENWW Table 2 34 High capacity input HCI feeder covers cee ce eee e eee teeeeee eee eee eeecaaeaaaeaaecaaecaeceeeeeeeeeeeeteees 227 Table 2 35 High capacity input HCI feeder main assemblies 1 of 3 228 Table 2 36 High capacity input HCI feeder main assemblies 2 Of 31 229 Table 2 37 High capacity input HCI feeder main assemblies 3 of 31 230 Table 2 38 Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch covers ccccecceceesseeecceceeeeecesaeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 231 Table 2 39 Booklet maker only COVES iioc trt eerte cede cet eaa v EE Ra YER ab YID da ATE RR RER EN 232 Table 2 40 Finishing accessories main assemblies sssssssssssssssseeeee eene 233 Table 2 41 Important information on the configuration pages ssesssenm nen 253 Table 2 42 Gel CT 255 Table 243 General Seuihgs mel ec ir eo reote re Dd a re mui rre ERR ni duo e RR RR uU ER ER D ue ERR FAR 257 Table 2 44 Copy Settings menu M830 only A 266 Table 2 45 Scan Digital Se
422. nu 44 XX XX Error Messages 44 01 XX Error Event log message MFP Only Description A digital send error has occurred Recommended action Try to send the job again No action necessary This error message should automatically clear 44 03 XX Error Event log message MFP Only Description A digital send error has occurred Recommended action Try to send the job again 44 10 XX Error Event log message MFP Only Description A send to e mail error has occurred Recommended action No action necessary 406 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 44 34 XX Error Event log message MFP Only Description A fax error has occurred Recommended action 1 2 Try to send the job again If the issue persists see document c03264726 HP LaserJet Enterprise M4555 MFP Product Series Solve fax problems for additional fax troubleshooting information 44 92 XX Error Event log message MFP Only Description A fax error has occurred Recommended action 1 Try to send the job again 2 Ifthe issue persists see document c03264726 HP LaserJet Enterprise M4555 MFP Product Series Solve fax problems for additional fax troubleshooting information 47 XX XX Error Messages 47 00 XX Description Back channel internal error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Resend the print job 3 If the error persists clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu 47 01 XX
423. o each code Blocked Fax List Print A list of phone numbers that are blocked from sending faxes to View this product Speed Dial List Print Shows the speed dials that have been set up for this product View Fax Call Report Print A detailed report of the last fax operation either sent or View received Other Pages PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts 256 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW General Settings menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the General Settings menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 43 General Settings menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Date Time Settings Date Time Format Date Format DD MMM YYYY Use the Date Time Settings menu to MMM DD YYYY specify the date and time and to configure YYYY MMM DD date time settings Time Format 12 hour AM PM Select the format that the product uses 24 hours to show the date and time for example 12 hour format or 24 hour format Date Time Time Zone Select the time zone from a list Date Select the date from a pop up calendar Time Select the time from a pop up keypad Adjust for Daylight Checkbox If you are in an area Savings that uses daylight savings time select the Adjust for Daylight Savings box ENWW Tools for troubleshootin
424. o indicate when the document feeder is open The document feeder and control panel assembly are attached to the scanner assembly If the scanner fails it can be replaced as a whole unit The scanner replacement part does not include the document feeder SCB or control panel assembly 26 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Document feeder system Figure 1 11 Document feeder cross section Zu 1 El D uj Item number Component name 1 Paper stopper 2 Input tray 3 Lift plate 4 Exit drive roller 5 Pick roller 6 Separation roller 7 Deskew drive roller 8 Pre scan drive roller 9 Simplex selector 10 Post scan drive roller 11 Duplex selector background selector 12 Output tray ENWW Scanning image capture system 27 Document feeder sensors The document feeder contains the following sensors Figure 1 12 Document feeder sensor positions
425. ock Service setting before they can open the Service menu Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk ScanVolume during startup ENWW Preboot menu options 135 Table 2 5 Preboot menu options 5 of 6 continued Menu option First level Administrator Startup Options continued continued Second level Third level First Power Description Not currently functional This item allows the product to initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on For example the user is prompted to configure first time settings like date time language and other settings Select this item so that it is enabled for the next time the product power is turned on When the product power is turned on the next time this item is unchecked so that the pre configured settings are used during configuration and the first time setting prompt is not used Embedded Jetdirect Off Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable the embedded HP Jetdirect By default this item is unchecked so that HP Jetdirect is always enabled WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the wireless accessory Table 2 6 Preboot menu options 6 of 6 Menu option First level Second level Third level Description Administrator Diagnostics Memory Do Not Run Diagnostic items are useful for troubleshooting formatter problems Use the options below the Do Not Run item to cont
426. oduct x 7 When the product prompts you to confirm the upgrade touch the Upgrade button When the upgrade is complete the product will initialize Ey NOTE The upgrade process can take up to 10 minutes to complete 8 When the upgrade process is complete print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade firmware version was installed 578 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW A Service and support e Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement e HP s Premium Protection Warranty LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement e HP policy on non HP supplies e HP anticounterfeit Web site e Data stored on the toner cartridge e End User License Agreement e OpenSSL e Customer self repair warranty service e Customer support ENWW 579 Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY HP LaserJet Enterprise 700 color MFP M775 One year on site warranty HP warrants to you the end user customer that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase for the period specified above If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after th
427. of SW1 The primary paper deflector solenoid activates listen for the solenoid to activate e Second press of SW1 The primary paper deflector solenoid deactivates listen for the solenoid to deactivate e Third press of SW1 The secondary paper deflector solenoid activates listen for the solenoid to activate e Fourth press of SW1 The secondary paper deflector solenoid deactivates listen for the solenoid to deactivate e Fifth press of SW1 The feed plate solenoid activates listen for the solenoid to activate e Sixth press of SW1 The feed plate solenoid deactivates listen for the solenoid to deactivate e Seventh press of SW1 The booklet entrance solenoid activates listen for the solenoid to activate e Eighth press of SW1 The booklet entrance solenoid deactivates listen for the solenoid to deactivate Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW1 to cause the solenoids to repeatedly activate and then deactivate in the order listed above Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW switches to the OFF setting TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the solenoids are deactivated before continuing If a solenoid fails the test replace the defective assembly Tools for troubleshooting 191 Saddle booklet feed motor test 1 Do one of the following If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remov
428. of that target to appear in the middle of the touchscreen above the cancel button NOTE The product automatically calibrates the touchscreen A manual touchscreen calibration procedure is not available for this product Use this item to identify touchscreen LED display problems 1 Touch the icon 2 Touch the up A or down WV arrow buttons to scroll though touchscreen LED display test screens Use this item to test audio functionality 1 Touching this item causes the speaker to emit a tone 2 Touch the 2 button on the keypad and then touch this item to cause the speaker to emit a more complex tone 142 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 8 Control panel diagnostic functions continued Item Description Shows the firmware version Firmware information Factory use only Remarks Touch this item to display the control panel firmware version and firmware build date Tests the product keyboard NOTE For products with a keyboard feature only Keyboard test When this item is selected pressing a button on the keyboard causes the corresponding character to appear on the control panel display 1 Touch the icon 2 Press a button on the keyboard The corresponding character should appear on the control panel display Adjusts the backlight Backlight test Use this item to adjust the brightness of the control panel display 1 Touch the icon 2 Touch the up A or down
429. oid is moving as part of a component test Recommended action No action necessary To exit press the Stop button 9 Moving solenoid and motor Description The solenoid and a motor are moving as part of a component test ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 477 Recommended action No action necessary To exit press the Stop button 9 No job to cancel Description The user pressed the Stop button but the product is not actively processing any jobs Recommended action No action necessary Non HP Supply Installed Description A non HP supply is detected This message displays for 30 seconds and then the product returns to a Ready state The product does not provide supply status messages for non HP supplies Recommended action Press OK to continue If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply go to www hp com go anticounterfeit Output Bin Full Description This message displays even though the output bin is not full Recommended action 1 Make sure that the output bin sensor flag is not damaged and can move freely If the flag is damaged replace the flag 2 Use the output bin full sensor PS1452 test in the Manual sensor test to test the sensor If it does not respond replace the output bin full sensor PS1452 3 Reconnect connector J205 on the DC controller PCA Output Device detached Description An output device is recognized on the product but not fully attached Recommended action Realign and rea
430. oklet Finisher stay jam at the booklet output sensor PI6 Media is present at P6 Recommended action 1 Check the folder roller area for a jam or media wrapped around the rollers 2 Check sensor PI6 for damage 3 Make sure that the sensor is not obstructed 4 Make sure that sensor PI6 is securely fastened to the chassis 5 Replace sensor or assembly as needed 13 A1 D1 Description Paper Delay Jam in Tray 1 This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 1 feed sensor PS2502 in the designated amount of time after the start of media pick up from Tray 1 This is a no pick jam from Tray 1 348 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1 Clear the jam in the area indicated 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Check and replace the Tray 1 pickup rollers as needed 4 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 5 Test PS2502 using the sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly 6 Runthe Tray 1 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly 7 If itis not replace the right door assembly 13 A1 FF Description Residual Media Jam in Tray 1 This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Tray 1 feed sensor PS2502 at power on Recommended action 1 Clear the jam in the area indicated 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Make sure that the
431. ol panel 6 LEDs 151 left door jams 516 license software 585 lights formatter 151 link speed settings 321 locations of major components 222 low voltage power supply LVPS 16 LSTR last rotation state 3 LVPS low voltage power supply 16 M major components base product 222 major components high capacity input HCI 227 manual print modes 551 manual sensor test 160 material restrictions 599 Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS 600 memory flash card 5 information 249 RAM 5 ROM 5 toner cartridge 25 memory chip toner cartridge description 584 menu map 130 menus control panel Calibrate Cleaning M806 328 mercury free product 599 motor control HCI 61 motor failure detection HCI 62 motors 11 booklet maker 118 failure detection in hole punch 72 failure detection in stapler stacker 72 hole punch 72 paper path 42 stapler stacker 72 N networks diagnostics 316 HP embedded Jetdirect configuration page 251 link speed settings 321 no control panel sound 148 non HP supplies 582 nonvolatile memory NVRAM 5 notes iii NVRAM nonvolatile memory 5 O online support 590 operations basic product 2 engine control system 7 laser scanner 21 scanner 26 sequence of 3 over current protection 18 over voltage protection 18 P pages 564 paper default size reset 566 jams 496 stop in path for testing 163 paper jams booklet maker 538 duplexer 511 front door 497 fuser 516 hole punch accessory 527 hole pun
432. ollectively Upgrade you must first be licensed for the original HP Software identified by HP as eligible for the Upgrade To the extent the Upgrade supersedes the original HP Software you may no longer use such HP Software This EULA applies to each Upgrade unless HP provides other terms with the Upgrade In case of a conflict between this EULA and such other terms the other terms will prevail End User License Agreement 585 4 TRANSFER a Third Party Transfer The initial end user of the HP Software may make a one time transfer of the HP Software to another end user Any transfer will include all component parts media User Documentation this EULA and if applicable the Certificate of Authenticity The transfer may not be an indirect transfer such as a consignment Prior to the transfer the end user receiving the transferred Software will agree to this EULA Upon transfer of the HP Software your license is automatically terminated b Restrictions You may not rent lease or lend the HP Software or Use the HP Software for commercial timesharing or bureau use You may not sublicense assign or otherwise transfer the HP Software except as expressly provided in this EULA 5 PROPRIETARY RIGHTS All intellectual property rights in the Software and User Documentation are owned by HP or its suppliers and are protected by law including applicable copyright trade secret patent and trademark laws You will not remove any product identific
433. oller Registration roller 51 mm Intermediate delivery roller 54 mm Secondary transfer roller 57 mm Fuser delivery roller Face up delivery roller 63 mm Developing roller HCI cassette pickup roller 69 mm Pressure roller 75 mm Cassette pickup roller Fuser sleeve 77mm Tray 1 separation roller Tray 1 feed roller HCI cassette separation roller HCI cassette feed roller 82 mm Tray 1 pickup roller 94 mm Cassette separation roller Cassette feed roller Photosensitive drum 1 M806 product only The primary charging roller photosensitive drum and developing roller cannot be cleaned because they are internal assemblies in the toner cartridge If one of these assemblies is causing the defect replace the toner cartridge 254 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Control panel menus Administration menu You can perform basic product setup by using the Administration menu Use the HP Embedded Web Server for more advanced product setup To open the HP Embedded Web Server enter the product IP address or host name in the address bar of a Web browser Reports menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Reports menu Table 2 42 Reports menu First level Second level Values Description Configuration Status Pages Administration Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire Administration menu and the View selected values for each setting Current Settings Page Print Print a summa
434. oller The separation roller rotates in the opposite direction of the feed roller The torque limiter allows the separation roller to be turned backward as the top sheet feeds into the system but it returns additional sheets to the tray ENWW Pickup feed and delivery system 43 Transparency media detection The transparency sensor detects transparency media by reading a light that shines through a prism in the paper path Paper passing through the paper path blocks the light indicating that it is not a transparency Fuser wrapping jam detection Tray 1 The paper path includes a mechanism to detect jams where paper wraps around fuser rollers The DC controller sends signals to the pressure roller bias generation circuit which applies the same bias values to the pressure roller and to the wrapping jam detection circuit The jam detection lever solenoid contacts the pressure roller to monitor its bias value The wrapping jam detection circuit compares the original bias value to the bias value monitored on the pressure roller If the values differ the circuit signals the DC controller that a wrapping jam has occurred and to stop the printing operation Tray 1 accommodates a wide variety of paper It picks up and feeds paper directly into the paper path Tray 1 driver PCA Tray 1 includes a driver PCA with a four bit microcomputer CPU IC2501 that controls the operational sequence and the serial communications with the DC controller The C
435. ommands from the control panel e Executing the Partial Clean function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems ENWW Service mode functions 569 e Toreset the product by deleting all solutions and customer defined settings e The product default settings are not properly working Execute a Partial Clean 1 Turn the product on 2 The HP logo displays on the product control panel When an underscore displays below the HP logo touch the logo to open the Preboot menu Touch the down arrow button to highlight Administrator and then touch the OK button Use the down arrow e button to highlight Partial Clean and then touch the OK button Touch the OK button again oa s t Touch the Home gy button to highlight Continue and then touch the OK button Eyf NOTE The product initializes Format Disk The Format Disk option erases the entire disk drive ACAUTION After executing a Format Disk option the product is not bootable Characteristics of a Format Disk e Customer defined settings third party solutions firmware files and the operating system are deleted Ey NOTE Rebooting the product does not restore the firmware files e Rebooting the product restores the firmware files from the Repository location but does not restore any customer defined settings e X After executing the Format Disk function the message 99 09 67 displays on the control panel e After executing the Format Di
436. omplete Full Calibration Start The product automatically calibrates itself at various times However you can calibrate the product immediately if you see problems with print quality Use this feature to perform a full calibration which can take up to three minutes Use this calibration if the color layers Seem to be shifted on the page Before calibrating the product make sure that the Ready indicator displays on the control panel display If a job is in progress the calibration occurs when that job is complete 326 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 56 Calibration Cleaning menu M830 continued First level Second level Values Description Delay Calibration at Wake Disabled Controls the timing of power on Power On calibration when the product Enabled wakes up or is turned on Wake Select if you are not using the feature and want to print jobs immediately when the product wakes up or is turned on before calibration begins No The product will calibrate immediately when it wakes up or is turned on The product will not print any jobs until it finishes calibrating Yes Enables the product that is asleep to accept print jobs before it calibrates It might start calibrating before it has printed all the jobs it has received This option allows quicker printing when coming out of sleep mode or when you turn the product on but print quality might be reduced NOTE Forthe best results allow the
437. ompleting the job Select whether this feature is available on the product Make optional The feature is optional depending on the user who is signed in Require preview Previews are required for all users Disable preview Previews are disabled for all users Default File Name The product is shipped with a factory default file name of Untitled for any scanned files that are sent or saved Use this feature to specify a different default file name If you are saving a file to a network folder or USB storage product and a file with the default file name already exists a number is appended to the file name for example Untitled 001 274 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 45 Scan Digital Send Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Document File Type Fourth level Values Select from a list of file types Description PDF provides the best overall image and text quality JPEG is a good choice for most graphics Most computers have a browser that can view JPEG files This file type produces one file per page TIFF is a standard file format that many graphics programs support This file type produces one file per page MTIFF stands for multi page TIFF This file type saves multiple scanned pages in a single file XPS XML Paper Specification creates an XAML file that preserves the original formatting of the document
438. on 1 Face down delivery assembly M806 only 4 Delivery assembly M830 only 2 Edge cooling fan assembly 5 Duplexer 3 Registration roller assembly 6 Transfer roller assembly ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 225 Figure 2 31 Base product main assemblies 3 of 3 Table 2 33 Base product main assemblies 3 of 3 Item Description Item Description 1 Connector PCA 4 High voltage power supply 2 DC controller PCA 5 Driver PCA 3 Low voltage power supply 6 Formatter 226 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW High capacity input HCI feeder oues SATUS AE LR IA SO Ji Table 2 34 High capacity input HCI feeder covers Item Description Item Description 1 Connector 4 Positioning pin 2 Paper path assembly 5 Right cassette 3 Right door 6 Left cassette ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 227 Figure 2 33 High capacity input HCI feeder main assemblies 1 of 3 Table 2 35 High capacity input HCI feeder main assemblies 1 of 3 Item Description Item Description 1 Left tray pickup drive assembly 6 Right tray media level sensor assembly 2 Merge drive assembly 7 Right tray automatic close assembly 3 Right tray pickup drive assembly 8 Left tray automatic close assembly 4 Right tray lifter drive assembly 9 Left tray lifter drive assembly 5 Left tray media level sensor assembly 228 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Figure 2 34 High capacity input HCI feeder main assemblies 2 of 3
439. on the control panel When you complete a step the product displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all steps in the procedure Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams To reduce the number of paper jams try these solutions 1 2 Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product Use paper that is not wrinkled folded or damaged If necessary use paper from a different package Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on Make sure the tray is not overfilled If it is remove the entire stack of paper from the tray straighten the stack and then return some of the paper to the tray Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the product If you are printing on heavy embossed or perforated paper use the manual feed feature and feed sheets one at a time From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Trays button Verify that the tray is configured correctly for the paper type and size Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications 496 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the front door 1 Open the front door Make sure that the door is completely open 2 Push the button on the lever and then rotate the toner cartridge lever to the
440. on the stapler assembly and can only be replaced by replacing ENWW the entire stapler assembly M41 Staple Motor drives the insertion and crimping of the staple only not the location of the staple on the paper P1120 senses the home position of the stapler as it is inserting and crimping a staple only not the location of the staple on the paper The stapler safety switch MS103 assures that the stapler motor M41 is disabled when it senses a finger might be in the stapler Recommended action Control panel diagnostics M41 Staple Motor Staple Shift Motor and PI120 Stapler Home Sensor Stapler Home Position Sensor 1 Test tbe upper stapler shift motor M41 using the finisher component test from the product control panel e Ifthe stapler unit moves correctly proceed to the next step e If the stapler unit does not move correctly or moves erratically perform the following steps a Check the flat flexible cable FFC for damage dents folds and or tears Replace the FFC if necessary b Checkthe FFC connectors and cable mounting areas c Ifthe error persists replace the stapler assembly 2 Test the stapler shift home position sensor PI120 using the finisher component test from the product control panel e Ifthe sensor does not change state when the stapler unit is moved from the home position perform the following steps a Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the chassis b Carefully clean the
441. onal Description A parameter in the USB accessory is not functioning correctly Recommended action 1 Turn the product off 2 Remove the USB accessory 3 Insert a replacement USB accessory 4 Turn the product on USB hubs are not fully supported Some operations may not work properly Description Some USB hubs require more power than the product has available Recommended action Remove the USB hub USB is write protected To clear touch OK Description The USB device is write protected and no new files can be written to it Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error USB needs too much power Description Power requirements for the USB device attached to the product are beyond supported limits Recommended action 1 Remove the USB device 2 Turn the product off and then on 3 Try a similar accessory that has its own power supply or requires less power USB needs too much power Remove USB and Then Turn Off then On Description A USB accessory is drawing too much electrical current Printing cannot continue 492 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1 Turn the product off 2 Remove the USB accessory 3 Turn the product on 4 Try a similar USB accessory that has its own power supply or requires less power USB not initialized Description The file system on the USB device must be initialized before it can be used Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmi
442. one line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area This equipment uses the following USOC jacks RJ11C 614 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant This equipment cannot be used on telephone company provided coin service Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary mod
443. ontrol panel select the Administration menu and then select the Copy Settings menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 44 Copy Settings menu M830 only First level Second level Third level Copies Values 1 9999 Default 1 Description Configure the default options for copy jobs If the user does not specify the job options when creating the job the default options are used Sides 1 sided original 1 sided output 2 sided original 2 sided output 1 sided original 2 sided output 2 sided original 1 sided output Use to indicate whether the original document is printed on one or both sides and whether the copies should be printed on one or both sides For example select 1 sided original 2 sided output when the original is printed on one side but you want to make two sided copies Orientation Portrait Specify portrait or landscape orientation and select the way the second sides are printed Portrait orientation means the short edge of the page is along the top Landscape Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top 266 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 44 Copy Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level 2 Sided Format Values Book style Flip style Book style original Flip style copy Flip style original Book style copy
444. open detection sensor PS3307 Intermediate unit presence sensor PS3308 Right cassette media level sensor PS3309 Left cassette media level sensor HCI lift up operation The HCI lifts up the tray to keep the surface of the paper at the pickup position whenever any of the following occur e The product is turned on e The cassette is installed e The paper stack surface lowers as a result of the pickup operation Figure 1 36 HCI lift up operation mechanism Wire HCI left cassette media stack surface 1 sensor Zeg Die r HCI left cassette media stack surface 2 sensor Tray Pulley 8 il ioc HCI left cassette lifter motor Ili The figure above illustrates the mechanism for the left cassette but each HCI cassette has the same mechanism Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW The operational sequence of the lift up is as follows 1 The HCI cassette lifter motor rotates the pulley to reel the wire The tray moves up 2 The HCI cassette lifter motor stops when the HCI cassette media stack surface sensor detects the paper surface 3 The HCI cassette lifter motor rotates again when the HCI cassette media stack surface sensor detects that the stack surface lowers during a print operation The HCI controller determines
445. or 500ms and then deactivates listen for the solenoid to activate and then deactivate Eyf NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to cause the solenoids to repeatedly activate and then deactivate in the order listed above 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW4 switches to the OFF setting xo TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the solenoids are deactivated before continuing 6 Ifa solenoid fails the test replace the appropriate solenoid 180 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Stacker clutch test 1 Do one of the following If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed If you are continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe main controller PCA set DIPSWA to the following settings Switch 1 ON Switch 2 through switch 4 OFF Switch 5 and switch 6 ON Switch 7 OFF Switch 8 ON 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following First press of SW3 The lower stack ejection roller clutch activates for 500ms milliseconds and then deactivates listen for the clutch to activate and then deactivate Second press of SW3 The shutter open close clutch activates for 500ms and then deactivates listen for the clutch to activate and the
446. or To continue turn off then on cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 419 57 00 04 Error To continue turn off then on ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 420 57 00 05 Error To continue turn off then on ssssssssss 420 57 00 06 Error To continue turn off then on ssssssss 420 57 00 07 Error To continue turn off then on cecceeeeeeeeeeees 421 57 00 08 Error To continue turn off then on cceceeeeeeeeeeees 421 57 00 09 Error To continue turn off then on ssssssss 421 57 00 10 Error To continue turn off then on sssssssss 421 59 XX YZ Error Messages ott dette Dad peg le Pe EE dec 422 59 00 30 or DO OO A0 422 eat Re D EEN 422 60 00 0Y 62 00 00 Error Messages ssssmMMMRMMRRRRRRReen 423 60 00 02 Tray 2 lifting error seemmRI 423 60 00 03 Tray 3 lifting error seemH 423 60 00 04 Tray 4 lifting error 0 eee center cette eter eeetaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaea 424 60 00 05 Tray 5 lifting error 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eetaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaea 424 xiv ENWW ENWW 62 00 00 No system To continue turn off then on 425 65 X0 AZ Error Messages mee eene nnne 425 65 X0 AZ Output accessory Failure sees 425 66 WX YZ Error Messages eene ennemis 426 66 00 20 EE 426 66 00 40 TT 426 E eebe oec MIT to rege 427 60 00 74 ii eid i e He e ae Ra RE Gre LE 427 66 009 2 i oa e eb
447. or flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the PI114 sensor body Also make sure that when the top edge of the output bin engages the sensor arm that the sensor flag moves into sensor P1114 7 Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the chassis 8 Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 9 Make sure that intermediate connector J1040 and J7 on the stacker controller PCA are fully seated and not damaged Check the wiring at the sensor 10 Ifthe error persists replace sensor P1114 11 If the error persists replace the output bin 1 assembly Ey NOTE The output bin 1 assembly includes the output bin 1 shift motor M1070 output bin 1 switch MSW103 output bin 1 area sensors and the output bin 1 Area Sensor PCA If output bin 1 does not move during the test perform the following steps 432 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW A 66 60 32 233 ENWW 1 Check the output bin tracks for damage 2 Replace the output bin 1 assembly NOTE NOTE The output bin 1 assembly includes the output bin 1 shift motor M1070 output bin 1 switch MSW103 output bin 1 area sensors and the output bin 1 Area Sensor PCA Only if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the stacker controller PCA Description BIN2 Tray Motor Error Finisher error 2nd tray lift lower motor M108 Occur
448. or troubleshooting 161 4 Activate the desired sensor and then check the control panel display to verify the sensor state active or inactive e The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the sensor is active e The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted activated or deactivated For example opening Tray 2 increments the SW7 8 Tray 2 Paper Size Toggle item count two times once when the tray is opened and once when the tray is closed 5 Touch the Reset Sensors button to reset the Toggle count item Or Touch the Cancel button to exit the Manual Sensor Test screen and return to the Diagnostic Tests menu Table 2 14 Tray bin manual sensors Sensor or switch name PS2501 Tray 1 paper sensor Replacement part number Descriptions Last paper detect sensor PS2502 Tray 1 feed sensor PS1410 Tray 2 paper sensor PS1409 Tray 2 paper surface SW2 3 Tray 2 paper size Paper pickup assembly Paper pickup assembly Paper pickup assembly Paper pickup assembly PS1401 2 PS8 Tray 2 feed sensor Paper pickup assembly PS1412 Tray 3 paper sensor Paper pickup assembly PS1411 Tray 3 paper surface Paper pickup assembly SW4 5 Tray 3 paper size Paper pickup assembly PS1403 4 Tray 3 feed sensor Paper pickup assembly
449. or troubleshooting 213 Figure 2 21 Booklet maker BM cross section o 00909 Table 2 23 Booklet maker BM cross section Item Description Item Description 1 Saddle delivery roller 10 Registration roller 2 Stapler 11 Switch back roller 3 Output bin 12 Inlet roller 2 4 Stack ejection roller 13 Flapper 5 Reverse roller 14 Stitcher 6 Delivery roller 15 Intermediate roller 7 Buffer roller 16 Fold roller 8 Inlet roller 17 Crescent roller 9 Inlet roller 1 214 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Location of connectors DC controller PCA connectors Figure 2 22 DC controller PCA connectors d J225 J223 J206 J209 J202 J205 J305 J304 un decd J400 J226 J201 1302 J219 J234 J300 J222 J221 f J231 V 3232 A Table 2 24 DC controller PCA connectors Item Description Item Description J201 Low voltage power supply LVPS J226 Power supply fan Condensation prevention fan J202 Interlock switch J205 Output accessory detection switch J231 Driver PCA Face up solenoid M806 only Rear delivery fan Front delivery fan Center delivery fan M806 only Face down tray media full sensor M806 only Face down tray delivery sensor M806 only J206 Low voltage power supply LVPS J232 Dri
450. ow no damage or wear Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers as needed Check the connectors at the sensor feed motor and the DC controller PCA Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests Test PS1402 using the Tray Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly Touch Component Test Run the Tray 3 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the pickup assembly Run the Tray 3 intermediate feed motor M2 drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the pickup assembly If the error persists replace the paper pickup assembly 13 A8 D4 or 13 A8 D4 Description Jam in Upper Right Door This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 2C feed sensor PS8 in the designated amount of time after the HCI Exit sensor PS3301 sensed the leading edge of the paper when printing from Tray 4 or Tray 5 358 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW e D4 Tray 4 e D5 Tray5 Recommended action 1 Clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests A Run a Paper Path Test from both Tray 4 and Tray 5 to validate the issue 5 Test PS3301 using the Tray Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensors are functioning correctly 6
451. p feed and separation roller are installed correctly and show no damage or wear 4 Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers as needed 5 Check the connectors at the sensor feed motor and the DC controller PCA 6 Check connector J221 on the DC controller PCA and interconnect J21 7 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 8 Test PS1404 using the Tray Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensors are functioning correctly 9 Touch Component Test 10 Run the Tray 3 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the pickup assembly 11 Ifthe error persists replace the paper pickup assembly 13 A4 D4 Description Jam In Tray 4 This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 4 feed sensor PS3302 in the designated amount of time after the start of media pick up from Tray 4 This is a no pick jam from Tray 4 Recommended action 1 2 Open Tray 4 remove any jammed paper and then close the tray Open and close the HCI right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam Make sure that the Tray 4 pickup feed and separation roller are installed correctly and show no damage or wear Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers as needed Check the connectors at the sensor feed motor and the HCI controller PCA Open the following menus 352 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW e Administration e Troubl
452. p cover while observing the roller assembly It will fall against the separation pad and then pop up when the ADF initializes 2 Clean the separation pad and rollers Use a soft lint free cloth moistened with water to clean the two rollers and the separation pad 3 Print a Supplies Status page and verify the remaining life of the Document Feeder Kit if the remaining life is less than 1096 explain to the customer that the rollers and separation pad are consumables and need to be replaced every 90K pages 4 Check the stack height in the tray If the stack height is greater than 7 mm 0 28 in the originals might get jammed under the feed guides 5 Verify that the feed guides are not pushed too tightly against the input stack 388 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Check the operation of the registration sensor flag a Open the top cover and locate the sensor flag b Push down on the flag and then release it It should spring back into position If it does not spring back into position replace the ADF c Close the top cover Check the input tray If the clear plastic edge of the input tray is always illuminated with green light even without paper in the tray proceed with the following troubleshooting steps Troubleshooting the internal jam sensors The green LED in the input tray is always on even when no paper is present This condition will cause the ADF to continue to pick even after all the pages have left the input tray
453. page content setting or the wrong resolution setting Try setting the Optimize Text Picture option to Photograph setting You touched the Stop button to cancel a fax but the fax was still sent If the job is too far along in the sending process you cannot cancel the job This is normal operation No fax address book button displays The fax address book feature has not been enabled Use the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration utility to enable the fax address book feature Not able to locate the Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin are located under the device s status page drop down menu Select Digital Sending and Fax from the drop down menu The header is appended to the top of the page when the overlay option is enabled For all forwarded faxes the product appends the overlay header to the top of a page This is normal operation A mix of names and numbers is in the recipients box Names and numbers can both display depending on where they are from The fax address book lists names and all other databases list numbers This is normal operation 574 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW A one page fax prints as two pages The fax header is being appended to the top of the fax pushing text to a second page To print a one page fax on one page set the overlay header to overlay mode or adjust the fit to page setting A document stops in the document feeder in the middle of faxing A jam is
454. paper sensor Detects paper in vertical path J10 PI18 No 1 paper sensor 1 Flapper Detects paper No 1 on paper J10 paper sensor sensor PCA PI19 No 2 paper sensor 2 Flapper Detects paper No 2 on paper J10 paper sensor sensor PCA PI20 No 3 paper sensor Detects paper No 3 on paper J10 sensor PCA PI21 Paper folding home position sensor Detects paper fold home position J18 PI22 Booklet making paper entry sensor Detects saddle inlet paper J21 Booklet maker 123 Figure 1 93 Booklet maker switches and microswitches S f Abbreviation Component name Description Stacker controller PCA MSW1 Saddle guide assembly switch Inlet Detects saddle guide assembly J4 switch inlet door open MSW3 Delivery door switch Detects ejection door open J4 SWA Staple sensor rear Detects presence of staples rear J8 SW5 Stitcher home position sensor rear Detects stitching home position J8 rear SW6 Staple sensor front Detects presence of staples front J8 SW7 Stitcher home position sensor front Detects stitching home position J8 front 124 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Booklet maker jam detection ENWW The saddle stitcher unit identifies any of the following conditions as a jam and sends the jam signal to the product When all doors are closed after the jam is removed the saddle stitcher unit checks whether the vertical path paper sensor P117 has detected the presence of pa
455. path and specify the number of copies to print Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature Print Test Page Run the paper path test from the default settings Tray 2 no duplex and one copy To specify other settings scroll down the menu and select the setting and then scroll back up and select Print Test Page to start the test Source Tray Select Tray 1 Tray 2 or the optional tray Test Duplex Path Enable or disable two sided printing Number of Copies Set the numbers of copies to be printed the choices are 1 10 50 100 or 500 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button Open the following menus 158 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e PaperPath Test 3 Select the paper path test options for the test you want to run Paper path sensors test This test displays the status of each paper path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while printing internal pages 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Paper Path Sensors EY NOTE Exiting the Paper path sensors menu and then reentering the test will clear the test values from the previous test The menu list of sensors and motors for the
456. pen the diagnostic function Perform the sound test Can sounds be heard i Turn the product power off Remove the control panel Check the cables to the speaker Reseat the cables to the speaker Turn the product power on Can sounds be heard Do not replace the control panel ENWW Home button is unresponsive Figure 2 5 Home button is unresponsive Home button unresponsive v Open the diagnostic function Perform the Home button test Does the virtual LED illuminate green when the Home button is pressed Turn the product power off and then on again y Open the diagnostic function Perform the Home button test Does the virtual LED illuminate green when the Home button is pressed Do not replace the control panel Replace the control panel ENWW Troubleshooting process 149 Hardware integration pocket HIP is not functioning control panel functional Figure 2 6 Hardware integration pocket HIP is not functioning control panel functional Hardware integration pocket HIP not functional control panel functional i Check that all installed hardware integration pocket devices are within HP specifications The control panel provides only 0 5 Amps to the port If an installed device attempts to draw more power than is provided the port is automatically disabled Trou
457. per If the sensor has detected paper the unit identifies the condition as being a faulty jam removal and sends the jam signal to the product once again Figure 1 94 Detecting jams in the booklet maker unit Table 1 39 Booklet maker jam sensors Abbreviation Component name Description Saddle stitcher controller PCA PI1 Paper pushing plate motor clock Detects paper pushing plate motor J3 sensor clock PI3 Booklet delivery door sensor Detects eject cover open J3 Pl4 Paper folding motor clock sensor Detects paper folding motor clock J3 PI5 Alignment plate home position Detects alignment plate home J3 sensor position PI6 Output bin sensor Detects paper on output bin J6 PI7 Paper positioning plate home Detects paper positioning plate J6 position sensor home position PI8 Paper positioning plate paper Detects paper on paper positioning J6 sensor plate PI9 Saddle guide assembly Inlet door Detects inlet cover open J9 PI11 Saddle guide door Inlet cover Detects paper ejection J9 PI12 Crescent roller phase sensor Detects crescent roller phase J9 PI13 Guide home position sensor Detects guide home position J9 PI14 Paper pushing plate home position Detects paper pushing plate home J9 Sensor position Booklet maker 125 Table 1 39 Booklet maker jam sensors continued Abbreviation Component name Description Saddle stitcher controller PCA PI15 Paper pushing plate top position
458. performed The issue is an I O timeout when reading the header number and size It indicates a problem with the network environment not the product Tools for troubleshooting 455 Recommended action The most common cause is an issue with the network environment Make sure that there is a good network connection to the product and then attempt the firmware upgrade again or upgrade using the USB walk up port 99 00 03 Upgrade not performed error writing to disk Description A remote firmware upgrade RFU was not performed This is a disk error It might indicate a problem or a hard disk failure It might be necessary to check the connection to the hard disk or replace the hard disk Recommended action 1 Download the RFU file and then attempt the upgrade again 2 Ifthe error persists run the Clean Disk process from the Preboot menu You will need to download the firmware from the Preboot menu 3 Ifthe error persists replace the hard disk 99 00 04 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive Description A remote firmware upgrade RFU was not performed The issue is an I O timeout when reading the header Recommended action The most common cause is an issue with the network environment Make sure that there is a good network connection to the product and then attempt the firmware upgrade again or upgrade using the USB walk up port 99 00 05 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive Description A remote firmware upg
459. period from when the hole punch motor starts drive e The hole punch home position sensor keeps detecting the home position for a specified period from when it detects the home position e The hole punch home position sensor does not detect the home position again within a specified period from when it once detects the home position e The hole punch motor clock sensor does not detect a specified clock pulse within a specified period from when the hole punch home position sensor detects the home position Side registration motor failure ENWW e The side registration home position sensor does not detect the punch slide assembly within a specified period from when the side registration motor drives to move the hole punch slide assembly to its home position e The side registration home position sensor keeps detecting the hole punch slide assembly for a specified period from when the side registration motor drives to move the hole punch slide assembly away from its home position A jam is notified when the switchback motor registration motor or hole punch feed motor has failed Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 73 Feed and delivery operation The following figures show the electrical components for the feed and delivery operation of the stapler stacker and the stapler stacker with hole puncher assembly Figure 1 41 Stapler stacker feed and delivery electrical components Staple stacker gt PI104 AY
460. pgrade did not complete successfully Recommended action Upgrade the firmware again Restore Factory Settings Description The product is restoring factory settings Recommended action No action necessary ROM disk device failed To clear touch OK Description The specified device failed Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error ROM disk file operation failed To clear touch OK Description A PJL command was received that attempted to perform an invalid operation such as downloading a file to a nonexistent directory Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error ROM disk file system is full To clear touch OK Description The hard disk is full Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error ROM disk is write protected To clear touch OK Description The ROM device is write protected and no new files can be written to it Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 485 ROM disk not initialized To clear touch OK Description The file system on the ROM disk must be initialized before it can be used Recommended action Initialize the file system on the ROM disk Rotating Motor Description The product is executing a component test and the component selected is a motor Recommended action Press the Stop button when ready to stop this test or exit Size mismatch in Tray X Description The paper in the liste
461. pi 300 dpi 200 dpi 150 dpi 75 dpi Sets the resolution for sent documents Higher resolution images have more dots per inch dpi so they show more detail Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail but the file size is smaller Some file types for example a file that will be processed with OCR require a specific resolution When these file types are selected the Resolution setting might automatically change to a valid value 278 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 45 Scan Digital Send Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Content Orientation Orientation Auto Detect For some features to work correctly you Portrait must specify the way the content of the Landscape original document is placed on the page Portrait orientation means the short edge of the page is along the top Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top In the Orientation area select whether the original document has a portrait or landscape orientation 2 Sided Format Book style Use to configure the default style for 2 Flip style sided print jobs If the Book style option is selected the back side of the page is printed the right way up This option is for print jobs that are bound along the left edge If the Flip style option is selected the back side of the page is printed upside
462. pler The stapler motor M41 rotates the cam one turn for stapling The stapler home position sensor PI50 detects the home position of the cam The macro computer IC13 on the stacker controller PCA controls the forward and reverse rotation of the staple motor When the stapler home position sensor is off the stacker controller PCA rotates the stapler motor in the forward direction until the sensor turns on allowing the staple cam to return to the original position The staple sensor PI52 is used to detect the presence or absence of a staple cartridge in the machine and the presence or absence of staples in the cartridge The staple edging sensor PI51 determines whether staples are pushed up to the top of the staple cartridge For safety the stacker controller circuit does not drive the staple motor M41 unless the staple safety switch MSW103 is on Figure 1 69 Stapling operation 1 of 2 98 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Hook top position detect signal Stapler HP detect signal Hook empty detect signal Staple motor drive signal I T T Stacker controller PCA ENWW Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 99 Shift the staple unit The stapler shift motor M105 shifts the stapler unit The stapler shift home position sensor P110 detects the home position When there is a staple command from the product the stapler shifts to the staple ready position which depends on the stapl
463. plexer Recommended action 1 Remove and reinstall the duplexer 2 Turn the product off and then on 3 Ifthe error persists replace the duplexer Remove one toner cartridge Description The product is testing the toner cartridge motor Recommended action To perform the test remove the toner cartridge from the product To cancel press the Stop button 9 Remove USB accessory Description This message displays when an unsupported USB device is inserted into a host USB port on the product Recommended action Remove the unsupported USB device Replace Supply ENWW Description This alert displays only if the product is configured to stop when a supply reaches the very low threshold The product indicates when a supply level is at its estimated end of life The actual life remaining might be different than estimated Tools for troubleshooting 483 The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable The product can be configured to stop when the supply level is very low The supply might still be able to produce acceptable print quality When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life the HP Premium Protection Warranty on that supply ends e 10 00 70 event code Black toner cartridge e 10 23 70 event code Fuser Kit Recommende
464. ponent Test 7 Runthe Fuser motor DCM drive test to verify that the Fuser Drive and Gears are functioning correctly If they are not replace the Fuser Drive Assembly 8 Inspect the Left Door Diverter Assembly Test the Diverter solenoids SL1 and SL2001 to verify that the diverter is functioning correctly If it is not replace the assembly 9 Test and check the intermediate delivery roller Replace the face down delivery assembly as needed 13 D1 Dz Description Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when the media does not reach the duplex switchback sensor PS2002 for a designated amount of time after the fuser output sensor PS502 sensed the leading edge 370 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW Z Fuser Mode 13 D1 D2 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Normal 13 D1 D3 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Light 1 or Light 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode 13 D1 D4 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 1 13 D1 D5 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 2 13 D1 D8 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Transparency 13 D1 DD The fuser is printing in fuser mode Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode Recommended action SF N 10 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam Test the print job or the duplex paper path test again
465. prescribed time after the staple motor M41 is rotated backwards The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms e 13 89 30 e 13 89 31 e 13 89 32 Recommended action 1 Check the stapler unit for jammed staples 2 Check the stapler unit for loose staples and paper dust 3 Inspect the stapler unit for damage 4 Remove the stapler cartridge and make sure HP approved staples are being used 5 Verify that the wiring at the stapler unit and the connector are not damaged 6 Install new staple cartridge and retest 7 Ifthe error persists replace the stapler unit Description Booklet Inlet Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the front left door Finisher stay jam at booklet making paper entry sensor PI22 Occurs when the booklet making paper entry sensor PI22 remains activated longer than expected suggesting that there is a paper jam at the sensor The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms Tools for troubleshooting 343 e 13 90 40 e 13 90 43 Recommended action 1 Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be activating sensor P122 2 Verify that the sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body 3 Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 4 Verify that the wiring at the sensor is not damaged and that the intermediate connectors between sensor PI22 and connector J21 on
466. present Toner level detection The toner cartridge includes a plate antenna and a flat antenna to enable the DC controller to detect toner level Whenever the power is turned on a door cover is closed or a toner operation is performed the DC controller sets the developing bias signal and the developing AC bias circuit sends a signal to the toner level circuit 1 and to the developing cylinder This causes the plate antenna to return the output value to the toner level circuit 1 The toner level circuit 1 compares the two signals and sends the results to the DC controller as the toner level detection signal At the same time the DC controller turns on the frequency output signal to output the reference frequency to the flat antenna This causes the flat antenna to return the output value to the toner level circuit 2 The toner level circuit 2 compares the two signals and sends the results to the DC controller as a toner level percentage which is accurate within 1 The DC controller reports the result to the formatter ENWW Image formation system 25 Scanning image capture system E NOTE The information in this section applies only to the HP LaserJet Enterprise Flow MFP M830 product Scanner The scanner is a carriage type platen scanner which includes the frame glass LED optics and a scanner controller board SCB attached to the back of the assembly The scanner has two sensors to detect Legal and Ledger A3 sized paper and a switch t
467. process can take several minutes When it is finished discard the printed page Check the scanner glass for dirt or smudges M830 Over time specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing which can affect performance Use the following procedure to clean the scanner glass and white plastic backing 1 Press the power button to turn off the product and then disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet 3P 558 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Open the scanner lid Align paper that has copy defects with the scanner glass to identify the locations of dirt or smudges Clean the main scanner glass callout 1 the document feeder glass the small strip of glass on the left side of the scanner callout 2 and the white backing callout 3 Use a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner Dry the glass and white plastic backing by using a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting Do not use abrasives acetone benzene ammonia ethyl alcohol or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the product these can damage the product Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen They might seep and damage the product If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder be sure to clean the small strip of glass on the left side of the scanner See this English language video for a demonstration of how to iden
468. product to calibrate before printing Print jobs performed before calibration might not be of the highest quality Calibrate Scanner Touch Next to calibrate the device scanner Messages on the control panel display will lead you through the calibration process Clean Rollers Reset Maintenance History screen is view only There are two Cancel options the Reset option to reset the page count or the Cancel option to go back to the previous screen Clean Document Feeder Low Threshold Settings Range 0 10096 Configure cleaning settings for Settings the document feeder Default 10 Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue Continue ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 327 Calibration Cleaning menu M806 To display At the product control panel select the Device Maintenance menu and then select the Calibration Cleaning menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 57 Calibration Cleaning menu First level Second level Auto Cleaning Values Off On Description Use to set an automatic cleaning period for the product Cleaning Interval Select from a list of cleaning intervals Use to set the interval when the automatic cleaning page should be printed The interval is measured by the number of pages printed Auto Cleaning Size Select from a list of support sizes Select the paper size to use for the automatic cleaning page
469. punch knob is positioned as shown in the graphic 9 Close the top left door ENWW Clear jams 533 10 Close the front left door 11 Attach the finishing accessory to the product Clear Staple 1 jams 1 Lift the jam access cover for the output slot and gently remove any jammed paper 534 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 2 Wait three seconds and then open the front left door 3 Pull the staple cartridge up and out to remove it 4 Liftup the metal handle on the front of the staple cartridge ENWW Clear jams 535 5 Remove any jammed staples from the staple cartridge 6 Push down the metal handle on the front of the staple cartridge 536 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 7 Insert the staple cartridge Press down on the top of the staple cartridge until it clicks into place 8 Close the front left door ENWW Clear jams 537 Clear jams in the booklet maker accessory e Clear jams in the front left door of the booklet maker e Clear connection jams e Clear Staple 1 jams e Clear staple jams in the booklet maker Clear jams in the front left door of the booklet maker 1 Open the front left door 2 Move the lower jam release lever to the right and then remove any paper 3 Move the lower jam release handle to the left 538 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 4 Move the upper jam release handle to the righ
470. r 402 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Z D Source is the duplexer Z E Source is the envelope feeder Z 2 Source is Tray 2 Z 3 Source is Tray 3 Z 4 Source is Tray 4 Z 5 Source is Tray 5 Recommended action 1 3 Make sure that the tray is loaded with the correct paper size and that the sliding paper guides are correctly adjusted Use the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify that the cassette media switch is correctly functioning If the error persists replace the lifter assembly 41 03 YZ Unexpected size in tray X ENWW Description The product detected a different paper size than expected Y Type Z Tray Y 0 Size mismatch Detected media is longer or shorter than expected Y A Size mismatch Detected media too long Y B Size mismatch Detected media too short Y C Size mismatch Inter page gap error Z D Source is the duplexer Z E Source is the envelope feeder Z 1 Source is Tray 1 Z 2 Source is Tray 2 Z 3 Source is Tray 3 Z 4 Source is Tray 4 Z 5 Source is Tray 5 Recommended action 1 Make sure that the feeder is loaded with the correct paper size and that the sliding paper guides are correctly adjusted Use the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify that the envelope feeder paper sensor is correctly functioning If the error persists replace the envelope feeder Tools for troubleshooting 403 41 04 00 Printer Error Description A printer
471. r M105 to return the stapler unit to home position If the stapler unit is already at home position it waits in that state Figure 1 63 Stapler unit Paper Stapler Stapler shift home position sensor P110 Figure 1 64 Staple location l Paper width 1 2 2 point stapling Rear diagonal stapling Table 1 31 Sensors used in stapling Abbreviation Sensor Connector Function Remarks PI10 Stapler shift home position J6B 7 Detects the home position for the sensor stapler moving back and forth PI16 Stapler alignment interference J5 3 Staple prohibited area detection sensor N A Stapler home position sensor J5 5 Detects the home position for the In the stapler stapling operation N A Staple edging sensor J5 6 Detects the staple top position In the stapler N A Staple sensor J5 7 Detects presence or absence of In the stapler staples in the cartridge Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 95 Table 1 32 Motors used in stapling Abbreviation Component name Function M105 Stapler shift motor Moves the stapler M41 Staple motor Performs the stapling operation The stacker controller PCA moves the stapler according to the specified stapling position When the rear of the first sheet passes the first delivery roller the stacker controller PCA stops the stack delivery motor M102 and then rotates it in reverse The stack delivery motor rotates the stack delivery roll
472. r M806 only PS1452 Face down tray media full sensor M806 only PS2002 Duplex switchback sensor PS2003 Duplex pre registration sensor PS2004 Duplex feed sensor PS2005 Duplex residual media sensor PS2501 Tray 1 media presence sensor PS2502 Tray 1 feed sensor Pickup feed and delivery system 41 Motors and solenoids Figure 1 24 Motors and solenoids paper path Table 1 14 Motors and solenoids paper path Abbreviation Component name DCM1 Fuser motor DCM2 Drum motor M2 Tray 3 feed motor M3 Tray 2 feed motor STM1 Pickup motor STM2 Lift up motor STM3 Cassette pickup motor STM2002 Duplex switchback motor 42 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Table 1 14 Motors and solenoids paper path continued Abbreviation Component name STM2003 Duplex feed motor STM2004 Duplex re pickup motor STM2501 Tray 1 pickup motor SL1 Face up solenoid M806 only SL2001 Duplex flapper solenoid SL2501 Tray 1 pickup solenoid CL2501 Tray 1 feed clutch Pickup and feed system The pickup and feed system picks up single sheets from Tray 2 or Tray 3 feeds each sheet to the fuser unit and delivers each sheet to the face up bin or to the face down bin When the product is turned on the lifter lifts the stack of paper to the pickup area in preparation for printing When t
473. r cartridge is removed or exchanged Supply errors are ignored while the product is in this mode When the product is in this mode you can navigate the troubleshooting menus and print internal pages the print quality pages will be the most useful This test can be used to isolate problems such as noise and to isolate print quality problems that are related to the toner cartridge Bf NOTE Do not remove or exchange a toner cartridge until after you start the disable cartridge check diagnostic 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Disable Cartridge Check ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 157 Engine test button To verify that the product engine is functioning print an engine test page Use a small pointed object to depress the test page switch located on the rear of the product The test page should have a series of horizontal lines The test page can use only Tray 2 as the paper source so make sure that paper is loaded in Tray 2 E NOTE The engine test button is located on the right side of the product near the upper right hand corner of the right door Figure 2 9 Engine test button Paper path test This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams To isolate a problem specify which input tray to use specify whether to use the duplex
474. r if needed for an e duplex copy job HP EveryPage 9 Sensor prescan2 Activates the backside scan module and the backside background selector if needed these components are in the document feeder for an e duplex copy job Document feeder simplex operation Following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder simplex job Figure 1 13 Simplex operation paper path Sr TT Simplex scan 1 The paper presence sensor is activated when paper is loaded in the input tray 2 The ift motor rotates to raise the lift plate until the maximum height is reached or the stack height sensor is triggered Di The pick motor rotates to lower the pick roller and start picking the loaded paper P The ultrasonic sensor detects if more than one page passes the separation roller If there is a multipick the document feeder stops and an error message appears on the control panel display 5 The deskew sensor is activated when leading edge of paper is driven passed it The firmware registers the leading edge of paper position ENWW Scanning image capture system 29 6 The leading edge of paper is continues to be driven into the pinch point of the deskew
475. r assembly Activates the specified motor at a specific speed for 10 seconds Repeat Not applicable Not applicable Options On Off ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 165 Finishing accessory component test Use the procedures in this section to diagnose problems with the finishing accessories During the test the finishing accessory is isolated and does not communicate with the product engine iy IMPORTANT Before you configure the dual inline package switches DIPSW on a PCA to perform a test you must turn the power off You do not have to turn the power off again before changing the DIPSW settings to perform other tests as long as the subsequent tests are performed using the same DIPSW However if subsequent tests involve setting a different DIPSW on a different PCA other than the one used to perform the first test you must turn the product power off before changing the DIPSW settings For example 1 2 3 4 5 6 Turn the product power off Set DPSWA on the main controller PCA Perform the test Turn the product power off Set DPSW on the punch controller PCA 166 Chapter2 Solve problems Perform the test ENWW Access the finishing accessory controller PCAs Access the main controller PCA N CAUTION ESD sensitive component For specific instructions about removing the following covers to access the main controller PCA see the product repair manual 1 Remove the following as
476. r is de activated when the trailing edge of the paper passes it The firmware registers this position as the trailing edge of the paper The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the paper trailing edge through the preset distance from the prescan7 sensorto the scan area The simplex scanner stops capturing scan data The prescan2 sensoris de activated when the trailing edge of the paper passes it The firmware registers this position as the trailing edge of the paper The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the paper trailing edge through the preset distance from the prescan2 sensor to the scan area The duplex scanner stops capturing scan data The feed motor continues to rotate until the input tray is empty and all pages have been fed through The ff motor rotates to lower the lift plate to the home position and the document feeder is in a ready state for the next scan operation Scanning image capture system 31 Document feeder paper control and deskew Figure 1 15 Deskew rollers and width adjust Item number Component name 1 Deskew Pinch Rollers 2 Deskew Rollers 3 Width Adjust Adjustable width adjust guides are provided on the input tray to ensure that the paper is stacked together neatly at the center of the input tray It also ensures the paper is located parallel with the direction of travel into the document feeder paper path e Tofurther minimize skew due to improper loading of paper in the input tray
477. r path for staplirig cio oec eoe Ri dete e ai bad estou AE EE 96 Rollers and sensors for Stapling ssssssesseeeene enne eene nnne nnns 97 Staple paper pall pw 97 Shift process for the staple unit ceccecceceecceeeeeeeeceeeeeaaeeaaeeaeceeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetteeteeeteesseees 98 Stapling operation 1 of 2 98 Stapling operation EE 99 Erontd point stapling cerni UI Re INE Ti Mia cadena 100 Rear 1 point Stapling 5 iter esee tee tte een o e aene a Reda Tee de idee e bt ER shastesdsdadaneteaet 100 ENWW xxxii Figure 1 73 Figure 1 74 Figure 1 75 Figure 1 76 Figure 1 77 Figure 1 78 Figure 1 79 Figure 1 80 Figure 1 81 Figure 1 82 Figure 1 83 Figure 1 84 Figure 1 85 Figure 1 86 Figure 1 87 Figure 1 88 Figure 1 89 Figure 1 90 Figure 1 91 Figure 1 92 Figure 1 93 Figure 1 94 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 18 Figure 2 19 ENWW 2 point stapling M 101 Items detected by the area sensors sssssssssssseeeeeeeenn men enne nne enne n nnne ins 103 ltere eru et E CET 104 elle Te EE 105 Jam Bee E Ee 106 Switchback assembly Sensors oorr etd nare rd a e a d d e dte Rd 107 Fiole punch assembly Sensors eer
478. r sensor SW3 booklet door 2 1 Using the diagnostic tests from the product control panel try to isolate which door or guide and sensor is causing the error 2 Make sure that the sensors are securely fastened to the chassis 3 Check the switches and sensors for damage and clean the sensors by gently blowing clean air into the sensor to remove dust and debris 4 Checkthe wiring at the switches and sensors 5 Check the tabs that activate the switches and sensors on the doors and guides for damage Make sure that the tabs are aligned with the switches and sensors Replace the doors and guides as necessary 6 Make sure that the following connectors are fully seated and not damaged e Stack controller PCA e J719 MS31 e J707 PI32 e Saddle stitcher controller PCA e J4 SW1 e J10 PI9 e J4 SW3 e J11 PI3 7 If the error persists replace the PCA stacker controller PCA or saddle stitcher controller PCA that is associated with the failed switch sensor Description Booklet Staple Motor Error Rear The Booklet Maker stitch staplers do not move to different locations in relation to the paper like the main stapler The only movement is through the movement of the rotary cam located on the stapler unit itself during the actual stapling of the booklet The stitch home position switch SW5 is part of the rear stitch stapler unit and senses the stapler opening and closing during stapling by the motion of Tools for trou
479. r stacker e Clear connection jams e Clear Staple 1 jams Clear jams in the stapler stacker 1 Open the top left door 2 Liftthe jam access cover for the output slot and gently remove any jammed paper ENWW Clear jams 521 3 Remove all paper from the top left door area 4 Close the top left door Clear connection jams 1 Pull the release handle on the top of the finishing accessory and then slide the finisher away from the product until it stops 522 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 2 Remove any paper from the area 3 Attach the finishing accessory Clear Staple 1 jams 1 Lift the jam access cover for the output slot and gently remove any jammed paper ENWW Clear jams 523 2 Wait three seconds and then open the front left door 3 Pull the staple cartridge up and out to remove it 4 Lift up the metal handle on the front of the staple cartridge 524 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 5 Remove any jammed staples from the staple cartridge 6 Push down the metal handle on the front of the staple cartridge ENWW Clear jams 525 7 Insert the staple cartridge Press down on the top of the staple cartridge until it clicks into place 8 Close the front left door 526 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the stapler stacker with hole punch accessory e Clear top left door jams in the stapler stacke
480. r with hole punch accessory e Clear a connection jam in the stapler stacker with hole punch accessory e Clear Staple 1 jams Clear top left door jams in the stapler stacker with hole punch accessory 1 Open the front left door 2 Open the top left door ENWW Clear jams 527 3 Turn the knob to align the arrows 4 Lift the hole punch unit 5 Lift the jam access cover for the output slot and gently remove any jammed paper 528 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 6 Remove jammed paper from top left cover area 7 Close the hole punch unit NOTE Ensure the notch on the hole punch is positioned as shown in the graphic ENWW Clear jams 529 8 Close the top left door 9 Close the front left door Clear a connection jam in the stapler stacker with hole punch accessory 1 Pull the release handle on the top of the finishing accessory and then slide the finisher away from the product until it stops 530 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 2 Remove any paper from the area 3 Open the front left door 4 Open the top left door ENWW Clear jams 531 5 Turn the knob to align the arrows and then gently pull out the jammed paper 6 If you cannot remove the jammed paper lift the hole punch unit 7 Remove the jammed paper from the bottom of the hole punch unit 532 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 8 Close the hole punch unit NOTE Ensure the arrow on the hole
481. rade RFU was not performed The issue is an I O timeout when reading image data Recommended action The most common cause is an issue with the network environment Make sure that there is a good network connection to the product and then attempt the firmware upgrade again or upgrade using the USB walk up port 99 00 06 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade RFU was not performed 456 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW The issue is an unexpected read error when reading the header number and size Recommended action 1 Download the RFU file and then attempt the upgrade again 2 Ifthe error persists replace the hard disk 99 00 07 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade RFU was not performed The issue is an unexpected read error when reading the rest of the header Recommended action 1 Download the RFU file and then attempt the upgrade again 2 Ifthe error persists replace the hard disk 99 00 08 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade RFU was not performed The issue is an unexpected read error when reading image data Recommended action 1 Download the RFU file and then attempt the upgrade again 2 Ifthe error persists replace the hard disk 99 00 09 Upgrade canceled by user Description A remote firmware upgrade RFU was not performed The RFU was canceled by the user
482. re roller is scarred or deformed Replace the high voltage power supply HVPS Replace the fuser The fuser control circuit is defective Replace the low voltage power supply LVPS The thermistor is defective The fuser heater is defective Replace the fuser Toner smears appear on the paper d NEN NI The product has residual paper The fuser inlet guide is dirty Remove the residual paper Clean the fuser inlet guide ENWW Solve image quality problems 555 Table 2 60 Image defects table continued Problem The printed page contains misformed characters Cause The product is experiencing page skew Solution See the Text or graphics are Skewed on the printed page row in this table The laser scanner unit is defective Replace the laser scanner assembly Text or graphics are skewed on the printed page The registration shutter spring is unhooked The registration shutter spring is deformed Check the spring and place it in the correct position Replace the registration assembly The printed page contains wrinkles or creases 3 o Ba The roller or paper feed guide is dirty A feed roller is deformed or has deteriorated Clean any dirty components Replace any deformed or deteriorated rollers The paper feed guide is damaged Replace the paper feed guide unit The front of the page is dirty The photos
483. re 2 18 High capacity input HCI feeder jam sensors VPS3305 P 3301 y GR ST PS3302 Q5 27 3 Iu Table 2 20 High capacity input HCI feeder jam sensors Item Description PS3301 Media feed sensor PS3302 Right cassette media feed sensor PS3305 Left cassette media feed sensor ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 211 Figure 2 19 High capacity input HCl feeder cross section D Q 9 o Table 2 21 High capacity input HCI feeder cross section Item Description 1 Cassette pickup roller 2 Cassette feed roller 3 Intermediate feed roller 4 Cassette separation roller 5 Right cassette 6 Left cassette 212 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Figure 2 20 Stapler stacker SS and Stapler stacker with hole punch SSHP cross section O o e 9 Table 2 22 Stapler stacker SS and Stapler stacker with hole punch SSHP cross section Item Description Item Description 1 Output bin 8 Cam 2 Stack ejection roller 9 Punch SSHP only 3 Return roller 10 Registration roller 4 Delivery roller 11 Punch chip box dust box collector SSHP only 5 Buffer roller 12 Switch back roller 6 Inlet roller 13 Stapler 7 Punch feed roller SSHP only ENWW Tools f
484. rency e 13 E6 AD The fuser is printing in fuser mode Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode Recommended action 1 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Reseat the connections to the DC controller 4 Make sure that the delivery flags move smoothly 5 Open the following menus Tools for troubleshooting 377 e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 6 Test the face down bin full sensor PS1452 using the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify the sensor is functioning correctly 7 If necessary replace the delivery unit 13 E6 Dz Description Jam in Left Door This jam occurs when the media does not reach the face down output sensor PS1451 ina designated amount of time after the fuser output sensor PS502 sensed the leading edge 13 E6 D2 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Normal 13 E6 D3 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Light 1 or Light 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode 13 E6 D4 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 1 13 E6 D5 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 2 13 E6 DB The fuser is printing in fuser mode Transparency 13 E6 DD The fuser is printing in fuser mode Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode Recommended action 1
485. rent size of paper Pages did not print The product might not be pulling paper correctly The paper is jamming in the product Make sure paper is loaded in the tray correctly Clear the jam The USB cable might be defective or incorrectly connected Other devices are running on your computer e Disconnect the USB cable at both ends and reconnect it e Try printing a job that has printed in the past e Tryusing a different USB cable The product cannot share a USB port If you have an external hard drive or network switchbox that is connected to the same port as the product the other device might be interfering To connect and use the product you must disconnect the other device or you must use two USB ports on the computer Solve performance problems 561 Solve connectivity problems Solve USB connection problems If you have connected the product directly to a computer check the cable Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 m 6 65 ft Try using a shorter cable Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product Replace the cable if necessary Solve wired network problems Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network Before beginning print a configuration page from the product control panel and locate the product IP address that is listed on thi
486. ription There is a compatibility issue with the firmware The specific message varies depending on the cause but the solution for each message is the same 458 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 99 01 XX ENWW 99 00 20 event log The bundle is not for this product 99 00 21 event log The bundle is not signed with the correct signature or the signature is invalid 99 00 22 event log The bundle header version is not supported by this firmware 99 00 23 event log The package header version is not supported by this firmware 99 00 24 event log The format of the bundle is invalid 99 00 25 event log The format of the package is invalid 99 00 26 event log A CRC32 check did not pass 99 00 27 event log An I O error occurred while downloading the bundle Recommended action Download the correct firmware file from www hp com and then resend the firmware upgrade 99 00 27 only 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Resend the firmware upgrade 3 Ifthe error persists try installing the upgrade by another method USB or Embedded Web Server Description A firmware install error has occurred The specific message varies depending on the cause but the solution for each message is the same 99 01 00 99 01 10 99 01 20 99 01 21 Tools for troubleshooting 459 Recommended action Reload the firmware 99 02 01 Description Firmware installation was successful Recommended action No action
487. rn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following e First press of SW3 The swing guide moves to the close position unless it is already in the close position e Second press of SW3 The swing guide moves to the open position unless it is already in the open position Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to continuously move the swing guide from position to position 5 If the swing guide correctly functions press and release SW3 until the swing guide is in the close position 6 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW4 switches to the OFF setting x TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the swing guide is in the close position before continuing 7 If the swing guide fails the test replace the defective assembly ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 173 Staple subassembly to staple position test 1 Doone ofthe following e If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e If you are continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe main controller PCA set DIPSWA to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e SWitch 2 through switch 6 OFF e Switch 7 and switch 8 ON 3 Locate the staple subassembly Ey NOTE For clarity the fi
488. roduct The booklet maker is the combination of the stapler stacker and the saddle function for the booklet maker The switchback assembly is in common with this assembly for the stapler stacker The stapler stacker assembly is described in the stapler stacker section Figure 1 81 Booklet maker paper path Staple stacker ass y Output bin Printer separation sensor Switch back ass y N N SR104 NO Saddle output bin Saddle ass y riet feed ass y The booklet maker supports the following delivery modes for both the straight through paper path and the duplex paper path Table 1 35 Delivery modes Feed Staple Saddle Punch Offset Supported feature Straight No N A No Yes Straight No N A Yes No Straight Staple N A No No Straight Staple N A Yes No Straight Saddle N A N A No Booklet maker 111 Table 1 35 Delivery modes continued Feed Staple Saddle Punch Offset Supported feature Switchback No N A No Yes Switchback No N A Yes Yes Switchback Staple N A No Yes Switchback Staple N A Yes No Switchback Saddle N A N A Yes These delivery modes are independent of each other and can be used in any combination Hole punch is not supported with the book
489. ror warning 55 02 06 event code NVRAM memory access error warning Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Check the life remaining on the maintenance kit 3 Reseatthe formatter DIMMs and EIO cards 4 Ifthe error persists replace the DC controller PCA 5 Ifthe error persists replace the formatter 56 00 YY Error Description Optional paper trays communication error occurred Recommended action 1 2 3 Turn the product off and then on If the error persists reseat the optional paper trays HCO and HCI Check the input connectors for damage If a connector is damaged replace the connector 57 XX YZ Error Messages 57 00 01 Error To continue turn off then on Description Power supply fan FM 1 malfunction Recommended action 1 2 4 Turn the product off and then on Listen for fan noise at the right side lower right hand corner of the product If no noise is heard make sure that the connector J226 on the DC controller PCA and the intermediate connector J25 between the DC controller and the fan are connected and undamaged If the error persists replace the power supply fan FM1 57 00 02 Error To continue turn off then on Description Controller fan FM 2 malfunction 418 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Listen for fan noise at the rear side center panel of the product 3 If no noise is heard
490. rror persists perform a partition clean from the Preboot menu 32 1C 0D event code Reboot and then retry the backup restore 32 1C 11 event code Wait until the product is idle and then try again 396 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 32 1C 13 event code and 32 1C 14 event code Free up disk space and then try again 32 1C 15 event code Use the current backup file 32 1C 2E event code Wait until the product is idle and then try again Turn the product off then on and then retry 32 1C 2F event code Turn the product off then on and then retry 32 1C 40 event code No action necessary 32 1C 41 event code No action necessary 32 1C 42 event code No action necessary 32 1C 43 event code No action necessary 32 1C 44 event code No action necessary 32 1C 45 event code No action necessary 32 1C 46 event code No action necessary 32 1C 47 event code No action necessary 32 1C 48 event code Check that a share was provided as part of the network path not blank Check that the server and the share exists Check that the user has permission to access the share on the provided server 32 1C 49 event code Verify that the encryption personal identification number PIN meets the restrictions for the product ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 397 32 1C 4A event code Retry the job If this does not resolve the issue turn the product off then on again and retry the job If t
491. rs first 2 3 4 Verify that the motor cables are connected 5 Reseat the document feeder to the SCB 6 Replace the document feeder 31 03 32 Description The document feeder deskew motor is not turning Recommended action 1 Verify that the paper meets the product specifications Make sure that the input tray is not overloaded Check the event log for document feeder errors and then resolve any errors first 2 3 4 Verify that the motor cables are connected 5 Reseat the ADF to SCB cables 6 Replace the document feeder 31 08 A1 Description An initialization occurred after an abnormal product shutdown Recommended action No action necessary 31 08 A2 Description A normal shutdown has occurred Recommended action No action necessary 390 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 31 08 A3 31 13 01 31 13 02 ENWW Description A normal initialization has occurred Recommended action No action necessary Description Paper pick was initiated but the page didn t did not make it to the pick success sensor Recommended action 1 Open the ADF lid pull sheets back into input tray and then resume the job Check the paper guides and make sure that they are set to the correct paper width Make sure that the input tray is not overloaded Check the document feeder page count for roller life Verify that the paper meets the product specifications Make sure that the ADF roller door is completely closed Check th
492. rst level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Default Job Options Notification Do not notify Notify when job completes Notify only if job fails Description Configure to receive notification about the status of a sent document Do not notify Turns off this feature Notify when job completes Select to receive notification for this job only Notify only if job fails Select to receive notification only if the job is not sent successfully Print E mail E mail Select to receive the notification in an email Touch the text box following Email Addess and then enter the email address for the notification Include Thumbnail NOTE When sending an analog fax select Include Thumbnail to receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification Notification E mail address Stamp Received Enabled Faxes Disabled Fit to Page Enabled Disabled Use this option to add the date time sender s phone number and page number to each page of the faxes that this product receives Use to shrink faxes that are larger than Letter size or A4 size so that they can fit onto a Letter size or A4 size page If this feature set to Disabled faxes larger than Letter or A4 will flow across multiple pages ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 295 Table 2 46 Fax Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Pap
493. rum Step 2 laser beam exposure Two laser diodes project laser beams onto a rotating scanning mirror As the scanning mirror writing rotates it reflects the beams through a set of focusing lenses and onto another mirror which reflects the beams through a slot in the top of the toner cartridge and onto the photosensitive drum The beams sweep from left to right on the drum discharging the negative potential wherever they strike the surface This creates the latent electrostatic image on the drum Step 3 Developing The developing drum inside the toner cartridge receives a negative charge from the negative DC supply and charges the toner as it rotates With the negative charge the toner is attracted to the laser discharged areas of the latent image on the photosensitive drum and is repelled from the negatively charged unexposed areas Step 4 Pre transfer The pre transfer upper guide receives bias to prevent toner from adhering to it from the photosensitive drum Step 5 Transfer The transfer charging roller applies a positive charge to the paper causing the negatively charged toner image to be attracted to the paper from the photosensitive drum Step 6 Separation As the paper is separated from the photosensitive drum the static charge eliminator reduces the charge on the paper This stabilizes the feed system and prevents loss of the toner image in temperature and humidity Step 7 Fusing The paper with the toner image on
494. ry delay jam 4 No Fuser delivery stay jam 1 Yes Fuser delivery stay jam 2 N A Fuser delivery stay jam 3 No Fuser delivery stay jam 4 No Residual paper jam 1 Yes Residual paper jam 2 N A Residual paper jam 3 No Residual paper jam 4 No Door open jam 1 Yes Door open jam 2 No Door open jam 3 No Door open jam 4 No 54 Chapter 1 Theory of operation Table 1 18 Jams detected by the DC controller continued Jam Supported feature Fuser wrapping jam 1 Yes Fuser wrapping jam 2 No Fuser wrapping jam 3 No Fuser wrapping jam 4 No The product detects the following jams Table 1 19 Jam detection Jam Causes and conditions Pickup 1 delay jam Media fails to reach Tray 2 feed sensor A PS1402 or Tray 3 feed sensor A PS1404 within 3 2 seconds after pickup begins Pickup 2 delay jam e Media fails to reach Tray 2 feed sensor B PS1401 or Tray 3 feed sensor B PS1403 within 3 0 seconds after Tray 2 feed sensor A PS1402 or Tray 3 feed sensor A PS1404 detects the leading edge e Media fails to reach the registration paper sensor PS2 within 4 0 seconds after Tray 2 feed sensor B PS1401 detects the leading edge of the media or within 4 5 seconds after Tray 3 feed sensor B PS1403 detects the leading edge Fuser delivery 1 delay jam The leading edge fails to reach the fuser delivery sensor PS502 within 1 4 seconds after the VSYNC signal Fuser delivery 2 delay jam The leading edge fails to reach the fuser jam se
495. ry of the current settings for the product This View might be helpful if you plan to make changes and need a record of the present configuration Configuration Page Print Shows the product settings and installed accessories View Supplies Status Page Print Shows the approximate remaining life for the supplies View reports statistics on total number of pages and jobs processed serial number page counts and maintenance information HP provides approximations of the remaining life for the supplies as a customer convenience The actual remaining supply levels might be different than the approximations provided Usage Page Print Shows a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the View product lists whether they were simplex duplex monochrome or color and reports the page count File Directory Page Print Shows the file name and folder name for files that are stored in View the product memory Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web Services for the product View ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 255 Table 2 42 Reports menu continued First level Second level Values Description Fax Reports M830 only Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received View by this product Billing Codes Report Print Provides a list of billing codes that have been used for View outgoing faxes This report shows how many sent faxes were billed t
496. s e Checklist for solving fax problems e General fax problems Checklist for solving fax problems Use the following checklist to help identify the cause of any fax related problems you encounter e Are you using the fax cable supplied with the fax accessory This fax accessory has been tested with the supplied fax cable to meet RJ11 and functional specifications Do not substitute another fax cable the analog fax accessory requires an analog fax cable It also requires an analog phone connection e Is the fax phone line connector seated in the outlet on the fax accessory Make sure that the phone jack is correctly seated in the outlet Insert the connector into the outlet until it clicks Ey NOTE Verify that the phone jack is connected to the fax port rather than to the network port The ports are similar e s the phone wall jack working properly Verify that a dial tone exists by attaching a phone to the wall jack Can you hear a dial tone and can you make or receive a phone call What type of phone line are you using e Dedicated line A standard analog fax phone line assigned to receive or send faxes Ey NOTE The phone line should be for product fax use only and not shared with other types of telephone devices Examples include alarm systems that use the phone line for notifications to a monitoring company e PBX system A business environment phone system Standard home phones and the fax accessory use an analog phone sig
497. s printed CAUTION Running this embedded test will erase your TCP IP configuration This test performs an internal loopback test An internal loopback test will send and receive packets only on the internal network hardware There are no external transmissions on your network 316 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 53 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level HTTP Test Yes No Values Description This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving predefined pages from the product and tests the HP Embedded Web Server Select the Yes option to choose this test or the No option to not choose it SNMP Test Yes This test checks operation of SNMP communications by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the product Select the Yes option to choose this test or the No option to not choose it Data Path Test Yes No This test helps to identify data path and corruption problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation product It sends a predefined PS file to the product However the test is paperless the file will not print Select the Yes option to choose this test or the No option to not choose it Select All Tests Yes Use this item to select all available embedded tests Select the Yes option to choose all tests Select the No option to select individual tests ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 317 Table 2 53
498. s Manager Hewlett Packard Company PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise Idaho 83707 0015 Phone 208 396 6000 604 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Certificate of Volatility M806 Figure C 1 Certificate of Volatility 1 of 2 ENWW Hewlett Packard Certificate of Volatility Model HP LaserJet Enterprise M806 Part Number M806dn CZ244A M806z CZ245A Address Hewlett Packard Company 11311 Chinden Blvd Boise ID 83714 Volatile Memory Does the device contain volatile memory Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed DX Yes J No If Yes please describe the type size function and steps to clear the memory below Type SRAM DRAM etc DDR2 DRAM Size User Modifiable Function 1GB O Yes D No Used for temporary storage during the process of jobs and for applications that is running on the OS Note Total memory consists of 512MB on board and an additional Steps to clear memory When the printer is powered off the memory is erased 512MB DIMM Type SRAM DRAM etc Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory LI Yes L No Type SRAM DRAM etc Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory LI Yes L No Non Volatile Memory Does the device contain non volatile memory Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed H Yes No If Yes please describe the type size function and steps to clear the
499. s are in the log Recommended action No action necessary 470 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Expected drive missing Description The product cannot find the encrypted hard drive Recommended action Install the encrypted hard drive External device initializing Description An external device is initializing Recommended action No action necessary Fax is disabled ignoring call Description The product received a call but the fax feature was not configured with the required settings country region date time company name fax number etc Recommended action Use the Administration menu to configure the required fax settings FIM Load Error Send full FIM on X port Description The product displays this message before the firmware is loaded at startup if an error has occurred during a firmware upgrade Recommended action Resend the firmware upgrade Flatbed cover open or Close Flatbed cover ENWW Description The platen glass cover is open or the open closed sensor is not functioning correctly Recommended action 1 Close the flatbed cover 2 Ifthe error persists perform a Sensors diagnostic in the Diagnostics menu on the product control panel to test the flatbed open closed sensor 3 Clean adjust or replace the sensor as needed Tools for troubleshooting 471 Fuser Kit low Description 10 23 60 event code The product indicates when a supply is low Recommended action Replace t
500. s configured correctly The product is disabled or other network settings are incorrect 1 Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol Enable it if necessary 2 Reconfigure the network settings if necessary ENWW Solve connectivity problems 563 Service mode functions Service menu The Service menu is PIN protected for added security Only authorized service people have access to the Service menu When you select Service from the list of menus the product prompts you to enter an eight digit personal identification number PIN E NOTE The product automatically exits the Service menu after about one minute if no items are selected or changed 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button 2 Open the Service menu 3 On the sign in screen select Service Access Code from the drop down list 4 Enter one of the following service access code for your product e M806 10080613 e M830 10083013 The following menu items appear in the Service menu First level Second level Value Description Print Event log Allows you to print or view the product event View Event log log Clear Event Log Use this item to clear the product event log Cycle Counts Total Engine Cycles Set the page count that was stored in NVRAM prior to installing a new formatter Refurbish Cycle Count Use this item to record the page count when th
501. s occurred Recommended action 1 Onthe product control panel open the following menus 424 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 2 Use the Tray Bin manual sensor test to make sure that the Tray 5 paper PS3201 and PS3203 surface sensors are functioning correctly 3 If this part has been removed or replaced check the connector J3015 on the HCI controller PCA J917 4 Ifthe error persists replace the lifter drive assembly Tray 5 62 00 00 No system To continue turn off then on Description Internal system failure Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Reload the firmware 3 Perform a firmware upgrade 4 If the error persists replace the hard disk 65 X0 AZ Error Messages 65 X0 AZ Output accessory Failure Description Output accessory disconnected An external paper handling accessory connection has been interrupted e 65 40 A0 Punch Unit disconnected e 65 50 A0 Folding Unit disconnected e 65 80 A0 Stapler Stacker disconnected e 65 80 A1 Stapler Stacker Unit connection interrupted e 65 90 A0 Booklet Make disconnected Recommended action 1 Make sure that the latest firmware updates are installed for the engine and finisher 2 Make sure that the finisher is grounded correctly ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 425 e Make sure that the finisher is latched and locked to the engine by tightening the thumbscrew inside the front door
502. s page Poor physical connection The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product The computer is unable to communicate with the product The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network New software programs might be causing compatibility problems The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly The product is disabled or other network settings are incorrect NOTE HP does not support peer to peer networking as the feature is a function of Microsoft operating systems and not of the HP print drivers For more information go to Microsoft at www microsoft com Poor physical connection 1 2 3 4 Verify that the product is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length Verify that cable connections are secure Look at the network port connection on the back of the product and verify that the amber activity light and the green link status light are lit If the problem continues try a different cable or port on the hub The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product 1E 562 Chapter 2 Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab Verify that the current IP address for the product is selected The product IP address is listed on the product configuration page If you installed the product using the HP standard TCP IP port select the box labeled Always print to this printer even if its IP ad
503. s when the output bin 2 does not activate the home position sensor P1115 when the output bin 1 shift motor M108 is driven for 20 seconds Also occurs when bin 2 upper limit is detected by P8983 PS982 PS981 on the Tray 2 Area Sensor PCA when no paper has been sensed by the output bin 2 paper sensor PI112 NOTE Output bin 2 home position is detected using the top sheet of paper on the bin when paper is present and the edge of the bin itself when there is no paper on the bin Control panel diagnostics M108 tray 2 output bin 2 motor and P1115 output bin 2 paper surface sensor Recommended action 1 Manually release output bin 2 and position it at the midpoint of its travel area 2 Test the output bin 2 shift motor M108 by using the finisher component test from the control panel display e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Component Test 3 IF output bin 2 moves during the test perform the following steps 4 Verify that the paper surface sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the PI115 sensor body Also verify that when the top edge of the output bin engages the sensor arm that the sensor flag moves into sensor P1114 5 Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the chassis 6 Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 7 Verify that intermediate connector J1040 and J8 on the stacker controller PCA
504. saddle stitcher controller PCA for damage and proper connections 5 If issue still remains replace sensor 13 90 Dz Description Booklet Inlet Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the front left door Finisher delay jam at booklet making paper entry sensor P122 Error occurs when booklet making function is selected and after the engine signals the finisher that it is delivering paper to the finisher The booklet making paper entry sensor PI22 is not activated within the expected time period after receiving the engine s delivery signal suggesting that a paper jam has occurred somewhere between the Reversing Assembly and sensor PI22 The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms Control panel diagnostics M9 Inlet Motor SL5 Inlet Switch Solenoid e 13 90 D0 e 13 90 D3 Recommended action 1 Print and analyze the event log looking for related jams occurring either in the Switch Back assembly or the Hole Punch assembly These errors might be the result of media failing to reach the output device in the correct amount of time Troubleshoot all Printer Engine Jams first Make sure that media is in good condition and not wrinkled or damaged Make sure that the correct paper size in the trays is selected according the paper size being fed Check the finisher entry point guides for damage Verify where the leading edge of the media is when Jam occurs an RR o H Has media made it through Switch Back registration e Test M2
505. scription Programs and fonts can be stored on the product s file system and are loaded into RAM when the product is turned on The number XX specifies a sequence number indicating the current program being loaded Recommended action No action necessary y NOTE Do not turn the product off 0 000 476 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Lower left booklet bin full Description The booklet bin is full Recommended action Remove media from the bin to continue Manually feed output stack Then touch OK to print second side Description The product has printed the first side of a manual duplex job and is waiting for the user to insert the output stack to print the second side Recommended action 1 Maintaining the same orientation remove the pages from the output bin 2 Flip the document printed side up 3 Load the document in Tray 1 4 Touch the OK button to print the second side of the job Manually feed lt Type gt lt Size gt To use another tray press OK Description This message displays when manual feed is selected Tray 1 is loaded and other trays are available Recommended action 1 Load tray with the requested paper 2 If paper is already in tray press the Help button to exit the message and then press the OK button to print 3 To use another tray clear paper from Tray 1 press the Help button to exit the message and then press the OK button Moving solenoid Description The solen
506. scription This message displays even though the toner cartridge is new Recommended action 1 Remove and then reinstall the toner cartridge 2 Make sure a genuine HP supply is used 3 Ifthe error persists replace the toner cartridge Checking engine Description The product is conducting an internal test 466 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action No action necessary Checking paper path Description The product is checking for possible paper jams Recommended action No action necessary Chosen personality not available To continue touch OK Description A print job requested a product language personality that is not available for this product The job will not print and will be cleared from memory Recommended action Print the job by using a print driver for a different language or add the requested language to the product if possible To see a list of available personalities print a configuration page Clearing event log Description This message is displayed while the event log is cleared The product exits the menus when the event log has been cleared Recommended action No action necessary Clearing paper path Description The product is attempting to eject jammed paper Media is detected in the paper path The product will attempt to eject it Recommended action No action necessary Check the progress at the bottom of the control panel display If a jam is not cleared remove the media
507. se the red grid touch test to verify that all areas of the touchscreen are correctly functioning See Table 2 8 Control panel diagnostic functions on page 141 Figure 2 2 Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond Touchscreen slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond Not a control panel problem Do not replace the control panel Troubleshoot firmware or software application problems 146 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone Figure 2 3 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone ls the area of the touchscreen you are touching greyed out intentionally deactivated N v Open the diagnostic function Perform the red grid touch test Does the previously inactive area respond to a touch Y Turn the product power off and then on again Does the previously inactive area respond to a touch Replace the N control panel Do not replace the control panel ENWW Troubleshooting process 147 No control panel sound Figure 2 4 No control panel sound Replace the control panel 148 Chapter2 Solve problems Control panel has no sound Open the following menus Administration Display Settings Key Press Sound Select the following Can sounds be heard O
508. self repair is optional These parts are also designed for Customer Self Repair If however you require that HP replace them for you this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product Based on availability and where geography permits CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery Same day or four hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits If assistance is required you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time normally five 5 business days The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement With a customer self repair HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier carrier to be used ENWW Customer self repair warranty service 589 Customer support Get telephone support for your country region Country region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the box with your product or at www hp com support Have the product name serial number date of purchase and problem descript
509. semblies e Bin cable cover e Open closed stepped cover e Upper stepped cover e Lower stepped cover e Rear cover 2 Locate the following controller PCA switches e SW3 callout 1 e DIPSW4 callout 2 f NOTE The DIPSWA has eight electronic switches that can be set to either the ON or OFF position The controller PCA is marked ON and OFF to show the current switch position For normal operation of the finishing accessory all of the DIPSWA switches must be in the OFF position Always return the DIPSWA switches to the factory setting when you are finished testing an accessory Figure 2 10 Finishing controller PCA switches ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 167 Access the saddle controller PCA A CAUTION ESD sensitive component For specific instructions about removing the following covers to access the saddle controller PCA see the product repair manual 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear cover e Rear cover BM PCA 2 Locate the following controller PCA switches e SWI callout 1 e DIPSW callout 2 Ey NOTE The DIPSW has eight electronic switches that can be set to either the ON or OFF position The DIPSW is marked ON to show the current switch position For normal operation of the finishing accessory all of the DIPSW switches must be in the OFF position Always return the DIPSW switches to the factory setting when you are finished testing an accessory PCA switches E i P PM 3 Figure 2 11
510. sembly sensors Trailing edge detection sensor WER LED5 PTR5 The stapler stacker detects the following hole punch jams 108 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW p H E Hole punch path delay jam The trailing edge detection sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the stacker controller receives the DELIVERY signal from the product Hole punch path stay jam The trailing edge detection sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when it detects the leading edge hole punching jam The hole punch home position sensor does not detect that the hole punch shaft is turned 180 degrees for a specified period during a punching operation The hole punch motor clock sensor does not detect a specified clock pulse for a specified period during a hole punching operation Residual paper jam The trailing edge detection sensor detects a paper presence when the power is turned on or when the door is closed Stapler stacker assembly jam detection The stapler stacker assembly uses the following sensors to detect the presence of the paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed e Inlet sensor PI103 e Switchback inlet sensor SR101 switchback assembly e Trailing edge detection sensor LED5 PTR5 hol
511. sendable packets transmit collisions and transmit late collisions 4 TCP IP information including the IP address 5 IPv4 information 6 IPv6 information 252 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Finding important information on the configuration pages ENWW Certain information such as the firmware date codes the IP address and the email gateways is especially helpful while servicing the product This information is on the various configuration pages Table 2 41 Important information on the configuration pages Type of information Firmware date codes When you use the remote firmware upgrade procedure all of these firmware components are upgraded Specific information DC controller Firmware datecode Configuration page Look on the main configuration page under Device Information Look on the main configuration page under Device Information HP embedded Jetdirect firmware version Look on the HP embedded Jetdirect page under General Information Accessories and internal storage All optional devices that are installed on the product should be listed on the main configuration page In addition separate pages print for the optional paper handling devices and the fax accessory These pages list more detailed information for those devices Finishing accessories Embedded HP Jetdirect Look on the main configuration page under Installed Personalities and Options Shows model an
512. sensor PS2502 flag moves smoothly and that the sensor is not damaged If the flag is damaged replace Tray 1 4 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 5 Test PS2502 using the Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly 6 Runthe Tray 1 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the right door assembly 7 Ifthe issue is not resolved replace the right door assembly 13 A2 D2 Description Jam in Tray 2 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 349 This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 2A feed sensor PS1402 in the designated amount of time after the start of media pick up from Tray 2 This is a no pick jam from tray 2 Recommended action 1 Open Tray 2 remove any jammed paper and then close the tray 2 Open and close the upper right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Make sure that the Tray 2 pickup feed and separation roller are installed correctly and show no damage or wear 4 Clean or replace the pickup feed rollers as needed 5 Check the connectors at the sensor feed motor and the DC controller PCA 6 Open the following menus e Administration e X Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 7 Runthe Tray 2 pickup feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the pickup assembly 8 Test PS1402 using the Tray Bin M
513. sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust band debris c Make sure that connector J5 on the stacker controller PCA is fully seated and not damaged Check the wiring at the sensor d Ifthe error persists replace the stapler assembly EY NOTE The stapler assembly includes the stapler shift home position sensor PI120 stapler unit shift position plate assembly and the flat flexible cable FFC Tools for troubleshooting 439 66 80 38 66 80 46 Description Stacker Stapler Mechanism Failed Occurs when stapler alignment interference sensor P1116 is activated signaling that the stapler unit is not in its proper position for stapling to occur This is to prevent damage to stapler from occurring when stapler is positioned over one of the three stoppers when the signal to staple has been sent Recommended action 1 Ifthe stapler unite does not move correctly or moves erratically check the flat flexible cable FFC for damage dents folds and or tears Replace the FFC if necessary 2 Ifthe stacker controller PCA was recently replaced adjust the staple alignment and staple position 3 Ifthe stapler is not positioned over a stopper when this error occurs perform the following steps a Make sure that the stapler unit is correctly mounted and securely fastened to the base b Make sure that the sensor is not obstructed or damaged Make sure that the sensor flag is not damaged moves freely
514. setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors Contrast Select a value using the Adjust the Contrast Background Cleanup slide bar or touch Automatic Select a value using the slide bar or touch Automatic setting to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and darkest color on the page Adjust the Background Cleanup setting if you are having trouble copying a faint image Sharpness Default Content Orientation Orientation Select a value using the slide bar or touch Automatic Portrait Landscape Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image For example increasing the sharpness could make text appear crisper but decreasing it could make photographs appear smoother Select this to make the selected Image Adjustment setting the default value For some features to work correctly you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page Portrait orientation means the short edge of the page is along the top Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 269 Table 2 44 Copy Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level 2 Sided Format Third level Values Book style Flip style Book style original Flip style copy Flip style original Book style copy Description If you are making two sided copies
515. shooting 271 Table 2 44 Copy Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Values Original Sides 1 sided 2 sided Description Select the 1 sided option if the original document is printed on only one side Select the 2 sided option if the original document is printed on two sides Borders on Each Page To print a border around each page select the Borders on Each Page option Edge to Edge Normal recommended Edge to Edge output Use to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original document is printed close to the edges Combine with the Reduce Enlarge feature to ensure that the entire page is printed on the copies When the Edge to Edge feature is turned on the product minimizes margins and prints as close to the edge of the paper as possible Job Build Job Build off Job Build on Use to combine several original documents into one job Also use this feature to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at one time The product temporarily saves all the scanned images After you have scanned all the pages for the job touch the Finish option to finish the job 272 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Scan Digital Send Settings menu M830 only To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Scan Digital Send Settings menu In the
516. side upper center of the product If no noise is heard make sure that the connector J205 on the DC controller PCA and connectors J1451 and J1454 on the intermediate PCA are connected correctly and undamaged If the error persists replace the face down delivery assembly Solve problems ENWW 57 00 07 Error To continue turn off then on Description Rear edge cooling fan FM 7 malfunction Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Listen for fan noise at the front left side of the product Ey NOTE The cooling assembly is deep inside the product and will be difficult to hear 3 If no noise is heard make sure that the connector J222 on the DC controller PCA and relay connector J33 are connected correctly and undamaged 4 Ifthe error persists replace the edge cooling fan assembly 57 00 08 Error To continue turn off then on Description Front edge cooling fan FM 8 malfunction Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Listen for fan noise at the front left side of the product Ey NOTE The cooling assembly is deep inside the product and will be difficult to hear 3 If no noise is heard make sure that the connector J222 on the DC controller PCA and relay connector J33 are connected correctly and undamaged 4 Ifthe error persists replace the edge cooling fan assembly 57 00 09 Error To continue turn off then on Description Condensation prevention fan FM 9 malfunc
517. sition e Subsequent paper is output closer to the delivery slot The volume of paper that can be output is as follows 15 sheets maximum of 14 sheets of 80 g m 1 sheet of 250 g m Figure 1 83 Paper delivery for booklet maker Direction of delivery First sheet Paper positioning plate The alignment plates put the paper in order when it is output to the vertical path assembly Mounted at the edge of the vertical path assembly alignment plates also prepare the stack for delivery after stapling Figure 1 84 Alignment plates Sheets Alignment plate Alignment plate T Paper positioning plate When all the paper has been output the two stitchers staple the stack The stitchers face the center of a stack and alternate to prevent the paper from wrinkling and to limit the load on the power supply If only one sheet arrives stitching does not take place and the next operation stack feeding occurs 114 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1 85 Stitching the stack g e Stitcher staplers The booklet maker unit folds the stitched stack and then feeds it to where the stapling position matches the height of the paper pushing plate and the paper folding roller nip The paper positioning plate moves the stack forward and the guide plate descends so that the paper folding rollers directly face the stack ENWW Booklet maker 115 Figure 1 86 Position the stack g A Paper folding roller Paper posit
518. sk function the product firmware must be reloaded A CAUTION HP recommends that you do not use the Format Disk option unless an error occurs and the solution in the product service manual recommends this solution After executing the Format Disk function the product is unusable HP recommends backing up product configuration data before executing a Format Disk if you need to retain customer defined settings See the Backup Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu Reasons for performing Format Disk e The product continually boots up in an error state Ey NOTE Try clearing the error prior to executing a Format Disk e The product will not respond to commands from the control panel 570 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW e Executing the Format Disk function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems e To reset the product by deleting all solutions and customer defined settings Execute a Format Disk 1 Turn the product on 2 TheHP logo displays on the product control panel When an underscore displays below the HP logo touch the logo to open the Preboot menu 3 Use the down arrow e button to highlight Administrator and then touch the OK button 4 Use the down arrow v button to highlight Format Disk and then touch the OK button 5 Touch the OK button again Ey NOTE When the Format Disk operation is complete you will need to reload the product firmware ENWW Service mode functions 571 Solve fax problem
519. sk status information if any is available Select the External Device item to erase the internal device or get status about the internal device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required This might take a long time NOTE The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled The ATA secure erase command erases the entire disk including firmware The disk remains an encrypted disk Erase Unlock Select the Erase Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain access to it from any product NOTE The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled The encryption key is erased so the disk becomes a non encrypted disk Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available 134 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 4 Preboot menu options 4 of 6 Menu option First level Second level Third level Description Administrator Configure LAN Select the Configure LAN item to set up the network settings for the Preboot menu firmware upgrade continued The network can be configured to obtain the network settings from a DHCP server or as static IP Mode Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition from the DHCP DHCP server IP Mode Use this item to manually assign the network addresses STATIC IP Address Use this item to manually e
520. sor B PS1404 Tray 3 feed sensor A PS1405 Tray 2 media level sensor 1 PS1406 Tray 2 media level sensor 2 PS1407 Tray 3 media level sensor 1 PS1408 Tray 3 media level sensor 2 PS1409 Tray 2 media surface sensor PS1410 Tray 2 media presence sensor PS1411 Tray 3 media surface sensor PS1412 Tray 3 media presence sensor PS1413 Cassette pickup roller home position sensor PS1451 Face down tray delivery sensor M806 only PS1452 Face down tray media full sensor M806 only PS2002 Duplex switchback sensor PS2003 Duplex pre registration sensor PS2004 Duplex feed sensor PS2005 Duplex residual media sensor PS2501 Tray 1 media presence sensor PS2502 Tray 1 feed sensor 10 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Motors ENWW Table 1 3 Electrical components continued Component type Abbreviation Component name SR2001 Duplex side registration sensor Sensor Environment sensor LED LED1 Power LED The product has 14 motors for paper feed and image formation The DC controller determines there is a motor failure if a motor does not reach a specified speed within a specified period after motor startup or if the rotational speed is outside a specified range for a specified period Table 1 4 Motors Abbreviation Component name Components driven or motor function DCM1 Fuser motor Pressure roller and fuser delivery roller Pressurizes or depressurizes the pressure roller DCM2 Drum motor Photosensitive drum regi
521. sor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body 5 Run a diagnostic through the engine control panel and turn on M2 Registration motor and Mi Switchback Motor to observe gear rotations on the upper left rear frame of the finisher 6 Test SL101 Switch Back inlet flapper solenoid using the control panel diagnostics 7 Check wiring from sensor SR103 to the Reverse Driver PCA connector for damage 8 Replace the Reverse assembly 13 84 Az Description Accumulator Tray Stay Jam Jam in the top left door Upper paper path entry sensor PI104 has signaled that paper has passed but the output bin Sensor PI112 or PI111 does not actuate within the expected time The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms e 13 84 A40 e 13 84 A1 342 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 89 3z 13 90 Az ENWW e 13 84 42 e 13 84 43 Recommended action 1 Remove any media jammed in the upper paper path between sensor PI104 and output bin 2 Check the accumulator for damage or obstructions 3 Ensure M109 Trailing Edge Assist Motor functions properly 4 Replace M109 or Assembly as needed Description Stacker Staple Jam Stapler 1 Jam in the front left door When the staple motor M41 is rotated forward the staple home position sensor PI120 does not turn back on after the prescribed time has elapsed after it goes off and the staple home position sensor P1120 turns on within the
522. sponse from the remote host The maximum is 100 Count Default 004 Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this test Select a value from 0 to 100 To configure the test to run continuously select 0 Print Results Yes No Execute Yes No Do not initiate the selected tests Yes Initiate the selected tests Ping Results Packets Sent Default 00000 Shows the number of packets 0 65535 sent to the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed Packets Received Default 00000 Shows the number of packets 0 65535 received from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed The default is 0 Percent Lost Default 000 Shows the percent 0 to 100 of ping test packets that were sent with no response from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed RTT Min Default 0000 Shows the minimum detected roundtrip time RTT from 0 to 4096 milliseconds for packet transmission and response ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 319 Table 2 53 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level RTT Max Fourth level Values Default 0000 Description Shows the maximum detected roundtrip time RTT from 0 to 4096 milliseconds for packet transmission and response RTT Average Default 0000 Shows the average round trip time RTT from 0 to 4096 millise
523. ss is used to overwrite and upgrade the firmware on the HDD or SSM Solid state module SSM Real time clock Used for the Wake up time feature It includes a battery to supply power when the product is turned off HP Jetdirect Inside JDI An Ethernet interface that is part of the formatter ENWW Formatter control system 5 Control panel The control panel is an 8 inch full color SVGA M880 or 4 3 inch full color SVGA M830 with capacitive touchscreen and adjustable viewing angle It includes an easy access USB port for walk up printing and a hardware integration pocket for third party USB devices such as card readers The control panel has a diagnostic mode to allow testing of the touchscreen Home button and speaker The control panel does not require calibration The M830 model has a QWERTY retractable keyboard beneath the control panel The keys are mapped to your language in the same way the virtual keyboard on the product control panel is mapped If you select a different keyboard layout for the virtual keyboard the keys on the physical keyboard are remapped to match the new settings 6 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Engine control system ENWW The engine control system receives commands from the formatter and interacts with the other main systems to coordinate all product functions It consists of the following components e DC controller e Low voltage power supply e High voltage power supply e Fuser con
524. sseeeeeeneeennen ener 234 Ee Deel Tele TTT 235 Internal print quality test pages sssssssssssssseeeeeeee mere ener nennen enne 245 Print quality troubleshooting pages sssm em 245 Fusertest ele C 247 Gl aning page cree th d Duties eee ee 248 Enable and configure auto cleaning eseeeeeesseeeeeereeeeeseeererrenesen 248 Print configuration page TEE 249 Configuration page ssssessssseeeeen enne 249 HP embedded Jetdirect page sess 251 Finding important information on the configuration pages 253 Print quality troubleshooting tools a nennen 254 Repetitive defects ruler ssssssssssssssseeeeeeneeneenne nenne 254 Control panel menlis 2 eebe a a Eeer scene ahud leap i obere 255 Administration menu soi tici tete tae Tuc ERR uae te netus 255 Reports men edd REENEN e ru RP e deeds 255 General Settings menu secte ueedi ii KREE tiet dde neis 257 Copy Settings menu M830 only ssse 266 Scan Digital Send Settings menu M830 only 273 Fax Settings menu M830 only 0 e eee ceeeeeeeee teeter eeeeeeetetaeeeeeeerenea 284 General Print Settings menu 297 Default Print Options menu 300 Display Settings MOM RTE 302 Manage Supplies menu sssssssssossessnnnnntnsrtntttrtrrnrtnnnennnnnnnennsennee nenene 304 Manage Trays menu e eene emen nnn 308 Network Settings menu
525. sss 574 You touched the Stop button to cancel a fax but the fax was still sent 574 No fax address book button displays sseeee 574 Not able to locate the Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin 574 The header is appended to the top of the page when the overlay option is enabled H O 574 A mix of names and numbers is in the recipients box suuueessussss 574 A one page fax prints as two pages nee 575 A document stops in the document feeder in the middle of faxing 575 The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too e 575 Product iere 576 Determine the installed revision of firmware ssssssssssestnsrtnrrennsrnssrestnttrtnnrnnnnnnsnnnee ene 576 Perform a firmware upgrade tete unter tede sth ebetode tae be tede deb Cer pede eet 576 HP Embedded Web Server sss sssnnosnnssnnsnnnnnrnnstnesteesteertertnntntnnnnnnnnnennrent ennenen 576 USB flash drive Preboot menu 577 USB flash drive control panel menu cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeenaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 578 Appendix A Seniko and E e 579 Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement enne rne 580 HP s Premium Protection Warranty LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement 581 HP policy eine Die ET EE 582 HP anticounterfeit Web site A 583
526. stall when print quality is no longer acceptable Ey NOTE When an HP supply has reached its approximate end of life the HP Premium Protection Warrant ends Supply very low OR Supplies very low Description The product indicates when a supply level or more than one supply is low Actual toner cartridge life might vary You do not need to replace the toner cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable When multiple supplies are low more than one event code is recorded e 10 00 70 event code Black toner cartridge e 10 23 70 event code Fuser Kit Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable replace the supply HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable Ey NOTE When an HP supply has reached its approximate end of life the HP Premium Protection Warrant ends Tray X lifting ENWW Description The product is in the process of lifting paper in the indicated tray e X 2 Tray2 e X 3 Tray3 e X 4 Tray 4 e X 5 Tray5 Recommended action No action necessary Tools for troubleshooting 463 File System device failure To clear touch OK Description The specified device has failed Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error File System file operation failure To clear touch OK Description A PJL file system command attempted to perform an invalid operation
527. stapler stacker assembly SL102 Buffer roller alienation solenoid Solenoids for the stapler stacker assembly SL103 Output bin 1 delivery roller alienation solenoid Solenoids for the stapler stacker assembly SL104 Buffer trailing edge retainer solenoid Solenoids for the stapler stacker assembly PI103 Inlet sensor PI104 Paper path sensor PI111 Output bin 1 media presence sensor PI112 Output bin 2 media presence sensor SR101 Switchback inlet sensor SR102 Switchback registration sensor SR103 Switchback path jam sensor LED PCA Stapler stacker with hole puncher assembly only Photosensor PCA Stapler stacker with hole puncher assembly only 76 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Switchback assembly The switchback assembly feeds the paper from the product directly or after switching back to the pass through assembly hole puncher assembly The switchback assembly has the following three functions e Straight feed e Switchback feed to the pass through assembly hole puncher assembly without hole punching operation e Switchback feed to the hole puncher assembly with hole punching operation Straight feed ENWW The straight feed function feeds the paper to the pass through assembly or the hole puncher assembly without switchback operation The operational sequence of the straight feed is as follows 1 The stacker controller receives the DELIVERY signal from the product 2 The stacker controller turns on
528. store Data Insert a USB drive that contains the backup file Calibration Cleaning menu M830 To display At the product control panel select the Device Maintenance menu and then select the Calibration Cleaning menu ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 325 In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 56 Calibration Cleaning menu M830 First level Second level Values Description Cleaning Settings Auto Cleaning Off Use to select the Auto Cleaning menu or the Cleaning Interval On menu Cleaning Interval Select from a list of cleaning Use to set the interval when the intervals cleaning page should be printed The interval is measured by the number of pages printed Cleaning Size Select from a list of support Select the paper size to use for sizes the cleaning page Cleaning Page Print Use to process the cleaning page that was created by using the Create Cleaning Page menu The process takes up to 1 5 minutes Quick Calibration Start The product automatically calibrates itself at various times However you can calibrate the product immediately if you see problems with print quality Use this feature to perform a partial calibration Use this calibration if color density or tone seems incorrect Before calibrating the product make sure that the Ready indicator displays on the control panel display If a job is in progress the calibration occurs when that job is c
529. stration roller and pre registration roller M1 Fuser shutter motor Opens or closes the fuser shutter M2 Tray 3 feed motor Tray 3 feed roller M3 Tray 2 feed motor Tray 2 feed roller M4 Scanner motor Scanner mirror STM1 Pickup motor Moves the cassette pickup roller up or down STM2 Lift up motor Lifts the cassette STM3 Cassette pickup motor Tray 2 pickup roller Tray 2 feed roller Tray 3 pickup roller and Tray 3 feed roller STM2001 Duplex side registration motor Duplex side registration guide STM2002 Duplex switchback motor Duplex inlet roller and duplex switchback roller STM2003 Duplex feed motor Duplex registration roller and duplex feed roller STM2004 Duplex re pickup motor Duplex re pickup roller STM2501 Tray 1 pickup motor Tray 1 pickup roller and Tray 1 feed roller The DC controller determines the following fan failures Failure detection function Supported feature Power supply fan failure detection Yes Controller fan failure detection Yes Rear delivery fan failure detection Yes Front delivery fan failure detection Yes Engine control system 11 Failure detection function Supported feature Cartridge fan failure detection Yes Center delivery fan failure detection M806 only Yes Rear edge cooling fan failure detection Yes Front edge cooling fan failure detection Yes Condensation prevention fan failure detection Yes Duplex fan failure detection Yes Fans The product fans prevent the tempera
530. t and then remove any paper 5 Move the upper jam release handle to the left 6 Open the lower booklet door 7 Turn the lower jam release knob counter clockwise ENWW Clear jams 539 8 Press the jam release knob and then turn it clockwise 9 Remove all paper from the lower booklet door area and then close the door 10 Close the front left door 540 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Clear connection jams 1 Pull the release handle on the top of the finishing accessory and then slide the finisher away from the product until it stops 2 Remove any paper from the area 3 Attach the finishing accessory ENWW Clear jams 541 Clear Staple 1 jams 1 Liftthe jam access cover for the output slot and gently remove any jammed paper 2 Wait three seconds and then open the front left door 3 Pull the staple cartridge up and out to remove it 542 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 4 Lift up the metal handle on the front of the staple cartridge 5 Remove any jammed staples from the staple cartridge 6 Push down the metal handle on the front of the staple cartridge ENWW Clear jams 543 7 Insert the staple cartridge Press down on the top of the staple cartridge until it clicks into place 8 Close the front left door Clear staple jams in the booklet maker 1 Open the front left
531. t have been faxed Copy Pages Count NOTE M830 product only Set the number of scanned pages that have been printed Scanner Settings NOTE M830 product only ADF Settings Leading edge Trailing edge Left Side Front Left Side Back Set the calibration values WARNING Do not change these values unless instructed to do so Serial Number Glass Settings Leading edge glass Left Side Glass Set the serial number Service mode functions 565 First level Service ID Cold Reset Paper Second level Value Description Use this item to show the date that the product was first used on the control panel This eliminates the need for users to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty When you perform a cold reset the paper size that is stored in NVRAM is reset to the default factory setting If you replace a formatter board in a country region that uses A4 as the standard paper size use this menu to reset the default paper size to A4 LETTER and A4 are the only available values New Registration Roller Yes No Reset the counter for the registration roller after replacing the registration assembly Media Sensor Value Use this item to record the media sensor value found on a replacement paper pickup assembly PTT Test Mode NOTE FAX models only Hook Operations Off Hook On Hook Test the internal modem for the analog fax ac
532. t products Primary DNS Secondary DNS Range 0 255 Default Range 0 255 Default 0 0 0 0 Specify the IP address n n n n of a Primary Domain Name System DNS Server Specify the IP address n n n n of a Secondary DNS Server IPV6 Settings Enable Off Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the print server Off IPv6 is disabled On IPv6 is enabled Address Manual Settings Enable Address Use this item to enable and manually configure a TCP IPv6 address 312 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 53 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Specified The stateful auto Router Unavailable configuration method to be used Always by the print server is determined by a router The router specifies whether the print server obtains its address its configuration information or both from a DHCPv6 server Router Unavailable If a router is not available the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 Server Always Whether a router is available the print server always attempts to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPV6 server Primary DNS Secondary DNS ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 313 Table 2 53 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level
533. t LED product operating 155 HP Jetdirect LEDs 155 upgrades downloading product 576 USB flash drive 577 578 USB interface 5 Use Requested Tray 308 V voltages DC 16 over current protection 18 WwW WAIT state 3 warnings iii warranty customer self repair 589 license 585 product 580 toner cartridges 581 warranty date information 566 waste disposal 600 Web sites customer support 590 fraud reports 583 Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS 600 2013 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P www hp com CZ244 90967
534. t be lost 2 Check the host configuration 40 00 03 EIO X buffer overflow To continue touch OK Description Too much data was sent to the EIO card in the specified slot x An incorrect communications protocol might be in use Recommended action Touch the OK button to print the transferred date some data might be lost 40 00 04 EIO X bad transmission To continue touch OK Description The connection between the product and the USB device has been broken Recommended action 1 Touch the OK button to clear the error message and continue printing 2 Remove and then reinstall the USB device 40 00 05 Embedded I O bad transmission To continue touch OK ENWW Description The USB device has been removed Recommended action 1 Touch the OK button to clear the error message data will be lost 2 Install the USB device Tools for troubleshooting 399 40 08 0X USB storage accessory removed Description X 0 or 1 information code Secure file erase is enabled Recommended action No action necessary 40 0X 05 USB storage accessory removed Description X 1 2 3 5 or 6 information code The USB storage accessory was removed Recommended action No action necessary 41 XX YZ Error Messages 41 01 YZ Description Event log error message 41 01 YZ An unknown misprint error occurred on the product Y Type Z Tray e Y 0 Photo Media 1 2 or 3 e Y 1 Auto Sense Normal e
535. t bin The swing motor turns and the swing guide descends causing the upper and lower stack delivery rollers to hold the stack The stack delivery motor turns the stack delivery roller and return roller At the same time the stack trailing edge assist motor starts the stack trailing edge assist guide and the stack held by the stack delivery rollers is moved forward When the stack trailing edge assist motor reverses the stack trailing edge assist guide returns to home position The stack delivery motor then ejects the stack with the upper and lower stack delivery rollers Figure 1 62 Stack delivery Swing guide Stack ejection roller Return roller Stack trailing edge assist guide Staple operation The stapling operation staples the prescribed number of copies with the stapler unit The staple position depends on the staple mode and paper size The stapler shift home position sensor P110 detects whether the stapler unit is at the home position The stapler unit is equipped with a stapler alignment interference sensor P116 The staple motor M41 operation is prohibited when the stapler alignment interference sensor PI46 is on This prevents stapling at the stopper and 94 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW damaging the stopper when the stapler shift motor M105 is incorrectly adjusted When the power is turned on the stacker controller PCA drives the stapler shift moto
536. t for jammed paper obstructions or damage 5 Runa diagnostic through the engine control panel and turn on M101 entrance motor to observe gear rotations on the upper rear frame of the finisher Ensure that the first delivery rollers and buffer rollers that pass paper to and from P1104 are rotating 6 Test SL102 buffer roller solenoid and SL 103 output roller solenoid using the control panel diagnostics 7 Check wiring from sensor PI104 to stacker control board connector J2 for damage 8 Onlyifthe error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the stacker controller PCA Description Stacker Delivery Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the top left door Upper paper path entry sensor P1103 has signaled that paper has passed but upper paper path exit sensor PI104 does not actuate within the expected time suggesting that the paper has jammed between PI103 and P1104 in the upper paper path The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms e 13 64 D1 e 13 64 D2 e 13 64 D3 Recommended action 1 Remove any media jammed in the upper paper path between sensor PI103 and sensor PI104 2 Check the paper path between sensor P1103 and sensor P1104 for obstructions that may be preventing the media from reaching P1104 3 Verify that the PI104 sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body 4 Make sure that sensor P1104 is securely fastened to the chass
537. t off and then on again 2 Ifthe error persists turn the product off and then check the scanner wire harness connectors and the scanner power supply fan 3 Ifthe error persists replace the scanner power supply the scanner power supply fan or the SCB Tools for troubleshooting 385 30 01 50 Description Internal SCB error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Ifthe error persists replace the SCB 30 03 14 Description A non fatal error has occurred A scanner EEPROM NVM error has occurred Recommended action This is an informational message and no action is required 30 03 20 Description The copy processor board firmware cannot communicate with the PCA on the optical assembly Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Verify that the FFC cables between scanner and the SCB are connected 3 Replace the scanner 30 03 22 Description The scan module cannot see the illumination module or marginal illumination The optical assembly is not parked under the calibration strip Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again Upgrade the firmware Check the service event log for other scanner errors and then resolve those errors 2 3 4 Check the scan module FFC connection 5 Replace the scanner 6 If the error persists please escalate this problem to your Global Business unit 386 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 30 03 23 30 03 30 3
538. t respond replace the associated lifter drive assembly Tools for troubleshooting 489 Tray X overfilled Description The tray is filled above the stack height mark e X 2 Tray2 e X 3 Tray 3 e X 4 Tray 4 e X 5 Tray5 The overfilled condition is sensed by the stack surface sensor when the tray is first closed If the stack surface sensor does not move down because the tray is too full the overfilled message will be displayed and the tray will not be available for printing Recommended action 1 Open the tray and remove media until the tray filled indicators can be seen 2 Close the tray 3 Make sure that all connections from the DCC to the paper pickup assembly and lifter drive assembly are fully seated and connected 4 Ifthe lifter drive assembly was removed or replaced make sure that the connector on the assembly is connected correctly and fully seated 5 If the error persists perform a tray bin sensor test for the paper stack sensor of the specified tray Replace sensors if necessary 6 Ifthe error persists replace the paper pickup assembly Eyf NOTE Type mismatch Tray X Description The specified tray contains a paper type that does not match the configured type Recommended action The specified tray will not be used until this condition is addressed Printing can continue from other trays 1 Load the correct paper in the specified tray 2 Onthe product control make sure that the type loaded
539. t style for 2 sided print jobs If the Book Flip style style option is selected the back side of the page is printed the right way up This option is for print jobs that are bound along the left edge If the Flip style option is selected the back side of the page is printed upside down This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge Edge to Edge Normal recommended Use to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of Edge to Edge output copies when the original document is printed close to the edges ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 301 Display Settings menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Display Settings menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 49 Display Settings menu First level Second level Display Brightness Values Range 10 to 10 The default value is O Description Use to specify the intensity of the LCD control panel display Key Press Sound On Use to specify whether you hear a sound when you touch the M830 only Off Screen or press buttons on the control panel Language Settings Language Select from a list of languages Use to select a different that the product supports language for control panel messages and specify the default keyboard layout When you select a new language the keyboard layout automatically changes to match the factory
540. t the output bin shift motor M107 or M108 by using the finisher component test from the control panel display 4 Ifthe output bin moves during the test perform the following steps 5 Ifthe paper surface sensor flag was recently removed or replaced make sure that it is installed correctly Ey NOTE The four tabs under the clips must be inserted into the slots behind the roller shaft of the lower stack ejection roller 6 Make sure that the paper surface sensor flag is not damaged moves freely and is correctly aligned with the sensor body Also make sure that when the top edge of the output bin engages the sensor arm that the sensor flag moves into sensor 434 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 66 60 34 66 60 48 ENWW 7 Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the chassis 8 Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris 9 Verify that the connectors on the stacker controller PCA are fully seated and not damaged Check the wiring at the sensor 10 If the error persist replace the output bin assembly Description Stacker Assist Motor Error In order to improve stacking performance when ejecting copies a trailing edge assist guide is used in addition to the stack ejection roller to support the rear end of the stack during stack ejection Error occurs when the stacker trailing edge guide does not leave its home position P1109 after the stack trailing
541. tack trailing edge assist operation ssss 94 Stack delivery ODER NENNT Ce A 94 Staple operation nennen nennen rentrer senis 94 Shift the staple unit 2 2 0 2 cece ce cceeeceecececeeceeeeeeeeeeececaaaeaaeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteseeeenneenaeees 100 Stack operation stapler stacker and booklet maker sssss 102 Output bin operation sssssssssssseeeeeeeemeen 102 Shutter operation sess 105 HEIN 105 Stapler stacker jam detection essssseesessesereeeseirrsstirrrssstrrnnnsttennnnstennnnnnnen n 105 Switchback assembly jam detechon 106 Hole puncher assembly jam detection sssssssseeesssssrrssseerrressrirrrnssnnnnnssrenna 108 Stapler stacker assembly jam detection sese 109 Booklet maker eiie En tix e I eR a e RIOT dE 111 Electrical circuitry for the booklet maker unit ssm 113 Basic operation of the booklet maker sss 113 Construction of the booklet maker unit control system see 117 Booklet maker MOS 5 cct bec ea Ecce Doa banc ror ll cea ina uar i c Ru RR 118 Booklet maker paper feed and delivery ssssssssssssssse 119 Booklet maker Jam detection oreet det eee ee n dene SEENEN 125 Booklet maker delivery modes eeeeseeeseeeeeeeeee entere neni nnne ann nnn nnne nnn nenas 126 2 SONS alen 127 el e te Eu
542. tact HP support if you cannot find a Third Party License If the Third Party Licenses include licenses that provide for the availability of source code such as the GNU General Public License and the corresponding source code is not included with the Software then check the product support pages of HP s website hp com to learn how to obtain such source code 2 LICENSE RIGHTS You will have the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA a Use HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the HP Software Use means installing copying storing loading executing displaying or otherwise using the HP Software You may not modify the HP Software or disable any licensing or control feature of the HP Software If this Software is provided by HP for Use with an imaging or printing product for example if the Software is a printer driver firmware or add on the HP Software may only be used with such product HP Product Additional restrictions on Use may appear in the User Documentation You may not separate component parts of the HP Software for Use You do not have the right to distribute the HP Software b Copying Your right to copy means you may make archival or back up copies of the HP Software provided each copy contains all the original HP Software s proprietary notices and is used only for back up purposes 3 UPGRADES To Use HP Software provided by HP as an upgrade update or supplement c
543. tage power supply assembly and the fuser 4 Ifthe issue persists replace the fuser 5 Ifthe issue persists replace the low voltage power supply assembly 6 Ifthe issue persists replace the DC controller PCA 50 7 Fuser pressure release mechanism failure 1 Remove and reinstall the fuser Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser 2 Check the connector J514 between the fuser and the printer If it is damaged replace the fuser connector assembly or fuser 3 Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the fuser depressurization sensor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the fuser 4 Run the fuser motor test in the actuator drive mode to verify that the fuser motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the fuser motor 5 Ifthe issue persists replace the fuser 50 8 Low fuser temperature 2 1 Remove and reinstall the fuser Make sure that it is seated correctly 2 Make sure that there is no residual paper in the fuser 3 Check the product power source Make sure that the power source meets product requirements Make sure that the product is the only device using the circuit 4 Check the connector J514 between the fuser and the printer If it is damaged replace the fuser connector assembly or fuser Tools for troubleshooting 413 5 Ifthe product has been serviced previously check the connectors J219 and J206 on the DC controller PCA and the connectors J90 and J
544. tage power suppiy eee e cede a aa a aa a a a a a araa a 16 High voltage power supply EE 20 LaSEr SCANNEr ICI 21 Image formation process sete nete t eeu det idera run ie nates aeu st dean IDE ARR ed 23 Layout of the toner cartridge sssssssssssseeeeene eee rne nne en nennen nnns 24 Document feeder cross section sss nennen nennen nnne 27 Document feeder sensor positions sssssssssssssssssssesseeeeneneen nennen nennen 28 Simplex operation paper Dat 29 Duplex operation paper path inesse diea iiaae nennen nennen AAE ATETEA 30 Deskew rollers and width adjust nee nennen nem nennen nnnm nen nn nnns 32 Separation angled ramp separation roller and separation Dad 33 legt V 34 White backing and simplex selector sse eene nnne 35 IBIUTeI eT eec 36 Document feeder closed book mode sssssssssssssss eene eene 37 Document feeder open max opening 70 sssssssssssssseeeeeee eee enne nennen nnns 38 Pickup feed and delivery system blocks ssssssssssssssssssseeeen enne 39 Photo sensors and E e EE 40 Motors and solenoids paper path 42 Tay ene 44 Tray 2 cassette pickup operation ssssssssssssssssssssseseeeeeeet nennen nennen nnns 47 Tray 2 cassette multiple feed prevention sssssssssssssssesseeeneen nennen 48 Tray 2 cassette lift up operation
545. taple stacker with hole punch only Solenoid SL101 Switchback inlet flapper solenoid SL102 Switchback alienation solenoid Switch MSW61 Top door open detection switch staple stacker with hole punch only MSW62 Front door open detection switch staple stacker with hole punch only Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 71 Component type Abbreviation Photointerrupter PI61 PI62 Component name Side registration home position sensor staple stacker with hole punch only Hole punch motor clock sensor staple stacker with hole punch only PI63 Hole punch home position sensor staple stacker with hole punch only P1120 Output bin 2 media surface sensor 2 P1123 Swing height sensor SR101 Switchback inlet sensor SR102 Switchback registration sensor SR103 SR104 SR104 Sensor PCA Switchback path jam sensor Product separation sensor Product separation sensor LED PCA staple stacker with hole punch only Photosensor PCA staple stacker with hole punch only Punch chip box full sensor PCA staple stacker with hole punch only Stapler stacker motors The stapler stacker has an additional two motors in the switchback assembly The stapler stacker with puncher assembly has another additional three motors in the puncher assembly Table 1 27 Stapler stacker motors Abbreviation Component name Component driven M1 Switchback motor Switchba
546. tch and are correct for the type of media being used 3 Check the connector J514 between the fuser and the printer If it is damaged replace the fuser connector assembly or fuser 4 Ifthe issue persists replace the fuser 5 If the issue persists replace the low voltage power supply assembly Fuser Modes e 0 Photo Media 1 2 3 e 1 Normal Auto Sense 414 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 2 Normal 3 Light 1 4 Heavy 1 5 Heavy 2 6 Heavy 3 7 Glossy 1 8 Glossy 2 9 Glossy 3 A Glossy Film B Transparency C Label D Envelope 1 E Rough Sleep States 0 Printing 1 Standby level 1 no temperature control 2 Standby level 2 high temperature control 3 Standby level 3 middle temperature control 4 Standby level 2 low temperature control 5 Middle sleep 6 Deep sleep F Power off 51 XX YZ 52 XX YZ Error Messages 51 00 10 Beam detect error ENWW Description A printer beam detect error occurred Recommended action 1 Reconnect the connector J1801 of the BD sensor and connector J234 on the DC controller PCA Reconnect the connector J151 of the laser scanner assembly and connector J234 on the DC controller PCA If the error persists replace the laser scanner Tools for troubleshooting 415 4 5 If the error persists replace the upper cable guide assembly If the error persists replace the DC controller 51 00 19 51 00 20 Laser
547. tches paper path 40 sequence of operation 3 serialnumber 565 Service ID convert to date 566 restore 566 Service menu options 564 service mode functions 564 settings restore factory 567 side registration motor failure 73 size specifications product 592 software software license agreement 585 solenoids paper path 42 solve problems 127 solving direct connect problems 562 specifications electrical and acoustic 593 physical 592 SS stapler stacker feed and delivery operation 74 jam detection 105 motor failure detection 72 motors 72 stacker staple jams 523 534 542 standby STBY state 3 staple jams booklet maker 544 stapler stacker 523 534 542 stapler stacker jams 521 522 541 staple jams 523 534 542 stapler stacker SS 68 feed and delivery operation 74 jam detection 105 motor failure detection 72 motors 72 stapler stacker assembly feed and delivery operation 87 jam detection 109 status eventlog 151 status fax accessory page 573 STBY standby state 3 stop printing for test 163 supplies counterfeit 583 non HP 582 recycling 597 support online 590 switchback assembly feed and delivery operation 77 jam detection 106 switches fuser 13 paper path 40 T Taiwan EMI statement 610 TCP IP information 252 technical support online 590 temperatures abnormal 15 tests component tests list and descriptions 164 disable cartridge check 157 engine 158 manual sensor 160 networks 316 paper pat
548. ted the warning and disappear from the display when the next job starts Continuable Events Auto continue 10 seconds Use this option to configure the product behavior when the Touch OK to continue product encounters certain errors If the Auto continue 10 seconds option is selected the job will continue after 10 seconds If theTouch OK to continue option is selected the job will stop and require the user to press the OK button before continuing ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 303 Manage Supplies menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Manage Supplies menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 50 Manage Supplies menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Supplies Status Print View M830 only Supply Settings Black Cartridge Low Threshold 1 100 Set the estimated Settings percentage at which Default 10 the product notifies you when the toner cartridge is very low Very Low Settings Stop Specifies how the product notifies you Prompt to continue when the toner cartridge is very low Continue Stop The product stops until you replace the toner cartridge Prompt to continue The product stops and prompts you to replace the toner cartridge You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing Continue The product alerts you that a toner cartridge is
549. ter2 Solve problems ENWW 30 01 08 4 5 If the fan is not operating replace the fan If the error persists replace the Scan Control Board SCB Ey NOTE You might want to provide both parts the fan and the SCB to the onsite technician Have the technician verify that the connector on the scanner controller PCB is firmly seated Also make sure that the connection for the fan in the base of the scanner assembly is firmly seated Description The scanner optic failed to return to the home position Recommended action 1 2 3 Turn the product off and then on again Observe the movement of the optics assembly If the error persists replace the optic assembly the scanner motor or the entire scanner assembly 30 01 10 event code Scanner ADF fan error 30 01 14 ENWW Description The ADF fan is not operating This fan operates only during the ADF scan process Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 Ifthe error persists turn the product off and then check the fan wire harness connectors 3 Remove the ADF rear cover and watch the fan during a scan from the ADF 4 Ifthe fan does not rotate replace the ADF assembly Description Scanner control board SCB EEPROM error Recommended action 1 2 3 4 Turn the product off and then on again Make sure that all connectors on the SCB are seated fully Make sure that the MFP has the latest SCB firmware version R
550. tes how long the product will wait before it reports that the job has failed See Table 2 53 Jetdirect Menu on page 310 for details These menus have the same structure If an additional HP Jetdirect network card is installed in the EIO slot then both menus are available Jetdirect Menu Table 2 53 Jetdirect Menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Information Print Sec Report Yes Yes Prints a page that contains the No current security settings on the HP Jetdirect print Server No A security settings page is not printed TCP IP Enable On On Enable the TCP IP protocol Off Off Disable the TCP IP protocol Host Name Use the arrow An alphanumeric 310 Chapter2 Solve problems buttons to edit the host name NPIXXXXXX string up to 32 characters used to identify the product This name is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page The default host name is NPIxxxxxx where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware MAC address ENWW Table 2 53 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level IPV4 Settings Config Method Values Bootp DHCP Auto IP Manual Description Specifies the method that TCP IPv4 parameters will be configured on the HP Jetdirect print server Bootp Bootstrap Protocol Use for automatic configuration from a BootP server DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration
551. that all of the toner is removed from the fuser roller 5 Use the manual sensor tests to toggle the fuser output sensor PS502 If the sensor is not functioning correctly replace the fuser assembly 6 If the error persists the fuser roller or pressure roller might be damaged Replace the fuser 366 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 13 B9 Dz ENWW Description Fuser delivery delay jam This jam occurs when the media disappears from the fuser output sensor PS502 before a designated amount of time after the registration sensor PS4 sensed the leading edge when printing 13 B9 D1 Fuser delivery delay jam when printing from Tray 1 13 B9 D2 Fuser delivery delay jam when printing from Tray 2 13 B9 D3 Fuser delivery delay jam when printing from Tray 3 13 B9 D4 Fuser delivery delay jam when printing from Tray 4 13 B9 D5 Fuser delivery delay jam when printing from Tray 5 13 B9 DD Fuser delivery delay jam when printing with the Duplexer Recommended action If the media stopped before the fuser try the following steps 1 2 3 Open the front door and the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam If media is stopped under the toner cartridge try another toner cartridge If necessary replace the toner cartridge Make sure that the transfer roller is seated correctly and not worn or deformed Replace the roller if necessary Inspect the trans
552. that the e label is missing This error can cause the supplies status feature to be disabled Recommended action 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Open the front door lower the green handle and then remove the toner cartridge Check the cartridge e label If it is damaged replace the cartridge Reinsert the cartridge push the release button and then rotate the green handle to the locked position Close the front door If the message displays again turn the product off then on If the error persists replace the toner cartridge If the error persists reconnect the connector J304 on the DC controller PCA 10 00 50 Cartridge seal roll up error Description The product encountered a toner cartridge roll up error Recommended action 1 Reinstall the cartridge 2 Turn the product off and then on 3 Reconnect the connector J305 on the DC controller PCA 4 Replace the cartridge sensor assembly 5 Replace the DC controller PCA 10 23 50 Description The fuser kit life was reset above the order threshold 330 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 10 23 51 10 23 52 Recommended action No action necessary Description The fuser kit life was reset above the replace threshold Recommended action No action necessary Description The fuser kit life was reset above the reset threshold Recommended action No action necessary 10 23 70 Printing Past Very Low Description The product indicates when the fuser kit
553. the notification When sending an analog fax select Include Thumbnail to receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification Provide the email address that will receive notifications Content Orientation Orientation Portrait Landscape For some features to work correctly you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page Portrait This setting means the short edge of the page is along the top Landscape This setting means the long edge of the page is along the top ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 289 Table 2 46 Fax Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values 2 Sided Format Book style Flip style Original Size Select from a list of sizes that the product supports Description Use to configure the default style for 2 sided print jobs If the Book style option is selected the back side of the page is printed the right way up This option is for print jobs that are bound along the left edge If the Flip style option is selected the back side of the page is printed upside down This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge Use to describe the page size of the original document Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the overall quality of the copy Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and
554. the original document is placed on the page Portrait This setting means the short edge of the page is along the top Landscape This Setting means the long edge of the page is along the top Book style The back side of the original is printed right side up and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are bound along the left edge Flip style The back side of the original is printed upside down and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are to be bound along the top edge 288 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 46 Fax Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Notification Fourth level Include Thumbnail Notification E mail address Values Do not notify Notify when job completes Notify only if job fails Print E mail Description Use to receive notification about the status of a sent document Do not notify Turns off this feature Notify when job completes Select to receive notification for this job only Notify only if job fails Select to receive notification only if the job is not sent successfully Print Select to print the notification at this product E mail Select to receive the notification in an email Touch the text box following Email Address and then enter the email address for
555. the DELIVERY signal from the product 2 When the switchback inlet sensor detects the leading edge of paper the stacker controller drives the switchback motor 3 The paper is fed to the switchback paper path 4 When the trailing edge of paper reaches the switchback feed hold position after the switchback inlet sensor detects the trailing edge the stacker controller stops the switchback motor 5 The stacker controller reverses the switchback motor so that the paper is ejected from the switchback paper path 78 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW 6 The stacker controller drives the registration motor 7 When the paper passes the registration roller for a specified length after the switchback registration sensor detects the leading edge the stacker controller turns on the alienation solenoid so that the switchback counter roller separates from the switchback roller 8 When the trailing edge of paper passes the switchback paper path the stacker controller turns off the alienation solenoid so that the switchback counter roller contacts the switchback roller 9 When the trailing edge of paper passes the registration roller after the switchback registration sensor detects the trailing edge the stacker controller stops the registration motor Figure 1 44 Switchback feed to the pass through assembly hole puncher assembly without hole punching operation Registration roller Switch back inlet flapper
556. the center position o LED601 and LED602 alternate flashing e Press SW603 to stop the LEDs from flashing o A LED60O l off LED602 flashing e Press SW602 to move the punch to the home front position LED601 and LED602 alternate flashing e Press SW602 to stop the LEDs from flashing and return to the ready state o A LED6OI is off o LED602 is flashing 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW switches to the OFF setting X TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the punch is in the home front position before continuing 6 Ifthe punch side registration fails the test replace the defective assembly 200 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Punch motor test d 5 6 ENWW xy TIP that the drills have stopped moving before continuing Do one of the following e l fthis is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e lfyouare continuing from a previous punch controller PCA test go to step 2 On the punch controller PCA set DIPSW to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 ON e Switch 3 and switch 4 OFF Turn the product power on On the punch controller PCA locate LED601 and LED602 and then observe the following e Ready state o LED601 off o LED602 flashing e Press SW602 for a 3 hole or 4 hole punch or SW603 for a 2
557. the following e First press of SW3 The post alignment plate moves to the home position unless it is already in the home position e Second press of SW3 The post alignment plate moves to the A4 landscape position if it was in the home position e Third press of SW3 The post alignment plate moves from to the A4 portrait position if it was in the A4 landscape position Eyf NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to continuously move the post alignment plate from position to position 5 Ifthe post alignment plate correctly functions press and release SW3 until the plate is in the home position 6 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW4 switches to the OFF setting Se TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the post alignment plate is in the home position before continuing 7 Ifthe post alignment plate fails the test replace the defective assembly 172 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Swing guide motor test 1 Do one of the following e _If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e lfyouare continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe main controller PCA set DIPSWA to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 through switch 6 OFF e Switch 7 ON e Switch 8 OFF 3 Tu
558. the following e First press of SW3 The stacker entrance guide motor rotates listen for the motor to rotate e Second press of SW3 The stacker entrance guide motor stops Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to cause the stacker entrance guide motor to repeatedly rotate and then stop 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSWA switches to the OFF setting x TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the stacker entrance guide motor is stopped before continuing 6 If the stacker entrance guide motor fails the test replace the defective assembly ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 177 Stapled job output motor test 1 Do one of the following If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed If you are continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 On the main controller PCA set DIPSW4 to the following settings Switch 1 ON Switch 2 through switch 4 OFF Switch 5 ON Switch 6 and switch 7 OFF Switch 8 ON 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following First press of SW3 The stapled job output motor rotates listen for the motor to rotate Second press of SW3 The stapled job output motor stops Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to cause the stapled
559. the paper source for a job If a tray is not specified as part of a job manual feed is selected Select which version of the Courier font you want to use The factory default setting is Regular which uses an average stroke width The Dark setting can be used if a heavier Courier font is needed Changes the printable area of A4 size paper If you enable this option eighty 10 pitch characters can be printed on a single line of A4 paper Print PS Errors Print PDF Errors Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Use this feature to select whether a PostScript PS error page is printed when the product encounters a PS error Selects whether a PDF error page is printed when the product encounters a PDF error Personality ENWW Auto POL POSTSCRIPT PDF Configures the default print language or personality for the product Normally you should not change the product language If you change the setting to a specific product language the product does not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to it Tools for troubleshooting 297 Table 2 47 General Print Settings menu continued First level Second level PCL Form Length Values Range 5 128 Default 60 Description Controls the PCL print command options PCL is a set of product commands that Hewlett Packard developed to provide access to product features Use the For
560. the product power source Make sure that the power source meets product requirements Make sure that the product is the only device using the circuit 4 Check the connector J514 between the fuser and the printer If it is damaged replace the fuser connector assembly or fuser 5 Ifthe issue persists replace the fuser 50 2 Fuser warm up error 1 Remove and reinstall the fuser Make sure that it is seated correctly 2 Make sure that there is no residual paper in the fuser 3 Check the product power source Make sure that the power source meets product requirements Make sure that the product is the only device using the circuit 4 Check the connector J514 between the fuser and the printer If it is damaged replace the fuser connector assembly or fuser 5 Ifthe product has been serviced previously check the connectors J219 and J206 on the DC controller PCA and the connectors J90 and J91 on the power line between the low voltage power supply assembly and the fuser 6 Ifthe issue persists replace the fuser 7 Ifthe issue persists replace the low voltage power supply assembly 50 3 High fuser temperature 1 Remove and reinstall the fuser Make sure that it is seated correctly 2 Check the paper type setting in the product control panel menus and in the print driver Make sure that the settings match and are correct for the type of media being used 3 Check the connector J514 between the fuser and the printer If
561. the sensor number sensor name sensor state active or inactive and the number of times the sensor has been toggled activated 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Manual Sensor Test 3 Touch the sensor number and name on the Manual Sensor Test screen to display a sensor location graphic on the control panel display 4 Activate the desired sensor and then check the control panel display to verify the sensor state active or inactive e The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the sensor is active e The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted activated or deactivated For example opening the front door increments the PS14 Front door Toggle item count two times once when the door is opened and once when the door is closed 5 Touch the Reset Sensors button to reset the Toggle count item Or Touch the Cancel button to exit the Manual Sensor Test screen and return to the Diagnostic Tests menu 160 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 13 Manual sensor diagnostic tests Sensor or switch Replacement Part number Description SW8 Front door open closed Switch cable SW6 Left door open closed Switch cable SW7 Rig
562. the switchback inlet flapper solenoid to switch the paper path 3 When the switchback inlet sensor detects the leading edge of the paper the stacker controller drives the registration motor 4 The paper is fed to the straight paper path 5 When the switchback inlet sensor detects the trailing edge of paper the stacker controller checks if the following paper is fed straight or not If the following paper is fed to the straight paper path the stacker controller keeps the paper path switched and driving the registration motor Or Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 77 If there is no following paper the stacker controller stops the registration motor when the trailing edge of paper passes through the registration roller Figure 1 43 Straight feed Registration roller Switch back inlet flapper Paper to pass through ass y or puncher ass y SS ZL Paper from printer ee PS101 O Switchback feed to the pass through assembly hole puncher assembly without hole punching operation The switchback feed to the pass through assembly hole puncher assembly function feeds the paper to the switchback paper path Then it feeds the switched paper to the pass through assembly or the hole puncher assembly The operational sequence of the switchback feed to the pass through assembly hole puncher assembly is as follows 1 The stacker controller receives
563. them operates in the same manner This section uses the left cassette for explanation Figure 1 35 HCI pickup and feed components PS3305 PS3307 V V v PS3301 V Sw3301 Ps3300 9 V PS3201 PS3302 V V PS3202 E B E PS3309 PS3308 a V V SW3303 PS3304 SW3302 PS3303 V V Abbreviation Component name M3301 Right cassette pickup motor M3302 Right cassette lifter motor M3303 Left cassette lifter motor M3304 Left cassette pickup motor M3305 Intermediate feed motor SL3301 Right cassette pickup solenoid SL3302 Left cassette pickup solenoid SW3301 Right door open detection switch SW3302 Right cassette open detection switch SW3303 Left cassette open detection switch PS3101 Right cassette lift up media surface sensor PS3102 Right cassette pickup coordinate media surface sensor PS3103 Right cassette media presence sensor PS3201 Left cassette lift up media surface sensor 3 500 sheet high capacity input HCI feeder 63 Abbreviation Component name PS3202 Left cassette pickup coordinate media surface sensor PS3203 Left cassette media presence sensor PS3301 Media feed sensor PS3302 Right cassette media feed sensor PS3303 Right cassette media size sensor PS3304 Left cassette media size sensor PS3305 Left cassette media feed sensor PS3306 Side feed guide
564. then return all of the DIPSWA switches to the OFF setting o TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the bin has stopped moving before continuing 7 Ifthe stack upper bin fails the test replace the upper stack output bin ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 183 Secondary tray test lower stack output bin 1 Do one of the following e l fthis is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e Ifyou are continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 On the main controller PCA set DIPSWA to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 through switch 4 OFF e Switch 5 switch 6 switch 7 and switch 8 ON 3 Remove all paper from the stack upper and lower output bins 4 Turn the product power on 5 Onthe controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following A CAUTION mmediately unplug the product power cord if you hear any abnormal sounds when the bins are moving e First press of SW3 The stack upper and lower output bins move to the paper out position for the lower output bin position e Second press of SW3 The stack lower output bin moves to the detecting bin surface position Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to repeat moving the stack lower output bin to the detecting bin surface position 6 Turn the
565. this option is PC 8 Either PC 8 or PC 850 are recommended for line draw characters 298 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 47 General Print Settings menu continued First level Second level Values Description Append CR to LF No Configure whether a carriage return CR is appended to each Yes line feed LF encountered in backwards compatible PCL jobs pure text no job control Select Yes to append the carriage return The default setting is No Some environments such as UNIX indicate a new line by using only the line feed control code This option allows the user to append the required carriage return to each line feed Suppress Blank Pages No This option is for users who are generating their own PCL which Yes could include extra form feeds that would cause blank pages to be printed When the Yes option is selected form feeds are ignored if the page is blank Media Source Mapping Standard Use to select and maintain input trays by number when you are Classic not using the product driver or when the software program has no option for tray selection The following options are available Standard Tray numbering is based on newer HP LaserJet models Classic Tray numbering is based on HP LaserJet 4 and older models ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 299 Default Print Options menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Default Pr
566. tify and clean debris that causes streaks on copies Connect the power cable to an outlet and then press the power button to turn on the product ENWW Clean the product 559 Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder M830 1 Liftthe document feeder latch 2 Open the document feeder cover 3 Remove any visible lint or dust from each of the feed rollers and the separation pad using compressed air or a clean lint free cloth moistened with warm water NOTE Lift up the roller assembly so you can clean the second roller 4 Close the document feeder cover 560 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Solve performance problems Table 2 61 Solve performance problems ENWW Problem Pages print but are totally blank Pages print very slowly Cause The document might contain blank pages Solution Check the document that you are printing to see if content displays on all of the pages The product might be malfunctioning Heavier paper types can slow the print job To check the product print a Configuration page Print on a different type of paper Complex pages can print slowly Proper fusing might require a slower print speed to ensure the best print quality Large batches narrow paper and special paper such as gloss transparency cardstock and HP Tough Paper can slow the print job Print in smaller batches on a different type of paper or on a diffe
567. tion Connecting to a PSTN termination point may be the subject of additional requirements set out by the local PSTN operator New Zealand Telecom Statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services This equipment may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service This product has not been tested to ensure compatibility with the FaxAbility distinctive ring service for New Zealand Additional FCC statement for telecom products US This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the back of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ T XXXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the teleph
568. tion Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Listen for fan noise at the rear panel left center of the product 3 If no noise is heard make sure that the connector J226 on the DC controller PCA and intermediate connector J26 are connected correctly and undamaged 4 Ifthe error persists replace the condensation prevention fan FM 9 57 00 10 Error To continue turn off then on Description Duplex fan FM 2001 malfunction ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 421 Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Remove and reinstall the duplex unit to ensure a proper connection 3 Ifthe error persists replace the duplex unit 59 XX YZ Error Messages 59 00 30 or 59 00 40 Description A printer motor error occurred Fuser motor error e 59 00 30 Fuser motor start up error e 59 00 40 Fuser motor rotation error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Check the fuser for any jammed media that might be restricting proper movement of the fuser rollers 3 Remove and reinstall the fuser 4 Run the fuser motor test in the actuator drive mode to make sure that the fuser motor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the fuser motor 5 Check the connector J59 of the fuser motor and connector J233 on the DC controller PCA 6 Ifthe error persists replace the fuser motor 7 Ifthe error persists replace the fuser assembly 8 Ifthe error persists replace the fuser
569. to staple position test Staple sub assembly motor test Stacker entrance motor test Stapled job output motor test Trailing edge assist motor test Stacker solenoid test Stacker clutch test Shutter assembly test First tray test upper stack output bin Secondary tray test lower stack output bin Saddle entrance motor or punch feed roller motor test Returning roller test Switchback motor test Registration motor test Switchback inlet flapper solenoid test Switchback roller alienation solenoid test Saddle solenoid test Saddle booklet feed motor test Paper folding motor test Jogger plate motor test Saddle booklet aging test Saddle booklet alignment plate test Paper position plate test Guide plate test Punch aging test Punch side registration test 170 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW e Punch motor test Pre alignment plate motor test 1 Do one ofthe following e _ If this is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e lfyouare continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe main controller PCA set DIPSW4 to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 through switch 8 OFF 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the main controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following e First press of SW3 The pre alig
570. ton 2 Open the following menus e General Settings e Print Quality e Adjust Paper Types 3 Select a paper type and then select the mode to adjust 4 Selecta value for the mode and then touch the Save button Table 2 58 Print modes under the Adjust Paper Types submenu Print Mode e Plain e Light 60 74g e Mid Weight 96 110g e Heavy 111 130g e Extra Heavy 131 175g e Cardstock 176 220g e Mono Transparency e Labels e Letterhead e Envelope e Heavy Envelope e Preprinted e Prepunched e Colored e Bond e Recycled e Restore Modes NOTE Not all print modes are available for all paper types Resistance Mode Set to Up to resolve print quality issues caused by poor secondary transfer in low humidity environments with resistive or rough surface paper ENWW Use manual print modes 551 Table 2 58 Print modes under the Adjust Paper Types submenu continued Humidity Mode With glossy film set to High when the product is in a high humidity environment and print quality defects occur on HP Tough Paper or Opaque film With transparencies set to High when the product is in a high humidity environment and print quality defects occur on color transparencies on the first page of a print job With all other paper types set to High when the product is in a high humidity environment and light density occurs on the first page of a print job Pre Rotation Mode Set to On when horizontal banding occurs with th
571. tput bins 1 and 2 All sheets are ejected through the following path when the accessory is set to non sort Figure 1 48 Paper path when set to non sort Tray x Paper is stacked alternately 1st delivery roller Stack ejection roller Buffer roller Inlet roller A ef Ty se 03 TTO LVB TO When the product sorts paper size other than A4 B5 or LTR or when set to staple and sort copies are delivered to the processing output bin for aligning and stapling and then ejected using the stack trailing edge assist ENWW Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 87 Figure 1 49 Paper path for sizes other than A4 B5 or LTR 1st delivery roller Buffer roller Inlet roller Stack ejection roller yt A E de oOo o o Mc y B Paper Processing tray With A4 B5 or LTR paper sizes two sheets of paper feed into the buffer two or three sheets if 2 point stapling is activated The sheets are then aligned and stapled in the processing output bin and ejected While stapling or offset is performed copies are simultaneously ejected delivered to the buffer and stacked in the processing output bin Copies are received continuously from the product The stack delivered from the buffer
572. tration Not Registered o ePrint Fa IPsec Secure Web Cert Expires SNMP Versions 1 2 SNMP Set Caty Name Not S SNP Get Caty Name Not Specif Access List Not S Adnin Password Not Speci fi Announcement Agent e Network Statistics Tota Packets Received Unicast Packets Received Bad Pack ived Framing Errors Received Total Packets Transmitted o Transmit Collisions Transmit Late Collisions Jun 21 2013 9 19 55 AM HP LaserJet M806 IPv4 IPv6 Host Kame IPv4 Domain Name IPv6 Domain Nane Primary DNS Server Secondary ONS Server NSCIPv6 Not Speci fied WINS Server Idle Timeout Kg P Status I Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Config By BOOTP OHCP Server TFTP Server Bonjour Service Name HP LaserJet M806 6EA7DA Status Link Loca foB0 3aea a7 ff febe a7da Stateless Not Configured DHCP V6 Not Configured Manual Not Configured Pv6 NPIBEATDA aqui nt Not Specified 58 209 English United States 2 Security Settings information General Information indicates the product status model number hardware firmware version port select port configuration auto negotiation manufacturing identification and manufactured date Tools for troubleshooting 251 3 Network Statistics indicates the total packets received unicast packets received bad packets received framing errors received total packets transmitted un
573. trol Figure 1 2 Engine control system Engine control system Laser scanner system Image formation system Pickup feed and delivery system Input accessory I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Formatter I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Engine control system 7 8 DC controller The DC controller controls the operational sequence of the product Figure 1 3 DC controller block diagram ACinput Low voltage i power supply K J Fuser K Transfer roller C Bose K Pom fl ewe A eet eos I Control panel gt NIME Table 1 3 Electrical components Motor 56 Fan F Solenoid Clutch Photointerrupter Sensor Duplex unit I Nee ji DC controller Input accessory des Laser scanner ass y a MP tray pickup ass y Component type Abbreviation Component name Motor DCM1 Fuser motor DCM2 Drum motor M1 Fuser shutter motor M2 Tray 3 feed motor M3 Tray 2 feed motor M4 Scanner motor Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Table 1 3 Electrical components continued Component type Abbreviation Component name STM1 Pickup motor STM2 Lift up motor STM3 Cassette pickup motor STM2001 Duplex side registration motor STM2002 Duplex switchback motor STM2003 Duplex feed motor STM2004 Duplex re pickup motor STM2501
574. trol panel functions and relaying product status information through the control panel and the network or bidirectional interface e Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA e Storing font information e Communicating with the host computer through the network or the bidirectional interface The formatter receives a print job from the network or bidirectional interface and separates it into image information and instructions that control the printing process The DC controller PCA synchronizes the image formation system with the paper input and output systems and then signals the formatter to send the print image data Formatter hardware The formatter system includes the following components Table 1 2 Formatter hardware components Component Function Microprocessor 800 mhz microprocessor stores fonts and control programs RAM Stores printing and font information and temporarily stores print image data before it sent to the print engine RAM data is lost when the product is turned off NOTE Upgrading RAM improves graphic intense printing operations but does not increase the I O buffer space or the printing speed NVRAM Stores configuration information NVRAM is saved when the product is turned off USB Sends and receives data through USB type B interface connector connected to the host computer Hard disk drive HDD The HDD or SSM store the firmware A remote firmware upgrade proce
575. ts replace the saddle stitcher controller PCA 66 90 30 Description Booklet Staple Motor Error Front The Booklet Maker stitch staplers do not move to different locations in relation to the paper like the main stapler The only movement is through the movement of the rotary cam located on the stapler unit itself during the actual stapling of the booklet The stitch home position switch SW7 is part of the front stitch stapler unit and senses the stapler opening and closing during stapling by the motion of the rotary drive cam Like SWT the stitch motor M7 is also part of the overall stitch stapler unit and replacement requires the replacement of the saddle stapler assembly This error occurs when the front booklet maker stapler stitching home position sensor SW7 does not turn on when the stitch motor front M7 has driven forward for 0 5 seconds This error also occurs when the front booklet maker stapler stitching home position sensor SW7 does not turn off when the stitch motor front M7 has driven forward for 0 5 seconds 446 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW 66 90 41 ENWW Recommended action 1 Check the front stitch stapler for jammed staples 2 Clear jammed staples and then check the staple unit for damage Retest the stapler e fthe error continues check the following items a Make sure that HP approved staples are used b Replace the staple cartridge with one containing HP approved staples c If the error continu
576. ttach the output device 478 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Paused Description The product is paused and there are no error messages pending at the display The I O continues receiving data until memory is full Recommended action Press the Stop button Performing Paper Path Test Description The product is performing a paper path test Recommended action No action necessary Please Wait Description The product is in the process of clearing data Recommended action No action necessary Printing Configuration Description The product is printing the Configuration page Recommended action No action necessary Printing Event Log Description The product is printing the Event Log page Recommended action No action necessary Printing File Directory ENWW Description The product is printing the File Directory pages Recommended action No action necessary Tools for troubleshooting 479 Printing Font List Description The product is printing the Font List pages Recommended action No action necessary Printing Fuser Test Page Description The product is printing the Fuser Test page Recommended action No action necessary Printing Help Page Description The product is printing the Help page Recommended action No action necessary Printing Menu Map Description The product is printing the Menu Map pages Recommended action No action necessary
577. tuja yll pitotoimia jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoisty kaluja VARO 610 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Mik li kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan olet alttiina nakymattomallelasersateilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa Al katso s teeseen VARNING Om laserprinterns skyddsh lje ppnas d apparaten r i funktion uts ttas anv ndaren f r osynlig laserstr lning Betrakta ej str len Tiedot laitteessa k ytett v n laserdiodin s teilyominaisuuksista Aallonpituus 775 795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser ENWW Safety statements 611 GS statement Germany Das Ger t ist nicht f r die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen Um st rende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert warden Das Ger t ist kein Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV Bei ung nstigen Lichtverh ltnissen z B direkte Sonneneinstrahlung kann es zu Reflexionen auf dem Display und damit zu Einschrankungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen Substances Table China Ch E Fig ob C TIRET RRENEN AW AeA EW PTGS Hh ER F KN SR ZRK KUFR PR Pb Hg Cd Cr VD PBB PBDE TfIFISISE X 0 0 0 0 0 F FUR E X 0 0 0 0 0 petal ti X 0 0 0 0 0 VE BLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 RE SULA ZA X 0 0 0 0 0 RED fa X 0 0 0 0 0
578. ture from rising in the product and cool the delivered paper Table 1 5 Fans Abbreviation Component name Area cooled Type Speed Failure detection FAN1 Power supply fan Around the power supply Exhaust Full half Yes assembly FAN2 Controller fan Around the formatter Intake Full half Yes FANS Rear delivery fan Around the delivery area Exhaust Full half Yes M806 only FAN3B Rear delivery fan Around the delivery area Exhaust Full half Yes M830 only FAN4 Front delivery fan Around the delivery area Exhaust Full half Yes M806 only FAN4B Front delivery fan Around the delivery area Exhaust Full half Yes M830 only FANS Cartridge fan Cartridge Intake Full half Yes FANG Center delivery fan Around the delivery area Intake Full Yes M806 only FAN7 Rear edge cooling fan Around the fuser assembly Intake Full Yes FAN8 Front edge cooling fan Around the fuser assembly Intake Full Yes FAN9 Condensation Around the fuser assembly Intake Full Yes prevention fan FAN2001 Duplex fan Inside the duplex unit Intake Full Yes 12 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Fuser control circuit ENWW This product features on demand fusing The fuser heater control circuit and the fuser heater safety circuit control the fuser temperature according to commands from the DC controller The product uses on demand fusing The fuser control circuit consists of the following major components Figure 1 4 Fuser control circuit TH4 Fuser sleeve
579. ubleshooting 287 Description Use the Image Preview feature to scan a document and display a preview before completing the job Select whether this feature is available on the product Make optional The feature is optional depending on the user who is signed in Require preview Previews are required for all users Disable preview Previews are disabled for all users Select the resolution for outgoing faxes If you increase the resolution faxes might be clearer but they could transmit more slowly Some file types for example a file that will be processed with OCR require a specific resolution When these file types are selected the Resolution setting might be automatically changed to a valid value Table 2 46 Fax Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Original Sides Fourth level Values 1 sided 2 sided Description Use to describe the layout for each side of the original document First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides Then touch the Orientation setting to indicate whether the original has portrait or landscape orientation If it is printed on both sides also select the 2 sided format that matches the original document Orientation 2 Sided Format Portrait Landscape Book style Flip style For some features to work correctly you must specify the way the content of
580. uch the down arrow e button to highlight USB Thumbdrive and then touch the OK button 8 Touch the down arrow w button to highlight the xxxxxxx bd1 file and then touch the OK button Ey NOTE The upgrade process can take up to 10 minutes to complete TIP If there is more than one xxxxxxx bd1 file on the storage device make sure that you select the correct file for this product 9 When the message Complete displays on the control panel display touch the back arrow button 3 times 10 When the message Continue displays on the control panel display touch the OK button The product will initialize 11 When the upgrade process is complete print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade firmware version was installed Product upgrades 577 USB flash drive control panel menu 1 Copy the xxxxxxx bd1 file to a portable USB flash drive 2 Turn the product on and then wait until it reaches the Ready state 3 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button 4 Touch the USB Firmware Upgrade button 5 Insert the portable USB storage device with the xxxxxxx bd1 file on it into the USB port on the front of the product and then touch the OK button 6 Touch the xxxxxxx bd1 file and then touch the Upgrade button D X TIP If there is more than one xxxxxxx bd1 file on the storage device make sure that you select the correct file for this pr
581. ue persists replace the delivery unit 13 EA EE Description Left Door Open Jam This jam occurs when the engine left door SW6 is opened during printing ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 379 13 FF FF Recommended action 1 Close the lower right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 2 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 3 Test SW6 using the manual sensor switch test to verify the switch is functioning correctly 4 Ifthe issue persists replace SW6 Description Jam in Printer This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the multiple media path sensors This jam code will only be in the event log if it is a residual jam at power on Recommended action 1 Open all the doors and clear all media from the product 2 Close all the doors to allow the product to attempt to clear the paper path 30 XX YZ Error Messages 30 01 01 30 01 06 Description The flatbed cover sensor was interrupted Recommended action No action necessary This error message should automatically clear If the error persists open the Scanner Tests to test the Flatbed cover sensor Description Scanner fan error Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on again 2 During the MFP initialization sequence listen to the fan to determine if it is operating 3 Ifthe error persists turn the product off and then check the fan wire harness connectors 380 Chap
582. use the saddle entrance motor or punch feed roller motor to repeatedly rotate and then stop 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSWA switches to the OFF setting x TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the saddle entrance motor or punch feed roller motor stops before continuing 6 Ifthe motor fails the test replace the motor ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 185 Returning roller test 1 Do one of the following e l fthis is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e Ifyou are continuing from a previous main controller PCA test go to step 2 2 On the main controller PCA set DIPSW4 to the following settings e Switch 1 ON e Switch 2 OFF e Switch 3 ON e Switch 4 OFF e Switch 5 and switch 6 ON e Switch 7 OFF e Switch 8 ON 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the controller PCA press and release SW3 and then observe the following e First press of SW3 The swing guide is open the stapled job output motor rotates and the returning roller rotates listen for the motor to rotate e Second press of SW3 The stapled job output motor and returning roller stop and the swing guide is closed S NOTE Press and hold down SW3 to repeatedly cause the swing guide to open and close and the stapled job output motor and the returning roll
583. usiness Unit Security Technical IPG Marketing Engineer Date Prepared 08 12 13 606 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Certificate of Volatility M830 Figure C 3 Certificate of Volatility 1 of 2 ENWW Hewlett Packard Certificate of Volatility Model HP LaserJet Enterprise Flow MFP M830 Part Number M830dn M830x CF367A Address Hewlett Packard Company 11311 Chinden Blvd Boise ID 83714 Volatile Memory Does the device contain volatile memory Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed H Yes No If Yes please describe the type size function and steps to clear the memory below Type SRAM DRAM etc Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory DDR2 DRAM 1 5 GB O Yes X No Used for temporary storage When the printer is powered during the process of jobs and off the memory is erased for applications that is running on the OS Note Total memory consists of 512MB on board and an additional 512MB DIMM Type SRAM DRAM etc Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory O Yes L No Type SRAM DRAM etc Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory O Yes L No Non Volatile Memory Does the device contain non volatile memory Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed XX Yes No If Yes please describe the type size function and steps to clear the memory be
584. ut bin 1 shift motor J21 Not used Output bin 1 shift area sensor PCA Output bin 1 media presence sensor J8 Output bin 2 shift motor J24 Swing motor Output bin 2 shift area sensor PCA Output bin 2 media presence sensor J9 Saddle inlet motor J25 Not used Punch controller J10 Front door open detection switch J27 Not used J11 Intermediate feed unit J28 Not used J12 Saddle controller J29 Not used J13 Lower stack ejection roller clutch J30 Saddle controller J14 Output tray 1 close detection switch J32 Not used ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 219 Plug jack locations Figure 2 25 Plug jack locations M806 Table 2 27 Plug jack locations M806 Item Description 1 USB port for connecting external USB drives this port might be covered 2 Hi Speed USB 2 0 printing port NOTE For Easy access USB printing use the USB port near the control panel 3 Local area network LAN Ethernet RJ 45 network port 4 Foreign interface harness for connecting external devices Figure 2 26 Plug jack locations M830 Table 2 28 Plug jack locations M830 Item Description 1 USB port for connecting external USB drives this port might be covered 220 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 28 Plug jack locations M830 continued Item Description 2 Hi Speed USB 2 0 printing port 3 Local area network LAN Ethernet RJ 45 network port 4 Foreign interface harness for connecting external devices 5 Fax port
585. ut for each side of the original document First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides Then touch the Orientation setting to indicate whether the original has portrait or landscape orientation If it is printed on both sides also select the 2 sided format that matches the original document ENWW Orientation Automatically detect Portrait Landscape Tools for troubleshooting 277 For some features to work correctly you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page Portrait orientation means the short edge of the page is along the top Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top In the Orientation area select whether the original document has a portrait or landscape orientation Table 2 45 Scan Digital Send Settings menu M830 only continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level 2 Sided Format Values Book style Flip style Description Book style The back side of the original is printed right side up and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are bound along the left edge Flip style The back side of the original is printed upside down and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are to be bound along the top edge Resolution 400 d
586. utes and unpacks the toner eliminating the need to shake the toner cartridge at installation or when toner begins to run low The toner cartridge is out of toner at the point when print fading occurs Toner cartridge memory chip The toner cartridge includes a memory chip with RAM callout 6 to record its condition and to provide information to the product The memory chip controller reads and writes to the memory after receiving instructions from the DC controller which monitors the antenna unit e Read o When power is turned on A When the front cover is closed When DC controller receives a command from the formatter e Write When a print operation is complete o When the DC controller receives a command from the formatter Toner seal The toner cartridge seal is opened automatically when the toner cartridge is installed into the product The DC controller checks the toner seal status to verify whether the toner cartridge is new whenever the product is turned on the toner cartridge is inserted or the front cover is closed If the toner cartridge is new the DC controller sends the open signal to the drum motor The drum motor rotates in reverse to roll up the toner seal and then after a short time the DC controller turns off the open signal The DC controller also monitors the presence of a toner cartridge When a toner cartridge is inserted the DC controller checks toner seal status as a signal that the toner cartridge is
587. ver PCA J209 Laser scanner J233 Fuser motor Right door open detection switch J210 High voltage power supply HVPS J234 Laser scanner motor J219 Fuser J300 Not used ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 215 Table 2 24 DC controller PCA connectors continued Item J221 Description Item Tray 2 media level sensor 1 J302 Tray 2 media level sensor 2 Tray 2 media surface sensor Tray 2 media presence sensor Tray 2 feed sensor A Tray 2 feed sensor B Tray 2 feed sensor C Tray 2 media length switch Tray 2 media width switch Tray 3 media level sensor 1 Tray 3 media level sensor 2 Tray 3 media surface sensor Tray 3 media presence sensor Description Power switch Power LED Left door open detection switch Front door open detection switch J221 J222 Tray 3 feed sensor A J304 Tray 3 feed sensor B Tray 3 media length switch Tray 3 media width switch Cassette pickup roller home position sensor Controller fan E label toner cartridge memory tag Rear edge cooling fan J305 Front edge cooling fan Drum motor Duplex unit Toner cartridge sensor PCA J223 J225 Tray 1 pickup assembly J400 Paper deck HCH Loop sensor Inter connect board ICB Toner cartridge fan 216 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW High capacity input HCI feeder controller PCA connectors Figure 2 23 High capacity input HCI feeder controller PCA connectors _ son J3006 J3005 J3004 J3008 Co Od Ld
588. very low but it continues printing Document Feeder Low Threshold 1 100 Set the percentage at Kit Settings which the product Default 10 notifies you when a M830 only document feeder kit is needed 304 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 50 Manage Supplies menu continued First level Second level Third level Very Low Settings Fourth level Values Stop Prompt to continue Continue Description Configure how the product responds when the document feeder kit is reaching the end of its estimated life Stop The product stops until you replace the document feeder kit Prompt to continue The product stops and prompts you to replace the document feeder kit You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing Continue The product alerts you that the document feeder kit is very low but it continues printing Maintenance Kit M806 only Low Threshold Settings Very Low Settings 1 100 Default 10 Stop Prompt to continue Continue Set the percentage at which the product notifies you when the maintenance kit is needed Configure how the product responds when the maintenance kit is reaching the end of its estimated life Stop The product stops until you replace the maintenance kit Prompt to continue The product stops and prompts you to replace the maintnenace kit You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing Continue The product
589. ves up the swing ass y height sensor flag turns off the swing height sensor until the swing height sensor flag turns on the swing height sensor Process output bin paper stacking operation When the trailing edge of the paper exits the first delivery roller the sheet is delivered to the processing output bin by the stack delivery roller and return roller and then pushed against the processing output bin stopper Figure 1 56 Process output bin Stack ejection roller 1st delivery roller Offset operation ENWW The job offset operation offsets the paper stack to the front or rear when ejecting to sort the paper stack The forward backward movement of the sheet delivered to the processing output bin is controlled by the front aligning plate and rear aligning plate The aligned copies are stapled or ejected according to the signal from the product When the power is turned on the stacker controller PCA drives the aligning plate front motor M103 and aligning plate rear motor M104 to return the two Stapler stacker and stapler stacker with hole punch 91 aligning plates to the home position The name and function of motors and sensors used by the stack job offset function are shown below Figure 1 57 Motors and sensors for stack job offset Rear aligning plate home position sensor P107 Aligning plate rear Light shielding plate Front aligning plate home position se
590. vious saddle controller PCA test go to step 2 2 Onthe saddle controller PCA set DIPSW to the following settings e Switch 1 OFF e Switch 2 ON e Switch 3 OFF e Switch 4 ON e Switch 5 through switch 8 not used 3 Turn the product power on 4 On the saddle controller PCA press and release SW1 and then observe the following e First press of SW1 The paper folding motor rotates in the feed direction listen for the motor to rotate e Second press of SW1 After a 100 millisecond delay the paper folding motor rotates in the reverse direction listen for a pause and then for the motor to rotate e Third press of SW1 The paper folding motor stops Ey NOTE Press and hold down SW1 to cause the motor to repeatedly rotate pause reverse direction and then stop 5 Turn the product power off and then return all of the DIPSW switches to the OFF setting Eos TIP If you are going to perform another test skip this step and go to the next test make sure that the motor is stopped before continuing 6 Ifthe motor fails the test replace the defective assembly ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 193 Jogger plate motor test 1 Do one of the following e l fthis is the first test you are performing turn the product power off remove all paper and then make sure that all doors and trays are closed e Ifyou are continuing from a previous saddle controller PCA test go to step 2 2 On the saddle controller PCA set DI
591. when as the product is turned on the product is returning from sleep mode or the front cover is being closed ENWW Pickup feed and delivery system 45 Tray 2 and Tray 3 Tray 2 and Tray 3 accommodate up to 500 sheets each The pickup and feed block picks one sheet of paper from Tray 2 and feeds it into the fuser Tray 2 cassette pickup The operational sequence of the Tray 2 cassette pickup is as follows 1 The product is turned on or the Tray 2 cassette is inserted 2 The lift up operation and the lifting plate spring move up the lifting plate to the position where the paper can be picked up 3 The DC controller rotates the pickup motor when it receives a print command from the formatter 4 The Tray 2 cassette CST feed roller rotates 5 The Tray 2 cassette CST pickup solenoid is driven at a specified timing 6 The Tray 2 cassette CST pickup roller rotates and picks up the paper 7 The Tray 2 cassette CST separation roller removes any multiple fed sheets 8 One sheet of paper is fed into the product E NOTE The lift up operation pushes up the lifting plate to keep the stack surface of paper at the pickup position 46 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1 26 Tray 2 cassette pickup operation Pickup motor L CST pickup roller I d g feed roller UH C Bee separation roller A Lifting plate spring Lifter ENWW Pickup feed and de
592. x selector can sufficiently move relative to the document feeder to ensure consistent and stable contact with the document feeder specific window of the simplex scanner Document feeder white backing Figure 1 18 White backing and simplex selector Item number Description 1 White backing ENWW Scanning image capture system 35 The white backing mounted to the document feeder callout 1 ensures that any paper placed on the flatbed scanner conforms to the glass resulting in a uniform scan The white color also enables scanning of transparent paper on the flatbed scanner window The optical properties color and reflectance are sufficient to achieve the required image quality attributes on both transparent and non transparent paper The material used is UV stabilized so its color will not change over time after being exposed to the light source from the scanner Document feeder duplex selector Figure 1 19 Duplex selector Item number Description 1 Duplex selector 36 Chapter 1 The duplex selector is used as a white and black background for duplex scans It also provides a white surface for duplex scanner calibration when the device is powered on Switching between white black and calibration mode is caused by rotating the deskew motor in reverse which actuates a cam and lever that toggle the selector The duplex selector is biased toward the duplex scanner to keep the media conformed to the duplex scanner
593. x switchback sensor PS2002 for a designated amount of time after it has reached the duplex switchback sensor PS2002 Z Fuser Mode 13 D1 A2 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Normal 13 D1 A3 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Light 1 or Light 2 see the event log secondary jam information digits for specific mode 13 D1 A4 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 1 13 D1 A5 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 2 13 D1 A6 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy media 3 Tools for troubleshooting 369 e 13 D1 A7 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Glossy media 1 e 13 D1 A8 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Glossy media 2 e 13 D1 A9 The fuser is printing in fuser mode Glossy media 3 e 13 D1 AB The fuser is printing in fuser mode Transparency e 13 D1 AC The fuser is printing in fuser mode Label Recommended action 1 Open the left door and clear the jam in the indicated area 2 Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam 3 Ifthe issue persists remove the fuser and inspect the fuser sleeve pressure roller and delivery roller for blockage and or damage Replace the fuser as needed ACAUTION The fuser might be HOT 4 Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests 5 Test the Fuser Delivery sensor PS502 using the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify the sensor is functioning correctly If it is not replace the fuser 6 Touch Com
594. y 8 When the paper is fed for a specified length the stacker controller turns on the alienation solenoid so that the switchback counter roller separates from the switchback roller 9 When the trailing edge of paper passes the switchback paper path the stacker controller turns off the alienation solenoid so that the switchback counter roller contacts the switchback roller 10 When the trailing edge of paper passes the registration roller after the switchback registration sensor detects the trailing edge the stacker controller stops the registration motor Figure 1 45 Switchback feed to the hole puncher assembly with hole punching operation Registration roller Switch back inlet flapper Paper to puncher ass y Switch back feed hold position Switch back counter roller Switch back roller 80 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Hole puncher assembly The staple stacker with hole puncher assembly has either the 2 hole 3 hole puncher assembly or the 2 hole 4 hole puncher assembly so that it operates two types of punching functions The hole puncher assembly has the following two functions e Sideregistration operation e Hole punching operation 2 hole 3 hole or 2 hole 4 hole Figure 1 46 Hole puncher assembly 2 hole 3 hole puncher assembly Punch motor Punch motor clock sensor Punch slide ass y Punch shaft a x 2 hole punch AT Encoder Mor D Ke P
595. y chip that assists in the operation of the product In addition this memory chip collects a limited set of information about the usage of the product which might include the following the date when the toner cartridge was first installed the date when the toner cartridge was last used the number of pages printed using the toner cartridge the page coverage the printing modes used any printing errors that might have occurred and the product model This information helps HP design future products to meet our customers printing needs The data collected from the toner cartridge memory chip does not contain information that can be used to identify a customer or user of the toner cartridge or their product HP collects a sampling of the memory chips from toner cartridges returned to HP s free return and recycling program HP Planet Partners www hp com recycle The memory chips from this sampling are read and studied in order to improve future HP products HP partners who assist in recycling this toner cartridge might have access to this data as well Any third party possessing the toner cartridge might have access to the anonymous information on the memory chip 584 Appendix A Service and support ENWW End User License Agreement ENWW PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT This End User License Agreement EULA is a contract between a you either an individual or the entity you represent and b Hewlett
596. y if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem replace the saddle stitcher controller PCA 13 94 Az Description Booklet Deliver Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the front left door Finisher stay jam at the booklet delivery sensor P111 or the vertical paper path sensor P117 Occurs when the booklet delivery sensor P111 remains activated longer than expected after sensing the arrival of the new booklet from the folding rollers Also occurs when the vertical paper path sensor PI17 remains activated longer than expected after the paper has already passed through the folding rollers and is now detected by the booklet delivery sensor P111 The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms e 13 94 40 e 13 94 43 Recommended action 1 Check the folder roller area for a jam 2 Testthe folding motor M2 by using the finisher component test from the control panel display Remove the finisher rear cover before starting the test and make sure that the folding rollers are rotating when motor M2 is on A Check sensor PI11 and PI17 for damage 4 Make sure that the sensors are not obstructed 5 Make sure that sensor PI11 and sensor PI17 are securely fastened to the chassis 6 Replace Motor or assembly as needed 13 94 Dz Description Booklet Deliver Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the front left door Finisher stay jam at the booklet delivery sensor P111 or the vertical paper path sensor P117 Oc
597. y optimize the setting for each document Printed picture Use for line drawings and preprinted images such as magazine clippings or pages from books If you see bands of irregular color or intensity on copies try selecting the Printed picture setting to improve the quality Photograph Use for photographic prints Pages per Sheet One 1 Two 2 Four 4 Copies multiple pages onto one sheet of paper NOTE Before using this screen use the Content Orientation Screen to describe the original document orientation Page Order Add Page Borders Right then down Down then right If you are printing four pages per sheet select the page order To print the pages in rows select the Right then down option To print the pages in columns select the Down then right option If you are printing two or more pages per sheet and you want to print a border around each page select the Add Page Borders option Original Size Select from a list of sizes that the product supports Describes the page size of the original document Booklet Format Booklet Booklet off Booklet on Use to copy two or more pages onto one sheet of paper so you can fold the sheets in the center to form a booklet The product arranges the pages in the correct order For example if the original document has eight pages the product prints pages 1 and 8 on the same sheet ENWW Tools for trouble
598. ze and type meet HP specifications Also open the Trays menu on the product control panel and verify that the tray is configured correctly for the paper type and size 5 Print a configuration page If the product is connected to a network an HP Jetdirect page also prints a From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button b Openthe following menus e Reports e Configuration Status Pages e Configuration Page c Touch the Print button to print the page e Ifthe pages do not print check that at least one tray contains paper e Ifthe page jams in the product follow the instructions on the control panel to clear the jam 128 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW e Ifthe page does not print correctly the problem is with the product hardware e Ifthe page prints correctly the product hardware is working The problem is with the computer you are using with the print driver or with the program 6 Print a supplies status page and then check that the maintenance items below are not at their end of life 29 TIP If a maintenance item needs to be replaced order the part number provided below a From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button b Openthe following menus e Reports e Configuration Status Pages e Supplies Status Page C Touch the Print button to print the page and then check the following maintenance items e Mainten

HP LaserJet Enterprise M806 and Flow MFP M830

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents